NEAX2400 IPX System Operations And Maintenance Manual (IPX U Type) PDF NEC Op Maint Type

IPX System Op and Maint (IPX-U Type)(2430710w) IPX System Op and Maint (IPX-U Type)(2430710w)

NEC IPX System Op and Maint IPX U Type NEC_IPX_System_Op_and_Maint_IPX_U_Type www.TelecomUserGuides.com Access User Guides, Manuals and Brochures

User Manual: PDF T E X T F I L E S

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 724

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

NDA-24307
Issue 1
STOCK #200789

®

System Operations and Maintenance Manual
(IPX-U Type)

OCTOBER, 2000

NEC America, Inc.

LIABILITY DISCLAIMER
NEC America, Inc. reserves the right to change the specifications, functions, or
features, at any time, without notice.
NEC America, Inc. has prepared this document for use by its employees and
customers. The information contained herein is the property of NEC America,
Inc. and shall not be reproduced without prior written approval from NEC
America, Inc.
NEAX and Dterm are registered trademarks of NEC Corporation.
Copyright 1999, 2000
NEC America, Inc.
Printed in the U.S.A.

ISSUE No.

ISSUE No.
PAGE No.

PAGE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

1

8

1

23

1

ii

1

24

1

iii

1

25

1

iv

1

26

1

v

1

27

1

vi

1

28

1

vii

1

29

1

viii

1

30

1

ix

1

31

1

i

x

1

32

1

xi

1

33

1

xii

1

34

1

xiii

1

35

1

xiv

1

36

1

xv

1

37

1

xvi

1

38

1

1

1

39

1

2

1

40

1

3

1

41

1

4

1

42

1

5

1

43

1

6

1

44

1

7

1

45

1

8

1

46

1

9

1

47

1

10

1

48

1

11

1

49

1

12

1

50

1

13

1

51

1

14

1

52

1

15

1

53

1

16

1

54

1

17

1

55

1

18

1

56

1

19

1

57

1

20

1

58

1

21

1

59

1

1

60

1

22

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

5

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

ISSUE 8
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)
Revision Sheet 1/10

NDA-24307

ISSUE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

61

1

99

1

62

1

100

1

63

1

101

1

64

1

102

1

65

1

103

1

66

1

104

1

67

1

105

1

68

1

106

1

69

1

107

1

70

1

108

1

71

1

109

1

72

1

110

1

73

1

111

1

74

1

112

1

75

1

113

1

76

1

114

1

77

1

115

1

78

1

116

1

79

1

117

1

80

1

118

1

81

1

119

1

82

1

120

1

83

1

121

1

84

1

122

1

85

1

123

1

86

1

124

1

87

1

125

1

88

1

126

1

89

1

127

1

90

1

128

1

91

1

129

1

92

1

130

1

93

1

131

1

94

1

132

1

95

1

133

1

96

1

134

1

97

1

135

1

98

1

136

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

5

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

ISSUE 8
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)
Revision Sheet 2/10

NDA-24307

ISSUE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

137

1

175

1

138

1

176

1

139

1

177

1

140

1

178

1

141

1

179

1

142

1

180

1

143

1

181

1

144

1

182

1

145

1

183

1

146

1

184

1

147

1

185

1

148

1

186

1

149

1

187

1

150

1

188

1

151

1

189

1

152

1

190

1

153

1

191

1

154

1

192

1

155

1

193

1

156

1

194

1

157

1

195

1

158

1

196

1

159

1

197

1

160

1

198

1

161

1

199

1

162

1

200

1

163

1

201

1

164

1

202

1

165

1

203

1

166

1

204

1

167

1

205

1

168

1

206

1

169

1

207

1

170

1

208

1

171

1

209

1

172

1

210

1

173

1

211

1

174

1

212

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

5

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

ISSUE 8
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)
Revision Sheet 3/10

NDA-24307

ISSUE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

213

1

251

1

214

1

252

1

215

1

253

1

216

1

254

1

217

1

255

1

218

1

256

1

219

1

257

1

220

1

258

1

221

1

259

1

222

1

260

1

223

1

261

1

224

1

262

1

225

1

263

1

226

1

264

1

227

1

265

1

228

1

266

1

229

1

267

1

230

1

268

1

231

1

269

1

232

1

270

1

233

1

271

1

234

1

272

1

235

1

273

1

236

1

274

1

237

1

275

1

238

1

276

1

239

1

277

1

240

1

278

1

241

1

279

1

242

1

280

1

243

1

281

1

244

1

282

1

245

1

283

1

246

1

284

1

247

1

285

1

248

1

286

1

249

1

287

1

250

1

288

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

5

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

ISSUE 8
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)
Revision Sheet 4/10

NDA-24307

ISSUE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

289

1

327

1

290

1

328

1

291

1

329

1

292

1

330

1

293

1

331

1

294

1

332

1

295

1

333

1

296

1

334

1

297

1

335

1

298

1

336

1

299

1

337

1

300

1

338

1

301

1

339

1

302

1

340

1

303

1

341

1

304

1

342

1

305

1

343

1

306

1

344

1

307

1

345

1

308

1

346

1

309

1

347

1

310

1

348

1

311

1

349

1

312

1

350

1

313

1

351

1

314

1

352

1

315

1

353

1

316

1

354

1

317

1

355

1

318

1

356

1

319

1

357

1

320

1

358

1

321

1

359

1

322

1

360

1

323

1

361

1

324

1

362

1

325

1

363

1

326

1

364

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

5

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

ISSUE 8
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)
Revision Sheet 5/10

NDA-24307

ISSUE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

365

1

403

1

366

1

404

1

367

1

405

1

368

1

406

1

369

1

407

1

370

1

408

1

371

1

409

1

372

1

410

1

373

1

411

1

374

1

412

1

375

1

413

1

376

1

414

1

377

1

415

1

378

1

416

1

379

1

417

1

380

1

418

1

381

1

419

1

382

1

420

1

383

1

421

1

384

1

422

1

385

1

423

1

386

1

424

1

387

1

425

1

388

1

426

1

389

1

427

1

390

1

428

1

391

1

429

1

392

1

430

1

393

1

431

1

394

1

432

1

395

1

433

1

396

1

434

1

397

1

435

1

398

1

436

1

399

1

437

1

400

1

438

1

401

1

439

1

402

1

440

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

5

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

ISSUE 8
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)
Revision Sheet 6/10

NDA-24307

ISSUE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

441

1

479

1

442

1

480

1

443

1

481

1

444

1

482

1

445

1

483

1

446

1

484

1

447

1

485

1

448

1

486

1

449

1

487

1

450

1

488

1

451

1

489

1

452

1

490

1

453

1

491

1

454

1

492

1

455

1

493

1

456

1

494

1

457

1

495

1

458

1

496

1

459

1

497

1

460

1

498

1

461

1

499

1

462

1

500

1

463

1

501

1

464

1

502

1

465

1

503

1

466

1

504

1

467

1

505

1

468

1

506

1

469

1

507

1

470

1

508

1

471

1

509

1

472

1

510

1

473

1

511

1

474

1

512

1

475

1

513

1

476

1

514

1

477

1

515

1

478

1

516

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

5

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

ISSUE 8
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)
Revision Sheet 7/10

NDA-24307

ISSUE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

517

1

555

1

518

1

556

1

519

1

557

1

520

1

558

1

521

1

559

1

522

1

560

1

523

1

561

1

524

1

562

1

525

1

563

1

526

1

564

1

527

1

565

1

528

1

566

1

529

1

567

1

530

1

568

1

531

1

569

1

532

1

570

1

533

1

571

1

534

1

572

1

535

1

573

1

536

1

574

1

537

1

575

1

538

1

576

1

539

1

577

1

540

1

578

1

541

1

579

1

542

1

580

1

543

1

581

1

544

1

582

1

545

1

583

1

546

1

584

1

547

1

585

1

548

1

586

1

549

1

587

1

550

1

588

1

551

1

589

1

552

1

590

1

553

1

591

1

554

1

592

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

5

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

ISSUE 8
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)
Revision Sheet 8/10

NDA-24307

ISSUE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

593

1

631

1

594

1

632

1

595

1

633

1

596

1

634

1

597

1

635

1

598

1

636

1

599

1

637

1

600

1

638

1

601

1

639

1

602

1

640

1

603

1

641

1

604

1

642

1

605

1

643

1

606

1

644

1

607

1

645

1

608

1

646

1

609

1

647

1

610

1

648

1

611

1

649

1

612

1

650

1

613

1

651

1

614

1

652

1

615

1

653

1

616

1

654

1

617

1

655

1

618

1

656

1

619

1

657

1

620

1

658

1

621

1

659

1

622

1

660

1

623

1

661

1

624

1

662

1

625

1

663

1

626

1

664

1

627

1

665

1

628

1

666

1

629

1

667

1

630

1

668

1

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

5

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

ISSUE 8
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)
Revision Sheet 9/10

NDA-24307

ISSUE No.

ISSUE No.

PAGE No.

PAGE No.
1

669

1

670

1

671

1

672

1

673

1

674

1

675

1

676

1

677

1

678

1

679

1

680

1

681

1

682

1

683

1

684

1

685

1

686

1

687

1

688

1

689

1

690

1

691

1

692

1

693

1

694

1

695

1

696

1

2

3

4

ISSUE 1
DATE

OCTOBER, 2000

6

7

8

1

ISSUE 2
DATE

ISSUE 5
DATE

5

3

4

ISSUE 3
DATE

ISSUE 6
DATE

2

5

6

7

8

ISSUE 4
DATE

ISSUE 7
DATE

ISSUE 8
DATE

NEAX2400 IPX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual (IPX-U Type)
Revision Sheet 10/10

NDA-24307

NDA-24307
ISSUE 1
OCTOBER, 2000

NEAX2400 IPX
System Operations and Maintenance Manual
(IPX-U Type)
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
LIST OF FIGURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

xi

LIST OF TABLES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xv
CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1

CHAPTER 2

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Administrative Management Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 How to Follow This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3
3
3
4

2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 System Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1.1 Configuration of the System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.1 Module Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.2 Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.3 Group . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2.4 Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Local Partition (LP) Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Assignment of Network Control Node (NCN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.5 System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.6 Fault Detecting Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.7 Range of Faults Specification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.8 Explanation of Terms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4
5
6
16
16
17
18
19
20
21
25
26
31
39

3. HOW TO READ PRECAUTIONS, DIAGNOSTIC, AND FAULT REPAIR INFORMATION . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Precaution about Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 How to Follow Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

41
41
45

4. REPORTING FAULT TO NEC. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Fault Reporting Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Forwarding Faulty Circuit Card Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

48
48
50

CHAPTER 3
0-C
0-D
0-E
0-F

SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reset Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Clock Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Level Infinite Loop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Memory Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24307

51
56
58
59
61

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page i
Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
0-G
0-H
0-I
0-J
1-A
1-B
1-C
1-D
1-E
1-F
1-G
1-H
1-I
1-J
1-K
1-L
1-O
1-P
1-S
1-T
1-U
1-V
1-W
1-X
1-Y
1-Z
3-B
3-C
3-D
3-E
3-F
3-G
3-H
3-I
3-J
4-C
4-D
4-E
4-F
4-Q
4-S
4-T
4-U
4-V
6-A
6-B
6-C
6-D
6-H

B-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mate CPU Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abnormal Interrupt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both TSW Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both TSW Write Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW Write Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both TSW Clock Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both HSW Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HSW Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both HSW Write Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HSW Write Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both HSW CLK Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HSW CLK Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both PLO Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Group Down Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW ACT Change Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure (Both) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LN → ISW CLK/FH Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock-Up Failure (Permanent). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock-Up Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
-48V Over Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Ground Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Line Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Line Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Line Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both TSW Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both HSW Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HSW Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLKC Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both MUX Ready Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI Card Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PCI Card Failure Recovered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGU and Howler Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Load Control Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Load Control Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Bad Call Notification. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page ii
Issue 1

NDA-24307

63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
79
81
83
85
86
88
89
90
91
93
95
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
6-I
6-J
6-L
6-M
6-N
6-O
6-P
7-A
7-B
7-C
7-D
7-E
7-F
7-I
7-J
7-K
7-L
7-M
7-N
7-O
7-P
7-U
7-V
13-A
13-B
13-C
13-D
13-E
13-F
13-G
13-H
13-I
13-J
13-K
13-N
13-O
13-P
13-Q
13-R
13-Z
15-A
15-B
15-C
16-A
16-B
16-C
16-E
16-F
16-K

STA-Test Connection Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Call . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Control Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Emergency Control Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Abnormal Call Duration Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialize With Data Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialize . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU MBR Key Turn ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU MBR Key Turn OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALMC MB Key Turn ON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALMC MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PM MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PM MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NCU MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NCU MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cyclic Diagnosis Normal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cyclic Diagnosis Information (Error Detected) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH Lock-Up Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH Lock-Up Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCS Link Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCS Link Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Restoration From CCS Link Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH Reset Interrupt Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Line Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Line Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Digital Line Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAU Battery Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DAU Line Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VPS Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VPS Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
VPS Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Inside Trunk All Busy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Tie Line Set Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sender Start Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
I/O Port Line OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24307

124
127
128
129
130
133
136
137
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
160
180
181
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
192
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
207
208
209
212
219

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iii
Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
16-L
16-M
16-N
16-T
16-U
16-X
17-A
17-B
17-C
17-D
17-H
17-O
17-P
17-Q
17-R
17-Y
17-Z
23-P
23-Q
23-Y
23-Z
26-N
26-R
26-V
26-W
27-E
27-F
27-G
33-A
33-B
33-C
33-D
33-E
CHAPTER 4

I/O Port Line Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hard Clock Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOC Failure (Temporary) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOC Failure (Permanent) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Station Exchanged Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH MBR Key Turn OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCH MB Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Day/Night Change Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOC MB Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOC MB Key Turn OFF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOC MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOC MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GATE-HSW MBR Key ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GATE-HSW MBR Key OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dch Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dch Back-Up Manual Change Start/End . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Clock Failure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Both MUX Clock Failure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MAT Log. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Call Trace. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAN Interface Error Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LAN Interface Release Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLMX MBR Key Turn ON . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLMX MBR Key Turn OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLMX ACT Change Report . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Clock Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDT Alarm Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDT Alarm Trouble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDT Alarm Restore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SDT Interface Change Notify . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

220
221
222
223
224
225
228
229
230
231
232
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
242
244
245
246
247
251
255
257
258
259
260
261
263
266
267

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269

1. LPM ACCOMMODATING UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.1 CPR Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.2 EMA Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.3 IOC Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.4 Power Supply Unit Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.5 MISC Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3.6 MMC Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

269
269
269
271
272
285
287
289
291
292

2. TSWM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

294
294
294
295

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page iv
Issue 1

NDA-24307

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
2.3.1
2.3.2
2.3.3
2.3.4
2.3.5
2.3.6
2.3.7

GT Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSW Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLKC Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLK Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MISC Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

296
300
306
308
310
312
313

3. PIM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Precaution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.1 LC/TRK Circuit Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.2 MUX Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.3 PWR Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.4 HUB Circuit Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.5 SDT Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3.6 DLMX Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

314
314
314
315
316
317
320
322
324
329

4. ISWM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Operating Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.1 IOGT Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.2 TSW Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.3 HSW Card Replacement Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.4 PLO Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3.5 PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

331
331
331
332
333
337
340
343
345

5. FAN UNIT REPLACEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
6. CPR COOLING FAN REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
7. FUSE REPLACEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
CHAPTER 5

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359

1. LINE FAULT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 Line Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Line Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Line Fault - When Dialing Results in a Wrong Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.5 Line Fault - When Bell Does Not Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.6 When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech Cannot Be Made . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.7 Dterm Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

362
363
363
365
367
368
369
370

2. TRUNK FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.2 Trunk Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.3 Trunk (ORT, SND, CFT) Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2.4 Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI) Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

372
372
375
376
377

3. ATTCON/DESKCON FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
3.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
3.2 ATTCON/DESKCON Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381

NDA-24307

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page v
Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
3.3

ATTCON/DESKCON Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 383

4. UNIT FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.2 Unit Fault - Fault Related to Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.3 Unit Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.4 Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

385
386
388
392
396

5. SPEECH PATH (TSW) SYSTEM FAULT (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.2 Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related to Speech . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.3 Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.4 Speech Path System Fault (LN) - STBY Side Has Become Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

398
398
401
405
406

6. SPEECH PATH SYSTEM FAULT (WHOLE SYSTEM/ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - Fault Related to Speech. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - ACT side becomes Faulty Intermittently . .
6.4 Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - STBY side becomes Faulty Intermittently .
6.5 PLO Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

408
408
409
410
411
412

7. CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 Control System Fault - STBY Side is Faulty. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

413
413
414
416

8. ALARM INDICATION FAULT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Fault of Alarm Indicating Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.3 Fault That Cannot Be Detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

417
417
417
423

9. POWER SUPPLY FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 Fuse Blown Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

424
424
430
431
432

10. FAN UNIT FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
10.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 433
10.2 Fan Unit Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 434
11. TONE FAULT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
11.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 436
11.2 Tone Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437
12. SYSTEM DOWN FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 439
12.1 When Cause for Fault Cannot Be Identified. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 440
12.2 When Faulty Circuit Cards Can Be Assumed From System Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 443
13. COMMON CHANNEL INTEROFFICE SIGNALING (CCIS) LINE FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.2 CCIS Line Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.3 Specific CCH/CCT Card Is Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
13.4 Fault of CCH, DTI and Related Flat Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

444
444
444
445
446

14. INTEGRATED SERVICE DIGITAL NETWORK (ISDN) LINE FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
14.1 Check Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page vi
Issue 1

NDA-24307

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
14.2 ISDN Line Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 447
14.3 Specific DCH/PRT Card Is Faulty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 448
14.4 Fault of DCH, DTI and Related Flat Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 449
15. HARD TIME CLOCK FAULT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 450
CHAPTER 6

SYSTEM OPERATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 451

1. ALARM INDICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.1 Kinds of Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2 How to Stop Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.3 Alarm Indications on TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.4 Variable Alarm Indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

452
452
452
453
454

2. COLLECTION OF SYSTEM MESSAGES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
2.1 Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated Printer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
2.2 Display on MAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 455
3. INDICATION OF LOCKOUT STATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
3.1 Indicating Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
3.2 Recovery Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 456
4. LINE LOAD CONTROL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
4.1 Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 458
5. IOC LINE MONITOR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

462

6. LINE MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.1 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.2 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.3 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.4 Line Management Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

463
463
464
464
465

7. STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM (SMDR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.1 Transmission Data to SMDR Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.2 IPX Format (Text Format of Centralized Billing - Fusion). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.3 ICS Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4 Details on Transmission Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.1 Calling Party Information/Called Party Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.2 Call Start/Call End Time Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.3 Called Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.4 Account Code/Authorization Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.5 Route Advance Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.6 Condition B Information. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.7 Call Metering Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.8 Office Code of Calling (Called) Party and Billing Process Office . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7.4.9 Text Format of SMDR - TCP/IP Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

466
466
468
476
479
479
480
481
482
483
483
484
484
485

8. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.1 The Kind of Traffic Measurement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2 Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.1 Procedure for Set-up and Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.2 Data Output - Details on DTFD/DTFDN Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8.2.3 Service Conditions (when performing Traffic Measurement via TCP/IP) . . . . . . . . . . .

488
488
490
490
492
495

NDA-24307

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page vii
Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
9. OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.1 Office Data Stored Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.2 Office Data Preservation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.3 Office Data Management Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.4 Call Forwarding Data/Individual Speed Calling Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.5 One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9.6 Commands for Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

496
496
496
497
500
500
500

10. TEST OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS KINDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.1 Designated Connection Test (Station) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.2 Designated Connection Test (DESKCON/ATTCON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
10.3 Bad Call Notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

501
502
512
514

11. ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
11.1 Related System Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 515
11.2 Routine Diagnosis Result . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 517
12. SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1 Changeover/Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.2 How to Control CPU Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.3 Manual System Changeover of CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.4 Forced Changeover of CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.5 How to Control Switching Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.1.7 Manual System Changeover of PLO. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2 Initialization. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.1 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.2 System Initialization by Turning ON the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.3 System Initialization by Key Operations on TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.4 System Initialization by Keys on CPU Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.5 System Initialization by SINZ/SINZ1 Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.2.6 Peripheral Equipment Initialization (Line/Trunk Initialization) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.1 How to Turn ON a LN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3.2 How to Turn ON the ISW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4 How to Turn OFF Whole System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.4.1 How to Turn OFF a LN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5 System Start-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.5.1 System Start-Up Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CHAPTER 7

518
518
518
528
530
534
535
537
541
543
543
544
546
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
560
562
562

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567

1. GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
1.1 Flow of Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 567
1.2 Required Test Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 568
2. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 569
3. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES-DETAILED EXPLANATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.1 Check of Ambient Conditions in Switch Room . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.2 Alarm Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.3 MAT/Printer Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page viii
Issue 1

NDA-24307

570
571
572
573

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11

Collection of System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Locked-out Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fan Unit Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Tests . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Main Power System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk RGU Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATTCON/DESKCON Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

574
575
576
577
578
579
580
582

4. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE CHECK LISTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 583
CHAPTER 8 MAINTENANCE COMMANDS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALLC
Assignment of Line Load Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ALMG
Assignment of Alarm Grade Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATRF
Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATRFN
Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
BOSD
Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CADSD
Continuous Assignment of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CATK
Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CBCN
Control of Broadcasting for NDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCSE
Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CDBU
Change of Dch Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CMOD
Change of System Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CMODI
Change of System Mode for ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CMWL
Control Message Waiting Lamp . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CMWL_T
Control Message Waiting Lamps - Telephone Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPRS
Controlled Alternate PRSCs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSCL
Continuous Change of Station Class. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CSTN
Continuous Change of Station Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCBD
Display of Call Block Entry Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCEN
Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DCON
Display of Connection Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DFTD
Display of System Message Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISS
Display of Program Issue . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLEN
Display of LENS Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLSL
Display of Lock Out Station - LENS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLSS
Display of Lockout Station - Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLSS_T
Display of Lock Out Station - Number- Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DLTEL
Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DNTEL
Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPKG
Display of Setting Port Package . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DPSW
Display Package Switch Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DSTN
Display of Station Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTELN
Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTF101
Display of Terminal Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTF102
Display of Route Traffic Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTF103
Display of Station Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTF104
Display of Attendant Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTF105
Display of Route Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTF201
Display of Service Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24307

593
596
597
598
600
602
603
606
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
625
626
627
628
629
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page ix
Issue 1

TABLE OF CONTENTS (CONTINUED)
Page
DTF301
DTF302
DTF303
DTF501
DTF601
DTF602
DTF101N
DTF102N
DTF103N
DTF104N
DTF105N
DTF201N
DTF301N
DTF302N
DTF303N
DTF501N
DTF601N
DTF602N
FLINST
HDD_FDD
HDD_MAT
HDD_MAT_N
HDFP
MBCT
MBLE
MBPM
MBRT
MBSM
MBST
MBST_T
MBTC
MBTK
MEM_HDD
MEM_HDD_N
MFCH
PMBU
RALM
RALMN
RLST
RLST_T
SINZ
SINZI
SPTS
SRTS
XHFD

Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Station Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Connection Route Traffic Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
File Install . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Control Between HDD and FDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Control Between HDD and MAT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Control Between HDD and MAT for NDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HDD Format of PBX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Busy of LENS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Busy of Port Microprocessor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Busy of Route . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Busy of System Message Printout . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Busy of Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Busy of Station - Telephone Number. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Busy of Trunk-Continuous . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Busy of Trunk. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Control Between Memory and HDD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Data Control Between Memory and HDD for NDM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make Busy of FCCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Port Microprocessor Back Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release Alarm for NDM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release Station/Trunk . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Release Station/Trunk - Telephone Number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialization for ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanning of Port Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scanning of Route Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
X-RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page x
Issue 1

NDA-24307

647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
688
689
690
694
695

LIST OF FIGURES
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 2-1
Figure 2-2
Figure 2-3
Figure 2-4
Figure 2-5
Figure 2-6
Figure 2-7
Figure 2-8
Figure 2-9
Figure 2-10
Figure 2-11
Figure 2-12
Figure 2-13
Figure 2-14
Figure 2-15
Figure 2-16
Figure 2-17
Figure 2-18
Figure 2-19
Figure 2-20
Figure 2-21
Figure 2-22
Figure 2-23
Figure 2-24
Figure 2-25
Figure 2-26
Figure 2-27
Figure 2-28
Figure 2-29
Figure 2-30
Figure 2-31
Figure 2-32
Figure 2-33
Figure 2-34
Figure 2-35
Figure 4-1
Figure 4-2
Figure 4-3
Figure 4-4
Figure 4-5
Figure 4-6
Figure 4-7
Figure 4-8
Figure 4-9
Figure 4-10
Figure 4-11
Figure 4-12
Figure 4-13
Figure 4-14

Flow of Administrative Management Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Details on Inter-node PCM Cable Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Details on Ethernet Cable Connections (Establishment of Fusion Link) (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Details on Ethernet Cable Connections (Using MAT via Ethernet) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of IMG0 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of IMG1 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of IMG2 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Face Layout of IMG3 (Local Node) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LENS Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Module Group Allocations (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Group Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Level Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LP Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Example of NCN Assignment (1/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Message Example. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Detection General Diagram (via Alarm Lamps on TOPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Detection Block Diagram (via Display of System Messages) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Detection Block Diagram. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
General System Block Diagram (1/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Controlling Block Diagram (ISW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Controlling Block Diagram (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speech Path Block Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speech Path Range of Fault . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3M® Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Hold a Circuit Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Set the ROM in IC Socket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Clean the Connector Portion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Clean Gold-Plated Terminal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Diagnostic Work Items and Symbols Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Recovery Procedure Example . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number . . . .
Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of LPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPR Face Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Replace the CPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Removal of Front Panel and Top Cover From CPR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insertion of ISAGT and LANI Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Reattachment of CPR Top Cover and Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Accommodation of New CPR Into LPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Insertion of New HFD Into CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Switch Setting on the CPU Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of TSWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Block Diagram (Connections Between GT and CPU). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Block Diagram (TSW and Other Speech Path Echelons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LEDs and Switches for TSW Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24307

3
5
6
7
8
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
16
17
18
19
20
22
25
27
28
29
32
34
35
36
38
41
42
42
43
43
46
47
49
270
272
273
279
280
281
282
283
284
294
296
301
303
314

LIST OF FIGURES
Page xi
Issue 1

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Figure 4-15
Figure 4-16
Figure 4-17
Figure 4-18
Figure 4-19
Figure 4-20
Figure 4-21
Figure 4-22
Figure 4-23
Figure 4-24
Figure 4-25
Figure 4-26
Figure 4-27
Figure 4-28
Figure 4-29
Figure 4-30
Figure 4-31
Figure 5-1
Figure 5-2
Figure 5-3
Figure 5-4
Figure 5-5
Figure 5-6
Figure 5-7
Figure 5-8
Figure 5-9
Figure 5-10
Figure 5-11
Figure 5-12
Figure 5-13
Figure 5-14
Figure 5-15
Figure 5-16
Figure 5-17
Figure 5-18
Figure 5-19
Figure 5-20
Figure 5-21
Figure 5-22
Figure 5-23
Figure 5-24
Figure 5-25
Figure 5-26
Figure 6-1
Figure 6-2
Figure 6-3
Figure 6-4
Figure 6-5
Figure 6-6

Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of ISWM. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Block Diagram (IOGT and Other Speech Path Echelons) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FANU Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation for FANU Replacement (Fans on TOPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Replace FANU (Fans on TOPU) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preparation for FANU Replacement (Fans in Fan Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Replace FANU (Fans in Fan Box) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPR Face Layout. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Extraction of CPR from LPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Rear View of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Remove the Cooling Fan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kind of Fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse After Blown Fault. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Locations in LPM/PIM/FANU/BASEU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fuse Location on PWR SW Card (TSWM/ISWM) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
RGU Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DC -48V Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling LC/ELC Circuit Cards and Speech Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling Trunk Circuit Cards and Speech Path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ATT Connector Cabling and Connector Leads Accommodation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Range of Units (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Control Block Diagram (Dual Configuration). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Control Block Diagram (Single Configuration) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
MUX Card Locations (LN0/1/2/3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speech Path Block Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Messages Related to Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) . . . . . . . . . .
Cable Routing for Alarm Indications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cabling Related to Alarm Indicating Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Distribution/Collection of Key/Alarm Information within the System. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Bus Cable Connections Diagram (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram of Power Supply System (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG1/IMG2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply to PIM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply to LPM (LN/ISW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Power Supply to TSWM/ISWM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Circuit Diagram of Fan Unit and Thermal Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Dial Tone Connection. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
External Hold Tone Supply Block Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Down Fault Repair Sequence . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling CCIS Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Controlling ISDN Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Status Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Indications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Indications on TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated Printer Operating Procedure . . . . . . . . . .
Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station (1/2). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON—Setting. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LIST OF FIGURES
Page xii
Issue 1

Page

NDA-24307

331
333
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
352
353
354
354
355
356
357
358
364
375
382
385
386
387
387
399
408
418
419
420
421
424
425
426
427
428
428
429
435
436
438
439
444
447
451
452
453
455
456
458

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Page

Figure 6-7
Figure 6-8
Figure 6-9
Figure 6-10
Figure 6-11
Figure 6-12
Figure 6-13
Figure 6-14
Figure 6-15
Figure 6-16
Figure 6-17
Figure 6-18
Figure 6-19
Figure 6-20
Figure 6-21
Figure 6-22
Figure 6-23
Figure 6-24
Figure 6-25
Figure 6-26
Figure 6-27
Figure 6-28
Figure 6-29
Figure 6-30
Figure 6-31
Figure 6-32
Figure 6-33
Figure 6-34
Figure 6-35
Figure 6-36
Figure 6-37
Figure 6-38
Figure 6-39
Figure 6-40
Figure 6-41
Figure 6-42
Figure 6-43
Figure 6-44
Figure 6-45
Figure 6-46
Figure 6-47
Figure 6-48
Figure 6-49
Figure 6-50
Figure 6-51
Figure 6-52
Figure 6-53
Figure 6-54
Figure 6-55

Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON—Cancelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Control Indication (ATTCON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKON—Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKON—Cancelling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Load Control Indication (DESKCON) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . .
Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Format for Outgoing Call - IPX Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Format for Incoming Call - IPX Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Format for Station-to-Station Call - IPX Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Format for Incoming Call - ICS Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Format for Outgoing Call - ICS Format. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Format for Station-to-Station Call - ICS Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SMDR—TCP/IP Interface Billing Output Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IPX “MAT Menu” Display Image (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DTFD Command Display Image (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“Listup Report” Window when “View Database” Is Selected (Example) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
“Export” Dialog for Traffic Report Text File Saving . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Office Data Change Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Node-Level Commands for Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Network-level Commands for Data Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Test Operation Method Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Register Test Procedure/Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Sender Test Procedure/Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-Party Conference Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-Party Conference Test Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tone Test Procedure/Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Interrupt Ringing (IR) Test Procedure/Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Test Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Test Connection Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Block Diagram for ISW Switching Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Block Diagram for LN Switching Network (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG0) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Check STATUS LEDs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Block Diagram in LN (Switching Network Between CPU and GT) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU in ACT/STBY Mode (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Changeover via MBR Key (ISW). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indications Before and After CPU Changeover (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU in ACT/STBY Mode (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GT in ACT / STBY Mode (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CPU Changeover via MBR Key (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indications Before and After CPU Changeover (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Forced CPU Changeover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Block Diagram (Switching Network for Speech Path System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
IOGT/TSW/HSW/DLKC/MUX in ACT Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24307

459
459
460
460
461
464
464
470
471
472
476
477
478
485
491
493
494
494
497
498
499
501
503
504
505
506
507
509
510
511
519
520
522
523
524
525
526
527
529
530
531
531
532
532
533
533
534
537
538

LIST OF FIGURES
Page xiii
Issue 1

LIST OF FIGURES (CONTINUED)
Figure

Title

Figure 6-56
Figure 6-57
Figure 6-58
Figure 6-59
Figure 6-60
Figure 6-61
Figure 6-62
Figure 6-63
Figure 6-64
Figure 6-65
Figure 6-66
Figure 6-67
Figure 6-68
Figure 6-69
Figure 6-70
Figure 6-71
Figure 7-1
Figure 7-2
Figure 7-3

IOGT/TSW/HSW/DLKC/MUX in STBY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speech Path System Changeover via Active IOGT MBR Key. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indications Before and After Speech Path System Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO/CLK in ACT/STBY Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLO Changeover via MB Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LED Indications Before and After PLO/CLK Changeover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialization by Turning ON the Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Conceptional Diagram of Initial Program Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys on the TOPU (ISW) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Keys on the TOPU (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Related Keys and LEDs for System Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialization by Keys on CPU Front Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialization by SINZ Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Turn ON a LN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Turn ON the ISW . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Turn OFF a LN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Flow of Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Time on ATTCON. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Desk Console. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

LIST OF FIGURES
Page xiv
Issue 1

Page

NDA-24307

538
539
540
541
542
542
544
547
547
547
548
554
555
558
559
560
568
580
581

LIST OF TABLES
Table

Title

Page

Table 2-1
Table 2-2
Table 3-1
Table 3-2
Table 3-3
Table 4-1
Table 4-2
Table 4-3
Table 4-4
Table 5-1
Table 5-2
Table 5-3
Table 5-4
Table 5-5
Table 5-6
Table 5-7
Table 5-8
Table 5-9
Table 5-10
Table 5-11
Table 5-12
Table 5-13
Table 5-14
Table 6-1
Table 6-2
Table 6-3
Table 6-4
Table 6-5
Table 6-6
Table 6-7
Table 6-8
Table 6-9
Table 6-10
Table 6-11
Table 6-12
Table 6-13
Table 6-14
Table 6-15
Table 6-16
Table 6-17
Table 6-18
Table 6-19
Table 6-20
Table 7-1
Table 7-2
Table 7-3
Table 8-1

How to Follow This Manual Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kinds of Circuit Card Front Restart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of System Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Error Kind (ERRK) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
LPM Unit/Circuit Cards and Reference Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
TSWM Circuit Cards and Reference Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIM Circuit Cards and Reference Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISW Circuit Cards and Reference Items . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Trunk Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timings for Trunks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Timings for Senders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Unit Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speech Path (TSW) System Fault Situation (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Speech Path (TSW) System Fault Situation (LN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Control System Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Alarm Indication Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PIN Location of External Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PWR Supply Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CCIS Line Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ISDN Line Fault Situation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description of Alarm Indications on TOPU . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Message Judgment Criteria . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASCII Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Kind of Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Traffic Measurement Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Designated Connection Test (Station) Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tone Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changeover of CPU Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Changeover of Switching Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lamp Indications on DSP of CPR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialization Procedure Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialization Without Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialization With Office Data Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialization with Program Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialization With Office Data And Program Loading Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
System Initialization by Phase 1 Restart Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Line/Trunk Initialization Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
How to Turn OFF the ISW Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Up Procedure When Basic and Application Software is Installed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Start-Up Procedure When Basic, Application Software and Office Data is Installed . . . . . . .
Test Equipment and Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Routine Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
List of Routine Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Command List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

NDA-24307

4
40
51
252
254
271
295
315
332
359
362
372
373
374
385
398
408
413
417
419
424
444
447
453
462
467
469
488
502
508
528
535
545
546
549
550
551
552
553
556
561
563
565
568
569
570
593

LIST OF TABLES
Page xv
Issue 1

This page is for your notes.

LIST OF TABLES
Page xvi
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

1. GENERAL
This manual describes routine system maintenance and fault repair procedures. This chapter explains how to
follow the manual and provides precautions pertaining to maintenance jobs as a whole. Be sure to read this chapter thoroughly before starting the required maintenance job.
2. HOW TO FOLLOW THE MANUAL
If technicians engage in a fault repair with a sufficient amount of knowledge of the system (system
configurations, controlling systems, functions, etc.), the time spent repairing the system is minimized. This
manual provides explanations about the system, while placing emphasis on system configurations, controlling
systems, and functions. If faults of all conceivable cases are to be assumed for the explanations, the explanations
may lack reality and be more difficult to understand. Therefore, this manual provides the explanations on the
basis of the following points:
(1) It is very important to judge whether the fault has occurred in the system or at any of the peripheral
equipment.
(2) In case the system is faulty, explanations will be given about the actions to be taken until you identify the
faulty circuit card/cards.
(3) Explanations will be omitted pertaining to the following faults:
•

Fault of peripheral equipment (MAT, telephone sets, etc.)

•

Fault due to an error in office data assignment

•

Fault due to an error in installation procedure (an error in circuit card switch setting, cross-connection,
etc.)

(4) How to Read This Manual
•

When a fault is to be repaired for the first time

See Section 3, How to Read Precautions, Diagnostic,
Go to Chapter 5.

and Fault Repair Information, Chapter 2.

See Section 4, Reporting Fault to NEC,
in Chapter 2.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 1
Page 1
Issue 1

INTRODUCTION

•

When only the contents of a system message needs to be known, or when a fault is to be diagnosed
from a system message
Chapter 5

•

When the range of faulty conditions has been specified and a faulty circuit card can be assumed
Chapter 5

See Section 4, Reporting Fault to NEC, in Chapter 2.

•

When investigating the system for the purpose of a fault repair
See Section 4, Reporting Fault to NEC, in Chapter 2.

Chapter 5

•

When replacing a unit/circuit card with a spare
Chapter 4

•

When performing routine maintenance
Chapter 7

CHAPTER 1
Page 2
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

1. GENERAL
1.1 Purpose
This chapter explains the outline of fault diagnosis and duties necessary to maintain the PBX.
1.2 Administrative Management Procedures
Figure 2-1 shows the work flow of the administrative management procedures.
Administrative
Management Works
Administrative Works
Office Data Management and Office
Data Protection

Expansion and Change of
Station Users
See Chapter 6

See Chapter 6
See Chapter 6

Traffic Management
Actions on Claims from
Station Users and/or Operators

(A)

Management Works
Station Message Detail
Recording System (SMDR)

See Chapter 6

See Chapter 6

Routine Diagnosis

Diagnosis result, system message displays abnormality
Routine Maintenance

See Chapter 7

System Status Monitor

See Chapter 6

(B)

Line fault

Alarm Indications
Fault Analysis/
Test Operation/
Changeover/
Make-Busy/Circuit
Card Change/
Initialization

Collection of System Messages

Indication of Lockout Stations

Circuit card fault
Terminal
(Tel., etc.) fault

Refer to
Chapter 5

Fault cause not
able to be localized

(A)
(B)
(Abnormal
Congestion)

Line Load Control

See Chapter 6

Figure 2-1 Flow of Administrative Management Procedures
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 3
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

1.3 How to Follow This Manual
Table 2-1 provides a brief description of the contents for each chapter in this manual.
Table 2-1 How to Follow This Manual Guide
CHAPTER

DESCRIPTION

2

See Section 2, Basic Knowledge.
Explains basic knowledge of fault detection and indication, functions and fault range of the system,
etc.
See Section 3, How to Read Precautions, Diagnostic, and Fault Repair Information.
Explains the methods of procedure performance and various symbols used in the description.
See Section 4, Reporting Fault to NEC.
Explains the method of forwarding faulty circuit cards, the method of creating a history record for
future fault repair, and the method of reporting faults to NEC.

3

Explains how to read and analyze system messages.

4

Explains the method of replacing a unit/circuit card due to a fault.

5

Explains repair procedures corresponding to the faults of processors or equipment.

6

Explains how to control the system in service management functions and precautions required in the
system control process.

7

Explains routine maintenance.

8

Explains the commands used in the system administrative management procedure.

2. BASIC KNOWLEDGE
This section identifies the information necessary for the system operations and maintenance procedures.
2.1 System Configuration
2.2 Line Equipment Numbers (LENS)
2.3 Local Partition (LP) Number
2.4 Assignment of Network Control Node (NCN)
2.5 System Messages
2.6 Fault Detecting Function
2.7 Range of Faults Specification
2.8 Explanation of Terms

CHAPTER 2
Page 4
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.1 System Configuration
Figure 2-2 shows the system configuration of the fully expanded NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U.

LN0

LN1

ISW
......

LN2

LN3

FRONT VIEW
ISW: Inter-node Switch
LN: Local Node

Figure 2-2 NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 5
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.1.1

Configuration of the System
The NEAX2400 IPX IPX-U system (referred to in the remainder of this manual as “the system”) is
configured by a single Inter-node Switch (ISW) and a maximum of 4 Local Nodes (LNs). Refer to
figures in this section. The ISW and LNs are connected via the Fusion link, with Ethernet and physical
PCM cables connected to each other. Figure 2-3 provides an overall image of system configuration. A
two-module ISW and maximum four Local nodes compose a single network system via the Fusion
link.

LN0
......

......

......

LN1
......

......

......

......

......

ISW
......

LN2
......

LN0

LN1

LN2

......

......

LN3
......

LN3

ISW

Ether

PCM Cable

LN0/1/2/3
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

ISWM

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

LPM

TSWM0

TSWM1

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

ISW
TOPU

FRONT VIEW

ISW: Inter-node Switch
LN:
Local Node
TOPU: Top Unit

FRONT VIEW

LPM:
Local Processor Module
TSWM: Time Division Switch Module
ISWM: Inter-node Switch Module

PIM:
Port Interface Module
FANU: Fan Unit
BASEU: Base Unit

Figure 2-3 System Configuration

CHAPTER 2
Page 6
Issue 1

NDA-24307

......

......

......

......

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

[ D etails on P C M C able C onnections betw een IS W and LN ]
LN 0
IM G 0

IM G 1

IM G 2

IM G 3

TOPU

TOPU

TO P U

TOPU

P IM 3

P IM 3

PIM 3

P IM 3

P IM 2

P IM 2

PIM 2

P IM 2

FANU

FANU

FANU

FA N U

P IM 1

P IM 1

PIM 1

P IM 1

P IM 0

P IM 0

PIM 0

P IM 0

L PM

TSW M0

TS W M 1

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

IP X -U
LN0
......

......

......

LN 1
......

......

......

......

......

ISW
......

LN2
......

......

......

LN 3
......

......

......

......

......

< TS W M 1 B ackplane >

IS W
< TS W M 0 B ackplane >

TSW
(N o. 1 System )

TSW
(N o. 0 System )

TO P U

(19) (18) (17) (16) (15) (14) (13) (12)

TSW
(N o. 1 System )

TSW
(N o. 0 System )

IS W M

(19) (18) (17) (16) (15) (14) (13) (12)

LP M
BASEU

< IS W M B ackplane >
To M U X
(IM G 2/3)

To M U X
(IM G 0/1)

TSW
(N o. 1 System )
(17) (16) (15) (14)

TSW
(N o. 0 System )
(07) (06) (05) (04)

To M U X
(IM G 2/3)

For TSW M 1

To M U X
(IM G 0/1)

For TSW M 0

PC M (ISW -LN TSW -CA-n) C ables

To LN 3
To LN 2
To LN 1

To L N3
To L N2

Note: For actual cable runnings, refer to the Installation Manual.

LN : Local N ode

To L N1

IS W : Inter-node Sw itch

Figure 2-4 Details on Inter-node PCM Cable Connections

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 7
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

[Details on Ether Cable Connections]
ISW and each LN can achieve a Fusion link by physically connecting themselves via the 10 BASE-T cables. This figure
shows an example where the CPR-accommodated LANI cards (internal LANI: PCI slot 00) are mutually connected via
HUB0/HUB1 (PA-M96) cards in PIM0 of LN0, IMG0 (HUB0 for CPU0 of all nodes, HUB1 for CPU1 of all nodes.)
Note 1
IMG0 (LN0)
Note
HUB1

Note
HUB0

ISW / IMG0 (LN1/2/3)

PIM0
From LN3
From LN2
From LN1
From ISW

From LN3
From LN2
From LN1
From ISW

LANI

LANI
00

00

To HUB1
in LN0

CPU1

CPU1
00

00

LPM

LPM

CPU0

To HUB1
in LN0

CPU0

Note: HUB card can be mounted in any universal slot of PIM.

ISW
CPU1
L1

LN0
CPU1
L1

LN2
CPU1
L1

LN1
CPU1
L1

LN3
CPU1
L1

10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

10 BASE-T
Cables
(Cross)

HUB1

HUB0

PIM0 of LN0, IMG0
10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)
Note 2
Max. 328 ft (100m)

L1
CPU1
LN1
ISW: Inter-node Switch

L1
CPU1
LN1
LN: Local Node

L1
CPU1
LN1
LI: LANI (PZ-PC19)

L1
CPU1
LN1
HUB: PA-M96

L1
CPU1
LN1
: 10 BASE-T connector

Note 1: The connections, shown in this figure, are only an example. Actual cable runnings may vary, depending on your
system configuration. (Refer to the “Installation Manual” for more details)

Note 2: The mutual 10 BASE-T (Ethernet) connections must be within 328 feet (100m) in their distance. If the distance is
longer [e.g. , Fusion Link is provided also with other distant IPX node(s)], use FCH (PA-FCHA) card as a protocol
converter for the Fusion-link data. For more details, refer to the “Fusion Network System Manual.

Figure 2-5 Details on Ethernet Cable Connections (Establishment of Fusion Link) (1/2)
CHAPTER 2
Page 8
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

[ Details on Ether Cable Connections: When Dual LANIs are used for each CPU ]
When dual LANIs are used for each CPU, the whole second LANIs (external LANI: PCI slot 03) must also be
connected in addition to the first LANIs explained on the previous page. This figure shows an example where the
second LANIs are connected to the additional HUB2/HUB3 (PA-M96) cards in PIM0 of LN2, IMG0 (HUB2 for
CPU0 of all nodes, HUB3 for CPU1 of all nodes). Note 1
IMG0 (LN2)

IMG0 (LN0)

HUB0

ISW / IMG0 (LN1/3)

HUB2

HUB1

HUB3

PIM0

PIM0
Second LANI
00

03

00

03

CPU1

LPM

CPU0

To HUB3
in LN2
To HUB1
in LN0
To HUB2
in LN2
To HUB0
in LN0

From LN3
From LN2
From LN1
From ISW

Second LANI
00

From LN3
From LN1
From LN0
From ISW

From LN3
From LN2
From LN1
From ISW
03

To HUB3
in LN2

CPU1
00

03

CPU0

00

03

00

03

CPU1

LPM

CPU0

To HUB2
in LN2

ISW

LN0

LN1

LN2

LN3

CPU1
LI LI

CPU1
LI LI

CPU1
LI LI

CPU1
LI LI

10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

HUB1

10 BASE-T
Cables
(Cross)

HUB0

HUB3

HUB2

PIM0 of LN2, IMG0

LN0
10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

10 BASE-T Cables (Straight)

Max. 328 ft (100m)

Note 2

LI LI

LI LI

LI LI

LI LI

LI LI

CPU0

CPU0

CPU0

CPU0

CPU0

ISW

LN0

LN1

LN2

LN3

ISW: Inter-node Switch

To HUB1
in LN0

LPM
To HUB0
in LN0

CPU1
LI LI

10 BASE-T
Cables
(Cross)

From LN3
From LN1
From LN0
From ISW

Second LANI

LN: Local Node

LI: LANI (PZ-PC19)

HUB: PA-M96

: 10 BASE-T connector

Note 1: The above connections are only an example. Actual cable runnings may vary, depending on your system
configuration (Refer to the “Installation Manual” for more details.)
Note 2: The mutual 10 BASE-T (Ethernet) connections must be within 328 ft (100m) in their distance. If distance is longer (e.g., Fusion link is provided with other distant IPX node(s), use FCH (PA-FCHA) card
as a protocol converter for the Fusion link data. For more details, refer to the “Fusion Network System
Manual.”
Figure 2-5 Details on Ethernet Cable Connections (Establishment of Fusion Link) (2/2)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 9
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

[ Details on Ether Cable Connections: When using MAT via Ethernet ]
The IPX-U system can use both IOC (PH-IO24) card or each CPR-accommodated LANI (PZ-PC19) card as
an interface for the connection to a MAT. This figure shows an example where a MAT is connected via the
LANI card in PCI slot 01 of each LN/ISW.

ISW

LN0

LN1

LN2

LN3

Fusion Link
Ether for MAT

MAT

This figure is an example where a MAT is connected to LN1 via the 10 BASE-T cables
(Ethernet). As seen from this, the MAT, a single terminal connected to the Ether, can control
the whole system status, thus capable of a single-point entry to each LN and ISW.
LN1
IMG0 (LN1)
Note 1

IMG0 IMG1 IMG2 IMG3

Note 1

HUB

HUB

PIM0
To LANI0 of LN3
To LANI0 of LN2
To LANI0 of LN0
To LANI0 of ISW

To LANI1 of LN3
To LANI1 of LN2
To LANI1 of LN0
To LANI1 of ISW

10 BASE-T Cable
(Cross)

Note 2

Note 2

00 01

CPU1
10 BASE-T Cable
(Straight)

00 01

CPU0

LANI

LPM

MAT

10 BASE-T Cable
(Straight)

ISW : Inter-node Switch
LN : Local Node
LANI : LANI (PZ-PC19)
HUB : PA-M96
: 10 BASE-T connector

Note 1: When connecting the MAT by this way, be sure to use dedicated HUB (PA-M96) card(s).
Note 2: Because ISW has no universal slot for external HUB cards, connect the 10 BASE-T ca-

bles (from the ISW) to a MAT-dedicated HUB in any of the LNs (LN0 - LN3). In this example, the cables are ISW) to a MAT-dedicated HUB in any of the LNs (LN0 - LN3). In
this example, the cables are connected to HUB in LN1.

Note: The LANI card for MAT connection is mounted in PCI slot No. 01 of each CPR.
Figure 2-6 Details on Ethernet Cable Connections (Using MAT via Ethernet)
CHAPTER 2
Page 10
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

ISW
TOPU

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

Note

IOC (PH-IO24)

EMA (PH-PC40)

LANI(PZ-PC19) LANI(PZ-PC19)

LANI(PZ-PC19) LANI(PZ-PC19)

LANI(PZ-PC19) LANI(PZ-PC19)

HSW11 (PU-SW01) (RES) ISAGT(PZ-GT13) ISAGT(PZ-GT13)

HSW10 (PU-SW01)
TSW13 (PU-SW00)
TSW12 (PU-SW00)
TSW11 (PU-SW00)
TSW10 (PU-SW00)

00 01 02 03 04

CHAPTER 2
Page 11
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DSP
PWR FDD/HDD

PLO1
(PH-CK16-A/17-A)
IOGT1 (PH-GT10)
IOGT0 (PH-GT10)
PLO0
(PH-CK16-A/17-A)
TSW03 (PU-SW00)
TSW02 (PU-SW00)
TSW01 (PU-SW00)
TSW00 (PU-SW00)
HSW01 (PU-SW01)
HSW00 (PU-SW01) (RES)

PWR1 (PH-PW14)

MMC (PH-M22)
LPM

PWR0 (PH-PW14)
ISWM

BASEU

Note: The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in this slot.

Figure 2-7 Face Layout of ISW

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

IMG0 (Local Node)
TOPU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 2

FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 0

00 01 02 03 04

PH-PC40 (EMA)
PH-IO24 (IOC)
Note

PH-I-M22 (MMC)

LPM

BASEU

Note: The 2nd IOC card (optional) may be mounted in this slot.
Figure 2-8 Face Layout of IMG0 (Local Node)

CHAPTER 2
Page 12
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

IMG1 (Local Node)
TOPU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36
(MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36
(MUX)

P A -P W
54-A (P W R 1)
PWR1

PWR0
P A -P W
55-A (P W R 0)

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

P A -PPWR1
W 54-A (P W R 1)

P A -PPWR0
W 55-A (P W R 0)

PIM 2

FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PLO1

PLO0

TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
GT1
GT0
DLKC1
DLKC0
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC

PWRSW1
PWRSW0

TSWM0

BASEU

Note: No circuit card is mounted in Slot 02 of TSWM0.

Figure 2-9 Face Layout of IMG1 (Local Node)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 13
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

IMG2 (Local Node)
TOPU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36
(MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36
(MUX)

P A -P W
54-A (P W R 1)
PWR1

PWR0
P A -P W
55-A (P W R 0)

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

P A -PPWR1
W 54-A (P W R 1)

P A -PPWR0
W 55-A (P W R 0)

PIM 2

FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 0

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

BASEU

Note: No circuit card is mounted in Slot 02 of TSWM1.
Figure 2-10 Face Layout of IMG2 (Local Node)

CHAPTER 2
Page 14
Issue 1

NDA-24307

PLO1

PLO0

TSW13
TSW12
TSW11
TSW10
TSW03
TSW02
TSW01
TSW00
GT1
GT0

MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC
MISC

PWRSW1
PWRSW0

TSWM1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

IMG3 (Local Node)
TOPU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 3

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 2

FANU
00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 1

00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

PH-PC36 (MUX)
PH-PC36 (MUX)

PWR1

PWR0

PIM 0

DUMMY

BASEU

Figure 2-11 Face Layout of IMG3 (Local Node)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 15
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.2 Line Equipment Numbers (LENS)
The Line Equipment Numbers (LENS) are used to specify the location of a circuit (trunk/port) in any of
the PIM universal slots. Refer to the figures in this section, and confirm the LENS format used in the
system.
As shown in Figure 2-12, the LENs consists of six digits: two digits for MG, one digit for U, two digits
for G, and one digit for Lv.

LENS = XX X XX X

Lv (Level) : 0 - 7
G (Group) : 00 - 23 Note
U (Unit)

:0-3

MG (Module Group) : 00 - 07
Note: In addition to Group No. 00-23, 24-31 can be used as the extended group numbers.

Figure 2-12 LENS Format

2.2.1

Module Group
Figure 2-13 explains the Module Group (MG). In a fully expanded system, the MG number ranges
from 00 to 07 in each local node.
LN0/1/2/3
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

MG01

MG03

MG05

MG07

PIM2
FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

MG00

MG02

MG04

MG06

LPM

TSWM0

TSWM1

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

PIM0

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-13 Module Group Allocations (LN0/1/2/3)
CHAPTER 2
Page 16
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.2.2

Unit
Details on Unit (U) numbers are shown in Figure 2-14. The numbers range from 0 to 3, and each unit
represents the PIM universal slots, No. 04-12 (U 0/2) or No. 15-23 (U 1/3).

On each Module Group (MG: #00 - 07), a total of four Units (U0 - U3) can be assigned.
LN0/1/2/3

PIM3

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

U2

U3

U2

MG01
PIM2

U0

U0

U1
FANU

PIM1

U0

U3

U0

U1
FANU

U3

U3

U2

MG04

MG06

U1

U0

U3
MG07

U1

U2

U1

U0

U2

FANU

MG02

U1

U0

U3
MG05

U1

U2

MG00
PIM0

U2

FANU

U3

U2

U3
MG03

U1

U0

LPM

TSWM0

TSWM1

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

FRONT VIEW

Unit Number (U = 0/2)
Slots No.

02

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

(16)

MUX (PH-PC36) 1

16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32

MUX (PH-PC36) 0

192 TS

PWR

PWR

Number
of
Time Slots

00

Unit Number (U = 1/3)

192 TS
PIM

16 16 16 16 16 16 32 32 32

(16)
16

16

16

16

Control

16

16

Control

Figure 2-14 Unit Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 17
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.2.3

Group
The Group (G) numbers are allocated as shown in Figure 2-15. A total of two Groups are assigned on
each universal slots within the PIM. Slot numbers 10, 11, 12, 21, 22, 23 can contain a total of four
Groups as an exception.

A total of two or four Groups (G) can be assigned on each PIM universal slot.
LN0/1/2/3
IMG0

IMG1

TOPU
PIM3

U2

TOPU

U3

PIM2

U0

U3

PIM1

U2

U0

U3

U2

FANU

U0

U1

U0

U3

U2

U0

U2

U1

U0

U3

U2

G = 15

U1
FANU

M G 04
U1

U3
M G 07

FANU

M G 02
U1

TOPU

U3
M G 05

FANU

M G 00
PIM0

U2

M G 03
U1

IMG3

TOPU

U2

M G 01

Slot No. 10
IMG2

U0

Slot No. 05

U3
M G 06

U1

U0

U1

LPM

TSWM0

TSWM1

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

G = 03
G = 14
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23

32 ports total

PW R

16 ports total

PW R

04 05 06 07 08 09 10

MUX (PH-PC36) 0

02

MUX (PH-PC36) 1

00

G = 02
G = 13

PIM
FRONT VIEW

G = 12

01 03 05 07 09 11
Group No.

(24)

(25)

00 02 04 06 08 10

15 19 23
14 18 22
13 17 21

15 19 23
01 03 05 07 09 11
00 02 04 06 08 10

12 16 20
Extended
Group No.

Note
Slot No.

00

02

27

29

31

27

29

31

26

28

30

26

28

30

14 18 22

PIM

13 17 21
12 16 20

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
U=0/2

U=1/3

Note: In addition to Group No. 00 - 23, the system can use No. 24 - 31 as theoretically valid numbers.

Refer to the Fusion Network System Manual for information on Extended Group No. 26 - 31.
Figure 2-15 Group Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3)
CHAPTER 2
Page 18
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.2.4

Level
Figure 2-16 explains the Level (Lv) numbers. There are a total of eight Levels (Lv0 - Lv7) on every
Group number, which ranges from 00 to 31.

A total of eight Levels (Lv0 - Lv7) can be assigned on each Group.
LN0/1/2/3

PIM3

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

U2

U3

U2

M G 01
PIM2

U0

U0

U1

U2

U0

TSWM0

BASEU

BASEU

U2

U3

U3
M G 06

U1

U0

U1
FANU

M G 04
U1

U0

LPM

U0

U1

U2

U3

U3
M G 07

FANU

MG02
U1

U0

U2

M G 05
U1

U2

U3

TOPU

U3

FANU

M G 00
PIM0

U2

MG03

FANU
PIM1

U3

IMG3

U1

U0

DUMMY

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

FRONT VIEW
U=0/2
00

02

U=1/3

04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21

15 19 23
01 03 05 07 09 11
14 18 22

Group No.
(24) (25)

00 02 04 06 0810

22 23

Level (Lv)

15 19 23
01 03 05 07 0911

13 17 21

14 18 22
00 02 04 06 08 10

12 16 20

PIM

13 17 21
12 16 20

27

29

31

27

29

31

26

28

30

26

28

30

Level (Lv)

Group
(G = Odd No., < 11)

32-port Slot

16-port Slot

Group
(G = Even No., < 10)

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
0

Group
(G = 15/19/23)

Group
(G = 14/18/22)

Group
(G = 13/17/21)

Group
(G = 12/16/20)

Figure 2-16 Level Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 19
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.3 Local Partition (LP) Number
The Local Partition (LP) number refers to a logical local processor number, theoretically assigned for each
IMG that consists of four (or less) Port Interface Modules (PIM). Though the local processor does not
actually exist in any of the IMGs, except for IMG0, the system can apply the two-digit LP number to each
IMG (see Figure 2-17) on its data memory program. The LP numbers are used primarily in the following
cases:
•

Display of system messages

•

Assignment of line load control data (ALLC command)

•

Backup for Call Forwarding/Speed Calling data (MEM_HDD command), etc.
The Local Partition No. (two digits, even number) is assigned on each IMG.
LN0/1/2/3
IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

FANU

FANU

FANU

FANU

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TSWM0

TSWM1

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

LP No. = 00

LP No. = 02

LP No. = 04

LP No. = 06

FRONT VIEW

Figure 2-17 LP Number Allocations (LN0/1/2/3)

CHAPTER 2
Page 20
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.4 Assignment of Network Control Node (NCN)
The IPX-U system can be in service by dialing a Telephone Number assigned for each station at a Network
Control Node (NCN). Because these network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned via the MAT
dedicated to the NCN only, designate any of the following nodes as this network data manager (NCN):
•

One of the Local Nodes (LN), excepting for the ISW, within the IPX-U system

•

One of the belonging Fusion nodes outside the IPX-U system

For more details, refer to Figure 2-18.
Note 1: Within the IPX-U system, the NCN can be designated only from the Local Nodes (LN0-LN3). The ISW

cannot be assigned as the NCN.
Note 2: On a Fusion network, assign only one NCN. Multiple nodes cannot be assigned as the NCN.

Because the Fusion link can be established either independently within the system (IPX-U) or jointly with
other outside IPX series, the assignment of NCN can differ, depending on the network configuration.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 21
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Pattern 1 When the system has a Fusion link independently of other systems
If the system has a Fusion link only within the system (i.e. no Fusion link is established with other IPX
series), an NCN must be assigned from any of the existing Local Nodes, excepting the ISW. In this
example, LN0 is assigned as the NCN.

Station A
TELN : 41000

(FPC =16)

LN 0

N etw ork D ata M em ory

......
......

......
......

......
......

N etw ork C ontrol N ode

......
......

-System D ata
ASYD N , AFM U , ALR TN ....

N ote 1

-N um ber Planning D ata

DM

AN PD N , ASPAN ....

LDM

NDM

-Station N um bering

(FPC =17)

LN 1

ND

ALG N N , ALG SN ....

M

......

......

......

......

Da

......

ta

Station B
TELN : 42005

Co
py

A ssignm ent of N D M D ata
via C entralized M AT

N ote 2
(FPC =15)

IS W

N DM

......

(FPC =18)

(FPC =19)

LN 2
......

......

......

LN 3
......

ND M

......

......

......

......

Station C
TELN : 43002
N DM

N DM

Station D
TELN : 45007

< IPX-U >

ISW : Inter-node S w itch
LN : Local N ode
N C N : Netw ork C ontrol N ode

D M : Data M em ory
LDM : Local Data M e mory
N D M : N etw ork Data M em ory

FP C : Fusion P oint C ode
TE LN: Telephone Number
M A T : Maintenance Ad ministration Ter minal

Note 1: The network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned only at the NCN. However, other node-level

data (LDM data) must also be assigned at each node (including ISW), depending on the
requirements. For more details, refer to the “Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)” or the “Fusion
Network System Manual.”
Note 2: When the system is operated, the function to be performed by the ISW is only to provide the PCM

time slot switching between the Local Nodes. However, an FPC (Fusion Point Code) must be assigned also for the ISW together with other Local nodes, by using the ASYDL command.
Figure 2-18 Example of NCN Assignment (1/3)

CHAPTER 2
Page 22
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Pattern 2 When the system has a Fusion link with other IPX series and an NCN exists within the system
If the system has a Fusion link also with other IPX series (i.e. the Fusion nodes exist also outside the
system), an NCN can be assigned from either Local Nodes outside the system or the Local Nodes
inside the system. In this example, LN0 of the IPX-U system is designated as the NCN.

Station A
TELN: 41000

(FPC=16)

LN0

Network Data Memory

......
......

-System Data
ASYDN, AFMU, ALRTN....

......
......

......
......

N etw ork C ontrol N ode

......
......

Note 1

-Number Planning Data
ANPDN, ASPAN....

DM
LD M

-Station Numbering
ALGNN, ALGSN....

NDM

(FPC=17)

LN1

ND
M
......

Da

......

......

......

......

ta

Station B
TELN: 42005

Co
py

Assignment of NDM Data
via Centralized M AT

Note 2
(FPC=15)

ISW

NDM

......

(FPC=18)

(FPC=19)

LN2
......

......

LN3
......

NDM

......

......

......

......

......

Station C
TELN: 43002
NDM

Station D
TELN: 45007

NDM

(FPC=3)

LN-C
S tation G
TE LN : 49 012

IPX-U
System

......

......

(FPC=2)

LN-B

(FPC=1)

......

LN-A
......

......

......

......

NDM

Sta tio n E
TELN : 470 01
Statio n F
TEL N : 480 03

Fusion Link

NDM
NDM

ISW : Inter-node Switch
LN : Local Node
NCN : N etwork Control Node

D M : Data M em ory
LDM: Local D ata M em ory
N DM : Network D ata M em ory

FPC : Fusion Point Code
TELN: Telephone Number
M AT : M aintenance Adm inistration Term inal

Note 1: The network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned only at the NCN. However, other node-

level data (LDM data) must also be assigned at each node (including ISW), depending on the
requirements. For more details, refer to the “Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)” or the
“Fusion Network System Manual.”
Note 2: When the system is operated, the function to be performed by the ISW is only to provide PCM

time slot switching between the Local Nodes. However, an FPC (Fusion Point Code) must be
assigned also for the ISW together with other Local nodes, by using the ASYDL command.

Figure 2-18 Example of NCN Assignment (2/3)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 23
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Pattern 3 When the system has a Fusion link with other IPX series and an NCN exists outside the system
If the system has a Fusion link also with other IPX series (i.e. the Fusion nodes exist also outside the
system), an NCN can be assigned from either Local Nodes outside the system or the Local Nodes
inside the system. In this example, LN-A (NEAX2400IPX series, 4-IMG type) outside the system is
designated as the NCN.

(FPC=1)

LN -A
......

......
......

......
......

Network Control Node

......
......

......

Station E
TELN: 47001

Network Data Memory
-System Data
ASYDN, AFMU, ALRTN....
N ote 1

-Number Planning Data
ANPDN, ASPAN....

DM
LDM

-Station Numbering
ALGNN, ALGSN....

NDM Data Copy

NDM

......

Assignment of NDM Data
via Centralized MAT

(FPC=2)

LN-B
......

......

......

S tation F
T ELN : 48 003

......

......

(FPC =3)

LN-C
......

......

N DM

IPX-U
System

Station G
TELN: 49012

Fusion Link
ND M

(FPC=17)

(FPC =16)

LN1

LN0
......

Station A
TELN: 41000

......

......

......

......

......

......

......

Station B
TELN : 42005

Note 2
(FPC=15)

ISW

ND M

ND M

......

(FPC=18)

(FPC=19)

LN2
......

......

......

LN3
......

......

TELN: 43002
Station C

......

......

ND M

N DM

ISW : Inter-node Switch
LN : Local Node
NCN: Network Control Node

......

N DM

DM : Data Memory
LDM: Local Data Memory
NDM: Network Data Memory

Station D
TELN : 45007

FPC : Fusion Point Code
TELN: Telephone Number
MAT : Maintenance Administration Terminal

Note 1: The network-level data (NDM data) can be assigned only at the NCN. However, other node-level

data (LDM data) must also be assigned at each node (including ISW), depending on the
requirements. For more details, refer to the “Installation Manual (IPX-U Type)” or the “Fusion
Network System Manual.”
Note 2: When the system is operated, the function to be performed by the ISW is only to provide the PCM

time slot switching between the Local Nodes. However, a FPC (Fusion Point Code) must be
assigned also for the ISW together with other Local nodes, by using the ASYDL command.
Figure 2-18 Example of NCN Assignment (3/3)
CHAPTER 2
Page 24
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.5 System Messages
System messages display during routine diagnosis, system operation status controlling, and fault
occurrence. Figure 2-19 shows an example of a system message.
Refer to Chapter 3 for details on each message.

(1)

SYSTEM MESSAGE 3-E SUP LOCK UP FAILURE (TEMPORARY)

(2)

NEC TOKYO Note 1

(3)

LP00-0-ACT

(4)

JUL 24 09:35

1:1102 0000 0000 0000

2:0000 0000 0000 0000

3:0000 0000 0000 0000

4:0000 0000 0000 0000

5:0000 0000 0000 0000

6:0000 0000 0000 0000

7:0000 0000 0000 0000

8:0000 0000 0000 0000

9:0000 0000 0000 0000

Meaning:
(1)

:

SYSTEM MESSAGE 3-E

SUP

LOCK-UP FAILURE (TEMPORARY)
Meaning of the message
System Message Level
(Indicated by Alarm Lamp) Note 2

System Message Number
(2) : Office Name, Date and Time
(3) : LP00-0-ACT
ACT/STBY indication for dual systems
No.0/No.1 system indication for dual systems
Faulty processor/Related processor
(4) : Message detail data (notation by hexadecimal numbers)
Note 1: The data here indicates the Office Name, uniquely assigned to each node and ISW. This

can be set by using the ASYD (SYS1, Index 96-115) or AOFC command.
Note 2: There are four kinds of alarm information to be indicated by alarm lamps: MN, MJ, SUP,

and NON indications.
Figure 2-19 System Message Example

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 25
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.6 Fault Detecting Function
The system finds a fault by its fault detecting circuit and the fault detecting program. Once a fault occurs,
the system initiates a remedial action such as system changeover, make-busy setting, or restart processing
by the automatic diagnosis function. This action reduces the influence of the fault so that system servicing
may be minimized. The result of the process taken and the fault situation are indicated for equipment concerned.
Among the faults, those related to speech path (noise, one-way speech, speech inability, etc.) are not
detectable. Since these fault reports are to be obtained from a station or operator, periodic trunk tests must
be performed without failure to detect the faults related to speech path.
Figure 2-20 and Figure 2-21 shows an outline of fault detection, and Figure 2-23 shows a block diagram
of fault detection.

CHAPTER 2
Page 26
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Indication of Fault Occurrence

Information Collection
and Diagnosis

LN0

Example of Faults

Fault of line/trunk card
CPU
MMC

Indication of
Alarm Lamps
on TOPU

............

EMA

LN1

TSW write failure,
Fault of clocks, etc.
Abnormal temperature,
power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
the equipment frame
Fault of line/trunk card

CPU
MMC

Indication of
Alarm Lamps
on TOPU

............

EMA

TSW write failure,
Fault of clocks, etc.
Abnormal temperature,
power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
the equipment frame

ISW
NEC

MJ
Indication
of Audible
and Visual Alarm
Indicating Panel
ON

OFF

BELL

Fault of line/trunk card

MMC

CPU

TSW write failure,
Fault of clocks, etc.

Indication of
Alarm Lamps
on TOPU

............

EMA

LN2

Abnormal temperature,
power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
the equipment frame

Fault of line/trunk card
CPU
MMC

Indication of
Alarm Lamps
on TOPU

............

EMA

LN3

TSW write failure,
Fault of clocks, etc.
Abnormal temperature,
power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
the equipment frame
Fault of line/trunk card

CPU
MMC

Indication of
Alarm Lamps
on TOPU

............

EMA

TSW write failure,
Fault of clocks, etc.
Abnormal temperature,
power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
the equipment frame

Note: Alarm Indicating Panel indicates the fault information on both ISW and other Local Nodes (fault notification on a system
basis). Meanwhile, alarm lamps on the TOPU for ISW and Local Nodes (indicated in dotted lines above) provide the fault
indication only related to the belonging node. For more details, refer to CHAPTER 6.

Figure 2-20 Fault Detection General Diagram (via Alarm Lamps on TOPU)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 27
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Indication of Fault Occurrence

Information Collection
and Diagnosis

Example of Faults

...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*

LN0

IOC

Display of
System Messages

Fault of line/trunk card

LANI

CPU
MMC
EMA

LN1

TSW write failure,
Fault of clocks, etc.
Abnormal temperature,
power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
the equipment frame

...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*

IOC

Display of
System Messages

LANI

CPU

Fault of line/trunk card
TSW write failure,
Fault of clocks, etc.

...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*

MMC
Display of
System Messages

EMA

ISW

Abnormal temperature,
power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
the equipment frame

...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*

Display of
System Messages

LANI

IOC

Fault of line/trunk card
CPU

MMC
EMA

r
Ethe
LN2

Abnormal temperature,
power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
the equipment frame

...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*

Display of
System Messages

LANI

IOC

CPU
MMC
EMA

LN3

Fault of line/trunk card
TSW write failure,
Fault of clocks, etc.
Abnormal temperature,
power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
the equipment frame

...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*
...-:;..+..*

Display of
System Messages

LANI

IOC

CPU
MMC
EMA

- Symbols EMA: PH-PC40

TSW write failure,
Fault of clocks, etc.

MMC: PH-M22

LANI: PZ-PC19

Fault of line/trunk card
TSW write failure,
Fault of clocks, etc.
Abnormal temperature,
power supply failure,
fuse blowing, etc., within
the equipment frame

IOC: PH-IO24

Note: In addition to the connection to a port of IOC (PH-IO24) circuit card, a MAT can be connected also to the
Ethernet via LAN Interfaces (PZ-PC19: PCI Slot 01 of each CPR).

Figure 2-21 Fault Detection Block Diagram (via Display of System Messages)

CHAPTER 2
Page 28
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

< LN >

< LN >
Alarm Lamps on the TOPU

Alarm Lamps on the TOPU

Thermal Reed Relay

Thermal Reed Relay

Firmware
Fault

Firmware
Fault

RDY
Clock
etc.

RDY
Clock
etc.
LC/TRK

LC/TRK

To TSW
of ISWM

MUX

RDY
Clock
Write
etc.

TSW/
INT

MUX

RDY
Clock
Write
etc.

TSW/
INT

RDY
Clock
Write
etc.
RDY
Clock
Write
etc.

TSW/
INT

LC/TRK

To TSW
of ISWM

To TSW
of ISWM

MUX

RDY
Clock
Write
etc.

TSW/
INT

RDY
Clock
Write
etc.

TSW/
INT

TSWM0

TSWM1

C-level
monitor
C-level
monitor

C-level
monitor

Howler
Ringing
Circuit

CPU

To MAT,
Printer, etc.

PWR

CPU

IOC

PWR Supply
Failure,
Fuse Blown

Fault
Information

Note

LANI

TSW/
INT

GT

TSWM1

C-level
monitor

IOC

TSW/
INT

DLKC

GT

TSWM0

To MAT,
Printer, etc.

RDY
Clock
Write
etc.

TSW/
INT

RDY
Clock
Write
etc.

RDY
Clock
Write
etc.
GT

To TSW
of ISWM

MUX

RDY
Clock
Write
etc.

DLKC

GT

LC/TRK

PWR

PWR Supply
Failure,
Fuse Blown

Fault
Information

Note

LANI

EMA

MMC

Howler
Ringing
Circuit

EMA

MMC

Note: MJ, MN fault
Power, Fuse blown fault
Temperature, CPU fault
Speech Path System fault (SPE)
RGU, Howler fault
PFT fault
CPU Clock fault

From
other
nodes

To MAT
on the Ethernet

From
other existing
Local Nodes

- Symbols -

Alarm Lamps on the TOPU
: Circuit Card
: Main faults to be detected

Thermal Reed Relay

: Speech path
: Flow of fault information
CPU
EMA
MMC
TSW
INT
MUX
HSW
DLKC
PWR
LANI
IOC
GT
IOGT
LC/TRK
MAT
LN
TSWM
ISW
ISWM

To/From TSW
of each LN

:Central Processing Unit
:Emergency Alarm Controller
:Man Machine Controller
:Time Division Switch
:Speech Path Control Interface
:Multiplexer
:Highway Switch
:Data Link Controller
:Power Supply
:Local Area Network Interface
:I/O Controller
:Gate
:Input/Output Gate
:Line/Trunk
:Maintenance Administration Terminal
:Local Node
:Time Division Switch Module
:Inter-node Switch
:Inter-node Switch Module

RDY
Clock
Write
etc.

LANI

TSW/
INT
HSW

RDY
Clock
Write
etc.

C-level
monitor

To MAT,
Printer, etc.

CPU

IOGT

ISWM

Howler
Ringing
Circuit

PWR

IOC

PWR Supply
Failure,
Fuse Blown

Fault
Information

Note
MMC

EMA

< ISW >

Figure 2-22 Fault Detection Block Diagram
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 29
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

(a) Main Faults
Faults that may occur in the system can be generally categorized into Processor System Fault, Speech
Path System Fault, Line/Trunk Fault, etc.
•

Processor System Fault
The CPU alarm detecting circuit continuously monitors whether the CPU is working normally. If
a fault is detected, the CPU calls up the diagnostic program, which identifies the cause of the fault
and determines whether the fault is temporary or permanent. When the fault affects system
operations, Active/Standby status of the CPU is changed over (provided that the system has dual
configuration).

•

Bus System Fault
The CPU transfers line/trunk card control information to the associated peripheral circuits via IO
Bus. When a parity error is detected in the transfer data or when the required information cannot
be transferred from a circuit card, the CPU identifies the cause of the fault, changes over the CPU
so that system operation is not affected, and executes restart processing.

•

Speech Path Fault
The CPU monitors the operating status of the TSW card, the occurrence of errors in writing data
to the switch memory, and the basic clocks supplied to the speech path. Upon detecting a fault, the
CPU identifies the cause of the fault, determines whether the fault is temporary or permanent, and
executes required processing such as changeover of the TSW card.

•

Others
The alarm detecting circuit on the EMA card continuously monitors the occurrence of faults in the
PWR supply cards, such as abnormal temperatures within the equipment frame, and lights the
alarm lamp on the TOPU when a fault is detected.

(b) Lamp Indications on the TOPU
When a fault occurs, the corresponding lamp on the TOPU indicates the location of the fault. For the
meaning of each lamp indication, refer to Chapter 6.

CHAPTER 2
Page 30
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.7 Range of Faults Specification
(1) Upon receiving a fault report from a station user or an operator, the technician can assume a faulty card
exists if the range to be affected by the fault can be determined. For the detailed procedure, refer to
Chapter 5. Use the following actions to check the MDF:
(a) Check the LENS of the reporter (Station or ATTCON/DESKCON).
(b) Check other circuits of the circuit card in which the reporter (station line or ATTCON/DESKCON)
is located.
(c) Check the other groups (other circuit cards mounted in the same module) in the module in which the
reporter is located.
(d) Check lines in each of the other modules on the basis of plural lines.
(2) If the fault cannot be detected by the system (a fault related to the speech path such as noise during speech,
one-way speech, speech inability), the range of (a) through (d) (itemized above) should be limited.
(3) When a major fault is detected in the dual systems, the CPU or TSW system automatically changes over
if the fault range is (c) and (d). In this case, the whole module involved is placed into make-busy status
even if the fault is partial, and the station lines currently operating normally become faulty status.
Diagnose the fault from the content of the system message displayed and repair the fault as required.
(4) When limiting the range of faults, consider the system circuitry that consists of the control (see Figure 224 and Figure 2-25, where CPU 0 is active) and speech path systems (see Figure 2-26).
(5) As seen from the block diagrams in Figure 2-24 through Figure 2-27, if a fault occurs within the common
portions to be controlled, all other associated portions are affected by that fault occurrence. If the range
of faults is outside PIM fault, CPU/TSW system changeover is executed (only when the fault is detectable
by the system).

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 31
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

To MUX To MUX
(IMG0) (IMG1)

:

Circuit Card
(No. 0 System)

:

Circuit Card
(No. 1 System)

TSW00

Note 1
HSW00, 01 for No. 0 System /
HSW10, 11 for No. 1 System

TSW01

To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

TSW02

DLKC

TSW03

TSW00

PLO

CLK

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

Note 4

Note 2
ISW-LN TSW CA-n Cables

GT

GT

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

TSWM0

Note 3
ISW-LN PLO CA-n Cables

MISC

IOC

EMA

CPU

Note 4
PLO-CLK CA-n Cables

To TSW
of LN2

To TSW
of LN3

TSWM1

LN1

LANI

To MUX To MUX
(IMG0) (IMG1)

To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

Note 2

Note 1

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

TSW00

PLO

CLK

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW
TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03
DLKC

Note 4
PLO

TSWM0

Note 3

GT

GT

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

TSWM1

IOGT

MISC
ISAGT
MISC

IOC

EMA

To PLO of
LN2/3

EMA
CPU

ISW

IOC

CPU

LN0

LANI

LANI

Fusion Link

< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >
ISAGT: PZ-GT13
LANI: PZ-PC19
HSW: PU-SW01
PLO: PH-CK16/17-A

IOGT: PH-GT10
EMA: PH-PC40

TSW: PU-SW00
IOC: PH-IO24

< LN (Local Node) >
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13
DLKC: PH-PC20

LANI: PZ-PC19
CLK: PH-CK18

GT: PH-GT09
EMA: PH-PC40

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20
PLO: PH-CK16-A

TSW: PH-SW12
IOC: PH-IO24

MUX: PH-PC36

Note: For details on each equipment’s switching network, see Chapter 6, System Control

Procedures.
Figure 2-23 General System Block Diagram (1/2)
CHAPTER 2
Page 32
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

To MUX To MUX
(IMG0) (IMG1)

Circuit Card
:
(No. 0 System)
:

Circuit Card
(No. 1 System)

TSW00

Note 1
HSW00, 01 for No. 0 System /
HSW10, 11 for No. 1 System

TSW01

TSW02

DLKC

TSW03

TSW00

PLO

CLK

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

Note 4

Note 2
ISW-LN TSW CA-n Cables

GT

GT

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

TSWM0

Note 3
ISW-LN PLO CA-n Cables

MISC

IOC

TSWM1

EMA

Note 4
PLO-CLK CA-n Cables

To TSW
of LN0

To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

CPU

LN3

LANI

To TSW
of LN1
To MUX To MUX
(IMG0) (IMG1)

To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

Note 2

Note 1

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW
TSW00

TSW01

TSW03

TSW02

PLO

DLKC

CLK

Note 4

PLO

Note 3

TSWM0

GT

GT

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

TSWM1

IOGT

MISC
ISAGT
MISC

IOC

EMA
CPU

ISW

IOC

EMA

To PLO of
LN0/1

CPU

LN2

LANI

LANI

Fusion Link

< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >
ISAGT: PZ-GT13
LANI: PZ-PC19
HSW: PU-SW01
PLO: PH-CK16/17-A

IOGT: PH-GT10
EMA: PH-PC40

TSW: PU-SW00
IOC: PH-IO24

< LN (Local Node) >
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13
DLKC: PH-PC20

LANI: PZ-PC19
CLK: PH-CK18

GT: PH-GT09
EMA: PH-PC40

Note:

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20
PLO: PH-CK16-A

TSW: PH-SW12
IOC: PH-IO24

MUX: PH-PC36

For details on each equipment’s switching network, see Chapter 6, System Control Procedures.
Figure 2-23 General Block Diagram of the Whole System (2/2)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 33
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

This figure shows a block diagram of the CPU controlling block in ISW, where CPU 0 is active.
TSW I/O BUS

HSW 01

HSW 11

HSW 00

HSW 10

Note 1

Note 1

TSW 13F
TSW 13E
TSW 13D
TSW 13C
TSW 13B
TSW 13A
TSW 139
TSW/ TSW 138
INT TSW 137
TSW 136
TSW 135
TSW 134
TSW 133
TSW 132
TSW 131
TSW 130

TSW 03F
TSW 03E
TSW 03D
TSW 03C
TSW 03B
TSW 03A
TSW 039
TSW 038TSW/
TSW 037 INT
TSW 036
TSW 035
TSW 034
TSW 033
TSW 032
TSW 031
TSW 030

To TSWM1 of LN3

To TSWM0 of LN3

To TSWM0 of LN2

TSW 12F
TSW 12E
TSW 12D
TSW 12C
TSW 12B
TSW 12A
TSW 129
TSW/ TSW 128
INT TSW 127
TSW 126
TSW 125
TSW 124
TSW 123
TSW 122
TSW 121
TSW 120

TSW 11F
TSW 11E
TSW 11D
TSW 11C
TSW 11B
TSW 11A
TSW 119
TSW/ TSW 118
INT TSW 117
TSW 116
TSW 115
TSW 114
TSW 113
TSW 112
TSW 111
TSW 110

TSW I/O BUS

To TSWM0 of LN0

To TSWM1 of LN1

To TSWM0 of LN1

TSW 11

TSW 01
TSW 00F
TSW 00E
TSW 00D
TSW 00C
TSW 00B
TSW 00A
TSW 009
TSW 008TSW/
TSW 007 INT
TSW 006
TSW 005
TSW 004
TSW 003
TSW 002
TSW 001
TSW 000

To TSWM1 of LN0

To TSWM0 of LN2

Note 2

TSW 01F
TSW 01E
TSW 01D
TSW 01C
TSW 01B
TSW 01A
TSW 019
TSW 018
TSW 017TSW/
TSW 016 INT
TSW 015
TSW 014
TSW 013
TSW 012
TSW 011
TSW 010

To TSWM0 of LN1

To TSWM1 of LN2

TSW 12

TSW 02

Note 2
To TSWM1 of LN1

To TSWM0 of LN3

TSW 13

TSW 03
TSW 02F
TSW 02E
TSW 02D
TSW 02C
TSW 02B
TSW 02A
TSW 029
TSW 028TSW/
TSW 027 INT
TSW 026
TSW 025
TSW 024
TSW 023
TSW 022
TSW 021
TSW 020

To TSWM1 of LN2

To TSWM1 of LN3

TSW 10F
TSW 10E
TSW 10D
TSW 10C
TSW 10B
TSW 10A
TSW 109
TSW/ TSW 108
INT TSW 107
TSW 106
TSW 105
TSW 104
TSW 103
TSW 102
TSW 101
TSW 100

MISC BUS

PLO 1

Note 3
PLO 0
MISC BUS

To TSWM1 of LN0

To TSWM0 of LN0

TSW 10

TSW 00
IOP0

IOP1

IOGT 0

IOGT 1

ISWM
- Symbols :
:
:
:

CPR
T

ISAGT 0 M
CPU clock

Controlling Routes of CPU
Circuit card (active)
External Cable
Signal

: Cable
: Circuit card (ST-BY)
: Clock Oscillator

ISA BUS
PCI BUS

CPU 0

LANI

MEMORY

MISC BUS
Reset Signal

CPR
(ST-BY)

IOC /
MISC

EMA

EMA: PH-PC40
LANI: PZ-PC19
IOC: PH-IO24
ISAGT: PZ-GT13
IOGT: PH-GT10

TSW: PH-SW00
HSW: PH-SW01
MUX: PH-PC36
PLO: PH-CK16-A/17-A
CLK: PH-CK18

T

CPU board
MISC BUS

PWR
PWR

(ST-BY)

ISAGT 1M
CPU board

LPM of ISW

To LPM
of LN0

To LPM
of LN1

To LPM
of LN2

To LPM
of LN3

Fusion Link

Note 1: The two HSW cards here provide the space division switching for a maximum of 16 PCM

highways from/to the TSW (PU-SW00) cards in ISWM. For more details, refer to NEAX2400 IPX
IPX-U “Circuit Card Manual”.
Note 2: See details in Figure 2-26, Speech Path Block Diagram.
Note 3: Multiple connection is provided on the backboard side between the PLOs here. For more details,
refer to the “Circuit Card Manual”.
Figure 2-24 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (ISW)
CHAPTER 2
Page 34
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

This figure shows a block diagram of the CPU controlling block in LN0, where CPU 0 is active.
IMG 0

IMG 1

PM BUS

IMG 2

PM BUS

MUX

PIM 3

PM BUS

LC/TRK
MUX

PM BUS

PIM 3

PIM 2

PM BUS

PIM 2

PIM 1

PM BUS

PIM 1

TSW/INT

TSW 00

M M M M
U U U U
X X X X

PIM 0

To ISWM

Note 1

TSW/
INT

TSW/
INT

TSW
02

TSW/INT

TSW
03

M M M M
U U U U
X X X X

M M M M
U U U U
X X X X

TSW/INT

TSW 01

PIM 0

To ISWM

Note 1

TSW/
INT

TSW/
INT

TSW
12

PM BUS

M M M M
U U U U
X X X X

TSW
13

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW I/O BUS

PM BUS

LC/TRK
MUX

PM BUS

TSW 00

TSW 11

MUX

PM BUS

MUX

LC/TRK
MUX

PIM 1

MUX

LC/TRK

PM BUS

LC/TRK
MUX

PM BUS

MUX

M M M M
U U U U
X X X X

PM BUS

PM BUS

MUX

PM BUS

LC/TRK
MUX

PM BUS

MUX

PM BUS

MUX

LC/TRK
MUX

PIM 2

MUX

LC/TRK

PM BUS

LC/TRK
MUX

PM BUS

MUX

PIM 0

PM BUS

PM BUS

MUX

PM BUS

LC/TRK
MUX

PM BUS

MUX

PM BUS

MUX

LC/TRK
MUX

PIM 3

MUX

LC/TRK

PM BUS

LC/TRK
MUX

PM BUS

MUX

PIM 1

PM BUS

PM BUS

MUX

PIM 2

MUX

LC/TRK
MUX

PM BUS

PM BUS

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM 3

IMG 3

PM BUS

MUX

TSW I/O BUS

M M M M
U U U U
X X X X

LC/TRK
MUX

PIM 0

To ISWM

Note 1

TSW/
INT

TSW/
INT

TSW
02

M M M M
U U U U
X X X X

TSW
03

TSW/INT

M M M M
U U U U
X X X X

TSW/INT

To ISWM

Note 1

TSW/
INT

TSW/
INT

TSW
12

TSW
13

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW 01
TSW I/O BUS

MUX

PM BUS

TSW 11

TSW I/O BUS

DLKC
0/1
MISC BUS

IOP1

IOP1

GT 0

GT 0

MISC BUS

MISC BUS

PLO 0

CLK 0

PLO 1

CLK 1

Note 2
MISC BUS

MISC BUS

GT 1

GT 1

TSWM 0 of LN0

IOP0

IOP0

TSWM 1 of LN0

CPR
ISAGT-0B

T

ISAGT-0AM

CPU clock
ISA BUS
PCI BUS

CPU 0

LANI

MEMORY

MISC BUS
Reset Signal

IOC /
MISC

EMA

CPU board
PWR

To LPM of ISW

Fusion Link

MISC BUS
PWR

(ST-BY)

CPR
(ST-BY)
ISAGT-B

ISAGT-A

To LPM
of LN1

To LPM
of LN2

To LPM
of LN3

LPM of LN0

- Symbols : Controlling Routes of CPU
: Circuit card (active)
: External Cable
: Signal

: Cable
: Circuit card (ST-BY)
: Clock Oscillator

EMA: PH-PC40
LANI: PZ-PC19
IOC: PH-IO24
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13
ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20
GT: PH-GT09

DLKC: PH-PC20
TSW: PH-SW12
MUX: PH-PC36
PLO: PH-CK16-A/17-A
CLK: PH-CK18

Note 1: See details in Figure 2-26, Speech Path Block Diagram.
Note 2: Multiple connection is provided on the backboard side between the PLOs here. For more

details, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”
Figure 2-25 CPU Controlling Block Diagram (LN)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 35
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

This figure shows a block diagram of speech path.
IMG0 of LN1
MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM1

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM2

LC/TRK

PIM1

MUX

PIM0

MUX

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM3

LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM1

IMG3 of LN1

MUX

PIM3

MUX

MUX

PIM0

: Circuit card (ACT)

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM2

LC/TRK

PIM1

: Speech Path
: Cable

IMG2 of LN1

MUX

PIM3

LC/TRK

PIM2

- Symbols -

IMG1 of LN1
MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

: Circuit card (ST-BY)
TSW (in ISWM) : PU-SW00
HSW: PU-SW01
TSW (in TSWM0/1) : PH-SW12
MUX: PH-PC36

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

000001002003

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

100101102103

004005006007

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW 00

TSW 10

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

104105106107

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW 13

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

10C10D10E10F

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX
00800900A00B

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

00800900A00B

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

10810910A10B

104105106107

TSW 13
TSW/INT

00C00D00E00F

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1
( LN1)

TSWM 0
( LN1)

IMG0 of LN0

IMG1 of LN0

MUX

PIM3

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM2

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM1

MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

MUX

MUX

LC/TRK

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM1

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

PIM2

LC/TRK

PIM1

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM3
MUX

PIM2

MUX

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM1

IMG3 of LN0

MUX

PIM3

MUX

PIM2

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM3
MUX

IMG2 of LN0

MUX

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

104105106107

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

104105106107

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW 13

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

10C10D10E10F

00800900A00B

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

10C10D10E10F

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX
00800900A00B

TSWM 1
( LN0)

TSW 13
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSWM 0
( LN0)

T TTT TT TT TT TT TT TT
S SSS SS SS SS SS SS SS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

T TTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
S SSS SSSS SSSS SSS S
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

TT TT T T T T T T T T T T T T
SS SS S S S S S S S S S S S S
WW WW WW WW WWWW WWWW

000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 00A 00B 00C00D 00E 00F

T TT T TT TT TTTT T TTT
S SS S SS SS SSSS S SSS
W WW W WW WW WWWW W WWW

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 10A 10B 10C 10D 10E 10F

010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 01A 01B 01C 01D 01E 01F

110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 11A 11B 11C 11D 11E 11F

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW 00

TSW 11

TSW 01

HSW
To TSWM0
of LN2

To TSWM1
of LN2

TTTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWW W
020021022023 024025026027 02802902A02B 02C02D02E02F
TSW/INT

TSW 02

To TSWM0
of LN2

To TSWM1
of LN2

TTTT TTTT TTT T T T TT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWW W W W WW
120121122123 124125126127 12812912A12B 12C12D12E12F
TSW/INT

To TSWM0
of LN3

To TSWM1
of LN3

TTTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW
030031032033 034035036037 03803903A03B 03C03D03E03F
TSW/INT

TSW 12

To TSWM0
of LN3

TTTT TTTT TTT T T T TT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWW W W W WW
130131132133 134135136137 13813913A13B 13C13D13E13F
TSW/INT

TSW 03

Figure 2-26 Speech Path Block Diagram (1/2)

CHAPTER 2
Page 36
Issue 1

NDA-24307

To TSWM1
of LN3

TSW 13

HSW

ISWM

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

This figure shows a block diagram of speech path.
IMG0 of LN3

IMG1 of LN3

MUX

MUX

PIM3
MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM2
MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM0

MUX

PIM3

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM1

LC/TRK

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM2

LC/TRK

PIM1

IMG3 of LN3

MUX

PIM3

LC/TRK

PIM2
MUX

PIM0

: Circuit card (ACT)

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM1

: Speech Path
: Cable

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM3
MUX

PIM2

- Symbols -

IMG2 of LN3

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM1
MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

: Circuit card (ST-BY)
TSW (in ISWM) : PU-SW00
HSW: PU-SW01
TSW (in TSWM0/1) : PH-SW12
MUX: PH-PC36

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

000001002003

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

100101102103

004005006007

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW 10

TSW 00

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

104105106107

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW 13

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

10C10D10E10F

00800900A00B

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

00800900A00B

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

104105106107

TSW 13
TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1
( LN3)

TSWM 0
( LN3)

IMG0 of LN2

IMG1 of LN2

MUX

PIM3

MUX

MUX

PIM2

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

PIM1

MUX

MUX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

PIM0

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

PIM2
MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM1
MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM3

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM2

MUX

LC/TRK

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM1

IMG3 of LN2

MUX

PIM3

MUX

PIM2

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM3

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM1

IMG2 of LN2

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX
LC/TRK

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

104105106107

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

104105106107

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW 13

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

10C10D10E10F

00800900A00B

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

10C10D10E10F

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX
00800900A00B

TSWM 1
( LN2)

TSW 13
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSWM 0
( LN2)

T T
T T
T T
T T
S T ST ST ST STS T STST
W S W S WS W S W S W S W S WS

T T
T T
T T
T T
ST ST S T ST ST S T S TS T
WS WS W S WS WS W S W S W S

T T
T T
T T
T T
ST ST STST ST ST ST ST
W S W S W S W S WS W S WS W S

T T
T T
T T
T T
S T S T ST S T S T ST STS T
W S W S WS W S W S W S W S W S

020W022W 024W 026W 028W02AW 02CW02EW
021 023 025 027 029 02B 02D 02F

120 W122W 124 W126W 128W12AW 12CW12EW
121 123 125 127 129 12B 12D 12F

030 W032W 034W036W 038W03AW 03CW03EW
031 033 035 037 039 03B 03D 03F

130 W132 W 134W136W 138 W13AW 13CW13EW
131 133 135 137 139 13B 13D 13F

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 12

TSW 02

TSW 13

TSW 03

HSW
To TSWM0
of LN0

To TSWM0
of LN0

To TSWM1
of LN0

TTTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

000001002003 004005006007 00800900A00B00C00D00E00F

To TSWM0
of LN1

To TSWM1
of LN0

TTTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

100101102103 104105106107 10810910A10B10C10D10E10F

TSW 00

TTTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

010011012013 014015016017 01801901A01B01C01D01E01F

TSW 10

To TSWM0
of LN1

To TSWM1
of LN1

TTTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

110111112113 114115116117 11811911A11B11C11D11E11F

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

To TSWM1
of LN1

TSW 01

TSW 11

HSW

ISWM

Figure 2-26 Speech Path Block Diagram (2/2)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 37
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

A fault within this range affects two slots.
LC/TRK

A fault within this range
affects this module.
32ch

LC/TRK

PIM 3

MUX

512ch

A fault within this range
affects the circuit card.
A fault within this range
affects two slots.
LC/TRK

A fault within this range
affects this module.
32ch

LC/TRK

PIM 3

MUX

512ch

A fault within this range
affects the circuit card.
A fault within this range
affects two slots.
LC/TRK

A fault within this range
affects this module.
32ch

LC/TRK

PIM 3

MUX

512ch

A fault within this range
affects the circuit card.
A fault within this range
affects two slots.
LC/TRK
LC/TRK

PIM 3

A fault within this range
affects this module.

32ch
MUX

512ch

A fault within this range
affects the circuit card.

TSW
TSW/INT

Symbols
: Circuit Card

: Possible fault range to be affected

Figure 2-27 Speech Path Range of Fault

CHAPTER 2
Page 38
Issue 1

NDA-24307

: Speech Path

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

2.8 Explanation of Terms
•

C-Level Infinite Loop
The program repeatedly executes specific routines due to a fault of the main memory, data destruction,
etc. The program is not able to be processed normally. This faulty condition is referred to as Program
Infinite Loop. C-Level infinite loop is a state where a clock-level program, which runs under clock
interrupt disable state, is in an infinite loop status.

•

B-Level Infinite Loop
This is a state where a program infinite loop has occurred during a connection processing and the
connection for the next call is not able to be processed.

•

PM (Port Microprocessor)
Each line/trunk card mounted in the PIM is equipped with a processor called Port Microprocessor
(PM), which continuously supervises the lines/trunks.

•

Ready Error
For acknowledging the connection between the CPU and a circuit card, an interface signal called
Ready Signal is used. When the CPU has accessed a specific circuit card and the normality of the
connection is acknowledged, the Ready Signal is returned to the CPU within 6 µs. If the Ready signal
is not returned to the CPU within 6 µs after access, the situation is referred to as Ready Error.

•

Parity Error
For confirming the normality of data transfer between the CPU and the circuit card under the control
of the CPU, parity check is made. When an error is detected in a parity check, it is referred to as Parity
Error. Parity check means to confirm the normality of data by adding an error detecting parity bit to
a set of data to be transferred.
When a set of data is transferred, a parity bit is added to the data so that the data has an even-number
of “1” bits (it is referred to as Even Parity). When there is an odd-number of “1” bits in the received
one set of data, it is detected as an error.

•

Monitor Restart
Monitor restart processing suspends current processings in progress without applying any hardware
controlling, allowing the system to restart its operations from the monitor program.
The system abandons only the processings of the calls being handled by the program, and maintains
all the connections that have already been established.

•

Circuit Card Front Initializing Restart
The whole system is forcibly initialized. However, the initialization varies with the setting of the
SENSE switch on the DSP of CPU (see Table 2-2).

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 39
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Table 2-2 Kinds of Circuit Card Front Restart
SENSE (0~F)

•

KIND OF RESTART

1

DM Clear Restart

2

DM Load Restart

5

OAI Memory Clear Restart

C

OFF-line Restart

REMARKS

When the system is in operation

PM (Line/Trunk Card) Make-Busy Restart
In this processing, the faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card) is isolated from the system and, at the same time,
the calls associated with that faulty PM (Line/Trunk Card) are released. No calls related to the faulty
PM (Line/Trunk Card) are processed and the system normally runs without the faulty PM (Line/Trunk
Card).

•

Data Copy Restart
In a system of dual CPU configuration, the RAM memory (including the data memory) is copied from
the ACT side CPU into the STBY side CPU, and ACT/STBY is changed over and monitor restart is
executed.
In the case of this restart processing, only the ACT side CPU and the STBY side CPU are changed
over without any effect on the current connections. However, no call processings are executed while
the restart processing is in progress (from copying until the end of the changeover).

CHAPTER 2
Page 40
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

3. HOW TO READ PRECAUTIONS, DIAGNOSTIC, AND FAULT REPAIR INFORMATION
3.1 Precaution about Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure
When performing diagnostic procedures/fault repair procedures, be aware of the following actions:
(1) When replacing a circuit card with a spare, handle the circuit card using the Field Service Kit.
(a) To protect the circuit card from static electricity, wear a wrist strap before handling the circuit card.
(b) Before extracting the circuit card from its mounting slot, set its MB switch to the UP side (ON).
(2) When holding a circuit card by hand, wear gloves and be careful not to touch mounted parts, goldplated terminal, etc., on the circuit card.
The 3M Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit, shown in Figure 2-28, is recommended as an effective
countermeasure against static electricity.

Connect ground wire to the Earth
terminal of the Module Group.

Place the Circuit
Card on a
conductive sheet.

Wrist Strap

Note: 3M is a registered trademark of Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing, Inc.
Figure 2-28 3M® Model 8012 Portable Field Service Kit

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 41
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

Gold Plated Terminal

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4

OFF

OFF
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

Circuit Card

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

Circuit Card

1 2 3 4

OFF

Card Puller Tab
OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

1 2 3 4
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

OFF

OFF

Note

Plastic Bag

Note: Do not touch the Gold Plated Terminal with bare hands.
Figure 2-29 How to Hold a Circuit Card

(3) When a circuit card appears to be faulty, check the following items before replacing it with a spare:
(a) Poor connector contact at the circuit card may be responsible for the fault. Repeat insertion and
extraction of the circuit card a few times. Clean the connector portion, and recheck for proper
operation.
(b) Check the lead wires of vertically-mounted parts (resistors, capacitors, etc.) to ensure they have not
shorted each other or broken.
(c) Check the back side of the circuit card to see if there is any short-circuited soldered portion, or
modified cross connection wires erroneously left unconnected.
(d) Check the ROMs to ensure proper seating in the IC socket. Figure 2-30 shows a leg that is bent and
not set in the socket.
A pin is bent, not
inserted in the socket.
ROM

SOCKET
Figure 2-30 How to Set the ROM in IC Socket
CHAPTER 2
Page 42
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

(4) How to clean the connector portion (gold-plated terminal):
(a) Dip the gold-plated terminal portion in the cleaning fluid for 3 to 5 seconds (only PA-XX type circuit
card), as shown in Figure 2-31.
C leaning
Fluid
C ircuit
C ard

C onta iner

Figure 2-31 How to Clean the Connector Portion
Note 1: Some of the parts are subject to damage if they come in contact with the cleansing liquid. Be careful

to allow only the connector portion (gold-plated terminal) to contact the cleaning liquid.
Note 2: Be sure to use fresh cleaning fluid (FREON or isopropyl alcohol).

(b) Using a soft cotton cloth, wipe both sides of the connector portion (gold-plated terminal) clean (only
PA-XX type circuit card), as shown in Figure 2-32.

gauze

Gold-plated terminal
Figure 2-32 How to Clean Gold-Plated Terminal
Note 1: Use cloth (gauze, etc.) to clean.
Note 2: After wiping, be careful not to leave lint on the surface of the circuit card.

(5) When a check on the flat cable or LT cable is directed in the tree, check the following items:
(a) Make a visual check to see if the connector is properly connected.
(b) Poor connector contact may be responsible for the fault. Repeat connection and disconnection a few
times, and check again to see if the connector is properly connected.
(c) Perform continuity test on the flat cable.
(6) When replacing the circuit card is directed in the tree, replace the circuit card with a spare as per Chapter 4.
(7) When multiple circuit cards appear to be faulty, before replacing them with spares, remount them (one at
a time) into their slots, to determine which cards should be replaced.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 43
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

The following is an example where the fault was recovered after the replacement of circuit cards:
START
Set the 1st circuit card back into its mounting slot
If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card.
Set the 2nd circuit card back into its mounting slot
If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card.
Set the 3rd circuit card back into its mounting slot
If the fault recurs: Replace the circuit card.
If a circuit card is found to be faulty, send the faulty circuit card for repair.
The fault may be a temporary one, or due to poor contact of the circuit card. Observe the
situation for a while.
END
(8) When a fault recovery is completed, use the RALM/RALMN command to clear all the alarm indications
and registered system messages. If required, restore temporary cross connections and transient data for
testing to the original ones.

CHAPTER 2
Page 44
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

3.2 How to Follow Diagnostic Procedure/Fault Repair Procedure
(a) Diagnostic Work
A fault diagnostic procedure by system message is explained in the “TREE” format on an individual
system message basis.
•

Proceed with judgment as to whether the fault status coincides with the indicated status, following
the sequence beginning from START.

•

How to proceed with the diagnosis work is explained in Figure 2-33.

STEP 1

Determine whether the fault coincides with the fault status (1) in Figure 2-33.

STEP 2

If the fault status does coincide, the fault is indicated by (2). Repair the fault by referring to the
relevant section in Chapter 5. Otherwise, proceed to (3).

STEP 3

Perform the work indicated by (3). The result of the work (3) is broken down as indicated by
(4).

STEP 4

Determine whether the result of work (3) coincides with the status indicated by (5). If so, the
fault(s) is/are indicated either by (6) or by (7). If not, proceed to the next Step.

STEP 5

Perform the work indicated by (8), and if the result of the work is the same as the status
indicated, the fault is indicated by (9). If the fault repair work indicated by (9) affects another
normal line, recheck the work as indicated by (10).

(b) Fault Repair Procedure
A fault repair procedure is explained by means of “TREE” format in Chapter 5. The following
explains how to follow the “TREE” format and proceed with designated work. See Figure 2-34.
•

Begin from START and proceed with the necessary repair work following the sequence.

•

When a faulty circuit card (or circuit cards) is suspected, replace the faulty circuit card with a spare
in accordance with the work procedure pertaining to that specific circuit card.

STEP 1

Replace the circuit card indicated by (A) with a spare and check it. Perform the detailed work
as per (B). If the fault status is beyond repair, proceed to the next step.

STEP 2

If the range of the fault or the system configuration is as indicated by (C), perform a check as
indicated by (D). If the fault status is beyond repair, proceed to the next step.

STEP 3

Replace the circuit card indicated by (E) with a spare and check it. The detailed procedure
indicated by (G) varies with the system configuration indicated by (F).

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 45
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

START

(2)

(1)

FAULT

When

: It is the fault of
Section No.

(3)

(11)
(5)

Perform

FAULT SUPERVISION

When
(4)
(5)

(6)

(7)
FAULT

When

: It is the fault of
Section No.

(Chapter 5)
(11)

(8)
When

(Chapter 5)

(9)

with
performed

FAULT

:
CHECK OF WORK
Section No.

END

(10)

(Chapter 5)
(11)

Note: (1):

(2),(6),(7),(9):
(11):
(3):
(4):
(5):
(8):

Judgment of fault status
When the fault status coincides with the indication, the cause of the fault is indicated.
When repairing the fault, refer to the relevant section in Chapter 5.
Operating items for diagnosis
Branching of the result of the operation
Judgment of the status of the result of the operation
When operating method is unknown, refer to Chapter 6.

Figure 2-33 Diagnostic Work Items and Symbols Example

CHAPTER 2
Page 46
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

START

(A)

(B)

Check

(D)

(C)
When

Check

(E)
Check
(F)

(G)

When
(F)
(G)
When

END

Figure 2-34 Recovery Procedure Example

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 47
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

4. REPORTING FAULT TO NEC
When the cause of a fault is uncertain, make note of the situation involved and report it to NEC. When
forwarding faulty circuit cards to NEC, exercise caution to protect from static electricity.
4.1 Fault Reporting Method
The following three items must be included in the report without fail:
(1) Faulty situation (reports should be similar to “dial tone is not heard only on individual lines,” “incoming
C.O. line calls are not able to be terminated only to a specific ATTCON/DESKCON,” etc.)
•

Faulty phenomena
On lifting the handset, dial tone is not heard but side tone is heard, etc.

•

History of fault
When did the fault occur? What kind of repair procedure has been executed? Does the fault still exist
or not exist? etc.

•

Range of fault
Range of fault should be reported: Single line?, Specific trunk?, Specific circuit card?, Specific PIM?,
Whole system?, etc.

(2) Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number of the circuit card.
Figure 2-35 shows an example of PA-16LCBE circuit card.

CHAPTER 2
Page 48
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

PA16LCBE

Circuit Card Name

Circuit Card Version Number

Program Name

9A 91-03

SP 785

TR 5448

SPA16LCBE

A 6A
Program Package
Version Number
Front

Right View of Circuit Card

Figure 2-35 Circuit Card Version Number, Program Name, and Program Package Version Number

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 2
Page 49
Issue 1

SYSTEM MAINTENANCE OUTLINE

4.2 Forwarding Faulty Circuit Card Method
Send the faulty circuit card to the NEC agent to whom a request is made for a replacement card. Adhere
to the following procedure for sending the faulty circuit card:
(1) Insert connector covers onto the circuit card terminals.
(2) Put the circuit card into a static electricity protective bag.
(3) Pack the circuit card with air cap, etc.
(4) Set the circuit card into the cardboard box for that specific circuit card.
(5) If multiple circuit cards are to be sent, set each circuit card in a separate cardboard box and stuff the box
with shock absorbing material.
Note: When sending a faulty circuit card, put it in a static guard bag. To prevent damage, NEVER place the

circuit card in a vinyl bag or ship it without a protective bag.

CHAPTER 2
Page 50
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3

SYSTEM MESSAGES

This chapter explains how to read and analyze system messages displayed during routine diagnosis, system operation status controlling, and occurrence of a fault within the system. Table 3-1 provides a list of system messages.
Table 3-1 List of System Messages
MESSAGE NO.

SYSTEM MESSAGE

PAGE

0-C

Reset Interrupt

56

0-D

CPU Clock Down

58

0-E

C-Level Infinite Loop

59

0-F

Memory Failure

61

0-G

B-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)

63

0-H

B-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)

64

0-I

Mate CPU Failure

65

0-J

Abnormal Interrupt

66

1-A

Both TSW Failure (Permanent)

67

1-B

TSW Failure (Permanent)

68

1-C

Both TSW Write Failure

69

1-D

TSW Write Failure

70

1-E

Both TSW Clock Failure

71

1-F

TSW Clock Failure

72

1-G

Both HSW Failure

73

1-H

HSW Failure

74

1-I

Both HSW Write Failure

75

1-J

HSW Write Failure

76

1-K

Both HSW CLK Failure

77

1-L

HSW CLK Failure

79

1-O

Both PLO Failure

81

1-P

PLO Failure

83

1-S

Module Group Down Failure

85

1-T

TSW ACT Change Report

86

1-U

DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Permanent)

88

1-V

DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Temporary)

89

1-W

PLO Restore

90

1-X

LN Æ ISW CLK/FH Failure

91

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 51
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES
Table 3-1 List of System Messages (Continued)
MESSAGE NO.

SYSTEM MESSAGE

PAGE

1-Y

LN Æ ISW CLK/FH Failure (Both)

93

1-Z

LN Æ ISW CLK/FH Release

95

2-T

AP-INT Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) Note 1

-

2-U

AP-INT Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) Note 1

-

2-V

IP Data Transfer Failure (Permanent) Note 1

-

2-W

IP Data Transfer Failure (Temporary) Note 1

-

3-B

C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)

97

3-C

C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)

98

3-D

Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)

99

3-E

Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)

100

3-F

-48V Over Current

101

3-G

Ground Failure

102

3-H

Digital Line Warning

103

3-I

Digital Line Failure

104

3-J

Digital Line Restore

105

4-C

Both TSW Ready Failure

106

4-D

TSW Ready Failure

107

4-E

Both HSW Ready Failure

108

4-F

HSW Ready Failure

109

4-Q

DLKC Ready Failure

110

4-R

IO Ready Failure for UAP Note 1

4-S

MUX Ready Failure

111

4-T

Both MUX Ready Failure

112

4-U

PCI Card Failure

113

4-V

PCI Card Failure Recovered

114

6-A

System Failure

115

6-B

RGU and Howler Failure

116

6-C

Line Load Control Start

117

6-D

Line Load Control Stop

118

6-H

Bad Call Notification

119

6-I

STA-Test Connection Data

124

6-J

Emergency Call

127

6-L

Emergency Control Start

128

CHAPTER 3
Page 52
Issue 1

NDA-24307

-

SYSTEM MESSAGES
Table 3-1 List of System Messages (Continued)
MESSAGE NO.

SYSTEM MESSAGE

PAGE

6-M

Emergency Control Stop

129

6-N

Abnormal Call Duration Data

130

6-O

SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm

133

6-P

SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release

136

7-A

System Initialize With Data Load

137

7-B

System Initialize

139

7-C

CPU MBR Key Turn ON

140

7-D

CPU MBR Key Turn OFF

141

7-E

TSW MBR Key Turn ON

142

7-F

TSW MBR Key Turn OFF

143

7-I

ALMC MB Key Turn ON

144

7-J

ALMC MB Key Turn OFF

145

7-K

PM MB Key Turn ON

146

7-L

PM MB Key Turn OFF

147

7-M

NCU MB Key Turn ON

148

7-N

NCU MB Key Turn OFF

149

7-O

Cyclic Diagnosis Normal

150

7-P

Cyclic Diagnosis Information (Error Detected)

160

7-U

PLO MB Key Turn ON

180

7-V

PLO MB Key Turn OFF

181

13-A

CCH Clock Failure

183

13-B

CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)

184

13-C

CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)

185

13-D

CCH Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)

186

13-E

CCH Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)

187

13-F

CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)

188

13-G

CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)

189

13-H

CCS Link Failure (Permanent)

190

13-I

CCS Link Failure (Temporary)

192

13-J

Restoration From CCS Link Failure

194

13-K

CCH Reset Interrupt Failure

195

13-N

Digital Line Warning

196

13-O

Digital Line Failure

197

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 53
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES
Table 3-1 List of System Messages (Continued)
MESSAGE NO.

SYSTEM MESSAGE

PAGE

13-P

Digital Line Restore

198

13-Q

DAU Battery Operation

199

13-R

DAU Line Operation

200

13-Z

Power Failure

201

15-A

VPS Failure (Temporary)

202

15-B

VPS Failure (Permanent)

203

15-C

VPS Restore

204

16-A

Inside Trunk All Busy

205

16-B

Virtual Tie Line Set Report

207

16-C

Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report

208

16-E

Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out

209

16-F

Sender Start Time Out

212

16-K

I/O Port Line OFF

219

16-L

I/O Port Line Restore

220

16-M

Hard Clock Failure

221

16-N

Hard Clock Restore

222

16-T

IOC Failure (Temporary)

223

16-U

IOC Failure (Permanent)

224

16-X

Station Exchanged Report

225

17-A

CCH MBR Key Turn ON

228

17-B

CCH MBR Key Turn OFF

229

17-C

CCH MB Key Turn ON

230

17-D

CCH MB Key Turn OFF

231

17-H

Day/Night Change Information

232

17-O

IOC MB Key Turn ON

234

17-P

IOC MB Key Turn OFF

235

17-Q

IOC MBR Key Turn ON

236

17-R

IOC MBR Key Turn OFF

237

17-Y

GATE-HSW MBR Key ON

238

17-Z

GATE-HSW MBR Key OFF

239

23-J

ATM Interface Warning Note 2

-

23-K

ATM Interface Failure Note 2

-

23-L

ATM Interface Recovered Note 2

-

CHAPTER 3
Page 54
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES
Table 3-1 List of System Messages (Continued)
MESSAGE NO.

SYSTEM MESSAGE

PAGE

23-P

Dch Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End

240

23-Q

Dch Back-Up Manual Change Start/End

242

23-R

ATM Interface Change Report Note 2

-

23-S

FCCH Failure Note 1

-

23-T

FCCH Failure Recovered Note 1

-

23-U

FCCH Status Notice Note 1

-

23-W

FCCH Advancing Start Note 1

-

23-X

FCCH Advancing End Note 1

-

23-Y

MUX Clock Failure

244

23-Z

Both MUX Clock Failure

245

25-J

ZT Operation Start Note 3

-

25-K

ZT Set Up NG Note 3

-

25-L

ZT Fault Note 3

-

25-M

ZT Fault Recovery Note 3

-

25-N

ZT Carrier Fault Note 3

-

26-N

MAT Log

246

26-R

Call Trace

247

26-V

LAN Interface Error Report

251

26-W

LAN Interface Release Report

255

27-C

ATM Interface Port MB Key ON Note 2

-

27-D

ATM Interface Port MB Key OFF Note 2

-

27-E

DLMX MBR Key Turn ON

257

27-F

DLMX MBR Key Turn OFF

258

27-G

DLMX ACT Change Report

259

33-A

MUX Clock Restore

260

33-B

SDT Alarm Warning

261

33-C

SDT Alarm Trouble

263

33-D

SDT Alarm Restore

266

33-E

SDT Interface Change Notify

267

Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:
Note 4:

Refer to “Fusion Network System Manual.”
Refer to the manual related to ATM.
Refer to “Wireless System Manual.”
Refer to the manual related to OAI.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 55
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Reset Interrupt
0-C

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the processor is reset due to a failure in the system.

1: XXXX XX00 XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂

➃

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information
b7

b6

b4

b3

b1

b0

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information (FF
H: not mounted)
b7

b6

b4

b3

b1

b0

➂ Related-call Release Result
b7

b0:
b1:
b3:
b4:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -Phase 1 Restart Note 1
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart executed (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = Program Load not executed/executed
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b1:
b3:
b4:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -Phase 1 Restart Note 1
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart executed (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = Program Load not executed/executed
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b7:

0/1 = Call Release Processing after restart → “Normal End”/
“Abnormal End”

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 56
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃
b7

Data Load Result after restart
processing
b6

b5

b4

b3

b11

b2

b1

b9

b0

b8

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b8:
b9:
b11:

0/1 = Office Data Load → “Normal End”/“Abnormal End”
0/1 = Call Fowarding Data Load → “Normal End”/“Abnormal End”
0/1 = Individual Speed Calling data load → “Normal End”/“Abnormal
End”
0/1 = RCF Data Load → “Normal End”/“Abnormal End”
0/1 = Name Display Data Load → “Normal End”/“Abnormal End”
0/1 = Network DM Load → “Normal End”/“Abnormal End”
0/1 = Local DM Load → “Normal End”/“Abnormal End”
0/1 = DM Load/Non Load
0/1 = User Assign Soft Key data load → “Normal End”/“Abnormal
End”
0/1 = Number Sharing data load is “Normal End”/“Abnormal End”
Note 2
0/1 = Call Block data load is “Normal End”/“Abnormal End”

Note 1: Phase 1 Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two-way

connections that have already been established:
• Basic two-way connections (STN-STN, STN-TRK, TRK-TRK)
• Fixed connections
• Two-way connections established on a Fusion link
For more details, see Chapter 6, Section 12.
Note 2: The number sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 57
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CPU Clock Down
0-D

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a fault has occurred to the clock oscillator in the CPU.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information (FF
H: not mounted)
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➂ Related Call Information

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1=-/Monitor Restart
0/1=-/Initialization
0/1=-/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1=-/MB control
0/1=ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1=-/Monitor Restart
0/1=-/Initialization
0/1=-/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1=-/MB control
0/1=ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b7:

0/1=Released/Not released

b7

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 58
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

C-Level Infinite Loop
0-E

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

C-level infinite loop is a state where a clock-level program, running under clock interrupt disable state, is in
an infinite loop. This message displays when the counter value to check the normality of the processing has
become abnormal.
0-E C-level Infinite Loop
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄➅ ➆

➇

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➇
7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➇

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information after
clock fault occurrence
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➂ NMI Factor
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:

0/1 = -/Reset by Power On
0/1 = -/Watchdog Timer timeout
0/1 = ISAGT is mounted/ISGAT is not mounted
0/1 = -/OSC clock interrupt on ISGAT
0/1 = -/IO parity Alarm
0/1 = -/IO ready Alarm
0/1 = -/External NMI

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 59
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ System
b7

b6

Controlling Port B
b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➄ CPU Alarm
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➅ CPU Changeover Factors
b7

b6

➆ System
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

ALM
b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

➇ Data to be Analyzed by

NEC

b0

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = Timer 2 Gate ON/OFF
0/1 = Speaker Gate ON/OFF
0/1 = Parity Check Enable/MASK
0/1 = Channel Check Enable/MASK
0/1 = -/RAM Refresh Pulse Output State
0/1 = -/Timer 2 Output State
0/1 = -/Channel Check Error Detected
0/1 = -/Parity Error Detected

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor CLK Alarm
0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor COP Alarm
0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor MEM Alarm
0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow
0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor CLK Alarm
0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor COP Alarm
0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor MEM Alarm
0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/CLK Alarm
0/1 = -/Emergency Timer Overflow
0/1 = -/SOFT EMA
0/1 = -/SOFT changeover
0/1 = -/Emergency Counter Overflow
0/1 = STBY/ACT
0/1 = Dual/Single
0/1 = CPU 0/CPU 1

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/Main Power Alarm
0/1 = -/Power Alarm
0/1 = -/FUSE Alarm
0/1 = -/TEMP MJ Alarm
0/1 = -/TEMP MN Alarm
0/1 = -/Parity Alarm
0/1 = Card is not mounted/mounted
0/1 = -/EMA CLK Alarm

Engineers
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 60
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Memory Failure
0-F

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a CPU memory read/write error occurs.
0-F Memory Failure
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄➅ ➆

➇

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➇
7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➇

➀

Information on Self-CPU Restart
after detection of a clock fault

b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➂ NMI Factor
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:

0/1 = -/Reset by Power On
0/1 = -/Watchdog Timer timeout
0/1 = ISGAT is mounted/ISGAT is not mounted
0/1 = -/OSC clock interrupt on ISGAT
0/1 = -/IO parity Alarm
0/1 = -/IO ready Alarm
0/1 = -/External NMI

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 61
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ System
b7

b6

Controlling Port B
b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➄ CPU Alarm
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➅ CPU Changeover Factors
b7

b6

➆ System
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

ALM
b5

b4

b3

b2

➇ Data to be Analyzed by

b1

b0

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = Timer 2 Gate ON/OFF
0/1 = Speaker Gate ON/OFF
0/1 = Parity Check Enable/MASK
0/1 = Channel Check Enable/MASK
0/1 = -/RAM Refresh Pulse Output State
0/1 = -/Timer 2 Output State
0/1 = -/Channel Check Error Detected
0/1 = -/Parity Error Detected

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor CLK Alarm
0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor COP Alarm
0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor MEM Alarm
0/1 = -/ACT-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow
0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor CLK Alarm
0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor COP Alarm
0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor MEM Alarm
0/1 = -/STBY-side Processor Emergency Timer Overflow

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/CLK Alarm
0/1 = -/Emergency Timer Overflow
0/1 = -/SOFT EMA
0/1 = -/SOFT changeover
0/1 = -/Emergency Counter Overflow
0/1 = STBY/ACT
0/1 = Dual/Single
0/1 = CPU 0/CPU 1

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/Main Power Alarm
0/1 = -/Power Alarm
0/1 = -/FUSE Alarm
0/1 = -/TEMP MJ Alarm
0/1 = -/TEMP MN Alarm
0/1 = -/Parity Alarm
0/1 = Card is not mounted/mounted
0/1 = -/EMA CLK Alarm

NEC

Engineers
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 62
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

B-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)
0-G

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a B-level infinite loop failure occurs.
0-F Memory Failure
1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁ ➂

➃

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➃
7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➃

➀

Information on Self-CPU Restart
after detection of a clock fault

b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➂ B-level Infinite Loop
b1

➃ Data to be Analyzed by
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b0

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/B-level Infinite Loop
0/1 = -/Task Timer Timeout

NEC Engineers
b1

b0

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 63
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

B-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)
0-H

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when, in the CPU program processing, the counter value to check the normality of the
processing has become abnormal.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁ ➂

➃

➃

➃

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➃

➃

➃

7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➃

➃

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information
(FF H: not mounted)
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➂
b1

b0

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/B-level Infinite Loop
0/1 = -/Task Timer Timeout

➃ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers
See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 64
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Mate CPU Failure
0-I

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a fault, such as the Clock down or C-level infinite loop error, has occurred.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ STBY-side CPU

Fault Information
b3

b2

b1

b0

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:

0/1 = -/CPU clock down
0/1 = -/C-level infinite loop
0/1 = -/Memory error, Parity alarm
0/1 = -/Emergency Timer Overflow

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 65
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Abnormal Interrupt
0-J

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the CPU detects abnormal interruption.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁ ➂ ➃

➃

➃

➃

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 6: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➃

➃

➃

7: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 8: XX00 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➃

➃

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information
(FF H: not mounted)
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➂
b1

b0

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b3:

0/1 = -/Abnormal Interruption (Hardware)
0/1 = -/Program Exception

➃ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers
See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 66
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Both TSW Failure (Permanent)
1-A

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW in both
systems.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

TSW system in which a fault is
detected

b0:

0/1 = TSW No. 0/TSW No. 1

b0:
b6:

0/1 = TSW No. 0 system/TSW No. 1 system
Speech Path in ACT status
0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b0

➁ Status at the time of fault detection
b6

➂

b0

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers
See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 67
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

TSW Failure (Permanent)
1-B

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW card in
one of the dual systems.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ TSW

system in which a fault is
detected

b0:

0/1 = TSW No. 0/TSW No. 1

b0:
b6:

0/1 = TSW No. 0/TSW No. 1
0/1 = Speech Path in ACT status
No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b0

➁ Status at the time of fault detection
b6

b0

➂ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers
See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 68
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Both TSW Write Failure
1-C

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW in both
systems.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

TSW system in which a fault is
detected

b0:

0/1 = TSW No. 0/TSW No. 1

b0:
b6:

0/1 = TSW No. 0/TSW No. 1
0/1 = Speech Path in ACT status
No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b0

➁
b6

b0

➂ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers
See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 69
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

TSW Write Failure
1-D

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the TSW card
in one of the dual systems.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁

➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ TSW

system in which a fault is
detected

b0:

0/1 = TSW No. 0/TSW No. 1

b0:
b6:

0/1 = TSW No. 0/TSW No. 1
0/1 = Speech Path ACT status
TSW No. 0 system is ACT/TSW No. 1 system is ACT

b0

➁ Status at the time of fault detection
b6

b0

➂ Data analyzed by NEC Engineers
See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 70
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Both TSW Clock Failure
1-E

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the system detects a clock failure, such as TSW internal clock down or Frame
Head down, in both systems.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

TSW card in which a fault is
detected
b1

➁ Clock status of No.
b7

b6

➂ Clock status of No.

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/Clock failure of No. 0 TSW
0/1 = -/Clock failure of No. 1 TSW

b2:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/DTG output down
0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) No. 0 System down
0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) No. 1 System down

b0

0 TSW
b2

1 TSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➁.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 71
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

TSW Clock Failure
1-F

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the system detects a clock failure, such as TSW internal clock down or Frame
Head down in one of the dual systems.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ TSW card in which

a fault is

detected
b1

➁ Clock status of No.
b7

b6

➂ Clock status of No.

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/Clock failure of No. 0 TSW
0/1 = -/Clock failure of No. 1 TSW

b2:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/DTG output down
0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) No. 0 System down
0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) No. 1 System down

b0

0 TSW
b2

1 TSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➁.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 72
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Both HSW Failure
1-G

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the system detects any failure at the HSW in both systems.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁

➂

➃

➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ HSW

detected as faulty

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0

➁ System

status at the time of fault
detection

b7

b6

b4

➂

Wire Address

➃

Write Data

➄

Read Data

b3

b2

b0

b0:
HSW No. (0-1)
b2-b3: Kind of TSW
10 = Second Switching
b4:
HSW No. (0-1)
b6:
Speech Path in ACT state
0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system
b7:
Base clock in ACT state

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 73
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

HSW Failure
1-H

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the system detects any failure at the HSW in one of the dual systems.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁

➂

➃

➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ HSW

detected as faulty

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0

➁ System

status at the time of fault
detection

b7

b6

b4

➂

Wire Address

➃

Write Data

➄

Read Data

b3

b2

b0

b0:
HSW No. (0-1)
b2-b3: Kind of TSW
10 = Second Switching
b4:
HSW No. (0-1)
b6:
Speech Path in ACT state
0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system
b7:
Base clock in ACT state

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 74
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Both HSW Write Failure
1-I

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the HSW card
in both systems.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁

➂

➃

➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ HSW

detected as faulty

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0

➁ System

status at the time of fault
detection

b7

b6

b4

➂

Wire Address

➃

Write Data

➄

Read Data

b3

b2

b0

b0:
HSW No. (0-1)
b2-b3: Kind of TSW
10 = Second Switching
b4:
HSW No. (0-1)
b6:
Speech Path in ACT state
0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system
b7:
Base clock in ACT state

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 75
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

HSW Write Failure
1-J

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the link information cannot be written into the switch memory of the HSW card
in one of the dual systems.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁

➂

➃

➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ HSW

detected as faulty

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0

➁ System

status at the time of fault
detection

b7

b6

b4

➂

Wire Address

➃

Write Data

➄

Read Data

b3

b2

b0

b0:
HSW No. (0-1)
b2-b3: Kind of TSW
10 = Second Switching
b4:
HSW No. (0-1)
b6:
Speech Path in ACT state
0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system
b7:
Base clock in ACT state

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 76
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Both HSW CLK Failure
1-K

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the system detects a clock failure such as HSW internal clock down or Frame
Head down in both systems.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄➅
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ HSW

detected as faulty

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0

b0:
b4:

0/1 = -/Clock failure in HSW
HSW No. (0-1)

b0

b0:
b1:
b3:

0/1 = -/HSW card internal clock down
0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) down
0/1 = -/Frame Head Return down

b0

➁ Details on

failure
b4

➂

Clock status of No. 0 HSW
b3

b1

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 77
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ Clock status of No.

1 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

➄ Clock status of No.

2 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

➅ Clock status of No.

3 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 78
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

HSW CLK Failure
1-L

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the system detects a clock failure such as HSW internal clock down or Frame
Head down in both systems.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄➅
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ HSW

detected as faulty

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

b0

b0:
b4:

0/1 = -/Clock failure in HSW
HSW No. (0-1)

b0

b0:
b1:
b3:

0/1 = -/HSW card internal clock down
0/1 = -/External 32 ch Clock (PLO) down
0/1 = -/Frame Head Return down

b0

➁ Details on

failure
b4

➂

Clock status of No. 0 HSW
b3

b1

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 79
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ Clock status of No.

1 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

➄ Clock status of No.

2 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

➅ Clock status of No.

3 HSW

Note: Refer to the meaning of ➂.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 80
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Both PLO Failure
1-O

Default Alarm:
MJ

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the system detects a fault, such as input clock all down or output clock down in
the PLO/CLK cards (both systems).

1: XXXX XXXX XX00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected PLO number
b7

b6

b0

b0:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = No. 0 PLO/No. 1 PLO
0/1 = -/CLK card failure Note 1
0/1 = -/PLO card failure Note 2

Note 1: For CLK in TSWM1 (used in LN only).
Note 2: For PLO in TSWM0 (used in LN only).

➁ Valid

Information bit for Scan
Data 1

b7

➂
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0-b7: The bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan
Data 1 ( ➃) is flagged “1”.

b0

Valid Information bit for Scan
Data 2
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0-b7: The bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan
Data 2 ( ➄) is flagged “1”.

b0

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 81
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ Scan Data 1: Current Status of the
PLO card
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➄ Scan Data 2: Current status of the
PLO card
b4

b1

b0

Clock status at the time of detection Note 1
0/1 = STBY/ACT
b1:
Circuit Card status at the time of detection
0/1 = PLO synchronizing/PLO self running or drifting
b2:
0/1 = -/Input clock down
b3, b4: Route of Input clock
b0:

b3

b4

DCS Input Route

Route of Input Clock

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

-

2

1

1

-

3

b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/PLO input all down
0/1 = -/PLO output down Note 2
0/1 = -/Drifting

b0:
b1:
b4:

0/1 = -/5msec Burst Clock down
0/1 = -/Frame Synchronization from SYNC card is down
0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down

Note 1: The clock status includes that of PH-CK18 (CLK) card.
Note 2: This information includes the failure detected in PH-CK18 (CLK) card.

CHAPTER 3
Page 82
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

PLO Failure
1-P

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the system detects all the failures concerned with input clock down or output clock
down in the PLO/CLK card (one of dual system).

1:

XXXX XXXX XX00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Details on

detected PLO
b0

b0:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = No. 0 PLO/No. 1 PLO
0/1 = -/CLK card failure Note 1
0/1 = -/PLO card failure Note 2

Note 1: For CLK in TSWM1 (used in LN only).
Note 2: For PLO in TSWM0 (used in LN only).

➁ Valid

Information bit for Scan
Data 1

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0-b7: The bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan
Data 1 ( ➃) is flagged “1”.

b0

➂ Valid

Information bit for Scan
Data 2

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0-b7: The bit position corresponding to the detected information in Scan
Data 2 ( ➄) is flagged “1”.

b0

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 83
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ Scan Data 1: Status of the PLO card
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➄ Scan Data 2: Current status of the
PLO card
b4

b1

b0

Clock status at the time of detection Note 1
0/1 = STBY/ACT
b1:
Circuit card status at the time of detection
0/1 = PLO synchronizing/PLO self running or drifting
b2:
0/1 = -/Input clock down
b3, b4: Route of Input clock
b0:

b3

b4

DCS Input Route

Route of Input Clock

0

0

0

0

0

1

1

1

1

0

-

2

1

1

-

3

b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/PLO input all down
0/1 = -/PLO output down Note 2
0/1 = -/Drifting

b0:
b1:
b4:

0/1 = -/5msec clock down
0/1 = -/Frame signal from SYNC card is down
0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down

Note 1: The clock status includes that of PH-CK18 (CLK) card.
Note 2: This information includes the failure detected in PH-CK18 (CLK) card.

CHAPTER 3
Page 84
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Module Group Down Failure
1-S

Default Alarm:
MJ

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a fault of the speech path system has occurred in a specific Module Group. The
specific Module Group is placed into make-busy state.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ MG

number of fault detection

b0:

0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0

➁ The kind of failure
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b0-b7: 00H/01H = -/ACT-side TSW fault

b2

b1

b0

➂ Speech Path/Clock System

b0:

b1

b0

b1:

ACT side speech path
0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system
ACT side clock
0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 85
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

TSW ACT Change Report
1-T

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the changeover of the TSW system is executed.

1: XXXX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 XXXX XXXX

➀➁

➂➃ ➄➅

19 20

21 22

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ACT side Speech Path (TSW) after

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

changeover
b0

➁ Reason for changeover
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b7-b4

b3-b0

CARD

0

1

TSW

6

2

32 ch Clock down, FH down

3

24 ch Clock down, FH down

6

TSW SW Memory write failure

9

I/O Alarm release

10

32 ch Clock down recovered, FH down
recovered

11

24 ch Clock down recovered, FH down
recovered

13

TSW MBR key OFF

15

TSW ACT/STBY changeover by the
CMODI command

1
2

CHAPTER 3
Page 86
Issue 1

CONTENTS
I/O Alarm

NDA-24307

MUX

MUX circuit card Ready failure
MUX circuit card Clock failure

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂~➅
b7

Status of ACT side TSW card

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➂
➃
➄
➅

MG00
MG02
MG04
MG06

MG01
MG03
MG05
MG07

b7-b4

b3-b0

b0-b3, b4-b7: The status of TSW card in each MG (00~07)
0000 = Normal
0001 = Abnormal (Impossible to make links)

19

b7

~

22

b6

Status of STBY side TSW
card
b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

19
20
21
22

MG00
MG02
MG04
MG06

MG01
MG03
MG05
MG07

b7-b4

b3-b0

b0-b3, b4-b7: The status of TSW card in each MG (00~07)
0000 = Normal
0001 = Abnormal (Impossible to make links)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 87
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Permanent)
1-U

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when DLKC data transfer failure (temporary), shown in message [1-V], occurs more
than 16 times an hour. At this time, the faulty DLKC card is shut and its switching network automatically
changes over.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ System status of faulty DLKC card

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

01H:
02H:
03H:
04H:

Firmware fault
Data transfer time out to DLKC
No answer time out (at DLKC)
Data parity error

b0:

Status of Speech Path System (including DLKC)
0/1 = No. 0 system is ACT/No. 1 system is ACT
Status of basic clock
0/1 = No. 0 system is ACT/No. 1 system is ACT

b0

➁ Error Code
b7

b6

b5

➂ Details on

b4

b3

b2

b1

Switching Network
b1

CHAPTER 3
Page 88
Issue 1

b0

b0

b1:

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

DLKC Data Transfer Failure (Temporary)
1-V

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a data sending error or no answer error occurs at the time of data transfer from
CPU to DLKC card.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ System status of faulty DLKC card

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system / No. 1 system

01H:
02H:
03H:
04H:

Firmware fault
Data transfer time out to DLKC
No answer time out (at DLKC)
Data parity error

b0:

Status of Speech Path System (including DLKC)
0/1 = No. 0 system is ACT/No. 1 system is ACT
Status of basic clock
0/1 = No. 0 system is ACT/No. 1 system is ACT
Information on Reset of STBY DLKC Note
0/1 = - /STBY DLKC card was reset

b0

➁ Error Code
b7

b6

b5

➂ Details on
b7

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Switching Network
b1

b0

b1:
b7:

Note: This data displays when the STBY DLKC card is detected as faulty.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 89
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

PLO Restore
1-W

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a PLO/CLK-related failure, such as internal clock down is restored.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Restoration of PLO fault

b0:

0/1 = PLO No. 0 system/PLO No. 1 system

b0

➁ Current status of PLO
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

card

b2

b1

b0

b0:
0/1 = Clock is in STBY side/ACT side Note 1
b1:
0/1 = PLO synchronizing/PLO self running or drifting
b2:
0/1 = -/Input clock down
b3, b4: Route of input clock (see the table below)

0

Connected With Primary
Oscillator (M-OSC)
No. 0 M-OSC

Connected With
External Clock
Route 0

0

1

No. 1 M-OSC

Route 1

1

0

–

Route 2

1

1

–

Route 3

b4

b3

0

b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/PLO input all down
0/1 = -/PLO output down Note 2
0/1 = -/Drifting

b0:
b1:
b4:

0/1 = -/5msec clock down
0/1 = -/Frame Synchronization from SYNC card is down
0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down

➂ Current status of the PLO card
b4

b1

b0

Note 1: The status includes that of PH-CK18 (CLK) card.
Note 2: This information includes the failure detected in PH-CK18 (CLK) card.
CHAPTER 3
Page 90
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure

1-X

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message (for the ISW only) displays when a TSW card (one of the dual systems) of ISW fails to receive
the CLK/FH signals, sent from the LN side.

1: XX00 XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

➁➂ ➃➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ TSW

detected as faulty
b1

b0

➁ ,➂

Details on the fault (TSW No. 0
side)

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/No. 0 system
0/1 = -/No. 1 system

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a
TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 0 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM
traffic has encountered a CLK/FH failure.

➁
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

➂

0:
1:

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure

b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200
Note 1: This data is displayed when b0 of ➀ is set as “1.”
Note 2: For more information on each lamp, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 91
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ ,➄

Details on the fault (TSW 1
side)

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a
TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 1 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM
traffic, once detected as faulty, has recovered.

➃
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

➄

0:
1:

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure

b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200
Note 1: This data is displayed when b1 of ➀ is set as “1.”
Note 2: For more information on each lamp, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

CHAPTER 3
Page 92
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure (Both)

1-Y

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message (for the ISW only) displays when a TSW card (both systems) of ISW fails to receive the CLK/
FH signals, sent from the LN side.

1: XX00 XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

➁➂ ➃➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ TSW

detected as faulty
b1

b0

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/No. 0 system
0/1 = -/No. 1 system

Note: Both b0 and b1 are displayed as “1.”

➁ ,➂

Details on the fault (TSW No. 0
side)

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a
TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 0 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM
traffic has encountered a CLK/FH failure.

➁
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

➂

0:
1:

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure

b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 93
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ ,➄

Details on the fault (TSW No. 1
side)

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a
TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 1 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM
traffic has encountered a CLK/FH failure.

➃
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

➄

0:
1:

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure

b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200
Note 1: For more information on each lamp, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

CHAPTER 3
Page 94
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

LN → ISW CLK/FH Release

1-Z

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message (for the ISW only) displays when LN → ISW CLK/FH failure has recovered and issues the [1X, 1-Y] system messages.

1: XX00 XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

➁➂ ➃➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ TSW

detected as fault recovery
b1

b0

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/No. 0 system
0/1 = -/No. 1 system

Note: When fault recovery is detected in both No. 0/No. 1 system, “1” is set in b0 and b1 simultaneously.

➁ ,➂

Details on the recovered traffic
(TSW No. 0 side)

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a
TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 0 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM
traffic, once detected as faulty, has recovered.

➁
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

➂

0:
1:

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

Recovery of LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure

b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200
Note 1: This data is displayed when b0 of ➀ is set as “1.”
Note 2: For more information on each lamp, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 95
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ ,➄

Details on the recovered traffic
(TSW No. 1 side)

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

The bits here correspond to “LN00” through “LN33” lamps, apiece, on a
TSW (PU-SW00) card of No. 1 system. If “1” is set, the corresponding PCM
traffic, once detected as faulty, has recovered.

➃
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

LN13 LN12 LN11 LN10 LN03 LN02 LN01 LN00

➄

0:
1:

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

LN → ISW CLK/FH Failure

b0

LN33 LN32 LN31 LN30 LN23 LN22 LN21 L200
Note 1: This data is displayed when b1 of ➁ is set as “1.”
Note 2: For more information on each lamp, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

CHAPTER 3
Page 96
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

C-Level Infinite Loop (Permanent)
3-B

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a C-level program abnormal state is detected as permanent. When the Port
Microprocessor (PM) on an LC/TRK card detects the abnormal state, the PM places the card into make-busy
status. If the failure occurs more than 15 times an hour, the system judges the failure as permanent, and issues
the [3-B] system message.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b7

Faulty Circuit Card Mounting
Location
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group
b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7:
Module Group
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 97
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

C-Level Infinite Loop (Temporary)
3-C

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when C-level program is detected as abnormal by the Port Microprocessor (PM)
mounted on an LC/TRK card. If the failure occurs less than 15 times/hour, and a B-monitor/Initial restart
executes as the result, the failure is judged as temporary and this message is created.

1: XX0X 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b7

Faulty Circuit Card Mounting
Location
b6

➁ PM

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Restart Type

b0-b4: Group
b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7:
Module Group
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0:

0/1 = B-monitor/Initial Restart

Note

b0

Note: B-monitor Restart: Ports whose link have already been established remain connected. Ports processing

a call-origination may be released.
Initial Restart: All ports on the circuit card are forcibly released to be placed in idle state.

CHAPTER 3
Page 98
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)
3-D

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

At the periodic interval, the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor (PM) on LC/TRK cards in
order to monitor the PM. If the CPU cannot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time, the
system displays this data. When the failure is detected more than 15 times per hour, the failure is judged as
permanent.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty Circuit Card Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group
b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7:
Module Group
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 99
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)
3-E

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

At the periodic interval, the CPU sends diagnosis data to the Port Microprocessor (PM) on LC/TRK cards in
order to monitor the PM. If the CPU cannot receive the return data within a predetermined period of time, the
system displays this data. When the failure is detected less than 15 times per hour, the failure is judged as
temporary.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty Circuit Card Location
b7

b6

➁ PM

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Restart Type

b0-b4: Group
b5-b6: Unit (0-3)
b7:
Module Group
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0:

0/1 = B-monitor/Initial Restart

b0

CHAPTER 3
Page 100
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

-48V Over Current
3-F

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when over current of the operating power (DC-48V) is supplied from the ATI/ELC
circuit card to the Attendant Console/Dterm. When this fault occurs, the related circuit card is placed into makebusy state and stops supplying power.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty PM
b7

b6

b5

Location
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group
b5, b6: Unit
b7:
Module Group
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 101
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Ground Failure
3-G

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a wire of the line between the LC circuit card and the telephone set is shortcircuited with ground.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty Circuit Card Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ Faulty Circuit Card Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b2: Circuit No. (0-7)
b3-b7: Circuit card No. (0-31)

b0, b1: Unit No. (0-3)
b2-b7: MG No.

Note: This message displays when using the specific LC card providing the above function.

CHAPTER 3
Page 102
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Digital Line Warning
3-H

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the DTI card detects abnormal state of a digital line but this failure has influence
on the Speech path. When the status is getting worse, they system will issue [3-I] Digital Line Failure.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty PM
b7

b6

b5

(LENS) Location
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ Kind of Fault
b7

➂

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Fault Detection Time Slot No.
(This data is valid only when the
kind of fault is 08H)
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0-b4: Group
b5, b6: Unit (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even numbered MG/Odd numbered MG

01H = Frame alignment loss occurs three times a day
02H = Bit error rate is over 10-6
03H = Slip occurs twice a day
04H = Multiframe alignment loss occurs three times a day
08H = Fault detection on the CCIS Bch

b0-b4: Time Slot No. in which the Digital line failure is detected
(1-16, 17-31)

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 103
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Digital Line Failure
3-I

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays after [3-H] Digital Line Warning lasts in the DTI card over the particular time. This
failure may cause a speech path fault to the DTI card.

1: XXXX 0000 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁

➂➃ ➂➃

➂➃ ➂➃ ➂➃ ➂➃

➂➃ ➂➃ ➂➃ ➂➃

4: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➂➃ ➂➃
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty PM Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ Kind of fault
b7

➂
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Faulty Circuit Card Location (This
data is valid when ➁ is 0FH)
b6

b5

b4

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 104
Issue 1

b4

01H = Frame alignment loss occurs 100 times a day
03H = Slip occurs 50 times a day
04H = Multiframe alignment loss occurs 110 times a day
06H = Frame alignment loss lasts for 2 to 3 sec.
07H = Bit error rate is over 10-4
09H = Warning signal (AIS) from the opposite office has been received for 1
sec. continuously.
0BH = Multiframe alignment loss lasts for 2 to 3 sec.
0FH = Digital Line is not restored
b3-b7: Group No.

b3

➃ Faulty Circuit Card Location (This
data is valid when ➁ is 0FH)
b7

b0-b4: Group
b5, b6: Unit
b7:
Module Group
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b3

b2

b1

b0, b1: Unit No. (0-3)
b2-b7: MG No.

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Digital Line Restore
3-J

Default Alarm:
ON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a digital line fault is restored.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty Line Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
Module Group
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 105
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Both TSW Ready Failure
4-C

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a Ready Failure occurs in both systems as a result of the TSW card having a failure
or the card is not mounted properly.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty TSW

Information

b7

b0:

b1

0/1 = TSW No. 0 system/TSW No. 1 system
Note: When Ready Failure occurs in both systems, the [4-C]

b0

message is separately issued twice: “0” displays in one
message, and “1” in the other message.
b1:

Details on faulty TSW card
0 = TSW card (LN) connection to MUX or TSW card within ISWM
Note 1
1 = TSW card (LN) connected to TSW of ISWM Note 2
Fault-detected circuit card
0 = PH-SW12 (LN) or PU-SW00 (ISW)
1 = PH-GT09 (LN only)

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.
b7:

[LN0]

[ISW]
To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

To MUX To MUX
(IMG0) (IMG1)

TSW00

TSW01

Note 1

TSW02

TSW03

Note 2
TSWM0

TSW00

TSW01

Note 1

To LN1 To LN2 To LN3

TSW02

TSW03

Note 2

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

Note 1

TSWM1

Note 1: If a fault occurs in any of the TSW cards, “0” is set in bit 1 of ➀.
Note 2: If a fault occurs in any of the TSW cards, “1” is set in bit 1 of ➀.

CHAPTER 3
Page 106
Issue 1

NDA-24307

TSW03

ISWM

SYSTEM MESSAGES

TSW Ready Failure
4-D

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a TSW Ready Failure occurs in one of the dual systems because the TSW card
fails or the card is not mounted properly.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Faulty TSW Information

b7

b1

b0

b0:
b1:

0/1 = TSW No. 0 system/TSW No. 1 system
Details on faulty TSW card
0 = TSW card (LN) connection to MUX or TSW card within ISWM
Note 1
1 = TSW card (LN) connected to TSW of ISWM Note 2
Fault-detected circuit card
0 = PH-SW12 (LN) or PU-SW00 (ISW)
1 = PH-GT09 (LN only)

b7:

[LN0]

[ISW]
To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

To MUX To MUX
(IMG0) (IMG1)

TSW00

TSW01

Note 1

TSW02

TSW03

Note 2
TSWM0

TSW00

TSW01

Note 1

To LN1 To LN2 To LN3

TSW02

TSW03

Note 2

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

Note 1

TSWM1

ISWM

Note 1: If a fault occurs in any of the TSW cards, “0” is set in bit 1 of ➀.
Note 2: If a fault occurs in any of the TSW cards, “1” is set in bit 1 of ➀.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 107
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Both HSW Ready Failure
4-E

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when I/O Ready Failure occurs in both HSW systems.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ HSW

Fault Detected

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system Note

b0

Note: When I/O ready failure ocurs simultaneously in both HSW systems, the [4-E] message is separately

issued twice: “0” is displayed in one message and “1” in the other message.

➁ Details on

HSW No.
b4

b0

b0:
b4:

0/1 = -/Ready Fault in HSW
HSW No. (0-1)

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 108
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

HSW Ready Failure
4-F

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when I/O Ready Failure occurs in both HSW systems.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ HSW

Fault Detected

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b0:
b4:

0/1 = -/Ready Fault in HSW
HSW No. (0-1)

b0

➁ Details on

HSW No.
b4

b0

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 109
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

DLKC Ready Failure
4-Q

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when I/O Ready Failure occurs on a DLKC card.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Details on faulty DLKC card
b7

CHAPTER 3
Page 110
Issue 1

b0

b0:
b7:

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system
0/1 = ACT/STBY

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

MUX Ready Failure
4-S

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card has a Ready Failure in one of the dual systems. When
the card is not ready for service function because of the failure or because the card is not mounted properly,
the system creates this message.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Unit and MG number for the faulty
MUX card
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ Faulty MUX card information
b2

b1

b0

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 0
0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 1
0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 2
0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 3
0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 0
0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 1
0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 2
0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 3

b0:

MG
0/1 = Even number/Odd number
0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system
ACT or STBY status
0/1 = ACT/STBY

b1:
b2:

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 111
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Both MUX Ready Failure
4-T

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card has a Ready Failure in both of the dual systems. When
the card is not ready for service function because of the failure or because the card is not mounted properly,
the system creates this system message.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Unit and MG number for the MUX
card
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ Faulty MUX card information
b2

b1

b0

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 0
0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 1
0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 2
0/1 = -/Even-numbered MG, Unit 3
0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 0
0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 1
0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 2
0/1 = -/Odd-numbered MG, Unit 3

b0:

MG
0/1 = Even number/Odd number
0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system Note 1
ACT or STBY status Note 2
0/1 = ACT/STBY

b1:
b2:

Note 1: Though this message indicates the Ready Failure in both systems, the information displayed here only

relates to the ACT-side MUX status. (Two messages are not displayed separately.)
Note 2: Fixed as “0 (=ACT).” See Note 1.

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 112
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

PCI Card Failure
4-U

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a PCI card failure occurs.

1: 0X0X 0X0X 0X00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Fault detection on PCI card
b3

➁

b2

b1

Error status on PCI slot 0
b1

➂

b0

b0

Error status on PCI slot 1
b1

➃

Not used

➄

Error status on PCI slot 3
b1

b0

b0

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:

0/1 = -/Error detection on PCI slot 0 (LANI-A)
0/1 = -/Error detection on PCI slot 1
0/1 = -/Error detection on PCI slot 2 (Not used)
0/1 = -/Error detection on PCI slot 3 (LANI-B)

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/Physical connection error Note 1
0/1 = -/Hardware Fault Note 2

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/Physical connection error Note 1
0/1 = -/Hardware Fault Note 2

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/Physical connection error Note 1
0/1 = -/Hardware Fault Note 2

Note 1: Physical Connection Error

•
•
•

Ethernet cable is disconnected.
Ethernet cable has short-circuited.
Ethernet straight/cross cable selection error

Note 2: Hardware Fault

•
•

Transmitter failure
Controller lock-up
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 113
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

PCI Card Failure Recovered
4-V

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the PCI card, which was detected as faulty, is recovered.

1: 0X0X 0X0X 0X00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detection of PCI restoration
b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ Details on error restoration

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:

0/1 = -/Error restoration on PCI slot 0 (LANI-A)
0/1 = -/Error restoration on PCI slot 1
0/1 = -/Error restoration on PCI slot 2 (Not used)
0/1 = -/Error restoration on PCI slot 3 (LANI-B)

b0:

0/1 = -/Physical connection error restoration Note

b0:

0/1 = -/Physical connection error restoration Note

b0:

0/1 = -/Physical connection error restoration Note

(PCI slot 0)
b0

➂ Details on error restoration
(PCI slot 1)
b0

➃ Not used
➄ Details on error restoration (PCI
slot 3)
b0

Note: Physical Connection Error

•
•
•
CHAPTER 3
Page 114
Issue 1

Ethernet cable is disconnected.
Ethernet cable has short-circuited.
Ethernet straight/cross cable selection error
NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

System Failure
6-A

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:
(FIXED) NON

Lamp Modified:
(FIXED) 3

This message displays when any of the following faults are detected:
•

Power failure

•

Fuse blowing

•

In-Frame abnormal temperature

1: XX00 XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

➁➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Probable cause for the failure
b4

b3

➁ The frame in which

b2

b1

b0

a fault is

detected
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➂ Factor of the failure
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:

Input power (-48V) down or failure
PWR Supply Fault
PWR Supply Fuse Alarm
Abnormal temperature MJ (70ºC (158ºF))
Abnormal temperature MN (60ºC (140ºF))

b0-b3: Frame No. (0-3)
b4, b5: Frame Group No. (0 only)
b6, b7: Kind of frame
00 = IMG

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:

0/1 = -/OBP Alarm 0 side
0/1 = -/OBP Alarm 1 side
0/1 = -/OBP Alarm MISC side
0/1 = -/Power Alarm 0 side
0/1 = -/Power Alarm 1 side

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 115
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

RGU and Howler Failure
6-B

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a fault in either the ringer or howler tone occurs in the PWR card.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Unit and MG

number of fault

b0, b1: Unit No. (0-3)
b2:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

detection
b2

b1

b0

➁ Kind of the fault
b1

CHAPTER 3
Page 116
Issue 1

b0

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/RGU (Ringing Unit) Fault
0/1 = -/Howler Fault

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Line Load Control Start
6-C

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the CPU usage (occupancy) rate exceeds the value assigned to ASYD, SYS1,
INDEX56, and the call origination from the pre-selected group of stations is restricted (i.e. Line Load Control
is set). This system message is always indicated as 0.

1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 117
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Line Load Control Stop
6-D

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the CPU usage (occupancy) rate becomes lower than the value assigned to ASYD,
SYS1, INDEX57, and Line Load Control is cancelled. This system message is always indicated as 0.

1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

CHAPTER 3
Page 118
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Bad Call Notification
6-H

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays to indicate the result of Bad Call Notification.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄➅ ➆➇

➈

➉

11

12

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b7

Bad Call Notification
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b3: Station number digit with the fault. (This data is always indicated as
“0” when Type of connection is 2 (ACD Trunk).)
b4-b7: Type of connection
0 = Station connection
1 = Trunk connection
2 = ACD Trunk connection

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 119
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When type of connection is intra-Station connection

➁ ~ ➃ Station number (see table)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁
➂
➃

➄ Called station number
b3

➅
b7

b4-b7

b0-b3

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

b0-b3: Number of digits for the called station number

b2

b1

b0

~ ➇ Called station number
(See table)
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➈ Time Slot Number of Link 1 Note

➅
➆
➇

b4-b7

b0-b3

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

1

➉ Not used
11

Time Slot Number of Link 2 Note 1

12

Not used
Note 1: Station at which the operation was performed as shown in the figure below.
LINK 1

CALLED SIDE (TRUNK)
LINK 2

CHAPTER 3
Page 120
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When type of connection is Trunk connection

➁ ~ ➃ Station number (See table)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁
➂
➃

➄ Remote Route No.
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b6

b5

b4

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

b0-b3: OPRT Route No. (Over 64)

b2

b1

b0

➆ Called trunk No.
b7

b0-b3

b0-b5: Route No. (1-63)
b6:
OP
0/1 = Data in OPRT ( ➅ ) is invalid/valid
b7:
AC
0/1 = Internal trunk/External trunk

➅ Remote Route No.
b3

b4-b7

b0-b7: Trunk No.

b3

b2

b1

b0

➇ Not used
➈ Time Slot Number of Link 1 Note

1

➉ Not used
11

Time Slot Number of Link 2 Note 1

12

Not used
Note 1: Station at which the operation was performed as shown below.
LINK 1

CALLED SIDE (TRUNK)
LINK 2

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 121
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When type of connection is ACD Trunk connection

➁ ACD
b7

Trouble Kind

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b7: ACD trouble kind
01H=ACD trunk trouble key Note 1
14H=ACD reset start Note 2
15H=Insufficient ACD memory
16H=Insufficient ACD call record
17H=Excessive business station on ACD calls
18H=Excessive calls queued
21H=Unknown Pilot No. called Note 3
24H=Illegal execution of ACD timeout procedure Note 4
30H=ACD pointer error detection and recovery Note 5
33H=ACDP reset completion Note 6
34H=Call recovery failure on unknown Pilot No. Note 7
37H=ACD Traffic (incoming) Capacity Over
99H=Illegal ACD processing-trace stored Note 4

Note 1: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 01 Hex:
➂ ~ ➅ Information on Calling Party

(a)

Station
My Line No.

➂
➃
➄
➅

(b)

b4-b7

b0-b3

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

Trunk
Route No.+Trunk No.
b4-b7

➂
➃
➄
➅

b0-b3
DC0

DC1

DC2
DC0

DC1

DC2

Example: RT125,TKl0
01 25 00 l0

➂ ➃ ➄➅

➆ ➇ Not Used
➈ ➉ Information on Calling Party
11 12

Refer to
Information on Held Party or 3rd Station/Trunk in 3-Party Connection
Refer to

Note 2: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 14 Hex:
➂ Issue of ACDP (First digit of decimal place)
➃ Issue of ACDP (Second digit of decimal place)
Note 3: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 21 Hex:
➂ ~ ➅ Information on Calling Party
Refer to ➂ ~ ➅ of Note 1
➆ ➇ Not used
➈ ➉ Information on Unknown Pilot No.
Refer to ➂ ~ ➅, (a) Station of Note 1

CHAPTER 3
Page 122
Issue 1

NDA-24307

Route No.
Trunk No.

SYSTEM MESSAGES
Note 4: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 24 or 99 Hex:

➂ ~ ➅ Not used
➆, ➇ Error Counter
Note 5: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 30 Hex:

➂ ~ ➅ Pointer Address
➆ Not used
➇ Error Kind
➂
➃

Note 6: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 33 Hex:

ACDP Data Memory
00 = Used
01 = Not used
ACDP System Capacity
02 = 50 Agent Positions
04 = 200 Agent Positions
07 = 500 Agent Positions
12 = 900 Agent Positions
15 = 2,000 Agent Positions

Note

Note: If other data is output, the ACD system may not be working correctly. In this case, be sure to install the

ACD application again by using the MSVIP command.
Note 7: When“➁ (ACD Trouble Kind)” is 34 Hex:
➂ ~ ➅ Information on Unknown Pilot No.
Refer to ➂ ~ ➅, (a) Station of Note 1

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 123
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

STA-Test Connection Data
6-I

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays to indicate the result of a designated connection test (Individual Trunk Access) from a
station.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 00XX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄➅ ➆➇

➈➉

11

12

12

12

12

12

12

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b7

Test Item (b0-b3 is valid only for
Outgoing trunk test)
b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 124
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b2: Kind of Signal
2 = Second Dial Tone
6 = Sender (Delay Dial Start)
7 = Sender (Wink Start)
b3: 0/1 = Data is not valid/valid
b4-b7: Test item
1 = Outgoing Trunk Test
2 = ORT/IRT Test
3 = Sender Test
4 = Digital Conference
5 = Tone Test
6 = Ringing Signal test
0 = Test NG

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➁
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b3: Number of digits of testing station No.
b4-b7: Error Numbers (see table below)

Error Numbers and Their Meanings
ERROR NO.

MEANING

0

---

1

Testing station is restricted from activating the
service.

2

Route Number Error of the designated trunk

3

Trunk Number Error of the designated trunk

4

Trunk busy

5

Sender busy

6

SMDR failure

7

Call origination restriction

8

Register busy

9

Trunk Number Error - when the trunk has been
designated by SHF.

A

Trunk busy - when the trunk has been designated
by SHF.

B

Inter-digit timer expiration

C

Register or sender is defective with respect to DP,
DP/PB

D

Register of sender is faulty with respect to PB

E

Tone fault

F

Test Processing Error

➂ ~ ➄ Station number of testing
station (see table)

➂
➃
➄

➅ Tenant No.
b7

b3

b2

b1

b0

b4-b7

b0-b3

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

b0-b3: Tenant No. (1-15)
b7:
OP
0/1 = Data in OPTN ( ➆ ) is invalid/valid

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 125
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➆

Tenant No.

b0-b3: Tenant No. (Over 15)

b3

b2

b1

b0

➇ Tested Route No.

b0-b5: Route No. (1-63) Note
b6:
OP
0/1 = Data in OPRT ( ➈ ) is invalid/valid
b7:
AC
0/1 = Internal trunk/External trunk

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b3

b2

b1

b0

Note: When Logical Routes are assigned, Logical Route Numbers are displayed here.

➈ OPRT data

b0-b7: Route No. ( > 64) Note

b7

b6

b5

b4

Note: When Logical Routes are assigned, Logical Route Numbers are displayed here.

➉ (This data is not for Ringing Signal Test)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b7: Trunk No. for Outgoing trunk test, ORT/IRT Test, Sender
Test and Digital Conference test
Tone Slot No. for Tone Test
0 = DT
1 = SPDT
2 = RBT
3 = CRBT, CWT
4 = BT
5 = RBT
6 = SST, WT
7 = SDT
8 = TRG
9 = SDTT
10 = CWRBT
14 = MSC
11

b0-b4: Dialed number digit sent by the test Trunk/Sender
or
Dialed number digit received by the test Register
12

b7

Digit of Dialed Number (for test)

b7

b4

b3

b2

b1

Dialed Number (for test)
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

(a) Dialed Number sent by the test Trunk/Sender

b) Dialed Number received by the test Register

b4-b7

b0-b3

b4-b7

b0-b3

b4-b7

b0-b3

DC0

DC1

DC12

DC13

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC14

DC15

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

DC16

DC17

DC4

DC5

DC6

DC7

DC18

DC19

DC6

DC7

DC8

DC9

DC20

DC21

DC8

DC9

DC10

DC11

DC10

DC11

CHAPTER 3
Page 126
Issue 1

NDA-24307

b0

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Emergency Call
6-J

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a call terminates to the Emergency Telephone.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄➅ ➆➇

➈➉

11 12

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ~ ➅ Called Station (Emergency
Telephone) No. (ASCII Code)
b7

➆~
b7

b6

12

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Calling Station No. (ASCII
Code)
b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➀
➁
➂
➃
➄
➅

DC0
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DC5

(1st digit)
(2nd digit)
(3rd digit)
(4th digit)
(5th digit)
(6th digit)

➆
➇
➈
➉

DC0
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
DC5

(1st digit)
(2nd digit)
(3rd digit)
(4th digit)
(5th digit)
(6th digit)

11
12

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 127
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Emergency Control Start
6-L

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the LCR-Attendant Manual Override is set at the Attendant/Desk Console.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Route Selection Time Pattern No.
assigned at Attendant/Desk
Console
b2

b1

b0-b2: Pattern No. (1-7)

b0

Note: Route Selection Time Pattern 0-7 corresponds to TDPTN No. 0-7 in the AOPR command.

CHAPTER 3
Page 128
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Emergency Control Stop
6-M

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the LCR-Attendant Manual Override is cancelled at the Attendant/Desk Console.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Suspension of Emergency Control
b0

b0:

Fixed 0.
0 = Outgoing call restriction is released by Attendant/Desk Console

Note: Route Selection Patterns 0-7 corresponds to TDPTN No. 0-7 in the AOPR command.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 129
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Abnormal Call Duration Data
6-N

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the system detects abnormal duration in the line connection between the calling
and called party. When the calling and called party establish a line connection and continue the hook-up for an
extremely short or long period of time (predetermined by the ASYD command (SYS1, INDEX45, 46)), this
message is created.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00

➀ ➁ ➁➂ ➂ ➂ ➂

➃➄ ➄➄ ➄➄ ➄➄

➄➄ ➄➄ ➄➄ ➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Calling party information

b7

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b3: Type of Calling party
0 = Station
1 = Attendant console
2 = Trunk
b7:
0/1 = Short/Long Time

➁

Tenant No. of Calling/Called party (Hex.)

➂

Calling party Information

When calling party is Station
Calling station No. (See table)
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 130
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

NDA-24307

b4-b7

b0-b3

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When calling party is ATTCON/DESKCON
Attendant/Desk console No. (See
table.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b4- b7

b0-b3

DC0

DC1

When calling party is Trunk
Route No. and Trunk No. (See table.)

Note:
Route No. (a)

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Route No. (b)

b3

➃

b2

b1

b0

b1

b0

Called party information
b3

b2

b0-b7
(a)

Route No. (Hex) Note

(b)

Route No. (Hex) Note

(c)

Trunk No. (Hex)

(d)

Trunk No. (Hex)

b0-b5: Route No. (1-63)
b6:
OP
0/1 = Data in OPRT is invalid/valid
b7:
AC
0/1 = Internal trunk/External trunk

b0-b3: OPRT
Route No. (Over 64)

b0-b3:
00 = Station-to-Station call
01 = Outgoing call to outside
02 = Incoming call from outside

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 131
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➄

Called Party Information

Station to Station Call
(a)

Type of called party

b4-b7

00 = Station

b0-b3
(a)

Tenant No.

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

Tenant No.

b0

OG Call to outside

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

IC Call from outside

b4-b7
b0-b3
Route No. (Hex)

b0-b7
Route No. (Hex)

Route No. (Hex)

Route No. (Hex)

Trunk No. (Hex)

Trunk No. (Hex)

Trunk No. (Hex)

Trunk No. (Hex)

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

DC6

DC7

DC8

DC9

DC10

DC11

DC12

DC13

DC14

DC15

DC16

DC17

DC18

DC19

CHAPTER 3
Page 132
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Alarm
6-O

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the SMDR output buffer usage rate has exceeded the value assigned to ASYD,
SYS1, INDEX249.

1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂➃
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detail Information
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b3: FS
b4-b7: FE
This system message varies depending on the data at

➀.

FS

FE

MEANING

(a)

0

0

SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the value
assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX249.

(a)

0

1

After SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the
value assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX249,
usage rate lowered less than the value assigned by
INDEX250.

(b)

1

0

-

(c)

2

0

Data output is impossible due to SMDR apparatus
failure.

(a) FS = 0, FE = 0/1

➁

b0:

b0

0/1 = Data assigned by the ASYD, SYS1, INDEX249, 250 is valid/
invalid

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 133
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂
b7

➃
b7

Buffer Usage Rate Assigned by
ASYD, SYS1, INDEX249
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0-b3: Units
b4-b7: Tens

b0

Buffer Usage Rate Assigned by
ASYD, SYS1, INDEX250
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0-b3: Units
b4-b7: Tens

b0

(b) FS = 1, FE = 0

➁
b1

➂

b0

Overflow Rate

b0, b1: Fault Grade by ALMG command
00 = NON CONT
01 = SUP
10 = MN
11 = MJ

b0:

0/1 = -/100% Overflow

b0

➃
b7

Overflow Rate
b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 134
Issue 1

b4-b7: 1-9 = 10%-90% Overflow

b4

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

(c) FS = 2, FE = 0

➁ SMDR

Group No.
b3

➂
b7

➃

b0-b3: SMDR Group No. to which failure occurred

b2

b1

b0

Port No.
b6

b5

b0-b7: Port No. allocated for SMDR Group to which failure occurred (0-7)

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Not used

(d) FS = 3, FE = 0

➁

b0-b3: SMDR Group No. to which failure occurred

b3

b2

b1

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 135
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

SMDR Output Buffer Overflow Release
6-P

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the SMDR output buffer usage rate has been lowered to less than the value
assigned in the ASYD, SYS1, INDEX250 after the rate exceeds the value assigned by INDEX249.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b7

Detail Information
b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 136
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b7: 00H = After SMDR output buffer usage rate exceeds the value
assigned by ASYD, SYS1, INDEX249, the rate lowered less than
the value assigned by INDEX250.

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

System Initialize With Data Load
7-A

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays after the office data is loaded and system initialization has executed.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b4

➁
b7

b3

b2

b1

b0

Load Status
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:

0/1 = IPL/PWR ON
0/1 = Load Key OFF/ON
0/1 = IPL KEY/MAT INITIAL
0/1 = Program load is executed/0/1 = -/Phase1 Restart Note 1

b0:

Office Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
Call Forwarding Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
Individual Speed Calling Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
RCF Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
Name Display Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
Network DM Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
Local DM Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
0/1 = DM Load/Non Load
User assign Soft Key Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG
Number Sharing Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG Note 2
Call Block Data Load Status
0/1 = Load OK/NG

b1:
b2:
b3:

b11

b9

b8

b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:
b8:
b9:
b11:

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 137
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES
Note 1: Phase 1 Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two-way

connections that have already been established:
•

Basic two-way connections (STN-STN, STN-TRK, TRK-TRK)

•

Fixed connections

•

Two-way connections established on a Fusion link

Note 2: The Number Sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS .

For more details, see Chapter 6, Section 12.

CHAPTER 3
Page 138
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

System Initialize
7-B

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when system initialization is activated.

1: XX00 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b4

➁

b3

b2

Details on Intialization Note 2
b1

➂ FPC No. Note
b7

b6

b5

b4

b0

2

b2:
b3:
b4:

0/1 = IPL KEY/MAT INITIAL
0/1 = Program Load/Non Load
0/1 = -/Phase1 Restart Note 1

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/ISW → LN Remote Initialization Request
0/1 = -/ISW → LN Data Sending Error

b0-b7: FPC No. of LN where initialization request sent

b3

b2

b1

b0

Note 1: Phase 1 Restart is executed when initializing the system without disrupting the following two-way

connections that have already been established:
•

Basic two-way connections (STN-STN, STN-TRK, TRK-TRK)

•

Fixed connections

•

Two-way connections established on a Fusion link

Note 2: When the whole system is initialized via key information from the ISW, this message is output in each

LN/ISW. However, the data ➁ and ➂ are displayed at the ISW only.

For more details, see Chapter 6, Section 12.
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 139
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CPU MBR Key Turn ON
7-C

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MBR switch on the CPU Front Panel has been turned ON at the time of CPU
changeover or speech path changeover.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b7

➁
b7

Self-CPU Restart Information
b5

b4

b3

b0

Mate-CPU Restart Information
b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 140
Issue 1

b4

b3

b0

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CPU MBR Key Turn OFF
7-D

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MBR switch on the CPU Front Panel has been turned OFF at the time of CPU
changeover or speech path changeover.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Self-CPU Restart Information
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

➁ Mate-CPU Restart Information
b7

b5

b4

b3

b0

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

b0:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b7:

0/1 = -/Monitor Restart
0/1 = -/Initialization
0/1 = -/Data Copy Restart (for Dual-CPU system only)
0/1 = -/MB control
0/1 = ACT/STBY (active system indication after restart)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 141
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

TSW MBR Key Turn ON
7-E

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card has been turned ON at CPU changeover or
speech path changeover.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ System

Status of TSW Card

b7

CHAPTER 3
Page 142
Issue 1

b0

b0:
b7:

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system
Kind of PKG
0/1 = SW12/GT09

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

TSW MBR Key Turn OFF
7-F

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MBR switch on the TSW card has been turned OFF at CPU changeover or
speech path changeover.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ System
b7

Status of TSW Card
b0

b0:
b7:

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system
Kind of PKG
0/1 = SW12/GT09

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 143
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

ALMC MB Key Turn ON
7-I

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the EMA card has been turned ON when extracting or inserting
a circuit card or at PM initialization. This message displays with the [7-J]: ALMC MB Key Turn OFF message.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Frame No. and its Kind
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 144
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b3: Frame No. (0 only)
b4-b5: Frame Group No. (0 only)
b6-b7: Kind of Frame
00=IMG

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

ALMC MB Key Turn OFF
7-J

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the EMA card has been turned OFF when extracting or inserting
a circuit card or at PM initialization.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Frame No. and its Kind
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b3: Frame No. (0 only)
b4-b5: Frame Group No. (0 only)
b6-b7: Kind of Frame
00=IMG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 145
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

PM MB Key Turn ON
7-K

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the line/trunk card has been turned ON when extracting or
inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b7

Faulty Line/Trunk Card Location
b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 146
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

PM MB Key Turn OFF
7-L

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the line/trunk card has been turned OFF when extracting or
inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty Line/Trunk
b7

b6

b5

b4

Card Location

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 147
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

NCU MB Key Turn ON
7-M

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT card has been turned ON when extracting or inserting
a circuit card or at PM initialization.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty PFT Card No.

b0-b2: Circuit card No. (0-7)

b2

b1

b0

➁ Faulty PFT Card Location
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 148
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

NCU MB Key Turn OFF
7-N

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the PFT card has been turned OFF when extracting or inserting
a circuit card, or at PM initialization.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty PFT Card No.

b0-b2: Circuit card No. (0-7)

b2

b1

b0

➁ Faulty PFT Card Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 149
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Cyclic Diagnosis Normal
7-O

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

In a specific time cycle, the system allows a routine diagnosis in its hardware and software to determine if they
are operating properly. This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis
program and the result of the diagnosis is normal.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Note

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

[00H] Routine Diagnosis Start
[10H] Program Memory Verification Normal End
[20H] Data Memory Verification Normal End
[30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End
[40H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End
[50H] No Trunk Ineffective Hold
[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End
[A0H] Periodic Back-up Normal End
[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Normal End

Note: The data in this area will be diverse, according to the diagnosis specified in

item data, see the following pages.

CHAPTER 3
Page 150
Issue 1

NDA-24307

➀. For details on each

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[00H] Routine Diagnosis Start

1: 00XX 0X0X XX00 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂➃ ➄
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item
➁
b7

[00H] Routine Diagnosis Start (LN)
[01H] Routine Diagnosis Start (ISW)

Diagnosis Menu (SYS1, Index 89)
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➂ Diagnosis Menu (SYS1, Index 90)
b3

b1

➃ Call Forward Memory

Clear Item

(SYS1, Index 232)
b2

b1

b0

➄ Periodic Back-up Item
(SYS1, Index 304)
b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

0/1=-/Program Memory Verification
0/1=-/Data Memory Verification
0/1=-/TSW ACT/STBY Changeover
0/1=-/CPU ACT/STBY Changeover
0/1=-/Trunk Ineffective Hold Check
0/1=-/Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection
0/1=-/Call Forwarding Memory Clear
0/1=-/IP ACT/STBY Changeover

b1:
b3:

0/1 = -/Periodic Back-up
0/1 = -/Residual Link Detection

b0:
b1:
b2:

0/1 = -/Call Forward All Clear
0/1 = -/Call Forward Busy Clear
0/1 = -/Call Forward No Answer Clear

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:

0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data Save
0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data Save
0/1 = -/PCS Data Save
0/1 = -/Name Display Data Save
0/1 = -/User Assign Soft Key Data Save
0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data Save

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 151
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[10H] Program Memory Verification Normal End

1: 10XX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

➁

[10H] Program Memory Verification Normal End

Information on HD
b1

b0

➂ Verification of Drive Number
b3

CHAPTER 3
Page 152
Issue 1

b2

b1

b0

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/HFD 0 is normal
0/1 = -/HFD 1 is normal

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:

0/1 = -/Drive Number 0
0/1 = -/Drive Number 1
0/1 = -/Drive Number 2
0/1 = -/Drive Number 3

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[20H] Data Memory Verification Normal End

1: 20XX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

➁

[20H] Data Memory Verification Normal End

Verification of HD
b1

b0

➂ Verification of Data Memory
b2

b1

b0

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/HFD 0 is normal
0/1 = -/HFD 1 is normal

b0:
b1:
b2:

0/1 = -/Data Memory
0/1 = -/Local Data Memory
0/1 = -/Network Data Memory

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 153
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End

1: 30XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

[30H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End

➁

b0:

Active TSW system after the
changeover

0/1 = TSW No. 0 is ACT/TSW No. 1 is ACT

b0

CHAPTER 3
Page 154
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[40H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End

1: 40XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Performed Diagnosis Item

[40H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Normal End

➁

Active status information after
changeover

b0:

b1

b0

b1:

CPU
0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT
TSW
0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 155
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[50H] No Trunk Ineffective Hold

1: 50XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Performed Diagnosis Item

➁ MG
b7

[50H] No Trunk Ineffective Hold

and Unit of No.

b6

b5

b4

b3

b0:

b2

b1

b0

b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

CHAPTER 3
Page 156
Issue 1

Unit 0, Even-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 1, Even-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 2, Even-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 3, Even-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 0, Odd-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 1, Odd-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 2, Odd-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold
Unit 3, Odd-numbered MG
1 = No Trunk Ineffective Hold

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End

1: 7000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item

[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear Normal End

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 157
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[A0H] Periodic Back-up Normal

1: A0XX XX00 0000 XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

➃

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Performed Diagnosis Item

[A0H] Periodic Back-up Normal

➁

Information on Periodic Backup
Normal End

b0:
b1:

0/1 = HFD 0 Normal end/Abnormal end
0/1 = HFD 1 Normal end/Abnormal end

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:

0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data
0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data
0/1 = -/RCF
0/1 = -/Name Display Data
0/1 = -/User Assign Soft Key Data
0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data Note
0/1 = -/Call Block Data

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:

0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data
0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data
0/1 = -/RCF
0/1 = -/Name Display Data
0/1 = -/User Assign Soft Key Data
0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data Note
0/1 = -/Call Block Data

b1

b0

➂ Backup Data to No. 0 system
b6

➃

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Backup Data to No. 1 system
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Note: The Number Sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS.

CHAPTER 3
Page 158
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Normal End

1: C000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b7

Performed Diagnosis Item
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Normal End

b1

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 159
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Cyclic Diagnosis Information (Error Detected)
7-P

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

In a specific time cycle, the system allows a routine diagnosis in its hardware and software to determine if they
are operating properly. This message indicates that the system has been checked by the routine diagnosis
program and the result of the diagnosis is not normal.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000
Note 3

➀

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected Error Item
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

[10H]
[11H]
[12H]
[20H]
[21H]
[31H]
[32H]
[41H]
[42H]

Program Memory Verification Discrepancy
Program Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)
Program Memory Verification Impossible (Fault at CPU side)
Data Memory Verification Discrepancy
Data Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)
TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (ISW)
TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (LN)
CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure
CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (DM or PM Verification
NG)
[43H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (PCI Fault)
[44H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (Changeover NG or CPU
RAM Copy NG)
[50H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected
[51H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released
[52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible
[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG
[A0H] Periodic Backup Abnormal End
[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End

Note 1: This data is output at the ISW.
Note 2: This data is collected and output at the ISW.
Note 3: The data in this area will be diverse, according to the diagnosis specified in

item data, see the following pages.

CHAPTER 3
Page 160
Issue 1

NDA-24307

➀. For details on each

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[10H] Program Memory Verification Discrepancy

1: 1000 XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

➁➂

➃

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected Error Item

➁

[10H] Program Memory Verification Discrepancy

Faulty HFD number
b1

➂

Verification of Drive Number
b3

➃

b0

b2

b1

b0

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/HFD 0
0/1 = -/HFD 1

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:

0/1 = -/Drive Number 0
0/1 = -/Drive Number 1
0/1 = -/Drive Number 2
0/1 = -/Drive Number 3

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 161
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[11H] Program Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)

1: 11XX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂

➃

➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected Error Item

➁

[11H] Program Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)

HFD No. (verification suspended)
b1

➂
b7

b0

Error Type
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➃

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

➄

Error Drive Note
b3

b2

b1

b0

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/HFD 0
0/1 = -/HFD 1

00H:
01H:
02H:
03H:
04H:
05H:

HD Processing NG
HD Not Connected
HD Busy
HD Fault (Fault processing/No equipment, etc.)
Transfer NG
Response Timeout

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:

0/1 = -/Drive Number 0
0/1 = -/Drive Number 1
0/1 = -/Drive Number 2
0/1 = -/Drive Number 3

Note: This data is available when ➂ is 00 Hex.

CHAPTER 3
Page 162
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[12H] Program Memory Verification Impossible (Fault at CPU side)

1: 12XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected Error Item

➁

[12H] Program Memory Verification Impossible (Fault at CPU side)

Cause for suspended verification
b1

b0

01H: CPU-to-CPU communication failure
02H: Check sum file copy failure

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 163
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[20H] Data Memory Verification Discrepancy

1: 20XX XX00 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀ ➁ ➂

➃

4: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected Error Item

➁

[20H] Data Memory Verification Discrepancy

Faulty HFD
b1

➂

Diagnosed Data Memory
b2

➃

b0

b1

b0

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/HFD 0
0/1 = -/HFD 1

b0:
b1:
b2:

0/1 = -/Data Memory (DM)
0/1 = -/Local Data Memory (LDM)
0/1 = -/Network Data Memory (NDM)

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

CHAPTER 3
Page 164
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[21H] Data Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)
DM

LDM

NDM

1: 21XX XX00 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂

➃➄ ➅➆

➃➄ ➅➆ ➃➄ ➅➆

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected Error Item
➁

[21H] Data Memory Verification Impossible (HFD Fault)

Faulty HFD
b1

➂

Diagnosed Data Memory
b2

➃
b7

➄
b7

b0

b1

b0

Error Type
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Signal Code
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➅

Data analyzed by NEC Engineers

➆

Error Drive
b3

b2

b1

b0

Note: When ➃ (Error Type) is 00H,

b0:
b1:

0/1 = -/HFD 0
0/1 = -/HFD 1

b0:
b1:
b2:

0/1 = -/Data Memory (DM)
0/1 = -/Local Data Memory (LDM)
0/1 = -/Network Data Memory (NDM)

00H:
01H:
02H:
03H:
04H:
05H:

HD Processing NG
HD Connection NG
HD Busy
HD Fault (Fault processing/No equipment etc.)
Transfer NG
Response Timeout

51H: Data Transfer starts
53H: File Transfer starts
55H: Data Load

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:

0/1 = -/Drive Number 0
0/1 = -/Drive Number 1
0/1 = -/Drive Number 2
0/1 = -/Drive Number 3

➄ Signal Code, ➅ and ➆ Error Drive are valid.
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 165
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[31H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (ISW)

1: 31XX XX00 XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂

➃➄

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Note: This data is output at the ISW

➀ Detected Error Item

[31H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (ISW)

➁ Active TSW

b0:

No.

0/1=TSW No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

b0

➂
b7

➃

FPC No. of ISW
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Number of MUX cards (ACT side)

b0-b7: Total number of MUX cards mounted in all LNs

Note

b7

➄
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Number of MUX cards (STBY
side) Note
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0-b7: Total number of MUX cards mounted in all LNs

b0

Note: This data is displayed when MUX failure occurs in LN side.

CHAPTER 3
Page 166
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[32H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (LN)

1: 32XX XX00 XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂

➃➄ ➅➆

➇➈ ➉

11

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

Note: This data is collected and output at the ISW.

➀ Detected Error Item

[32H] TSW ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (LN)

➁

b0:

Active TSW No.

0/1 = TSW No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

b0

➂

FPC No. of LN

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➃,➄, ➅, ➆

MUX card (ACT side)
linkage condition

b7

b6

b5

➃

Unit 3

➄

Unit 3

➅

Unit 3

➆

Unit 3

b4

b3

b2

MG1
Unit 2 Unit
MG3
Unit 2 Unit
MG5
Unit 2 Unit
MG7
Unit 2 Unit

b1

b0

As shown in the table below, each bit represents the Unit number allocated
for each MUX card position. When “1” is set, the corresponding MUX card
(status: ACT) has a functional failure.

1

Unit 0

Unit 3

1

Unit 0

Unit 3

1

Unit 0

Unit 3

1

Unit 0

Unit 3

MG0
Unit 2 Unit
MG2
Unit 2 Unit
MG4
Unit 2 Unit
MG6
Unit 2 Unit

NDA-24307

1

Unit 0

1

Unit 0

1

Unit 0

1

Unit 0

0: 1: MUX connection error
(functional fault/not mounted)

CHAPTER 3
Page 167
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➇, ➈, ➉,

11 MUX card (STBY side)
linkage condition

b7

b6

b5

➇

Unit 3

➈

Unit 3

➉

Unit 3

11

Unit 3

CHAPTER 3
Page 168
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

MG1
Unit 2 Unit
MG3
Unit 2 Unit
MG5
Unit 2 Unit
MG7
Unit 2 Unit

b1

b0

As shown in the table below, each bit represents the Unit number allocated
for each MUX card position. When “1” is set, the corresponding MUX card
(status: ACT) has a functional failure.

1

Unit 0

Unit 3

1

Unit 0

Unit 3

1

Unit 0

Unit 3

1

Unit 0

Unit 3

MG0
Unit 2 Unit
MG2
Unit 2 Unit
MG4
Unit 2 Unit
MG6
Unit 2 Unit

NDA-24307

1

Unit 0

1

Unit 0

1

Unit 0

1

Unit 0

0: 1: MUX connection error
(functional fault/not mounted)

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[41H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure

1: 41XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected Error Item

[41H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure

➁

b0:

ACT Status Information
b1

b0

b1:

CPU
0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/ No. 1 is ACT
TSW
0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/ No. 1 is ACT

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 169
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[42H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (DM Verification NG or PM Verification NG)

1: 42XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected Error Item

[42H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (DM or PM Verification NG)

➁ ACT Status Information

b0:

b1

CHAPTER 3
Page 170
Issue 1

b0

b1:

CPU
0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT
TSW
0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[43H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (PCI Fault)

1: 43XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected Error Item

[43H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (PCI Fault)

➁ ACT Status Information

b0:

b1

b0

b1:

CPU
0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT
TSW
0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 171
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[44H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure (Changeover NG or CPU RAM Copy NG)

1: 44XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Detected Error Item

[44H] CPU ACT/STBY Changeover Failure
Changeover NG or CPU RAM Copy NG)

➁

ACT Status Information

b0:

b1

CHAPTER 3
Page 172
Issue 1

b0

b1:

CPU
0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT
TSW
0/1 = No. 0 is ACT/No. 1 is ACT

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[50H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected

1: 50XX 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁

➂

➂

➂

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➂

➂

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected Error Item

➁

[50H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected

LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold
(MG, U)
b2

➂

b1

b0

b1
0
0
1
1
b2:

b0
0 = Unit 0
1 = Unit 1
0 = Unit 2
1 = Unit 3
0/1 = Even No./Odd No. Module

LENS of Ineffective Hold Trunk (G, LV)
Group No.
1: 500X 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
Group
Number

0

➀➁ ➂ ➃

➄➅ ➆➇ ➈➉

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
21 22

23 24

25 26

27 28

29 30

31

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 000

0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000


b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

G0
G1
G2
G3

b2

Level
b1
b0
0/1 = -/Ineffectively held

G30
G31
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 173
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[51H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released

1: 51XX 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁

➂

➂

➂

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➂
7:

0000

0000

➂

0000

0000

➀ Detected Error Item
➁

0000

0000

0000

0000

9:

0000

0000

0000

0000

[51H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected and Released

LENS of Trunk Ineffective Hold
Detected and Released (MG, U)
b2

➂

8:

b1

b0

b1
0
0
1
1
b2:

b0
0 = Unit 0
1 = Unit 1
0 = Unit 2
1 = Unit 3
0/1 = Even No./Odd No. Module

LENS of Ineffective Hold Trunk (G, LV)
Group No.
1: 500X 00XX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX
Group
Number

➀ ➀➁ ➂ ➃

➄➅ ➆➇ ➈➉

11 12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
21 22

23 24

25 26

27 28

31

29 30

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 000

0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000


b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

G0
G1
G2
G3

0/1 = -/Ineffectively held

G30
G31

CHAPTER 3
Page 174
Issue 1

b2

Level
b1
b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible

1: 5200 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Detected Error Item

[52H] Trunk Ineffective Hold Detected Impossible

➁ Cause for the Suspended Detection
b1

b0

b1
0
1
1

b0
1 = The CPU to detect is abnormal
0 = Data transfer error
1 = No Answer error

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 175
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG

1: 7000 0X00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Detected Error Item

➁

[70H] Call Forwarding Memory Clear NG

Cause for which the Transfer
Memory has been stopped
b1

CHAPTER 3
Page 176
Issue 1

b0

b1
0
1

b0
1 = CPU is abnormal
0 = Data Transfer error

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[A0H] Periodic Backup Abnormal End

1: A0XX XX00 XXXX XX00 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂

➃➄ ➅

➆➇

➈

➉

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6:

0000

0000

0000

0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9:

0000

0000

0000

0000

➀

Error detection by Routine
Diagnosis

[A0H] Periodic Backup Abnormal End

➁

Periodic Backup Abnormal End
Information

b0:
b1:

0/1 = HFD 0 Normal end/Abnormal end
0/1 = HFD 1 Normal end/Abnormal end

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:
b5:
b6:

0/1 = -/Individual Speed Calling Data
0/1 = -/Call Forwarding Data
0/1 = -/RCF
0/1 = -/Name Display Data
0/1 = -/User Assign Soft Key Data
0/1 = -/Number Sharing Data Note
0/1 = -/Call Block Data

b1

b0

➂ Backup Data to No. 0 system
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

➃ Error Code of No. 0 system
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b0

HD

b1

b0
Parameter

HD Fault

21H:
40H~47H:
53H:
57H:
59H~5BH:
80H~84H:
A0H:
A2H~A6H:
BDH:
C0H:
Failed installation
01H:
HD being used by another program
02H:
HD not equipped

Note: The Number Sharing data load also affects the data load of Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 177
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➄

Error Status of No. 0 System HD

b7

b3

b2

b1

b0

➅ Backup Data to No. 1 System
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

➆ Error Code of No. 1 System
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

➇ Error Status of No. 1
b7

b3

b2

Refer to No. ➂

b0

HD

b1

b1

Refer to No.➄

b0

➈

[Data analyzed by NEC Engineers]

➉

[Data analyzed by NEC Engineers]

CHAPTER 3
Page 178
Issue 1

Refer to No.➃

b0

System HD
b2

Error occurs;
b0: 0/1 = -/At the time data transfer started
b1: 0/1 = -/At the time data saved
b2: 0/1 = -/At the time data transfer ended
b3: 0/1 = -/At the time file transfer started

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End

1: C000 XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

➁

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Performed Diagnosis Item
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

[C0H] Detection of Remaining Link Abnormal End

b1

b0

➁ Error Data
b1

b0

b1
0
1
1

b0
1 = CPU is not normal
0 = Data transfer error
1 = No Answer error

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 179
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

PLO MB Key Turn ON
7-U

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO/CLK card is turned ON when extracting or inserting
a circuit card.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Switched PLO system

b0:

0/1 = PLO No. 0 system/PLO No. 1 system

b0

CHAPTER 3
Page 180
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

PLO MB Key Turn OFF
7-V

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the PLO/CLK card has been turned off when extracting or
inserting a circuit card.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Switched PLO System

b0:

0/1 = PLO No. 0 system/PLO No. 1 system

b0

➁
b7

Status of the PLO card at the time
of the fault detection (Scan Data 1)
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0:
0/1 = Clock STBY/ACT
b1:
0/1 = PLO Synchronizing/PLO self-running or drifting
b2:
0/1 = -/Input clock down
b3, b4: Route of Input clock (see table)
b5:
0/1 = -/PLO input all down
b4 b3

Connected With Primary
Oscillator (M-OSC)

Connected With
External Clock

0

0

No. 0 M-OSC

Route 0

0

1

No. 1 M-OSC

Route 1

1

0

-

Route 2

1

1

-

Route 3

b6:
b7:

0/1 = -/PLO output down Note
0/1 = -/Drifting

Note: This information includes the failure detected in PH-CK18 (CLK) card.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 181
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Status of the PLO card at the time
of the failure detection (Scan Data
2)
b4

CHAPTER 3
Page 182
Issue 1

b1

b0:
b1:
b4:

0/1 = -/n × 5msec clock down
0/1 = -/Frame Synchronization down from SYNC card
0/1 = -/Internal OSC clock down

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH Clock Failure
13-A

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a clock down failure occurs in the CCH/DCH circuit card. When this message is
indicated, the related CCH/DCH card is placed into make-busy status.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

card
b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 183
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)
13-B

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when C-level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 184
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

card
b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH C-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)
13-C

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when C-level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

card
b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 185
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH Lock-Up Failure (Permanent)
13-D

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a Port Microprocessor (PM) of the CCH/DCH card did not send an answer to the
CPU.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 186
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

card
b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH Lock-Up Failure (Temporary)
13-E

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a Port Microprocessor (PM) of the CCH/DCH card did not send an answer to the
CPU.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

card
b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 187
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Permanent)
13-F

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when B-level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 188
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

card
b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH B-Level Infinite Loop Failure (Temporary)
13-G

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when B-level infinite loop of the Port Microprocessor (PM) in the CCH/DCH circuit
card has occurred.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

card
b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 189
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCS Link Failure (Permanent)
13-H

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a failure has occurred numerous times to a common channel signaling link and
the link has been placed into make-busy state.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of Faulty CCH/DCH Card
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

➁ Data to be Analyzed by

NEC

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

Engineers
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 190
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Probable cause for the failure
b3

b2

b1

b0-b3: See Table:

b0
FLT ID

CCITT
ERROR

00

A

S (F = 1) frame is received.

01

B

DM (F = 1) response is received.

02

C

UA (F = 1) response is received.

03

D

UA (F = 0) response is received.

04

E

DM (F = 0) response is received.

05

F

SABME command is received.

06

G

N200 Timeout (Link is set)

07

H

N200 Timeout (Link is
disconnected)

08

I

N200 Timeout (Link failure is
restored to normal)

09

J

N (R) frame error is received.

0A

K

FRMR frame is received (Link is
re-setup).

0B

L

Undefined frame is received.

0C

M

0D

N

Improper long frame is received.

0E

O

I frame with I field which exceeds
N201 is received.

0F

-

-

10

-

Layer 1 down (for ILC)

40

-

FRMR frame is received. (Link is
not re-setup)

NDA-24307

FACTOR

-

CHAPTER 3
Page 191
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCS Link Failure (Temporary)
13-I

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a failure has occurred numerous times to a common channel signaling link and
the link has been placed into make-busy state. When this fault lasts over three minutes, the system message
changes to [13-H] CCS Link Failure (Permanent).

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

card
b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

➁ Data to be Analyzed by NEC Engineers
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 192
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Probable cause for the failure
b3

b2

b1

b0-b3: See Table.

b0
FLT ID

CCITT
ERROR

00

A

S (F = 1) frame is received.

01

B

DM (F = 1) response is received.

02

C

UA (F = 1) response is received.

03

D

UA (F = 0) response is received.

04

E

DM (F = 0) response is received.

05

F

SABME command is received.

06

G

N200 Timeout (Link is set)

07

H

N200 Timeout (Link is disconnected)

08

I

N200 Timeout (Link failure is restored
to normal)

09

J

N (R) frame error is received.

0A

K

FRMR frame is received (Link is
re-setup).

0B

L

Undefined frame is received.

0C

M

-

0D

N

Improper long frame is received.

0E

O

I frame with I field which exceeds
N201 is received.

0F

-

-

10

-

Layer 1 down (for ILC)

40

-

FRMR frame is received. (Link is not
re-setup)

NDA-24307

FACTOR

CHAPTER 3
Page 193
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Restoration From CCS Link Failure
13-J

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the faults pertaining to CCIS/ISDN Link are restored to normal.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

➁ Data to be Analyzed by
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 194
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

card
b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NEC Engineers
b1

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH Reset Interrupt Failure
13-K

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a fault occurred to the Port Microprocessor (PM) within the CCH/DCH circuit
card and the restart processing is executed .

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of faulty CCH/DCH
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

card
b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 195
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Digital Line Warning
13-N

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a digital line failure occurs on the DAI circuit card.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ DAI Card Mounting Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ Kind of Fault
b4

CHAPTER 3
Page 196
Issue 1

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0-b4: Kind of Fault (HEX)
00 = 01 = Frame alignment loss PCM down
02 = Bit error rate is over 10 -6
03 = Slip is detected
04 = 05 = Dch down
06 = Multi-frame alignment loss
07 = 10 = 11 = Frame alignment loss PCM down (frequently)
12 = Bit error rate is over 10 -4
13 = Slip is detected (frequently)
14 = Opposite office alarm is detected
15 = 16 = Multi-frame alignment loss (frequently)
17 = Frame alignment loss PCM down (continuously)
18 = Multi-frame alignment loss (continuously)

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Digital Line Failure
13-O

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a digital line failure occurs in succession on the DAI circuit card.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ DAI Card Mounting Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ Kind of Fault
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0-b4: Kind of Fault (HEX)
00 = 01 = Frame alignment loss PCM down
02 = Bit error rate is over 10 -4
03 = Slip is detected
04 = Opposite office alarm (AIS) is detected
05 = 06 = Multi-frame alignment loss
07 = Frame alignment loss PCM down (continuously)
08 = Multi-frame alignment loss (continuously)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 197
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Digital Line Restore
13-P

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a digital line failure is restored to normal.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ DAI Card Mounting Location
b7

➁

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Kind of Fault
b4

CHAPTER 3
Page 198
Issue 1

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0-b4: Kind of Fault (HEX)
00 = 01 = Frame alignment loss PCM down
02 = Bit error rate is over 10-4
03 = 04 = Opposite office alarm (AIS) is detected
05 = Dch restores to normal
06 = Multi-frame alignment loss

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

DAU Battery Operation
13-Q

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the battery is operated in the due to the Digital Access Unit (DAU) power down.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ DAI Card Mounting Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 199
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

DAU Line Operation
13-R

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the main power of the Digital Access Unit (DAU) system is restored to normal ,
ending the temporary power acceptance from the battery observed in the message [13-Q] DAU
Battery Operation.”

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ DAI Card Mounting Location
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 200
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Power Failure
13-Z

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a PWR circuit card failure is detected.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Power Circuit Card Location
b2

b1

b0

➁ Fault Information
b4

b3

b2

b1

➂ Power Card Classification

b0, b1: Unit No. (0-3)
b2:
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:

0/1 = -/-5V Power Failure
0/1 = -/+12V Power Failure
0/1 = -/+5V Power Failure
0/1 = -/-48V Power Failure

b0:

0/1 = Group 24 (0 side) / Group 25 (1 side)

b0

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 201
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

VPS Failure (Temporary)
15-A

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a VPS failure is detected.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Probable cause for the failure
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ LENS of VPS
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➂ LENS of VPS
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b7: 0 = 1 = Sector error
FF = Other than above

b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group

b0, b1: Unit
b2-b7: Module Group

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 202
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

VPS Failure (Permanent)
15-B

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a VPS failure is detected.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Probable cause for the failure
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ LENS of VPS
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➂ LENS of VPS
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b7: 0 = 01H = Sector error
FF = Other than above

b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group

b0, b1: Unit
b2-b7: Module Group

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 203
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

VPS Restore
15-C

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a VPS failure, observed in the message [15-B], is restored to normal.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ LENS of VPS
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ LENS of VPS
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 204
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group

b0, b1: Unit
b2-b7: Module Group

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Inside Trunk All Busy
16-A

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when Intra-Office Trunks (ATI, RST, etc.) have all become busy.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Details on

Trunk name and its
Route number

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

See table on the following page

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 205
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

ROUTE
NO.

DATA
(HEX.)

TRUNK NAME

ROUTE
NO.

DATA
(HEX.)

TRUNK NAME

901

01

Attendant Console

917

11

MFC Sender

902

02

Originating Register Trunk

918

12

Not used

903

03

Incoming Register Trunk

919

13

MODEM

904

04

MF Receiver

920

14

MODEM

905

05

Sender Trunk DP/PB

921

15

MODEM

906

06

PB Receiver for Automated
Attendant Service

922

16

MODEM

907

07

AMP

923

17

MODEM

908

08

Not used

924

18

MODEM

909

09

Three-Way Conference Trunk

925

19

MODEM

910

0A

Not used

926

1A

MODEM

911

0B

Not used

927

1B

Not used

912

0C

Originating Register Trunk for
ATTCON/DESKCON

928

1C

Not used

913

0D

Three-Way Conference Trunk for
ATTCON/DESKCON

929

1D

Data Signaling Trunk-Option

914

0E

Not used

930

1E

Rate Adaptation Conversion Trunk

915

0F

Night ATTCON/DESKCON

931

1F

Not used

916

10

MFC Register

CHAPTER 3
Page 206
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Virtual Tie Line Set Report
16-B

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when Virtual Tie Line setup has completed.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Counter
b7

b6

b5

b0:

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

b0,b1: Unit No.
b2:
Module Group No.

Location
b2

b1

b0

➂ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group No.

Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

00=01=Re-setup

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 207
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Virtual Tie Line Cancel Report
16-C

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when Virtual Tie Line Cancel has completed.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Counter

b0:

0/1=-/Re-setup

b0

➁ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

b0,b1: Unit No.
b2:
Module Group No.

Location
b2

b1

b0

➂ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group No.

Location
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 208
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Virtual Tie Line Set Time Out
16-E

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when Virtual Tie Line Setup has failed due to a fault in the network of the terminating
office concerned.

1: 00XX XX8X XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Virtual Tie Line Call Header
Location
b2

➁
b7

b1

b0,b1: Unit No.
b2:
Module Group No.

b0

Virtual Tie Line Call Header
Location
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group No.

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 209
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Virtual Tie Line Call Header

b0-b3: Call Source

Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

DATA

b0

CALL SOURCE

0

User

1

Private network to which the user is directly connected.
(Self side)

2

National network to which the user is directly connected.
(Self side)

3

Tie-Line Network

4

National network to which the opposite party is directly
connected. (Opposite party’s side)

5

Private network to which the opposite party is directly
connected. (Opposite party’s side)

7

International Network

A

Network from Interworking

Other

Spare

b4-b7: “8” is always indicated.

➃ Fault Cause
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

Class
X

Reason Kind
Value
X

8765

4321(bit)

-000
xxxx
-001
Normal Event Class

CHAPTER 3
Page 210
Issue 1

b0-b3: Reason Kind
b4-b6: Class
0=No Answer
Other than 0=Refer to the following table

b0

CLASS

REASON
KIND
VALUE

DATA

REASON KIND

000
000
000
000
000
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001
001

0001
0010
0011
0110
0111
0000
0001
0010
0011
0101
0110
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111

1
2
3
6
7
16
17
18
19
21
22
26
27
28
29
30
31

Dead Number
No route to the designated transit network
No route to the opposite Party
Use of channel not allowed
Call terminated to a setup channel
Normal disconnection
Called user busy
No response from called user
Called party being rung/no answer
Communication denied
Opposite party’s terminal number changed
Disconnection and release of the user not selected
Opposite party’s terminal out of order
Invalid number format (Incomplete Number)
Facility denied
Answer to status inquiry
Other normal class

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

010 xxxx
Classes not allowed use of resources

Class
X

Reason Kind
Value
X

8765
4321(bit)
011
xxxx
Classes not allowed use of services

100 xxxx
Classes not provided with services

101 xxxx

Invalid message class

110 xxxx
Procedure error (ex: unrecognized
message) class

111 xxxx
Interworking class

CLASS

REASON
KIND
VALUE

DATA

010
010
010
010
010
010
010

0010
0110
1001
1010
1011
1100
1111

34
38
41
42
43
44
47

No usable channel/line
Network failure
Temporary failure
Switching system congested
Access information discarded
Use of requested line/channel not allowed
Class not allowed use of other resources

011
011
011
011
011

0001
0010
1001
1010
1111

49
50
57
58
63

Use of QOS not allowed
Requested facility not contracted
Bearer capability not allowed
Bearer capability not allowed at present
Class not allowed to use other services or options

100
100
100
100
100

0001
0010
0101
0110
1111

65
66
69
70
79

Unprovided bearer capability designated
Unprovided channel kind designated
Unprovided facility requested
Restricted digital information bearer capability
Class unprovided with other services or options

001
101
101
101
101
101
101
101
101

0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
1000
1011
1111

81
82
83
84
85
86
88
91
95

Invalid call number used
Invalid channel number used
Designated transit call ID number unused
Transit call ID number being used
No transit call
Designated transit call disconnected and released
Terminal attributes unmatch
Invalid transit network selected
Other invalid message class

110
110
110

0000
0001
0010

96
97
98

110
110
110
110
110

0011
0100
0101
0110
1111

99
100
101
102
111

Mandatory information elements inadequate
Message kind undefined or unprovided
Call status and message unmatching or message
kind undefined
Information element undefined
Content of information element invalid
Call status and message unmatching
Recovery due to timer over
Class of other procedure errors

111

111

127

Other interworking class

Others

REASON KIND

Reserved

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 211
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Sender Start Time Out
16-F

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message indicates that an outgoing call (by connection acknowledge system) has not received an
acknowledgment signal from the opposite office. As a result, the attempted outgoing call is routed to Reorder
Tone (ROT) connection.

1: XXXX XXXX XX0X XX0X 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁ ➂➃ ➄➅ ➆➇

➈

➉

11

12

12

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

In Case of Station OG/ATT OG/ATT Tandem Connection

➀ Type of connection and

station

number digits
b7

b6

b2

➁ ~ ➃ Calling station

b1

b0

b0-b2: Digits of station number (origination)
b6-b7:
0 0 = Station OG connection
0 1 = ATT OG connection
1 1 = ATT Tandem connection

number

(See table)
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 212
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁
➂
➃

NDA-24307

b4-b7

b0-b3

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➄ Tenant No. of calling station (Hex.)
b7

b6

b2

b1

b7:

b0

OP data (0/1)
When OPTN data of ➅ is valid, “1” displays.

b0-b3: Tenant No. of calling station
• bit7=0 → Tenant No. ≤ 15
• bit7=1 → 15 < Tenant No.≤ 255

➅ OPTN data

Refer to the OPTN
data of ➅

b0-b3: OPTN data Note

b3

b2

b1

b0

Note: This data displays when the Tenant No. of the calling station is larger than 15, and bit7 of ➄ displays

as “1” (otherwise, “0” displays at any time). While the four-bit data of ➄ is self-sufficient in verifying
the Tenant No. “1-15,” this OPTN data provides a supportive role to cover the larger Tenant No.
ranging from 16 to 255. Use the following method to analyze the data:
Tenant No. of Calling Station (1-15)

=

0

0

0

OPTN data (0: fixed)

Tenant No. of Calling Station (16-255)

=

OPTN data
OPTN data (variable)

➆ OG
b7

route number (Hex.)

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

0

Tenant No.
bit 0 - bit 3 of ➄

Tenant No.
bit 0 - bit 3 of ➄

b7:

b1

b0

AC data
0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk
b6:
OP data (0/1)
When OPRT data of ➇ is valid, “1” displays,
b0-b5: OG route number
• bit 6=0 → Route No. ≤ 64
Refer to the OPTN
• bit 6=1 → 63 < Route No.
data of ➇

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 213
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➇ OPRT data

b0-b3: OPRT data Note

b3

b2

b1

b0

Note: This data displays when the OG Route No. is larger than 63, and bit6 of ➆ displays as “1” (otherwise,

“0” displays at any time). While the six-bit data of ➆ is self-sufficient in verifying the Route No. “163,” this OPRT data provides a supportive role to cover the Route No., which is larger than 63. Use the
following method to analyze the data:
OG Route No. (1-63)

=

0

0

0

OPTN data (0:fixed)

OG Route No. (64 or larger)

=

OPTN data
OPTN data (variable)

➈ Trunk
b7

b6

➉ Trunk
b7

11

b6

No. of OG trunk
b5

b4

b3

b2

b4

b3

b2

b1

CHAPTER 3
Page 214
Issue 1

b3

b2

bit0 - bit5 of ➆

OG Route No.
bit0 - bit5 of ➆

b0

b0-b7: Trunk No. of the sender

b1

b0

Number of digits dialed by the
caller
b4

OG Route No.

b0-b7: Trunk No. of OG trunk

No. of the sender
b5

0

b1

b0-b4: Number of digits dialed by the caller

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES
12

Number dialed by the caller (See
table)

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b4-b7

b0-b3

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

DC6

DC7

DC8

DC9

DC10

DC11

DC12

DC13

DC14

DC15

DC16

DC17

DC18

DC19

DC20

DC21

b0

In Case of Tandem Connection

➀ Type of connection
b7

➁ IC
b7

b7
1

b6

route number (Hex.)
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b6
0 = Tandem connection

b7:

b1

b0

AC data
0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk
b6:
OP data (0/1)
When OPRT data of ➂ is valid, “1” displays.
b0-b5: IC route number
• bit 6=0 → Route No. ≤ 64
Refer to the OPTN
• bit 6=1 → < 63 Route No.
data of ➂

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 215
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ OPRT data

b0-b3: OPRT data Note

b3

b2

b1

b0

Note: This data displays when the IC Route No. is larger than 63, and bit6 of ➁ displays as “1” (otherwise,

“1” displays at any time). While the six-bit data of ➁ is self-sufficient in verifying the Route No. “163,” this OPRT data provides a supportive role to cover the Route No., which is larger than 63. Use the
following method to analyze the data:
IC Route No. (1-63)

=

0

0

0

OPRT data (0:fixed)

IC Route No. (64 or larger)

=

OPRT data
OPRT data (variable)

➃ ~ ➄
b7

b6

Trunk No. of IC trunk
b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

0

IC Route No.
bit0 - bit5 of

➁

IC Route No.
bit0 - bit5 of

➁

b0-b7: Trunk No. of IC trunk

b0

➅ Not used
➆ OG
b7

route number (Hex.)

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 216
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b7:

b1

b0

AC data
0/1=Internal trunk/External trunk
b6:
OP data (0/1)
When OPRT data of ➇ is valid, “1” displays,
b0-b5: OG route number
• bit 6=0 → Route No. ≤ 64
Refer to the OPTN
• bit 6=1 → < 63 Route No.
data of ➇

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➇ OPRT data

b0-b3: OPRT data Note

b3

b2

b1

b0

Note: This data displays when the OG Route No. is larger than 63, and bit6 of ➆ displays as “1” (otherwise,

“0” is displays at any time). While the six bit data of ➆ is self-sufficient in verifying the Route No. “163,” this OPRT data provides a supportive role to cover the Route No., which is larger than 63. Use the
following method to analyze the data:
OG Route No. (1-63)

=

0

0

0

0

OPRT data (0: fixed)

OG Route No. (64 or larger)

=

OPRT data
OPRT data (variable)

➈ Trunk
b7

➉

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b3

b2

b1

OG Route No.
bit 0 - bit 5 of ➆

b0-b7:

Trunk No. of OG trunk

b0-b7:

Trunk No. of the sender

b0-b4:

Number of digits dialed by the caller

b0

Number of digits dialed by the
caller
b4

bit 0 - bit 5 of ➆

b0

Trunk No. of the sender

b7

11

b6

No. of OG trunk

OG Route No.

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 217
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES
12

b7

Number dialed by the caller (See
table)
b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 218
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b4-b7

b0-b3

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

DC6

DC7

DC8

DC9

DC10

DC11

DC12

DC13

DC14

DC15

DC16

DC17

DC18

DC19

DC20

DC21

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

I/O Port Line OFF
16-K

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the DR signal of the RS-232C, connected to the port designated by the system
data, remains OFF for 30 consecutive seconds while the system is in service (immediately after startup in the
case of system start-up).

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty Port No.
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

0/1 = -/Link Down
b0:
Port 0
b1:
Port 1
IOC0
b2:
Port 2
b3:
Port 3

NDA-24307

b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7

IOC1

CHAPTER 3
Page 219
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

I/O Port Line Restore
16-L

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when [16-K] I/O Port Line Down Failure is restored to normal.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Faulty Port No.
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 220
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

0/1 = -/Link Down
b0:
Port 0
b1:
Port 1
IOC0
b2:
Port 2
b3:
Port 3

NDA-24307

b4:
b5:
b6:
b7:

Port 4
Port 5
Port 6
Port 7

IOC1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Hard Clock Failure
16-M

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the timer circuit on the EMA card becomes faulty and stops functioning and 64Hz clock alarm is output.

1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Message Detail Data
This system message is always indicated as 0000.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 221
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Hard Clock Restore
16-N

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when [16-M] Hard Clock Failure is restored to normal.

1: 0000 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Message Detail Data
This system message is always indicated as 0000.

CHAPTER 3
Page 222
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

IOC Failure (Temporary)
16-T

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the IOC card fails.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ IOC circuit card No.

b0:

0/1 = No. 0/No. 1

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:

0/1 = -/COP Alarm
0/1 = -/CLK Alarm
0/1 = -/MEM bus CLK Alarm
0/1 = -/Abnormal Interruption
0/1 = -/Infinite Loop Detected

b0

➁ Cause for the fault
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 223
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

IOC Failure (Permanent)
16-U

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the IOC card failure, observed in the message [16-T], is detected more than eight
times a day.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ IOC circuit card No.

b0:

0/1 = No. 0/No. 1

b0:
b1:
b2:
b3:
b4:

0/1 = -/COP Alarm
0/1 = -/CLK Alarm
0/1 = -/MEM bus CLK Alarm
0/1 = -/Abnormal Interruption
0/1 = -/Infinite Loop

b0

➁

Cause for the fault
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 224
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Station Exchanged Report
16-X

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the user uses Follow Phone (SWAP) service.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XX00 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX 00XX 3: XXXX 0000 0000 0000

➀➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅ ➆

➇ ➈ ➉ 11

12 13

14

14

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Error code
b7

b6

b5

b0-b7: See table

b4

b3

b2

ERROR
CODE (HEX)

b1

b0

ERROR
CODE (HEX)

FAILURE

FAILURE

00

Normal End

16

Called station is busy

01

MG unmatch

17

MW has been set to Calling or Called
station

02

Called party is not the station

18

Call Back/OG queuing has been set to
Calling or Called station

03

TEC of Calling or Called station is abnormal

19

Call Forwarding - All Calls has been set to
Calling or Called station

04

TEC unmatch

20

Call Forwarding - Busy Line has been set to
Calling or Called station

05

Hunting group unmatch

21

Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer has been
set to Calling or Called station

06

Call Pick Up group unmatch

22-31

-

07

Calling or Called station is Night station

32

Under processing of Data Memory Back
Up

08

Call Pick Up Expand group unmatch

33

• Collision of swap service
• Under swapping of One Touch Memory
• Memory overflow (Max. 4 stations)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 225
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES
ERROR
CODE (HEX)

FAILURE

ERROR
CODE (HEX)

09

-

34

Data Memory read error

35

Data Memory swap failure

36

OAI Terminal Information swap failure
(CM Data)

37

OAI Terminal Information swap failure
(LP Data)

38

SST Time out

Calling or Called Dterm has Data Line

10

Dterm

11

Calling or Called
key

12

Calling or Called station is Agent/
Supervisor (ACD)

13-15

-

➁ Tenant No.
b7

b6

has OAI function

b5

of the calling station
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➂ Accommodated location of the
calling station after Follow Phone
service
b7

➃

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 226
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group (0-22)

b0

Accommodated location of the
calling station after Follow Phone
service
b6

b0-b3: Tenant No. (1-15)
b0-b7: Tenant No. (over 15)

b0, b1: Unit No. (0-3)
b2-b7: MG No.

b0

NDA-24307

FAILURE

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➄ ~ ➆ Station No. of the calling
station
b7

b6

b5

➇ Tenant No.
b7

➈

b6

b3

b2

b1

b0

of the called station
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Accommodated location of the
called station

b7

➉

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b6

~

11

b7

13

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

➄
➅
➆

b4-b7

b0-b3

DC0

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

DC5

b0-b3: Tenant No. (1-15)
b0-b7: Tenant No. (over 15)

b0-b2: Level
b3-b7: Group

b0

Accommodated location of the
called station

b7

14

b5

b4

b0, b1: Unit No. (0-3)
b2-b7: MG No.

b0

Station No. of the called
station
b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b4-b7

b0-b3

11

DC0

DC1

12

DC2

DC3

13

DC4

DC5

Data Analyzed by NEC Engineers

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 227
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH MBR Key Turn ON
17-A

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH/DCH card has turned ON.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ CCH/DCH Card

Mounting

Location
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ CKT No.

b0, b1: CKT No. (0-3)

b1

CHAPTER 3
Page 228
Issue 1

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH MBR Key Turn OFF
17-B

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MBR switch on the CCH/DCH card has turned OFF.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b7

CCH/DCH Card Mounting
Location
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ CKT No.

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0, b1: CKT No. (0-3)

b1

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 229
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH MB Key Turn ON
17-C

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH/DCH card has turned ON when extracting or inserting
a circuit card or at PM initialization, etc.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ CCH/DCH Card

Mounting

Location
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 230
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

CCH MB Key Turn OFF
17-D

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the CCH/DCH card has turned OFF when extracting or
inserting a circuit card or at PM initialization, etc.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
b7

CCH/DCH Card Mounting
Location
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 231
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Day/Night Change Information
17-H

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the NIGHT switch on the ATTCON/DESKCON has been operated or when the
DAY/NIGHT change has been executed by the external switch operation.

1: XXXX XXXX 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Tenant No.
b7

➁
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Changing Method
b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 232
Issue 1

b4

b3

b0-b3: Tenant No. (1-15)
b4-b7: Tenant No. (over 15)

b0-b7:

b2

b1

b0

1=Night Key on the ATTCON/DESKCON
2=External Key

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂ Day/Night Mode Specification
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b3: Mode after changing (Refer to table below)
b4-b7: Mode before changing (Refer to table below)
b0 b1 b2 b3
MEANING
b4 b5 b6 b7

0

0

0

0

Day Mode

0

0

0

1

Night Mode 1

0

0

1

0

Night Mode 2 (available only for Japan)

0

0

1

1

Night Mode 3 (DIT-Night Connection Fixed)
Note

Note: This data is programmed as initial data.

➃ External Switch Status
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b0-b7:

b1

b0

01=Not used
02=Day/Night Change
03=Not used

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 233
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

IOC MB Key Turn ON
17-O

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the IOC card has turned ON when extracting or inserting a
circuit card.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

Circuit Card No.

b0:

0/1 = IOC 0/IOC 1

b0

CHAPTER 3
Page 234
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

IOC MB Key Turn OFF
17-P

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MB switch on the IOC card has turned OFF.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Circuit Card No.

b0:

0/1 = IOC 0/IOC 1

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 235
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

IOC MBR Key Turn ON
17-Q

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MBR switch on the IOC card has turned ON at the time of CPU changeover
or speech path changeover.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Circuit Card No.

b0:

0/1 = IOC 0/IOC 1

b0

CHAPTER 3
Page 236
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

IOC MBR Key Turn OFF
17-R

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MBR switch on the IOC card has turned OFF at the time of CPU changeover
or speech path changeover.

1: XX00 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Circuit Card No.

b0:

0/1 = IOC 0/IOC 1

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 237
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

GATE-HSW MBR Key ON
17-Y

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MBR switch on the IOGT (PH-GT10) card in ISW is turned ON.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ IOGT card system

status

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7:

0/1 = Normal/MB Note 1

b0

➁ IOGT card system status after key
operation
b7

Note 1: If the MBR key on the active IOGT card is flipped, the ACT/STBY of Speech Path Systems within the

whole system is totally changed over. For more details, refer to Chapter 6, Chapter 12.
Note 2: “1” is always displayed in the bit data.

CHAPTER 3
Page 238
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

GATE-HSW MBR Key OFF
17-Z

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MBR switch on the IOGT (PH-GT10) card in ISW is turned OFF.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ IOGT card system

status

b0:

0/1 = No. 0 system/No. 1 system

b7:

0/1 = Normal/MB Note

b0

➁ IOGT card system status after key
operation
b7

Note: If failure occurs on the HSW card side, the IOGT card is placed in Make-Busy state and “1” is

displayed in the bit. Otherwise, “0” is displayed.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 239
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Dch Back-Up Automatic Change Start/End
23-P

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the Primary Dch fails, Dch Back-Up function is operated automatically.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Condition of the Dch
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b0-b7:

b2

b1

b0

➁ Location of the Dch (Primary)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

➂ Location of the Dch (Back-up)
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 240
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

1 = Back-up Start
2 = Back-up End
3 = Back-up Failed

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃

Changeover Information
b3

b2

b0, b1:

b1

00 = Change from Primary Dch to Dch for Back-up
01 = Change from Dch for Back-up to Primary Dch
10 = Place Primary Dch to ACT status
11 = Place Dch for Back-up to ACT status

b0

b2, b3:
00 = Change signal is received
01 = Change signal is sent

➄ Status of the Primary/Back-up Dch
b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➅ EVENT No.
b7

b6

b5

b0-b2: Status of Primary Dch
0 = In service (ACT status)
1 = STBY
2 = Out of Service
3 = Make Busy
4 = Changing the status from STBY to In Service
5 = Manual Changeover out of service
b3-b5: Status of Primary Dch
0 = In service (ACT status)
1 = STBY
2 = Out of Service
3 = Make Busy
4 = Changing the status from STBY to In Service
5 = Manual Changeover out of service
b0-b7: EVENT No.

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 241
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Dch Back-Up Manual Change Start/End
23-Q

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the Primary Dch fails, and the Dch Back-Up function is operated manually.

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂ ➃ ➄ ➅
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Condition of the Dch
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b0-b7:

b2

b1

b0

➁ Location of the Dch (Primary)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

b0

b0-b4: Group No.
b5, b6: Unit No. (0-3)
b7:
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

➂ Location of the Dch (Back-up)
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 242
Issue 1

b4

b3

b2

b1

1 = Back-up Start
2 = Back-up End
3 = Back-up Failed

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➃ Detailed

information on changing

Dch
b3

b2

b1

b0

b0, b1:
00 = Change from Primary Dch to Dch for Back-up
01 = Change from the Dch for Back-up to Primary Dch
10 = Primary Dch Changeover to ACT status
11 = Back-up Dch Changeover to ACT status
b2, b3: The way of changing
00 = Changed by the MAT
01 = Changed by the MB switch of the circuit card
02 = Changed by placing Dch to Make-Busy
03 = Unknown

➄ Status of the Primary/Back-up Dch
b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➅ EVENT No.
b7

b6

b5

b0-b2: Status of Primary Dch
0 = In service (ACT status)
1 = STBY
2 = Out of Service
3 = Make Busy
4 = Changing the status from STBY to In Service
5 = Manual Changeover out of service
b3-b5: Status of Back-up Dch
0 = In service (ACT status)
1 = STBY
2 = Out of Service
3 = Make Busy
4 = Changing the status from STBY to In Service
5 = Manual Changeover out of service

b0-b7: EVENT No.

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 243
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

MUX Clock Failure
23-Y

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card has a clock failure in one of the dual systems.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ MUX

Card Location and System

Status
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

➁ Scan Data
b3

b2

b1

b0-b1: Unit number
b2:
MG number
b3:
0/1 = MUX No. 0 system/MUX No. 1 system
b4:
0/1 = ACT/STBY

Scan Data:Clock alarm information on the faulty MUX card
b1:
0/1 = -/FH failure for 2M PCM Highway
b2:
0/1 = -/CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway
b3:
0/1 = -/4M CLK failure for PM

See Chapter 5 for repair procedure.

CHAPTER 3
Page 244
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Both MUX Clock Failure
23-Z

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card has a clock failure in both of the dual systems.

1: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ MUX

Card Location
b2

b1

➁ Scan Data 1
b3

b2

b1

Scan Data 1:Details on clock alarm information (ACT side)
b1:
0/1 = -/FH failure for 2M PCM Highway
b2:
0/1 = -/CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway
b3:
0/1 = -/4M CLK failure for PM

b1

Scan Data 2:Details on clock alarm information (STBY side)
b1:
0/1 = -/FH failure for 2M PCM Highway
b2:
0/1 = -/CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway
b3:
0/1 = -/4M CLK failure for PM

➂ Scan Data 2
b3

b2

b0

b0-b1: Unit No.
b2:
MG No.

See Chapter 4 for the Circuit Card Replacement Procedure.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 245
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

MAT Log
26-N

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
0

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MAT is log-in or log-out.

1: XX00 XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀

➁➁ ➁➁ ➁➁

➂➂ ➂➂ ➂➂ ➂➂

➂➂ ➂➂ ➂➂ ➂➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ I/O Port No. and MAT Status
b7

b6

b5

b4

b2

b1

b0

➁ Command Name
b7

b6

b5

b4

b0-b7: Command name

b3

b2

b1

b0

➂ User Name
b7

b6

b5

CHAPTER 3
Page 246
Issue 1

b0-b2: I/O Port No.
000 = Port 0 001 = Port 1
010 = Port 2 011 = Port 3
100 = Port 4 101 = Port 5
110 = Port 6 111 = Port 7
b4-b7: 0000 = Login
0001 = Logout
0010 = Command is startup
0011 = Command exit

b0-b7: MAT user name

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Call Trace
26-R

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This massage is issued when a call, originated via a station/trunk, is judged as malicious, and then, the details
on the call is traced with the called party pressing an access code or the “Call Trace” key.
[When a call is originated from a station]

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➁

➀

➂

➃

➄

➅

➆

➇

➈

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX XX00 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➉

11

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

•

1

Information on Called Party (Informer)
Fusion Point Code (FPC) (Hex.)
b7

2

b3

b6

b5

b2

b1

b0

b2

b1

b0

b6

b5

b6

b5

b4

b3

b4

b4

b3

b3

Telephone No. (Hex.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

1

Note

b2

b3

b2

2

Note
b1

User Group No. (UGN) (Hex.)
b7

5

b4

Physical Station No. (Hex.)
b7

4

b5

Tenant No. (Hex.)
b7

3

b6

Note

b0

3

Note

b1

b0

4

Note

b2

b1

b0

5

NDA-24307

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2

dc1
dc3

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2

dc1
dc3

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2
dc4

dc1
dc3
dc5

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2

dc1
dc3

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2
dc4
dc6

dc1
dc3
dc5
dc7

dc8
dc10
dc12
dc14

dc9
dc11
dc13
dc15
CHAPTER 3
Page 247
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

•

6

Information on Malicious call
Kind of Call (Hex.)
b7

7

b2

b1

b6

b5

b4

b3

b6

b5

b2

b0

b6

b5

b6

b5

b6

b5

b0

7

Note

b4

b3

b4

b3

b4

b3

Telephone No. (Hex.)
b7

Note

b1

b2

b2

b1

b4

b2

b0

8

Note
b1

User Group No. (UGN) (Hex.)
b7

11

b3

Physical Station No. (Hex.)
b7

10

b4

Tenant No. (Hex.)
b7

9

b5

Fusion Point Code (FPC) (Hex.)
b7

8

b6

10H=Call from a station

Note

b0

9

Note
b1

b0

10

Note
b3

b2

b1

b0

11

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2

dc1
dc3

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2

dc1
dc3

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2
dc4

dc1
dc3
dc5

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2

dc1
dc3

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2
dc4
dc6

dc1
dc3
dc5
dc7

dc8
dc10
dc12
dc14

dc9
dc11
dc13
dc15

Note: Each No./code is output in hexadecimal. Detailed meanings are as follows:

Output Data (Hex.)

CHAPTER 3
Page 248
Issue 1

Actual Meaning

1~9

→

1~9

A

→

0

B

→

*

C

→

#

0

→

blank

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When a call is originated from a trunk

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➁

➀

➂

➃

➄

➅

4: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 5: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➆
7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

•

1

Information on Called Party (Informer)
Fusion Point Code (FPC) (Hex.)
b7

2

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b6

b5

b4

b1

b6

b5

b4

b3

b3

b3

Telephone No. (Hex.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b0

1

Note
b2

b2

b1

b2

b0

2

Note
b1

User Group No. (UGN) (Hex.)
b7

5

b4

Physical Station No. (Hex.)
b7

4

b5

Tenant No. (Hex.)
b7

3

b6

Note

b0

3

Note
b1

b0

b1

b0

4

Note
b3

b2

5

NDA-24307

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2

dc1
dc3

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2

dc1
dc3

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2
dc4

dc1
dc3
dc5

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2

dc1
dc3

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2
dc4
dc6
dc8
dc10
dc12
dc14

dc1
dc3
dc5
dc7
dc9
dc11
dc13
dc15

CHAPTER 3
Page 249
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

•

6

Information on Malicious Call
Kind of Call (Hex.)
b7

7

b6

b5

20H=Call from a trunk

Note

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

Calling No. of Trunk Call (Caller ID) (Hex.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

Note, Note 1

7

b0

Note: Each No./code is output in hexadecimal. Detailed meanings

are as follows:
Output Data (Hex.)

Actual Meaning

1~9

→

1~9

A

→

0

B

→

*

C

→

#

0

→

blank

Note 1: If the number of the trunk call (Caller-ID) cannot be identified, the

data here is output as “0”.

CHAPTER 3
Page 250
Issue 1

NDA-24307

b4 - b7

b0 - b3

dc0
dc2
dc4
dc6
dc8
dc10
dc12
dc14
dc16
dc18
dc20
dc22
dc24
dc26
dc28
dc30

dc1
dc3
dc5
dc7
dc9
dc11
dc13
dc15
dc17
dc19
dc21
dc23
dc25
dc27
dc29
dc31

SYSTEM MESSAGES

LAN Interface Error Report
26-V

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message is issued when the connection error related to external LAN Interface equipment occurs in the
system.
TCP/IP Part

Application Part

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁ ➂➃

➄➅ ➆➇

➈➉

11

12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

1 ~ 4 IP Address for external equipment in which error has been detected. (Hex.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

5 , 6 Port No. (Client Port No.) (Hex.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

7 Socket No. (Used Socket No.) (Hex.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

8 Error Code (TCP/IP Error Code) (Hex.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

See Table 3-2.

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 251
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES
Table 3-2 Error Code
Output Data
(Hex.)

Definition

Output Data
(Hex.)

BSD SOCKET ERROR

58

Definition
Address family not supported

10

User parameter error

11

Host not reachable

59

Address already in use

12

Timeout

60

Can’t assign requested address

14

Protocol error

61

Network is down

15

No buffer space

62

Network is unreachable

16

Connection block invalid

63

Network dropped connection

17

Invalid pointer argument

18

Operation would block

65

Connection reset by peer

19

Message too long

67

Socket is already connected

20

Protocol not available

68

Socket is not connected

50

Destination address required

69

Can’t send after socket shutdown

52

Protocol wrong type for socket

72

Connection refused

54

Protocol not supported

73

Host is down

55

Socket type not supported

76

Operation already in progress

56

Operation not supported on socket

77

Operation now in progress

57

Protocol family not supported

CHAPTER 3
Page 252
Issue 1

PROTOCOL FAMILY

RESET

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

9 Application Type
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b7 : (Hex)
01=SUPER SERVER
02=MAT
03=SMDR
04=MCI
05=OAI
06=PMS
07=MIS

[When 9 =03 (SMDR) / 04 (MCI) ]
10 Device Number of Error-detected client PC
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b6

b5

b4

b3

(Hex)
Device Number of error-detected Client PC.
If the Machine Number is not determined, “FF”
is output.

b0-b7:

(Hex)
01=SEND Execution Error
02=RECEIVE Execution Error
03=SEND Execution Count Over
04=RECEIVE Execution Count Over
05=System Data is not assigned
06=Time Over
07=Parity Error
08=Connection Error
09=Connection Port Capacity Over
0A=Detection of B-level Infinite Loop
0B~FF=Not used

b0

11 Kind of Error
b7

b0-b7:

b2

b1

b0

b2

b1

b0

12 Details on Detected Error
b7

b6

13 ~ 24 Not used

b5

b4

b3

-When 01/02 is output at 11
b0-b7: Cause of error (Hex)
-When 05 is output at 11
b0-b7: 01=Data (Data Output via LAN) not
assigned
02=Device No. not assigned
-When 07 is output at 11
b0-b7: 00H=No Parity is set
01H=Odd Parity is set
02H=Even Parity is set
-When 08 is output at 11
b0-b7: Cause of error (Hex)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 253
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

When 9 =05 (OAI) / 07 (MIS)
10 Faulty Logical Port No. (Hex)

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

11 Error Kind (ERRK)

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0-b7 : Error Kind (Hex)
Refer to Table 3-3:

b0

Table 3-3 Error Kind (ERRK)
Output Data

Error Situation
SEND Execution Error
TCP/IP connection is down because the text is not transmitted continuously.

01H

RECEIVE Execution Error
02H

Incorrect text format is received.

Check the TCP/IP Transmission
capacity on the UAP side is proper or
not.

[2]

Check the operation status on the
UAP side is normal.

[1]

Check the software operation on the
MIS or Host side.

[2]

Check the LAN cable connection
status.

TCP/IP connection is released due to the TCP port disconnection order from the MIS or Host.
Connection Error (B-level Infinite Loop, etc.)

04H

Re-check the operation status of MIS or
Host.

TCP port is released due to the detection of abnormal state in
the MIS or HOST operation.
TCP/IP Port Capacity Over

05H

12 ~ 24

[1]

Re-start the MIS or HOST computer.

TCP/IP Connection Error
03H

Required Check

TCP/IP connection cannot be established due to the connection port capacity over.

Not used

CHAPTER 3
Page 254
Issue 1

NDA-24307

The number of allowed ports for application use via TCP/IP must be 16 or less. Adjust the used application number not to
exceed “16” in total.

SYSTEM MESSAGES

LAN Interface Release Report
26-W

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message is issued when the LAN Interface Connection Failure, detected in Message [26-V], recovers.
This message is displayed when the LAN Interface Connection Failure is restored, and then the first data is
normally sent/received by the recovered application equipment.
TCP/IP Part

Application Part

1: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 2: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX 3: XXXX XXXX XXXX XXXX

➀➁ ➂➃

➄➅ ➆➇

➈➉

11

12

13 14

15 16

17 18

19 20

21 22

23 24

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

1 ~ 4 IP Address for external equipment in which error has been detected. (Hex.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

5 , 6 Port No. (Client Port No.) (Hex.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

7 Socket No. (Used Socket No.) (Hex.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

8 Error Code (TCP/IP Error Code) (Hex.)
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

See Table 3-2.

b0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 255
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES
9 Application Type
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b7 : (Hex)
01=SUPER SERVER
02=MAT
03=SMDR
04=MCI
05=OAI
06=PMS
07=MIS

When 9 =03 (SMDR) / 04 (MCI)
10 Device Number of recovered client PC
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b6

CHAPTER 3
Page 256
Issue 1

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

(Hex)
Device Number of recovered Client PC
for external LAN Interface.

b0-b7:

(Hex)
01=Recovered
02~FF=Not defined

b0

11 Recovery Information
b7

b0-b7:

b0

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

DLMX MBR Key Turn ON
27-E

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message is issued when the MBR switch on the DLMX card has been turned ON at the time of DLMX
ACT/ST-BY changeover, etc.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of the DLMX card
b7

➁ System
b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4:
b5, b6:
b7:

b1

b0

b0:
b1:

Group No.
Unit No. (0-3)
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

status of DLMX card
0/1 = System #0/#1
0/1 = ACT/SY-BY

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 257
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

DLMX MBR Key Turn OFF
27-F

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message is issued when the MBR switch on the DLMX card has been turned OFF at the time of DLMX
ACT/ST-BY changeover, etc.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Location of the DLMX card
b7

➁ System

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b0-b4:
b5, b6:
b7:

b1

b0

b0:
b1:

Group No.
Unit No. (0-3)
MG No.
0/1 = Even-numbered MG/Odd-numbered MG

status of DLMX card

b7

CHAPTER 3
Page 258
Issue 1

0/1 = System #0/#1
0/1 = ACT/SY-BY

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

DLMX ACT Change Report
27-G

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message is issued when a DLMX card is placed to ACT state due to a mode changeover.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ Reason for changeover
b7

b2

b1

b0

b2
0
0
0

b1
0
0
1

b0
0 = MBR key operation
1 = Circuit Card Make Busy
0 = Detection of fault (on the DLMX card)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 259
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

MUX Clock Restore
33-A

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the MUX (PH-PC36) card, whose clock function was detected as faulty, is
recovered.

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ MUX

Card Location and System

Status
b4

b3

b2

b1

➁ RLS Data
b3

CHAPTER 3
Page 260
Issue 1

b2

b1

b0

b0-b1: Unit number
b2:
MG number
b3:
0/1 = MUX No. 0 system / MUX No. 1 system
b4:
0/1 = ACT/STBY

RLS Data:Clock alarm information on the recovered MUX card
b1:
0/1 = -/FH failure for 2M PCM Highway
b2:
0/1 = -/CLK failure for 2M PCM Highway
b3:
0/1 = -/4M CLK failure for PM

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

SDT Alarm Warning
33-B

Default Alarm:
SUP

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when an abnormal state is detected temporarily on the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card.

1: X0XX 00XX XXXX XX00 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁

➂

4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

MG (Module Group)

b7:

b7

➁
b7

0/1 = Even-number MG/Odd-number MG

b0

Details on alarm
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b4, b3 b2-b0
00
000
00
001
00
010
00
011
01
000
01
001
01
010
01
011
01
100
01
101
01
110
10
000
10
001
10
010
10
011
10
100
10
101
b7:

Hardware Failure
Optical Line Failure
Onboard Power Alarm
PCM Loss
Frame Alignment Loss
Receiving Section Failure
Mistake Rate Degradation
Sending Section Failure
Mistake Detection
Receiving Path Failure
Pointer Failure
Sending Path Failure
Receiving Path Error
Sending Path Error

SDT Card
Trouble

52M Interface
Alarm

VC-11 Path
Trouble
Note

SDT Card Status
0/1=No. 0 System/No.1 System

Note: Alarm-detected HW is specified in ➂ (next page).

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 261
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

➂
b7

Alarm-detected HW
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

The data here specifies the HW, on which any of the VC-11 Path
Trouble was detected in data ➁ (see Note). Refer to the table below:

b0

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

-

-

-

-

28

27

26

25

24

23

22

21

20

19

18

17

16

15

14

13

12

11

10

9

8

7

6

5

4

3

2

1

0/1=-/VC-11 Path Trouble

Note: This data displays only when b4 is “1” and b3 is “0” in data ➁.

Repair Procedure
Basically, fault repair work is not required by the display of this message. However, if the message is created
frequently, it is recommended that the repair work be performed as shown in the message [33-C] SDT Alarm
Trouble.

CHAPTER 3
Page 262
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

SDT Alarm Trouble
33-C

Default Alarm:
MN

Default Grade:
3

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when a grave failure occurs on the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card. If this is issued, remember
the ACT/STBY change of the SDT card may be followed, as a result of fault detection in the optical fiber line
(see [33-E] message).

1: XXXX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

MG (Module Group)

b7:

b7

➁
b7

0/1 = Even-number MG/Odd-number MG

b0

Details on alarm
b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b4, b3
00
00
00
00
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
10
10
10
10
10
10
b7:

b2-b0
000
001
010
011
100
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
000
001
010
011
100
101

Hardware Failure
Optical Line Failure
Onboard Power Alarm
Abnormal MB Key Operation
PCM Loss
Frame Alignment Loss
Receiving Section Failure
Mistake Rate Degradation
Sending Section Failure
Mistake Detection
Receiving Path Failure
Pointer Failure
Sending Path Failure
Receiving Path Error
Sending Path Error

SDT Card
Trouble

52M Interface
Alarm

VC-11 Path
Trouble
Note

SDT Card Status
0/1=No. 0 System/No.1 System

Note: Fault repair procedure on each alarm is shown on the next page.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 263
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

Repair Procedure
Depending on the fault status shown in data ➁, perform necessary repair work:
(1) Hardware Failure/Onboard Power Alarm
SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card is faulty. Replace the card with a spare by referring to Chapter 4, Section 3.3.3,
SDT Card Replacement Procedure.
(2) Optical Line Failure
Diagnosis: In addition to this alarm, is the “PCM Loss” alarm also indicated?
YES → Optical line side is faulty.
Verify that the SDT card in the distant node is not placed into make-busy state. Also, perform the
light level check of the optical fiber cables.
NO → SDT card is faulty.
Replace the SDT card with a spare by referring to Chapter 4, Section 3.3.3, SDT Card
Replacement Procedure.
(3) Abnormal MB Key Operation
This alarm is indicated when the MB key on the PA-SDTA card is turned ON, even though the MBR key
has been on the OFF side. Place the MBR key UP (=ON) and then turn ON the MB key.
(4) PCM Loss
Abnormal state is detected on the optical line side. Verify that the SDT card in the distant node is not
placed into make-busy state. Also, perform the light level check of the optical fiber cables.
(5) 52M Interface Alarm
- Frame Alignment Loss
- Receiving Section Failure
- Mistake Rate Degradation
- Sending Section Failure
- Mistake Detection
Clock synchronization with the distant node might be lost, or a trouble might occur on the optical line
side. Check the PLO cards first in both self-node and distant node. When no fault is found, proceed with
the light level check of the optical fiber cables.

CHAPTER 3
Page 264
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM MESSAGES

(6) Receiving Path Failure/Receiving Path Error
Abnormal state is detected in the process of multiplexing the “Receive” signals. To restore this, perform
the following:
STEP 1

Initialization of SDT card (distant node)
Initialize the SDT card in the distant node, and observe the situation. If the fault is not restored,
proceed with STEP 2.

STEP 2

Initialization of SDT card (self-node)
Initialize the SDT card in the self-node, and observe the situation. If the fault is not restored,
proceed with STEP 3.

STEP 3

Replacement of SDT card
It cannot be confirmed which node side (self-node or distant node) is faulty. By referring to
Chapter 4, Section 3.3.5, SDT Card Replacement Procedure, first replace the SDT card only in
one of the nodes. When the fault does not recover, then also replace the SDT card in other side
of the nodes.

(7) Pointer Failure/Sending Path Failure/Sending Path Error
Abnormal state is detected in the process of multiplexing the “Send” signals. To restore this, perform the
following:
STEP 1

Initialization of SDT card
Initialize the SDT card in the self-node, and observe the situation. If the fault is not restored,
proceed with STEP 2.

STEP 2

Replacement of SDT card
By referring to Chapter 4, Section 3.3.5, SDT Card Replacement Procedure, replace the SDT
card in the self-node with a spare.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 265
Issue 1

SYSTEM MESSAGES

SDT Alarm Restore
33-D

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
1

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the SDT (PA-SDTA/B) card or optical fiber line, which was once detected as
faulty, recovers.

1: X0XX 0000 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

MG (Module Group)

b7:

b7

➁

0/1 = Even-number MG/Odd-number MG

b0

Details on the fault

b7

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

b4, b3
00
00
00
00
00
01
01
01
01
01
01
01
10
10
10
10
10
10
b7:

CHAPTER 3
Page 266
Issue 1

b2-b0
000
001
010
011
100
000
001
010
011
100
101
110
000
001
010
011
100
101

Hardware Failure
Optical Line Failure
Onboard Power Alarm
Abnormal MB Key Operation
PCM Loss
Frame Alignment Loss
Receiving Section Failure
Mistake Rate Degradation
Sending Section Failure
Mistake Detection
Receiving Path Failure
Pointer Failure
Sending Path Failure
Receiving Path Error
Sending Path Error

SDT Card Status
0/1=No. 0 System/No.1 System

NDA-24307

SDT Card
Trouble

52M Interface
Alarm

VC-11 Path
Trouble

SYSTEM MESSAGES

SDT Interface Change Notify
33-E

Default Alarm:
NON

Default Grade:
2

Grade Modified:

Lamp Modified:

This message displays when the ACT/STBY of the SDT (PA-SDTA) card is changed over as a result of fault
detection in the optical fiber line. When the ACT/STBY change cannot be performed, this message also
indicates the cause for the changeover execution failure.

1: X0XX XX00 0000 0000 2: 0000 0000 0000 0000 3: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀ ➁ ➂
4: 0000 0000 0000 0000 5: 0000 0000 0000 0000 6: 0000 0000 0000 0000

7: 0000 0000 0000 0000 8: 0000 0000 0000 0000 9: 0000 0000 0000 0000

➀

MG (Module Group)

b7:

b7

➁
b7

➂
b7

0/1 = Even-number MG/Odd-number MG

b0

Detailed information
b6

b5

b4

b3

b0:

b2

b1

b0

Active SDT after Changeover
0/1=No.0 System/No.1 System
b1:
Operating Status of SDT
0/1=In service/Out of service
b2, b3: Result of Changeover
0/1=Success/Failure
b7-b4
Cause for Changeover
0001
SDT had a serious failure
0010
MB key on SDT card was turned ON

Cause for changeover execution failure
b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

0H:
1H:
2H:

(Changeover Success)
Optical interface isn’t dual
Optical interface has a serious failure in each No.0/No.1 system

Repair Procedure
Once this message displays, be sure to check other messages, such as [33-C] SDT Alarm Trouble, and review
the cause for the changeover. If any fault is implicated, repair the whole fault(s) according to the situation.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 3
Page 267
Issue 1

This page is for your notes.

CHAPTER 3
Page 268
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1. LPM ACCOMMODATING UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
This section explains how to replace unit/circuit cards mounted in the LPM (ISW/IMG 0).
1.1 Precautions
•

Use this procedure to replace a faulty unit/circuit card with a spare or to check a spare card.

•

There are functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be replaced.
As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for the LPM.
When a circuit card with a default switch setting is replaced with a spare card, always make the switch
setting on the new circuit card the same as on the replaced card. Otherwise, electronic components on
the circuit card may be destroyed, or the circuit card itself may fail to function normally.

•

When handling a circuit card, always use the field service kit for countermeasures against static
electricity. Touching a circuit card without using the field service kit may destroy the card due to static
electricity on the human body.

1.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout
Figure 4-1 shows the face layout of circuit cards mounted in the LPM.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 269
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

PZ-PW92

PZ-IO27

LANI(PZ-PC19)

Note 2

00

01

02

03

ISAGT(PZ-GT13)

ISAGT (PZ-GT20)
Note 1

04
SW

HDD MB

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

ON

MBR

FDD

IMG1

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT0
1

2

3

IMG2 IMG3
STATUS

4

ON
OFF

5A
SYSTEM SELECT1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

OUT PWR

SENSE
OFF

2

4 6
C

A

E

0

PALM

SYSTEM SELECT2
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

CPURST

8

ON

ON
IN PWR

EMA(PH-PC40)

IOC(PH-IO24)

MISC/IOC

MISC

MMC (PH-M22)

LPM

OFF

OFF
SLOT No.

SW

HDD MB

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

ON

MBR

FDD

IMG1

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT0
1

2

3

IMG2 IMG3
STATUS

4

ON
OFF

5A
SYSTEM SELECT1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

OUT PWR

SENSE
OFF

2

4 6
C

A

E

0

PALM

SYSTEM SELECT2
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

ON
IN PWR

CPURST

OFF

OFF
SLOT No.

FRONT VIEW

CPR

Note 1: This card (PZ-GT20) is mounted in the CPR of LN(s) only.
Note 2: In place of PZ-IO27, the CPR may be equipped with PZ-IO28, which does not have the MB key.

Figure 4-1 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of LPM

CHAPTER 4
Page 270
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3 Operating Procedures
The following paragraphs provide operating procedures to replace unit/circuit cards of the LPM. Perform
the operations that correspond to each reference item specified in Table 4-1.
Table 4-1 LPM Unit/Circuit Cards and Reference Items
UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD
CPR

REFERENCE ITEM
Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure

EMA Card

Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement Procedure

IOC Card

Section 1.3.3, IOC Card Replacement Procedure

PWR Unit

Section 1.3.4, Power Supply Unit Replacement Procedure

MISC Card

Section 1.3.5, MISC Card Replacement Procedure

WARNING

REMARKS
CPU, ISAGT,
LANI, HFD

Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the key using extreme care.
During replacement of a circuit card, the system issues system messages and activates the related
alarm. Reset the indicated alarm after completing the replacement procedure.
If the indicated alarm is cleared via the RALM/RALMN command, the system also clears the
contents of the system message. Before using the RALM/RALMN command, print the messages
using the DFTD command.
Use the ALM RST button on the TOPU only to reset the alarm lamps.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 271
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.1

CPR Replacement Procedure
This section explains how to replace the Control Processor Rack (CPR). The CPR
ATTENTION
Contents
is mounted in IMG 0 of LN and ISW. Before starting the procedures, make a backup
Static Sensitive
copy of the main data, such as office data, Call Forwarding (CF) data and Speed
Calling (SPD) data, on to the hard disk of the HFD. Figure 4-2 shows the front view
of the CPR. Operate the related keys and connectors to replace the CPU with a new one. Using a
Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws and extract the CPR with care, as shown in Figure 4-3.
Handling
Precautions Required

PZ-IO27

PZ-GT20(ISAGT)

Note 3

SW

HDD MB

PZ-GT13(ISAGT)

Note 2

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

ON

MBR

FDD

IMG1

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT0
1

2

3

IMG2 IMG3
STATUS

4

ON
OFF

5A
SYSTEM SELECT1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

OUT PWR

SENSE
OFF

2

4 6
C

A

E

0

PALM
SYSTEM SELECT2
1

ON

ON
IN PWR

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

CPURST
T

M

OFF

OFF
SLOT No.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

PZ-PC19(LANI) Note

1

PZ-PC19(LANI)

PZ-PW92

Note 1: This card (secondary LANI for Fusion Link) is optional.
Note 2: This card is mounted in the CPR of LN only.
Note 3: In place of PZ-IO27, the CPR may be equipped with PZ-IO28, which does not have the MB

key.
Figure 4-2 CPR Face Layout

CHAPTER 4
Page 272
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

IMG 0

...
.......
5A

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

8

E

2

6

LPM

SLOT

No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

..........
5A

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

E

2

6

1

1

SLOT

No.
0
1
2
3
4
5

CPR

6

Figure 4-3 How to Replace the CPU

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 273
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Replacement Procedure
START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

DSP

Handling
Precautions Required

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

MBR
ON

Make a backup copy of the main data (office data,
CF/SPD data, etc.) onto the hard disk of the HFD.

IMG1

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

IMG2 IMG3

OFF

2

4 6

0

E

1

C

A

1

OFF

OFF

Turn ON the MBR key on the DSP of the CPU
to be replaced. Then turn OFF the MBR key again.

FRONT VIEW

• System Changeover of the CPU from
ACT to STBY mode.
• IMG0 lamp on the DSP begin to flash
green.
• Check the mate CPU’s lamp indications:

Confirm the mate CPU's ACT mode.

At the ISW
• CPU OPE=Steady green
• IMG0 ~ IMG3=Steady green
at the LN
• CPU OPE=Steady green
• IMG0 ~ IMG3=Flash green

Turn ON the EMA SUP key on the
EMA (PH-PC40) card.

Note: IMG2 - IMG3 lamps may be
OFF depending on the system
configuration
• EMA SUP lamp on the EMA card lights
green.
PWR (PZ-PW92)

SW

Disconnect the power alarm cable from
the PALM connector on PZ-PW92.

ON

OFF
-48V

Cable Name to be disconnected
CPU 0: 10AL-(110) FLT CA
CPU 1: 10AL-(130) FLT CA

PALM
OUTPWR

ON
INPWR

ALM

A
FRONT VIEW

Note: ACT/STBY of CPR can also be performed by using the CMODI/CMOD command. For details, refer to

Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands.
CHAPTER 4
Page 274
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
PWR (PZ-PW92)

ATTENTION

SW

Contents
Static Sensitive

ON

Handling
Precautions Required

Turn OFF the SW key on PZ-PW92.
OFF
-48V
PALM

Disconnect power cables from the OUTPWR
connector and INPWR connector on PZ-PW92.

OUTPWR

ON

Cable to be disconnected from OUTPWR
CPU 0: 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-A
CPU 1: 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-B
Cable to be disconnected from INPWR
CPU 0: 4P-2P PWR CA-A
CPU 1: 4P-2P PWR CA-B

Disconnect bus cables from the front connectors
on the PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20 (ISAGT).

INPWR

ALM

FRONT VIEW

• Refer to Figure 4-2 for
CPR face layout.

Cables to be disconnected from front
connector of PZ-GT13
EXGT BUS CA-A for CN-M connector
34PH 50AL CA-A for CN-T connector
Cables to be disconnected from front
connector of PZ-GT20
34PH 50AL CA-B (in LN only)

• Refer to Figure 4-2 for
CPR face layout.

Disconnect Ethernet cables from the front
connectors on the PZ-PC19 (LANI).

Cables to be disconnected
Ether cable: UTP CTG5 ST CA-n
Note: The kind of Ethernet cable may vary,
depending on its connecting
conditions.

Remove the four screws fastened onto the CPR.
(Keep the removed screws.)

• Refer to Figure 4-3 to
replace the CPU.

B

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 275
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

B

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

• Refer to Figure 4-3 to replace
the CPU.

Extract the CPR from the LPM.

Mount the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20) and
LANI (PZ-PC19) cards onto the new CPR.
Then, insert the new CPR into the LPM.

C

CHAPTER 4
Page 276
Issue 1

• Refer to Circuit Card Installation
Into New CPR procedure in this
section.

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

C
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the disconnected Ethernet cables
to the connectors on the PZ-PC19.

Connect the disconnected bus cables to the
front connectors on the PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20.

Connect the disconnected power cables to
the OUTPWR and INPWR connectors.

PWR (PZ-PW92)

SW
ON

Note: Do not connect the cable for the
PALM connector yet.

OFF
-48V
PALM

Turn ON the SW key on PZ-PW92.
OUTPWR

ON

Connect the disconnected power alarm cable
to the PALM connector on PZ-PW92.

INPWR

ALM

FRONT VIEW

D

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 277
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

D

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

• EMA SUP lamp on the
EMA card goes OFF.

Turn OFF the EMA-SUP key on the EMA
(PH-PC40) card.

MBR(DSP)

Flip the MBR key on the DSP of the new
CPR from ON to OFF.

Confirm that IPL has completed successfully.

Initial Program Load (IPL)
starts automatically.

• IMG0 lamp on the DSP
flashes green.
DSP

END

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

MBR
ON

IMG1

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

IMG2 IMG3

OFF

5

6

7

8

2
0

E

1

4 6

2

3

4

5

6

7

C

A

1

OFF

8

OFF

FRONT VIEW

CHAPTER 4
Page 278
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Circuit Card Installation Into New CPR
This procedure shows how to install the new CPR into the LPM.
ATTENTION

(1) Detach the front panel of the new CPR by using the Phillips screwdriver to remove
the four screws, as shown in Figure 4-4. Then, lift the top cover by removing the
eight screws.

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Top Cover

Front Panel
CPR

Figure 4-4 Removal of Front Panel and Top Cover From CPR

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 279
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

(2) Insert the ISAGT (PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20) and LANI (PZ-PC19) cards into the
following slots of the new CPR (refer to Figure 4-5):
ISAGT (PZ-GT13) → Slot 6 (ISA)

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

ISAGT (PZ-GT20) → Slot 5 (ISA) (When LN has more than two IMGs) Note

Handling
Precautions Required

LANI (PZ-PC19) → Slot 0 (PCI) (For Fusion Link)
LANI (PZ-PC19) → Slot 1 (PCI) (When connecting MAT via 10-BASE T and PCI buses)
LANI (PZ-PC19) → Slot 3 (PCI) (When LANI for Fusion Link is in dual configuration)
Figure 4-5 shows how to insert the ISAGT and LANI cards into the PCI slots 5 and 6, 0 and 1 and 3 of the
CPR, respectively.
Note: This card is mounted in LN only.

ISAGT
LANI

Slot 6 (ISA)
Slot 5 (ISA)
Slot 3 (PCI)
Slot 1 (PCI)
Slot 0 (PCI)

CPR

Note: Actual installation of the LANI card may differ, depending on your system configuration.
Figure 4-5 Insertion of ISAGT and LANI Cards
CHAPTER 4
Page 280
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

(3) Reattach the top cover by fastening the removed eight screws. Then, reattach the
front panel by fastening the removed four screws. Refer to Figure 4-6).
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Top Cover

Front Panel
CPR

Figure 4-6 Reattachment of CPR Top Cover and Front Panel

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 281
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

(4) After turning ON the MBR key on the DSP of the new CPR, insert the new CPR into
the LPM as shown in Figure 4-7. Then, fasten the retained four screws.
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

LPM

CPR

Figure 4-7 Accommodation of New CPR Into LPM

CHAPTER 4
Page 282
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

(5) Insert the new HFD (PZ-IO27) into the CPR. Then, fasten the two screws as shown in
Figure 4-8.
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

LPM

HFD (PZ-IO27/PZ-IO28)
Figure 4-8 Insertion of New HFD Into CPR

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 283
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

(6) Make sure Switch 8 of SYSTEM SELECT 1 (DIP Switch) on each CPU Front Panel
is set to ON. (Do this for all LNs and ISW: Refer to Figure 4-9.)
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

LANI(PZ-PC19)

FRONT VIEW
00

01

02

03

ISAGT(PZ-GT13)

04
SW

HDD MB

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

ON

MBR

FDD

IMG1

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT0
1

2

3

IMG2 IMG3
STATUS

4

ON
OFF

5A

SYSTEM SELECT1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

SENSE

OUT PWR
OFF

2
E

A

C

SYSTEM SELECT2
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

CPURST

8

ON

ON
IN PWR

EMA(PH-PC49)

IOC(PH-IO24)

MISC/IOC

MISC

MMC (PH-M22)

LPM

4 6

0

PALM

CPR1

OFF

OFF
SLOT No.

SW

HDD MB

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

ON

MBR

FDD

IMG1

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT0
1

2

3

IMG2 IMG3
STATUS

4

ON
OFF

5A
SYSTEM SELECT1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

OUT PWR

SENSE
OFF

2

4 6
C

A

E

0

PALM

CPR0

SYSTEM SELECT2
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

ON
IN PWR

CPURST

OFF

OFF
SLOT No.

ISAGT(PZ-GT20)

Note

SYSTEM SELECT1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON
OFF

Note: PZ-GT20 card is mounted in LN only.

Figure 4-9 Switch Setting on the CPU Front Panel

CHAPTER 4
Page 284
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.2

EMA Card Replacement Procedure
The EMA (PH-PC40) card is mounted in slot No. 04 of the LPM. The main
functions of the card are as follows:

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

•

Designation of ACT/STBY status of the CPU and forced changeover of the
system

•

Shutoff of the system’s power supply and detection of rising temperature within the system

•

Control of the NCU (PA-M53) card

WARNING Before replacing the EMA card, check the CPU 0’s ACT mode. Attempting to replace the card
when the CPU 1 is active will result in the system being initialized.
Replacement Procedure
NO

• Check the CPU OPE lamp of DSP 1.
When the lamp is steady-green,
perform the system changeover.

CPU 1 is Active?

YES
Flip the MBR key on the DSP 1 (ON
(System Changeover of CPU 1: ACT

ON
OFF
STBY)

Turn ON the MB key on the EMA (PH-PC40) card.

• OPE/MB Lamp on the EMA card
lights red from green.

• When NCU (PA-M53) cards are
mounted, Power Failure Transfer
(PFT) is activated.

Extract the EMA card from the LPM.

A

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 285
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Set the keys on the new card by referring to the
card being replaced.

Turn ON the MB and EMA SUP keys on the
new card.

Insert the new card into the LPM.

Turn OFF the MB and EMA SUP keys on the card.

Assign the time data by using the ATIM/ATIMN
command.

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 286
Issue 1

NDA-24307

• OPE/MB Lamp on the EMA card
lights steady-green.

• The PFT service is cancelled:
resumption of normal operation.

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.3

IOC Card Replacement Procedure
The IOC (PH-IO24) card is mounted in slot No. 02 and/or 03 of the LPM. The
card’s main function is to provide a serial interface between the system and its
external equipment, such as the Maintenance Administration Terminal (MAT),
Station Message Detail Recording System (SMDR), Message Center Interface
(MCI), Property Management System (PMS), etc.

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

ATTENTION The equipment connected to the I/O ports of each card (MAT, SMDR, etc.) cannot be used while
replacing the IOC card.

START

• OPE lamp on the IOC card first
flashes and then lights red.

Turn ON the MBR key on the IOC (PH-IO24)
card to be replaced.

• All I/O ports are closed and the
equipment, such as MAT and SMDR,
loses connections.
Note: The text data (such as bill-

ing information), registered
before this step, will be
safely transmitted later.
However, the data, recorded
after this step, will not be
sent out, and instead is
stored in the buffer.

Turn ON the MB key on the card.

• OPE lamp on the IOC card goes OFF.

Extract the card from the LPM.

Set the keys on the new card, referring to the
card to be replaced.

A

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 287
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive

A

Handling
Precautions Required

Turn ON the MB and MBR keys on the
new card.

Insert the new card into the LPM.

Turn OFF the MB key on the card.

• OPE lamp on the IOC card lights
red.

Turn OFF the MBR key on the card.

• Release of I/O ports: new IOC card
is initialized, and I/O port channels
reopens.

• OPE lamp lights green.
END

CHAPTER 4
Page 288
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.4

Power Supply Unit Replacement Procedure

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

• CPU System
Changeover
Refer to Section 12,
Chapter 6.

Set the mode of the PWR UNIT (PZ-PW92)
to be replaced into STBY mode.

On the EMA (PH-PC40) card, set EMA SUP
switch UP.

Disconnect the power alarm cable from the
PALM connector on the PZ-PW92.

PWR (PZ-PW92)

SW

Cable Name to be disconnected
CPU 0: 10AL-(110) FLT CA
CPU 1: 10AL-(130) FLT CA

ON

OFF
-48V

Turn OFF the SW key on the PWR UNIT.

PALM
OUTPWR

ON
INPWR

ALM

Disconnect the power cables from the OUTPWR
connector and INPWR connector on the PZ-PW92.
FRONT VIEW

Cable to be disconnected from OUTPWR
CPU 0: 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-A
CPU 1: 6P-(4P-3P) PWR CA-B
Cable to be disconnected from INPWR
CPU 0: 4P-2P PWR CA-A
CPU 1: 4P-2P PWR CA-B

A

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 289
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Unscrew the PWR UNIT from the CPR.

Insert the new PWR UNIT into the CPR.

Reattach power cables to OUTPWR
and INPWR connectors on the PZ-PW92.

Turn ON the SW key on the PWR UNIT.

Reattach power alarm cable to the PALM
connector on the PZ-PW92.

On the EMA card, set EMA SUP switch DOWN.

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 290
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.5

MISC Card Replacement Procedure

START

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the MISC card, set MB switch UP.

Extract the MISC card from its mounting slot.

• Keep MB switch UP.

Insert the new circuit card into the same
mounting slot.

On the MISC card, set MB switch DOWN.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 291
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

1.3.6

MMC Card Replacement Procedure
The MMC (PH-M22) card is mounted in slot No. 00 of the LPM. The card’s main
functions are:
•

To collect key setting information on the TOPU of each LN/ISW. Note

•

To collect alarm information on LN or the entire system (in case of MMC in
ISW), thereby activating MJ/MN LED on the TOPU display.

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Note: If the key setting affects the entire system (i.e. the SYSTEM side is selected by the INITIAL SELECT key

on the ISW TOPU). The information is broadcast to the MMC of ISW including the MMC of all existing
LNs.
Replacement Procedure
• OPE lamp on the MMC goes off.
START

Set the MB key to UP on the MMC (PH-M22)
card the be replaced.

Disconnect the cable from the KEY connector
on the MMC card.

Cable to be disconnected
10AL-(400) FLT CA

Note: The connector and cable
Disconnect the whole cable(s) from the CNx
connector(s) on the MMC card.

Cable to be disconnected
MT24 MISC CA-n

Extract the MMC card from the LPM.

A

CHAPTER 4
Page 292
Issue 1

NDA-24307

names vary depending on
it’s connecting conditions.

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Set the MB key on the MMC card UP.

• OPE lamp on the MMC card goes
OFF.

Insert the MMC card into the LPM.

Connect the disconnected cable to the KEY
connector on the MMC card.

Connect the disconnected cable(s) to the
CNx connector(s) on the MMC card.

• OPE lamp on the MMC card lights a
steady green.

Set the MB key on the MMC card DOWN.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 293
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2. TSWM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
This section explains the procedure for replacing circuit cards mounted in the TSWM (TSWM0 in IMG1,
TSWM1 in IMG2).
2.1 Precautions
•

Use this procedure to replace a faulty circuit card with a spare or to check a spare card.

•

There are the functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be
replaced. As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for
the TSWM. When a circuit card with a default switch setting is replaced with a spare card, always
make the switch setting on the new circuit card the same as on the replaced card. Otherwise, electronic
components on the circuit card may be destroyed, or the circuit card itself may fail to function
normally.

•

When handling a circuit card, always use the field service kit for countermeasures against static
electricity. Touching a circuit card without using the field service kit may destroy the card due to static
electricity on the human body.

2.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout
Figure 4-10 shows the face layout of the circuit cards mounted in the TSWM. The circuit cards marked
with * are optional.

TSWM0/1

MISC

MISC

MISC

DLKC0 Note 1

DLKC1 Note 1

GT0

GT1

TSW00

*

*

*

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23
PLO1/CLK1 Note 2

12

PLO0/CLK0 Note 2

11

TSW13

10

TSW12

09

TSW11

08

TSW10

07

TSW03

06

TSW02

05

TSW01

04

*

PWR SW1

PWR SW0

03

MISC

02

*

00 01

MISC

Slot No.

FRONT VIEW
PWRSW: PH-PW14

DLKC: PH-PC20

GT: PH-GT09

TSW: PH-SW12

PLO: PH-CK16-A

Note 1: This card is mounted in TSWM0 only.
Note 2: PLO is mounted in TSWM0, and CLK is mounted in TSWM1.
Figure 4-10 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of TSWM

CHAPTER 4
Page 294
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CLK: PH-CK18

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the key using extreme care.
During replacement of a circuit card, the system issues system messages and activates the related
alarm. Reset the indicated alarm after completing the replacement procedure.
If the indicated alarm is cleared via the RALM/RALMN command, the system also clears the
contents of the system message. Before using the RALM/RALMN command, print the messages
using the DFTD command.
Use the ALM RST button on the TOPU only to reset the alarm lamps.
2.3 Operating Procedures
The following paragraphs explain the operating procedures to replace unit/circuit cards located in the
TSWM. Perform the operations corresponding to each Reference Item specified in Table 4-2.
Table 4-2 TSWM Circuit Cards and Reference Items
CIRCUIT CARD
FUNCTION NAME
GT
TSW
DLKC

REFERENCE ITEM
Section 2.3.1, GT Card Replacement Procedure
Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement Procedure
Section 2.3.3, DLKC Card Replacement Procedure

PLO

Section 2.3.4, PLO Card Replacement Procedure

CLK

Section 2.3.5, CLK Card Replacement Procedure

PWR SW
MISC

REMARKS

Section 2.3.6, PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure
Section 2.3.7, MISC Card Replacement Procedure

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 295
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.1

GT Card Replacement Procedure
The GT (PH-GT09) card is mounted in Slot No. 10 or 11 within the TSWM0 and TSWM1. The card’s
main function is to provide both MISC and I/O Local bus interface between the microprocessor of
CPU and other lower echelons, such as DLKC, TSW and MUX cards. Follow the procedures below to
replace a GT card with a spare.

Note: To replace the GT card, the ACT/STBY status of GT must be changed over first. This must be done by

operating the MBR key (or by using the CMOD/CMOD1 command) on the DSP of active CPR. Figure
4-11 shows a system block diagram centering upon the CPU and its controlling GT. If the ACT/STBY
of GT is to be changed over, the system of CPU must be manually changed over. For more details on the
GT changeover, refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
LN0/1/2/3

To/From TSW of ISWM

IMG 0

IMG 1

Line/Trunk PM

Line/Trunk PM
PM BUS

PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW
MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

External Cables
(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

TSW 12
TSW 02
TSW 10

TSW 00

TSW 13

TSW 03

TSW 11

TSW 01
TSW I/O BUS

TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 1
DLKC 0

PLO 1

From PLO
of ISWM

To CLK of
TSWM1

PLO 0

External Cables
(ISW-LN PLO CA-n)

External Cables
(PLO-CLK CA-n)
GT 1
GT 0

TSWM0
To GT1 in TSWM1

To GT0 in TSWM1

ISAGT-A
ISAGT-B

CPU 1

CPU 0

CPR 0

ISAGT-B

ISAGT-A

LANI

LANI

LANI

LANI

CPR 1

MISC BUS

EMA

Fusion Link
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13
MUX: PH-PC36

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20
DLKC: PH-PC20

IOC/
MISC

LANI: PZ-PC19
PLO: PH-CK16-A

GT: PH-GT09
EMA: PH-PC40

TSW: PH-SW12
IOC: PH-IO24

Note 1: CLK (PH-CK18) card is mounted in TSWM1 in place of PLO card.
Note 2: DLCK (PH-PC20) card is not mounted in TSWM1.
Figure 4-11 System Block Diagram (Connections Between GT and CPU)

CHAPTER 4
Page 296
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CLK: PH-CK18

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

GT Card Replacement Procedure
WARNING Use extreme care when operating the keys on the DSP of CPR and PH-GT09 card.

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the DSP of active CPR in the LN, turn ON the
MBR key. Turn OFF the MBR key again.

• System Changeover of GT from
ACT to STBY mode.
DSP
CPUOPE WDT IMG0

MBR
ON

IMG1

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

IMG2 IMG3

GT (PH-GT09)
OPE/MB
MB

OFF

5

6

7

MBR

8

2
0

E

1

4 6

2

3

4

5

6

7

C

A

1

OFF

8

OFF

FRONT VIEW

Check the following lamp indications
on the GT card to be replaced and on
the DSP CPR that controls the GT:
• OPE/MB (GT card) = OFF
• CPU OPE (CPU DSP) = OFF
• IMG0 (CPU DSP) = Flash (green)
• IMG1-3 (CPU DSP) = OFF

Confirm the mate GT's ACT mode.

Check the following lamp indications
on the mate GT card and the DSP of
the mate CPR:
• OPE/MB (GT card) = Steady-green
On the EMA (PH-PC40) card, set the
EMA SUP key UP.

• CPU OPE (CPU DSP) = Steadygreen
• IMG0-3 (CPU DSP) = Flash
(green)
Note: Lamp indications of IMG
2-3 vary depending on the
system configuration.

A

EMA SUP lamp on the EMA card
lights steady-green.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 297
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the GT card to be replaced,
set the MBR switch UP.

• OPE/MB lamp on the GT card
remains OFF.

On the GT card to be replaced,
set the MB switch UP.

Extract the GT card to be replaced
from the TSWM0/1.

Set the MBR and MB keys on the new card UP.

Insert the new GT card into the TSWM.

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

• OPE/MB lamp on the new card is
OFF.

Set the MBR Key on the new card DOWN.

• OPE/MB lamp on the new card
remains OFF.

B

CHAPTER 4
Page 298
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

B
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the EMA card, set the EMA SUP switch DOWN.

• EMA SUP lamp on the EMA card goes
OFF.

System Changeover
Flip the MBR key on the DSP of CPU which controls
the mate GT. Confirm the new GT functions normally.

• Replaced GT: STBY to ACT
• Mate GT: ACT to STBY
Check the following lamp indications on
the new GT card and the DSP of the CPR
which controls the GT.
• OPE/MB (GT card) = Steady-green
• CPU OPE (CPU DSP) = Steady-green
• IMG0 (CPU DSP) = Flash (green)
• IMG1-3 (CPU DSP) = Flash (green)
Note: IMG2-3 lamp indications may

vary depending on the system
configuration.
Check the following lamp indications on
the mate GT card and the DSP of the
mate CPR:

END

• OPE/MB (GT card) = OFF
• CPU OPE (CPU DSP) = OFF
• IMG0 (CPU DSP) = Flash (green)
• IMG1-3 (CPU DSP) = OFF

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 299
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.2

TSW Card Replacement Procedure
The TSW (PH-SW12) card is mounted in the Slot Nos. ranging from 12 to 19 within the TSWM0/1.
Equipped with the Time Division Switch (TSW) and Speech Path Controlling Interface (INT), the
card’s main function is to provide the Time Slot (TS) switching for a specific IMG or to provide the
PCM data link with the ISW. If the TSW card is used in a dual configuration, the card’s replacement
procedures are as follows:

Note: To replace a TSW card in dual configuration, the system of the card must be changed over from ACT to

STBY mode. The changeover can be done by flipping the MBR key on the active IOGT (PH-GT10) card
in ISWM or by using the CMODI command. For more details, refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
Figure 4-12 provides the system block diagram centering upon the speech path between ISW and LN.
If the system of TSW in ISW is changed over, the ACT/STBY of IOGT, HSW (mounted in ISW) and
TSW, DLKC and MUX (mounted in the LN) in the same switching block are also changed over.

CHAPTER 4
Page 300
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

IMG 0
Line/Trunk PM

MUX

PM BUS

PM BUS

PCM HW

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

To TSW To TSW To TSW
of LN2 of LN3
of LN1

Note

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW00

TSW00

HSW01

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

PLO

DLKC

PLO

To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

To MUX
(IMG1)

MUX

TSW00

TSW01

ISAGT
MISC

IOC

EMA

To PLO of
LN1 through 3

MISC

IOC

TSW03

CLK

IOGT

TSWM0

TSW02

GT

GT

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

TSWM1

EMA

CPU
CPU

ISW

LANI

LANI

LN0
To LANI of
LN1 through 3

Fusion Link

Note : ISW-LN TSW CA-n Cables
< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >
ISAGT: PZ-GT13
LANI: PZ-PC19
HSW: PU-SW01
PLO: PH-CK16-A/17-A
< LN (Local Node) >
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13
DLKC: PH-PC20

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20
PLO: PH-CK16-A

IOGT: PH-GT10
EMA: PH-PC40
LANI: PZ-PC19
CLK: PH-CK18

TSW: PU-SW00
IOC: PH-IO24
GT: PH-GT09
EMA: PH-PC40

TSW: PH-SW12
IOC: PH-IO24

MUX: PH-PC36

Figure 4-12 System Block Diagram (TSW and Other Speech Path Echelons)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 301
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

TSW Card Replacement Procedure
WARNING Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit card.

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the active IOGT (PH-GT10) card in ISWM, set
the MBR key UP. Then, return the key DOWN.

System Changeover. Check the following
lamp indications on the circuit cards to be
affected and ensure that they are all OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)

Check the ACT mode of the mate
Speech Path System.

• OPE/MB (DLKC card) Note
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)
Note: If the TSW card to be replaced

represents system status 0, all
the circuit cards with 0 status
are totally affected. Check the
whole cited cards' lamp
indications. (See Figure 4-12
and Figure 4-13.)

A

Check the following lamp indications on
the mate Speech Path block and ensure that
they are all steady-green:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

CHAPTER 4
Page 302
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

IOGT (PH-GT10)

TSW (PU-SW00)

HSW (PU-SW01)

TSW ACT

TSW ACT

HSW ACT

MB

TSW MB

MBR

TSW MBR

DLKC (PH-PC20)
OPE/MB
MB

MB

MUX (PH-PC36)

TSW (PH-SW12)

MUX ACT

TSW ACT

MB

MB
TSW MBR

LN

ISW
FRONT VIEW

Figure 4-13 LEDs and Switches for TSW Changeover

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 303
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the TSW (PH-SW12) card to be replaced,
set the TSW MBR switch UP.

• TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card
remains OFF.

• TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card
lights red.

On the TSW card to be replaced,
set the MB switch UP.

Extract the TSW card to be replaced
from the TSWM.

Set the keys on the new card,
referring to the card replaced.

Set TSW MBR and MB keys on the new card UP.

• TSW ACT lamp on the new card
lights red.

Insert the new TSW card into the TSWM.

Confirm M0SY, M1SY, M2SY and M3SY
LEDs on the new card are all lighting green.

B

CHAPTER 4
Page 304
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

B
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

• TSW ACT lamp on the new card goes
OFF.

Set the TSW MBR key on the new card DOWN.

• TSW ACT lamp on the new card
remains OFF.

MBR (on the active IOGT card of ISW)

Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card. Confirm
the new TSW card functions normally.

1

2

System Changeover
• Replaced TSW: STBY to ACT
• Mate TSW: ACT to STBY
Check the following lamp indications on the
Speech Path block to which the new TSW card
belongs and ensure that they are all steadygreen:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

END

Check the following lamp indications on the
mate Speech Path block and ensure that they
are all OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)
(Refer to Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13.)

Note: This procedure assumes the Speech Path mode change is executed totally on a system basis. If the

change is required on a node basis, use the MBR key on that node’s GT (PH-GT09) card or CMODI/
CMOD command. For more details, refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 305
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.3

DLKC Card Replacement Procedure
The DLKC (PH-PC20) card is mounted in Slot No. 08 or 09 within the TSWM0. The card’s main
function is to provide all the Attendant/Desk Consoles with information such as termination/answer/
release (abandoned) of ATT calls or idle/busy status of a station via the link of the TSW system. Use
the following procedures to replace the DLKC card with a spare.

Note: The system changeover of DLKC must be executed by the MBR key operation on the active IOGT (PH-

GT10) card or by using the CMODI command. Before starting this work, confirm the system block
diagram shown in Figure 4-12, or Section 12, Chapter 6.
Replacement Procedure
WARNING Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit card.

START

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the active IOGT (PH-GT10) card in ISWM, set the
MBR key UP. Then, return the key DOWN.

System Changeover. Check the following
lamp indications on the circuit cards to be
affected and ensure that they are all OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card) Note
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)
Note: If the DLKC card to be replaced
represents system status 0, all
the circuit cards with 0 status
are totally affected. Check the
whole cited cards' lamp
indications. (See Figure 4-12
and Figure 4-13.)

Check the ACT mode of the mate
Speech Path System.

Check the following lamp indications on the
mate Speech Path block and ensure that at
ISW they are all OFF and at LN all are a
steady green:

On the DLKC (PH-PC20) card to be
replaced, Set the MB switch UP.

At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

A

OPE/MB lamp on the DLKC card lights red.

CHAPTER 4
Page 306
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Extract the DLKC card to be replaced
from the TSWM.

• OPE/MB lamp on the new card lights red.

• OPE/MB lamp on the new card goes OFF.
M B R (on the active IO G T card of IS W )

On the new DLKC card, set the MB switch UP.
1

2

System Changeover
Insert the new DLKC card into the TSWM.

• Replaced DLKC: STBY to ACT
• Mate DLKC: ACT to STBY

On the new DLKC card, set the MB key DOWN.

Flip MBR key on the active IOGT card. Confirm the
new DLKC card functions normally.

Check the following lamp indications on the
Speech Path block to which the new DLKC card
belongs and ensure that they are all steady-green:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)
Check the following lamp indications on the mate
Speech Path block and ensure that they are all
OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

END

(Refer to Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13.)

Note: The changeover of Speech Path system can be performed also by using the CMODI command. For

details, refer to Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands.
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 307
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.4

PLO Card Replacement Procedure
The PLO (PH-CK16-A) card is mounted in Slot No. 21 or 23 within the TSWM0. Used together with
a direct digital interface circuit card, the card’s main function is to set up the clock synchronization on
the network. With this circuit card, the Local Node can be a clock subordinate office of the digital
network. Use the procedures below to replace the PLO card with a spare.

Note: The ACT/STBY of PLO can be changed over via a single MB key operation on the circuit card (ACT

side). Though its circuit is controlled by the GT (PH-GT09) card in TSWM0 via TSW I/O bus, the
switching system of PLO (LN) is not affected by the speech path system changeover, differing from other
echelons such as TSW, MUX, DLKC. Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6. If the system of PLO in TSWM0
is once changeover, the ACT/STBY of CLK in TSWM1 is also changed over.
Replacement Procedure

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the active PLO (PH-CK16-A) card, set the
MB key UP.

• PLO system is changed over from
ACT to STBY mode.

• OPE lamp on the PLO and CLK
cards in the same LN goes OFF.

Check the mate PLO's ACT mode.

Check the following lamp indications
on the mate PLO and CLK cards in the
same LN.
• OPE = Steady-green

Extract the PLO card to be replaced
from the TSWM0.

Set the keys on the new card according to
the card replaced.

A

CHAPTER 4
Page 308
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the new PLO card, set the MB key UP.

• OPE lamp on the new card is OFF.
Insert the new PLO card into the TSWM0.

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

• OPE lamp on the new card remains
OFF.
(Mate PLO = ON [green])

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 309
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.5

CLK Card Replacement Procedure
The CLK (PH-CK18) card is mounted in Slot No. 21 or 23 within the TSWM1. The card’s main
function is to supply basic clock signals to IMG2/3. This card receives clock signs from the PLO
located in TSWM0, thereby distributing the supplied 32,768 MHz CLK, 8 KHz FH (5msec x “n” FH
[for Wireless system]), PLO ACT signals and Hold tone to the TSW located in TSWM1. Use the
procedures below to replace the CLK card with a spare.

Note: The ACT/STBY of CLK(s) can be changed over when the PLO in TSWM0 is changed over (by flipping

the MB key on the active PLO card).
Replacement Procedure

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the active PLO (PH-CK16-A) card located in
TSWM0, set theMB key UP and then DOWN.

• OPE lamps on the mate CLK and
PLO cards are steady green.

Check the mate CLK's ACT mode.

On the CLK (PH-CK18) card to be replaced,
set the MB key UP.

Extract the CLK card to be replaced from the
TSWM1.

A

CHAPTER 4
Page 310
Issue 1

• OPE lamps on the CLK and PLO
cards goes OFF.

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the new CLK card, set the MB key UP.

• OPE lamp on the new card is OFF.
Insert the new CLK card into the TSWM1.

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

• OPE lamp on the new card remains
OFF.
(Mate CLK = ON [green])

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 311
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.6

PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure
The PWR SW (PH-PW14) card is mounted in Slot No. 00 or 01 within the TSWM0/1. The card’s main
function is to supply DC -48V operating power to the same TSWM circuit cards and also DC +5, -5 V
and +12 V output power to the MISC slots. Use the following procedures to replace the card with a
new one.

Replacement Procedure

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the PWR SW (PH-PW14) card, set the
SW key DOWN.

• P-ON lamp on the PWR SW card
goes OFF.
• ALM lamp on the PWR SW card
lights red.

Extract the PWR SW card to be replaced
from the TSWM.

On the new PWR SW card, set the SW key DOWN.

• P-ON lamp on the new card is OFF.
Insert the new PWR SW card into the TSWM.

On the new PWR SW card, set the SW key UP.

• ALM lamp on the PWR SW card
lights red.

• P-ON lamp on the new card lights
steady-green.
• ALM lamp on the PWR SW goes
OFF.

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 312
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

2.3.7

MISC Card Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

START

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the MISC card, set MB switch UP.

Extract the MISC card from its mounting slot.

• Keep MB switch UP.

Insert the new circuit card into the same
mounting slot.

On the MISC card, set MB switch DOWN.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 313
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3. PIM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
This Section covers the procedures for replacing circuit cards accommodated in the PIM (IMG0/1/2/3).
3.1 Precaution
•

This procedure is applied when replacing a faulty circuit card with a spare. It is also able to be applied
when checking a spare card.

•

There are functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be
replaced. As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for
the PIM. When a circuit card which has default switch setting has been replaced with a spare card, be
sure to make switch setting on the new circuit card in the same way as on the replaced card. Otherwise,
electronic components on the circuit card may be destroyed or the circuit card itself may fail to
function normally.

•

When handling a circuit card, be sure to use the field service kit as countermeasures against static
electricity. If you touch a circuit card without using the field service kit, electronic components like
an IC on the card may be destroyed by the static electricity electrified on the human body.

3.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout
The face layout of circuit cards mounted in the PIM is shown in Figure 4-14.
Universal Slots

PIM
05

06

07

08

09

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX0

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

PWR1

PWR0

04

LC/TRK

03

LC/TRK

02

LC/TRK

00 01

LC/TRK

Slot No.

Universal Slots

Note: This Section also covers the procedure to replace the SDT (PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB) card. The card can

be mounted in any of the universal slots (slots 04-12 or 15-23).
Figure 4-14 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of PIM

WARNING

Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the keys with extreme care.
By replacing a circuit card, the system will issue system messages and activate the related
alarm. Be sure to reset the indicated alarm after the replacement procedure is complete.
If the indicated alarm is cleared via the RALM/RALMN command, the system also clears
the whole contents of the system message. Be sure to print out the messages (by using the
DFTD command) BEFORE using the RALM/RALMN command.
ALM RST button on the TOPU is used to reset the alarm lamps only.

CHAPTER 4
Page 314
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3 Operating Procedures
The following sections provide operating procedures to replace circuit cards mounted in the PIM. Perform
the operations corresponding to each Reference Item specified in Table 4-3. The procedures assume that
the system adopts the dual configuration.
Table 4-3 PIM Circuit Cards and Reference Items
CIRCUIT CARD
FUNCTION NAME

REFERENCE ITEM

LC/TRK

Section 3.3.1, LC/TRK Circuit Card Replacement
Procedure

MUX

Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement Procedure

PWR

Section 3.3.3, PWR Card Replacement Procedure

HUB

Section 3.3.4, HUB Circuit Card Replacement
Procedure

SDT

Section 3.3.5, SDT Card Replacement Procedure

NDA-24307

REMARKS

CHAPTER 4
Page 315
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.1

LC/TRK Circuit Card Replacement Procedure

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the circuit card to be replaced,
set the MB switch UP.

Extract the circuit card from its mounting slot.

• Keep MB switch set at UP.
Insert the new card into its mounting slot.

On the new card, set MB switch DOWN.

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 316
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.2

MUX Card Replacement Procedure
The MUX (PH-PC36) card is mounted in Slot No. 13 and/or 14 of each Port Interface Module (PIM).
The card’s main function is to provide an interface between the CPR and Port Microprocessor (PM) of
the line/trunk circuit, and also to provide an interface for multiplexing/de-multiplexing of voice Pulse
Code Modulation (PCM) information and digital data information. Use the procedures below to
replace the MUX card with a spare:

Note: Execute the system changeover of MUX by using the MBR key operation on the active IOGT (PH-GT10)

card or by using the CMODI command. Before starting this task, be sure to confirm the system block
diagram shown in Figure 4-12, or Section 12, Chapter 6.
MUX Card Replacement Procedure
WARNING Apply extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit cards.

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the active IOGT (PH-GT10) card in ISWM, set
the MBR key UP. Then, return the key DOWN.

System Changeover. Check the following
lamp indications on the circuit cards to be
affected and ensure that they are all OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card) Note
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Check the ACT mode of the mate Speech Path
System.

Note: If the MUX card to be replaced
represents system status 0, all
the circuit cards with 0 status
are totally affected. Check the
whole cited cards' lamp
indications. (See Figure 4-12
and Figure 4-13.)
Check the following lamp indications on the
mate Speech Path block and ensure that they
are all a steady green:

On the MUX (PH-PC36) card to
be replaced, Set the MB switch UP.

At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)

A

At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)
MUX ACT lamp on the MUX card lights
red.
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 317
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Disconnect the cable for the MUX front
connector on the card to be replaced.

Extract card to be replaced from the mounted PIM.

Referring to the replaced card, set the keys on
the new card.

• MUX ACT lamp on the new card
lights red.

On the new card, set the MB key UP.

Insert the new card into the PIM.

Connect the disconnected cable to the
MUX front connector on the new card.

B

CHAPTER 4
Page 318
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

B
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Verify that the SYNC LED on the new card
lights green.

MBR (on the active IOGT card of ISW)

On the new MUX card, set the MB key DOWN.

Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card. Confirm
the new MUX card functions normally.

1

2

System Changeover
• Replaced MUX: STBY to ACT
• Mate MUX: ACT to STBY
Check the following lamp indications on the
Speech Path block to which the new MUX
card belongs and ensure that they are all
steady-green:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)
Check the following lamp indications on the
mate Speech Path block and ensure that they
are all OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

END

(Refer to Figure 4-12 and Figure 4-13.)

Note: This procedure assumes the Speech Path mode change is executed totally on a system basis. If the

change is required on a node basis, use the MBR key on that node’s GT (PH-GT09) card or CMODI/
CMOD command. For more details, refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 319
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.3

PWR Card Replacement Procedure
The PWR (PA-PW55-A/PA-PW55-B) and DPWR (PA-PW54-A/PA-PW54-B) cards are mounted respectively in Slot No. 1 and Slot No. 3 of each PIM. The card’s main function is to provide operating
power to the circuit cards accommodated in the PIM. The procedures to replace the PWR/DPWR card
are as follows.

Replacement Procedure

Turn ON the MB key on the PWR/DPWR card
to be replaced.

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

• OPE lamp on the card goes OFF.
Turn OFF the -48V SW on the card to be replaced.

Disconnect the power cable from the -48V IN
connector.

Extract the card to be replaced.

Turn OFF the -48V SW on the new card.

A

CHAPTER 4
Page 320
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Turn ON the MB key on the new card.

• OPE lamp on the new card is OFF.
Insert the new card into the PIM.

Connect the power cable to the -48V IN
connector.

Turn ON the -48V SW on the new card.

• OPE lamp on the new card lights
green.

Turn OFF the MB key on the card.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 321
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.4

HUB Circuit Card Replacement Procedure
The HUB (PA-M96) card is mounted in any universal slot of the PIM. This card provides the repeater
function based on ANSI/IEEE820.3.8. This card is also equipped with eight ports for 10 BASE-T cable
connection used for establishing Ethernet Link and/or connecting the MAT.

WARNING Replacement of a HUB card may result in a temporary shutoff of the Ethernet link. If this is
the case, take appropriate measures, such as CPU mode changeover, arrangement of 10 BASET cable connection, etc, may be necessary.
HUB Card Replacement Procedure
WARNING Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit cards.

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

If replacement affects current Ethernet status,
ensure CPU mode change or arrangement of
10 BASE-T cable connection.

On the HUB (PA-M96) card to be replaced,
set the MB key up.

Check the lamp indication of the mate HUB card.

Disconnect the 10 BASE-T cables from the front
connectors of the HUB card to be replaced

A

CHAPTER 4
Page 322
Issue 1

NDA-24307

• CPU mode change: Refer to
Section 12, Section 6.

• OPE lamp on the card goes OFF.

• OPE lamp on the mate HUB card
lights steady-green.

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Extract the HUB card from the universal slot of
the PIM.

Set the key on the new card, referring to the
card replaced.

Set the MB key on the new card UP.

• OPE lamp on the new card goes
OFF.

Insert the new card into the PIM.

Connect the disconnected 10 BASE-T cable(s) to
the connector(s) on the new card.

Set the MB key on the new DOWN.

• OPE lamp on the new card lights
green.

Confirm STxx lamp(s) on the new card
is lighting green.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 323
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.5

SDT Card Replacement Procedure
The SDT (PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB) card, mounted in a universal slot of a PIM, is used
to provide a 52M interface for the optical fiber lines. Use the following procedure
to replace the SDT card with a spare.

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

WARNING While this card is being replaced, the connected optical fiber line cannot be used.
Optical Fiber Cable Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

START

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

• ACT lamp on the PA-SDTA card goes
OFF. (When the card is provided in a
dual configuration, the card becomes
stand-by.)
The following occurs in call processing:

On the PA-SDTA card, turn ON Switch 4
of the P-SW key.

When card is provided in dual
configuration
All calls (including already established
calls plus newly attempted calls) can
normally be handled by the mate card.
When card is in single configuration,
or mate card is faulty in dual
configuration
Though any call attempt is rejected,
already established calls are not
affected. When any connection link
exists, the link is still maintained.
On the PA-SDTA card, set the MB key UP (=ON).

When card is in single configuration,
or mate card is faulty in dual
configuration
Already established calls (while in
speech)
lose
voice/tone.
Any
connection link is severed after a few
seconds.

A

CHAPTER 4
Page 324
Issue 1

• OPE lamp on the PA-SDTA card lights
red.
The following occur in call processing:

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A

Remove the optical fiber cable from the front
connector on the PA-SDTA card.

Connect the new optical fiber cable to the front
connector on the PA-SDTA card.

On the PA-SDTA card, set the MB key DOWN
(=OFF) and turn OFF Switch 4 of the P-SW key.

• OPE lamp on the PA-SDTA card
lights steady-green.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 325
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB Card Replacement Procedure

ATTENTION

START

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

• ACT lamp on the PA-SDTA card
goes OFF.

On the PA-SDTA card, turn ON Switch 4
of the P-SW key.

• Though any call attempt is rejected,
already established calls are safely
maintained. When any connection
link exists, the link is maintained.
Note: When the card is in a dual

configuration, perform this
for both system sides, in the
order of STBY → ACT.

By using the SPTS command, verify that no calls
are being handled by the SDT card.

On the PA-SDTA card, set the MB key UP (=ON).

• OPE lamp on the PA-SDTA card
lights red.
• When already established calls exist,
the connections lose voice/tone.
When any connection link exists, the
link is severed after a few seconds.

A
Note: When the card is in a dual

configuration, perform this
for both system sides ( ACT
and STBY).

CHAPTER 4
Page 326
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

A

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the PA-SDTB card, set the MB key UP (=ON).

• OPE lamp on the PA-SDTB card
lights red.
• When any connection link exists, the
nailed-down connection between the
FCH (PA-FCHA) and SDT (PASDTB) cards is cut off. Already
established calls, while in speech,
are all disconnected.

Extract both PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB cards,
simultaneously.

Remove the flat cables from the front connectors, I/O
and PCM, on both PA-SDTB and PA-SDTA cards.

When replacing the PA-SDTB, also remove MT24
TSW cables from all the front connectors on the card.

• Confirm that the MB key on the new
card is set UP (=ON). If the new card
is PA-SDTA, also confirm that
Switch 4 of the P-SW key is ON.

Referring to the card removed, perform
the switch settings on the new card.

B

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 327
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

ATTENTION

B

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Connect the disconnected flat cables to the connectors
on the new card and other PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB cards.

• OPE lamp on the new card lights
red.

When the new card is PA-SDTB, also connect the MT
24 TSW cables to all the required front connectors.

Insert both PA-SDTA/PA-SDTB cards (including new
card) simultaneously into the same slots of the PIM.

Note: When the card is in a dual
On the PA-SDTA card, set the MB key DOWN (=OFF).

On the PA-SDTA card, turn OFF Switch 4 of the
P-SW key.

On the PA-SDTB card, set the MB key DOWN (=OFF).

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 328
Issue 1

NDA-24307

configuration, perform this
action for both system sides (
ACT and STBY).
Note: When the card is in a dual

configuration, perform this
action for both system sides, in
the order of STBY → ACT.

• OPE lamp on the new card lights
steady-green.

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

3.3.6

DLMX Card Replacement Procedure
The DLMX (PA-PC94) card, accommodated in a universal slot of a PIM, is used to
collect the BLF information (associated with Attendant/Desk Console operation)
from DLKC cards of all nodes in the IPX-U system, and to send the collected data
to ATI cards of all nodes. When replacing this card, take the procedure below:

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Replacement Procedure

STA R T

O n the D LM X (P A -PC 94) card to be replaced,
set E lem ent 3 of "M N T" sw itch D O W N (=O N ).

NO

• ACT lamp on the card goes/
remains OFF.
(When the card is formally
active in a dual configuration,
the card is placed to ST-BY

Is the D LM X card
in a dual configuration?
Y ES

C heck the m ate D LM X card's "A C T" m ode.

O n the D LM X (P A-P C 94) card to be
replaced, set the M B key U P.

ACT lamp on the mate card
lights steady-green.

• OPE lamp on the card goes
OFF.

A

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 329
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

E xtract the D LM X card to be replaced
from the universal slot of the P IM .

O n the new D LM X (P A -P C 94) card, set the
sw itch setting, referring to the card replaced.

O n the new D LM X (P A -P C 94) card,
set the M B key U P .

Insert the new D LM X (P A -P C 94) card into the P IM .

• OPE lamp on the card lights
steady-green.

S et the M B key on the new card D O W N .

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 330
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4. ISWM ACCOMMODATING CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
This section explains the procedure for replacing circuit cards mounted in the ISWM.
4.1 Precautions
•

Use this procedure to replace a faulty circuit card with a spare or to check a spare card.

•

There are the functional switches (having set the default switch) on some of the circuit cards to be
replaced. As for switch setting on the circuit cards, confirm the circuit card mounting face layout for
the PIM. When a circuit card with a default switch setting is replaced with a spare card, always make
the switch setting on the new circuit card the same as on the replaced card. Otherwise, electronic
components on the circuit card may be destroyed, or the circuit card itself may fail to function
normally.

•

When handling a circuit card, always use the field service kit for countermeasures against static
electricity. Touching a circuit card without using the field service kit may destroy the card due to static
electricity on the human body.

4.2 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout
Figure 4-10 shows the face layout of the circuit cards mounted in the TSWM. The circuit cards marked
with * are optional.
ISWM

HSW01

TSW00

TWS01

TSW02

TSW03

10

11

12

13

14

15

16

17

18

19
HSW11

HSW00

09

HSW10

PWR1

08

TSW13

07

TSW12

06

TSW11

05

TSW10

04

PLO1

03

IOGT1

02

IOGT0

01

PLO0

0
PWR0

Slot No.

FRONT VIEW
PWRSW: PH-PW14

HSW: PU-SW01

TSW: PU-SW00

PLO: PH-CK16-A17-A

IOGT: PH-GT10

Figure 4-15 Circuit Card Mounting Face Layout of ISWM

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 331
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the key using extreme care.
During replacement of a circuit card, the system issues system messages and activates the related
alarm. Reset the indicated alarm after completing the replacement procedure.
If the indicated alarm is cleared via the RALM/RALMN command, the system also clears the
contents of the system message. Before using the RALM/RALMN command, print the messages
using the DFTD command.
Use the ALM RST button on the TOPU only to reset the alarm lamps.
4.3 Operating Procedures
The following section provide operating procedures to replace circuit cards mounted in the ISW. Perform
the operations corresponding to each reference item specified in Table 4-4. The procedures assume that
the system adopts the dual configuration.
Table 4-4 ISW Circuit Cards and Reference Items
CIRCUIT CARD
FUNCTION NAME

REFERENCE ITEM

IOGT

Section 4.3.1, IOGT Card Replacement Procedure

TSW

Section 4.3.2, TSW Card Replacement Procedure

HSW

Section 4.3.3, HSW Card Replacement Procedure

PLO

Section 4.3.4, PLO Card Replacement Procedure

PWR SW

CHAPTER 4
Page 332
Issue 1

Section 4.3.5, PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure

NDA-24307

REMARKS

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4.3.1

IOGT Card Replacement Procedure
The IOGT (PH-GT10) card is mounted in Slot No. 10 or 11 within the ISWM. This card provides
MISC/TSW I/O bus interfaces between the CPU and TSW, HSW, PLO cards within the ISWM. Figure
4-16 shows a system block diagram centering upon the CPU and it’s controlling IOGT. If the ACT/
STBY of IOGT is changed over, those of TSW, HSW (in ISW) and TSW, MUX, DLKC (in all LNs)
are also totally changed over. Follow the procedures below to replace an IOGT card with a spare.

Note: To replace the IOGT card, the STBY mode of the card (to be replaced) must be first confirmed. The mode

changeover is available by using the MBR key on the active IOGT card or by using the CMODI
command. See Figure 4-16.

IMG 0
Line/Trunk PM

HSW00

PM BUS

TSW03

PCM HW

TSW02

MUX

PM BUS

TSW01

MUX

PCM HW

TSW00

PM BUS

PM BUS

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

To TSW To TSW To TSW
of LN2 of LN3
of LN1

TSW00

HSW01

TSW01

IOGT

TSWM0

ISAGT
MISC

IOC

EMA

To PLO of
LN1 through 3

TSW02

MISC

IOC

TSW03

PLO

DLKC

PLO

To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

To MUX
(IMG1)

MUX

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

CLK

GT

GT

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

TSWM1

EMA

CPU
CPU

ISW

LANI

LANI

LN0
To LANI of
LN1 through 3

Fusion Link

< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >
ISAGT: PZ-GT13
LANI: PZ-PC19
HSW: PU-SW01
PLO: PH-CK16-A/17-A
< LN (Local Node) >
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13
DLKC: PH-PC20

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20
PLO: PH-CK16-A

IOGT: PH-GT10
EMA: PH-PC40
LANI: PZ-PC19
CLK: PH-CK18

TSW: PU-SW00
IOC: PH-IO24
GT: PH-GT09
EMA: PH-PC40

TSW: PH-SW12
IOC: PH-IO24

MUX: PH-PC36

Figure 4-16 System Block Diagram (IOGT and Other Speech Path Echelons)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 333
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

IOGT Card Replacement Procedure
WARNING Use extreme care when operating the keys on the DSP of CPR and PH-GT09 card.

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

If the card to be replaced is active, flip the MBR
key on the card OFF
ON
OFF

System Changeover: Check the following
lamp indications on the IOGT and other
circuit cards in the same Switching block
and ensure they are all OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)
Check the following lamp indications on
the mate IOGT card and other circuit
cards in the same mate block and ensure
they are all a steady green:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)

Confirm the mate IOGT's ACT mode.

At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

TSW ACT lamp on the IOGT card
remains OFF.

On the IOGT card to be replaced, set the
MBR key UP.

A

CHAPTER 4
Page 334
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the IOGT card to be replaced,
set the MB key UP.

• TSW ACT lamp on the IOGT card
lights red.

Extract the IOGT card to be replaced
from the ISWM.

On the new IOGT card, set the MB/MBR key UP,

• TSW ACT lamp on the new card
lights red.

Insert the new card into the ISWM.

• TSW ACT lamp on the IOGT card
goes OFF.

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

• TSW ACT lamp on the IOGT card
goes OFF.

Set the MBR key on the new card DOWN.

B

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 335
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

B
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

System Changeover: Check the following lamp
indications on the IOGT and other circuit cards
in the same Switching block are all steady
green:

Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card.
Confirm the new IOGT functions normally.

At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)
Check the following lamp indications on the
mate IOGT card and other circuit cards in the
same mate block are all OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

END

Note: The system changeover of Speech Path system can be executed also by using the CMODI command. For

details, refer to Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands.

CHAPTER 4
Page 336
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4.3.2

TSW Card Replacement Procedure
The TSW (PH-SW00) card is mounted in the Slot Nos. ranging from 04 to 07 and Slot Nos. 14 to 17
within the ISWM. Equipped with the Time Division Switch (TSW) and INT function, each circuit card
provides Time Slot (TS) switching for one Local Node (LN). In addition, used together with two PUSW01 (HSW) cards in pair, four PU-SW00 (TSW) cards achieve a maximum of 32,768 TS switching
for four LNs.

Note: To replace the TSW card, the STBY mode of the card (to be replaced) must be first confirmed. The mode

changeover is available by using the MBR key on the active IOGT card or by using the CMODI
command. See Figure 4-16.
TSW Card Replacement Procedure
WARNING Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit card.
START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

If the card to be replaced is active, flip the
MBR key on the active IOGT (PH-GT10)
card OFF ON
OFF

System Changeover: Check the following lamp
indications on the TSW and other circuit cards in the
same Switching block are all OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)

Check the ACT mode of the mate
Speech Path System.

At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)
Check the following lamp indications on the mate
TSW card and other circuit cards in the same mate
block are all a steady green:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)

On the TSW card to be replaced,
set the TSW MBR key UP.

At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

On the TSW card to be replaced,
set the TSW MB key UP.

• TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card remains OFF.
• TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card lights red.

A

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 337
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Extract the TSW card from the ISWM.

Set the key on the new card, referring to
the card replaced.

Set the TSW MBR and TSW MB keys on the
new card UP.

Insert the new card into the ISWM.

• TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card
lights red.

Confirm LN00~LN03, LN10~LN13, LN20~23, and
LN30~LN33 LEDs on the new card are lighting green.

Set the TSW MB key on the new card DOWN.

Set the TSW MBR key on the new card DOWN.

B

CHAPTER 4
Page 338
Issue 1

NDA-24307

• TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card
goes OFF.

• TSW ACT lamp on the TSW card
goes OFF.

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

B
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card. Confirm
the new card functions normally.

System Changeover: Check the following
lamp indications on the TSW and other
circuit cards in the same Switching block
are all steady green:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)
Check the following lamp indications on
the mate TSW card and other circuit cards
in the same mate block are all OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

END

Note: The system changeover of Speech Path system can be executed also by using the CMODI command. For

details, refer to Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 339
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4.3.3

HSW Card Replacement Procedure
The HSW (PH-SW01) card is mounted in the Slot Nos. 03, 04 and Slot Nos. 18 and 19. The main
functions of this card are as follows:

(a) The swithc omposition is T-T-S-T (T:Time division, S: Space division, T: Time division), and the
space division is composed with this circuit card.
(b) This circuit card collects the 16 highways of PCM data from TSW cards and sends 8 highways to
TSW cards by one card. It is used to perform 16 highways switching by two PU-SW01 cards.
Note: To replace the HSW card, the STBY mode of the card (to be replaced) must be first confirmed. The mode

changeover is available by using the MBR key on the active IOGT card or by using the CMODI command. See Figure 4-16.
HSW Card Replacement Procedure
WARNING Use extreme care when operating the keys on the circuit card.
START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

If the card to be replaced is active, flip the
MBR key on the active IOGT (PH-GT10)
card OFF ON
OFF

System Changeover: Check the following lamp
indications on the HSW and other circuit cards in the
same Switching block are all OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

Check the ACT mode of the mate
Speech Path System.

Check the following lamp indications on the mate
HSW card and other circuit cards in the same mate
block are all a steady green:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)

A

At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

CHAPTER 4
Page 340
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A

ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

• HSW ACT lamp on the HSW card
lights red.

On the HSW card to be replaced, set the
MB key UP.

Extract the HSW card from the ISWM.

Set the HSW MB keys on the new card UP.

• HSW ACT lamp on the HSW card
goes OFF.

Insert the new card into the ISWM.

Set the HSW MB keys on the new card DOWN.

• HSW ACT lamp on the HSW card
goes OFF.

B

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 341
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

B
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card in the
same block. Confirm the new card functions normally.

System Changeover: Check the following
lamp indications on the TSW and other
circuit cards in the same Switching block
are all steady green:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)
Check the following lamp indications on
the mate TSW card and other circuit cards
in the same mate block are all OFF:
At the ISW:
• TSW ACT (IOGT cards)
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• HSW ACT (HSW cards)
At the LN:
• TSW ACT (TSW cards)
• OPE/MB (DLKC card)
• MUX ACT (MUX cards)

END

Note: The system changeover of Speech Path system can be executed also by using the CMODI command. For

details, refer to Chapter 8, Maintenance Commands.

CHAPTER 4
Page 342
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4.3.4

PLO Card Replacement Procedure
The PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A) card is located in Slot No. 09 or 13 within the ISWM. Used together
with a different direct digital interface circuit card, the card’s main function is to set up the clock
synchronization on the network. Use the procedures below to replace the PLO card with a spare.

Note: The ACT/STBY of PLO can be changed over via a single MB key operation on the circuit card (ACT

side). Though its circuit is controlled by the IOGT (PH-GT10) card via TSW I/O bus, the switching
system of PLO (ISW) is not affected by the Speech Path system changeover, differing from other
echelons such as IOGT, TSW, and HSW. Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
Replacement Procedure

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the active PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A) card, set the
MB key UP.

• PLO system is changed over from
ACT to STBY mode.

• OPE lamp on the PLO card goes
OFF.

Check the mate PLO's ACT mode.

Check the following lamp indications
on the mate PLO cards:
• OPE = Steady-green
Extract the PLO card to be replaced
from the ISWM.

Set the keys on the new card according to
the card replaced.

A

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 343
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

A
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the new PLO card, set the MB key UP.

• OPE lamp on the new card is OFF.
Insert the new PLO card into the ISWM.

Set the MB key on the new card DOWN.

• OPE lamp on the new card remains
OFF.

END

CHAPTER 4
Page 344
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

4.3.5

PWR SW Card Replacement Procedure
The PWR SW (PH-PW14) card is mounted in Slot No. 00 or 01 within the ISWM. The card’s main
function is to supply DC -48V operating power to the same ISWM circuit cards and also DC +5, -5 V
and +12 V output power to the PLO cards. Use the following procedures to replace the card with a new
one.

Replacement Procedure

START
ATTENTION

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

On the PWR SW (PH-PW14) card, set the
SW key DOWN.

• P-ON lamp on the PWR SW card
goes OFF.
• ALM lamp on the PWR SW card
lights red.

Extract the PWR SW card to be replaced
from the ISWM.

On the new PWR SW card, set the SW key DOWN.

• P-ON lamp on the new card is OFF.
Insert the new PWR SW card into the ISWM.

On the new PWR SW card, set the SW key UP.

• ALM lamp on the PWR SW card
lights red.

• P-ON lamp on the new card lights
steady-green.
• ALM lamp on the PWR SW goes
OFF.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 345
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

5. FAN UNIT REPLACEMENT
This section explains how to replace the Fan Unit (FANU), which is fastened on the TOPU or inside the
dedicated fan box within the system. Because the fan is a vital device to protect the system from heated air, it
is recommended that the fan (a total of three per unit) be replaced at least every two years to guarantee its high
performance.
The mounting location of FANU differs, depending on the module configuration of each cabinet. When the
system consists of a total of three modules or less, the FANU is mounted on the TOPU of the cabinet.
Otherwise, the FANU is housed in the dedicated fan box in the center of the cabinet.

NEC

TOPU

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMX

TOPU

FAN BOX

NEAX 2400 IMX

FANU is
located here.

FRONT VIEW

////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////////
When FANU is mounted on TOPU

When FANU is mounted in FAN BOX

Figure 4-17 FANU Locations

Replacement Procedure: FANU on TOPU
When the FANU is mounted on the TOPU, perform the following replacement procedure. (Refer to Figure 418.):
STEP 1

Using a Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws. Lift away the top cover.

STEP 2

Turn OFF the PWR SW on the PZ-M369.

STEP 3

Remove the fan fuse (5A) on the PZ-M369.

STEP 4

Remove the fan cables from the fan connector and the connector(s) corresponding to the fan to
be replaced (for example, when replacing fan 0, disconnect the FC0 connector together with
the fan connector).

CHAPTER 4
Page 346
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Top Cover

PBX
Unscrew the top cover by using
a Phillips Screwdriver and
remove it from the TOPU.

FANU

.........
.........
......... .........
.........

.........
..............
..............
.........

NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

........
........
.....
.....
................... .....
.....
.....
...................
.....
........
........

.. .. ..

PZ-M369

NEAX 2400 IMS

NEC

1 Turn PWR SW "OFF"
OFF

PZ-M369

TH0

TH1

TH2

FAN

ON

FC0

FC1

FC0
FC2
FC2

TALM0 TALM1

OFF
Auto

3 Disconnect the FAN cable
from this power connector.

2 Remove this FAN fuse.

3 Disconnect the cable(s) and
the connector(s) here used for
the FAN to be replaced.

Figure 4-18 Preparation for FANU Replacement (Fans on TOPU)

STEP 5

Remove the four screws fastening the fan to be replaced. Refer to Figure 4-19.

Note: The removed screws are used in STEP 7 again. Do not dispose of them when unscrewing the fan here.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 347
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

STEP 6

Remove the unscrewed fan from the FANU.

STEP 7

Fasten the new fan with the removed screws.

STEP 8

Connect the new fan cables to the fan connector and the connector(s) disconnected in STEP 4.

STEP 9

Fix the fan fuse (5A) onto the PZ-M369.

STEP 10 Set the PWR SW on the PZ-M369 to the AUTO position.
Note: The switch setting of the PWR SW can be ON, depending on the location conditions of the system.

STEP 11 Attach the top cover again to the original location.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PZ-M369

......
...
......
............
....... ...
...
......

.. .. .
.

......
...
......
...
......
...
... ...
...
...
...
...

......
..
......
...... ...
......
.. ......
......
...... ...
.....
.... . ...
...
...
..
...
..
......
...
..
...
..
..
....

FANU

TOPU
PBX

(FAN)

(FAN)

Figure 4-19 How to Replace FANU (Fans on TOPU)

CHAPTER 4
Page 348
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Replacement Procedure: FANU in Fan Box
When the FANU is mounted in the fan box, perform the following replacement procedures:
STEP 1

Remove the front cover of the fan box. Then, extract the FANU.

STEP 2

Turn OFF the PWR SW on the PZ-M369. (Refer to Figure 4-20.)

STEP 3

Remove the fan fuse (5A) on the PZ-M369.

STEP 4

Remove the fan cables from the fan connector and the connector(s) corresponding to the fan to
be replaced (for example, when replacing Fan 1, disconnect the FC0 connector together with
the fan connector).

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

PBX
NEC

PZ-M369

NEAX 2400 IMS

FAN BOX

Remove the Front Cover
and pull out the FANU.

Front Cover

1 Turn PWR SW OFF
OFF

TH0

TH1

TH2

FAN

These dotted squares indicate the fans.
They reside in the back side of PZ-M369.

ON

FC0

FC1

PZ-M369

FC0
FC2

TALM0 TALM1

OFF
Auto

3 Disconnect the FAN cable
from this connector.

2 Remove this FAN fuse.

3 Disconnect the FAN cable(s) and
the connector(s) here used for the
FAN to be replaced.

Figure 4-20 Preparation for FANU Replacement (Fans in Fan Box)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 349
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

STEP 5

Take off the four screws fastening the fan to be replaced. (Refer to Figure 4-21.)

Note: The removed screws are used in STEP 7 again. Do not dispose of them when unscrewing the fan here.

STEP 6

Remove the unscrewed fan from the FANU.

STEP 7

Fasten the new fan with the removed screws.

STEP 8

Connect the new fan cables to the fan connector and the connector(s) disconnected in STEP 4.

STEP 9

Fix the fan fuse (5A) again onto the PZ-M369.

STEP 10 Insert the FANU into the fan box and fasten it with the two screws.
STEP 11 Set the PWR SW on the PZ-M369 to the AUTO position.
Note: The switch setting of the PWR SW can be ON, depending on the location conditions of the system.

STEP 12 Attach the front cover to the original location.
PBX

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

FAN power cable

PZ-M369
(FAN)

FAN BOX

FAN BOX

FAN power cable

(FAN)

FAN BOX

Figure 4-21 How to Replace FANU (Fans in Fan Box)

CHAPTER 4
Page 350
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

6. CPR COOLING FAN REPLACEMENT
This section explains how to replace a Cooling Fan in the back side of the CPR. This procedure is necessary
when a fault is detected in the Cooling Fan. Because the fan is a vital device to protect the CPR from heated
air, it is also recommended that the fan be replaced at least every two years, even if a fault is not detected.
STEP 1

Set the CPU, whose rack houses the fan to be replaced, in STBY mode via the MBR key on
the DSP (Refer to Figure 4-22.) Note

Note: For the ACT/STBY changeover of the CPU, see Chapter 6.

STEP 2

Disconnect the power alarm cable from the PALM connector on PZ-PW92.

STEP 3

Turn OFF the PWR SW on the PZ-PW92 (Refer to Figure 4-22.)
PZ-IO27

PZ-GT13 (ISAGT)

Note 2
SW

HDD MB

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

ON

MBR

FDD

IMG1

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT0
1

2

3

IMG2 IMG3
STATUS

4

ON
OFF

5A
SYSTEM SELECT1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

OUT PWR

SENSE
OFF

2

4 6
C

A

E

0

PALM
SYSTEM SELECT2
1

ON

ON
IN PWR

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

CPURST

OFF

OFF
SLOT No.

0

1

2

3

4

PZ-PC19 (LANI)

PZ-PW92

5

6

PZ-GT20 (ISAGT)

Note 1

Note 1: PZ-GT20 is located in LN only.
Note 2: In place of PZ-I027, the CPR may be equipped with PZ-I028 which does not have the MB key.
Figure 4-22 CPR Face Layout

STEP 4

Disconnect the power, bus, and Ethernet cables from the relevant connectors.

•

Power cables from OUTPWR, INPWR connectors on PZ-PW92

•

Bus cables from the front connectors on PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20

•

Ethernet (UTP CTG5 ST CA-n) cables from the front connectors on the PZ-PC19.

STEP 5

Remove the front bracket, and then take off the four screws fastened onto the CPU. (Refer to
Figure 4-23.)

STEP 6

Extract the CPR from the LPM. (Refer to Figure 4-23.)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 351
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

By using the Phillips screwdriver, remove the four screws. Then, extract the CPR with particular care.
PBX

....
......
5A

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

8

E

2

6

LPM

SLOT

No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

...
.......
5A

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

E

2

6

1

1

SLOT

No.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6

CPR

Figure 4-23 Extraction of CPR from LPM

STEP 7

Disconnect the fan cable from the connector in the backbone of CPR.

Note: The Cooling Fan is located in the backbone of CPR and the cable connector lies in its right side. Refer

to Figure 4-24.
Connector for Cooling FAN Cable
CPR

Cooling FAN

PZ-M14

Figure 4-24 Rear View of CPR

STEP 8

CHAPTER 4
Page 352
Issue 1

Loosen the two screws fastening the box that contains the fan inside. Slightly lift the box and
remove it from the CPR. Refer to Figure 4-24 and Figure 4-25.
NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

STEP 9

Take off the four screws and remove the Cooling Fan from the CPR. Refer to Figure 4-25.

STEP 10 Fasten the new Cooling Fan and CPR with the removed screws. Then, connect the fan cable
again. Refer to Figure 4-25.
STEP 11 Connect the fan cable again and insert the CPR back into the LPM. Refer to Figure 4-23 and
Figure 4-24.
STEP 12 Fasten the CPR and LPM with the four screws.
STEP 13 Connect the disconnected power, bus, and Ethernet cables to the relevant connectors.
STEP 14 Turn ON the SW key on the PZ-PW92.
STEP 15 Connect the disconnected power alarm cable to the PALM connector on the PZ-PW92.
STEP 16 Analyze the indicated system message. The message displayed when the PWR SW on the PZPW92 was turned OFF.
STEP 17 Clear the indicated ALM and confirm that the ALM lamp is lit again, indicating that the
Cooling Fan is replaced securely.

REAR
FRONT

Loosen, not remove, the screws.
CPR

Figure 4-25 How to Remove the Cooling Fan

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 353
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

7. FUSE REPLACEMENT
The system uses the fuses shown in Figure 4-26 as a protection against an overload resulting from a short
circuit.

1.5A

25A

12.5V

Figure 4-26 Kind of Fuse

When excessive current is applied to a PWR circuit card, the related fuse is blown. The blown fuse after a fault
can be confirmed as shown in Figure 4-27.

If a fuse is blown,
this area turns white.

A normal fuse

A fuse after blown fault

Figure 4-27 Fuse After Blown Fault

The purpose of fuses is to let them blow before the components are damaged. If any fuse gets blown, replace
it immediately with a new one using the following procedure:
(1) Confirm the blown fuse via the system message [6-A] or MJ lamp on the top of IMG 0/ISW.
(2) Replace the fuse with a new one, referring to Figure 4-28 and Figure 4-29.
(3) Determine the cause of the blown fault, referring to Figure 4-30 (case of RGU fuse) or Figure 4-31 (DC48V fuse.)

CHAPTER 4
Page 354
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

The following figures show the location of fuses within the system. In the figures, the fuses are indicated
by or .

PA-PW 54-A/
PA-PW 54-B

PBX [Front View ]

NEC

NEAX 2400 IM S

25A

5.0A
0.5A
25A

PZ-M 369

5.0A

PIM
PA-PW 55-A/
PA-PW 55-B

5.0A
0.5A
25A

.....
.....

LPM
.....
.....

5.0A

3.2A 5.0A

Note

PZ-PW 92

Note

PZ-M 377

Figure 4-28 Fuse Locations in LPM/PIM/FANU/BASEU
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 355
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

In the TSWM, the fuse shown in Figure 4-29 is used for the PWR SW (PH-PW14) card, which is housed in
Slot No. 00 and/or 01.
Note: The PH-PW14 card is also used in Slot No. 00 and/or 01 of ISWM.

PBX (IMG1/2)

PH-PW14
(PWR SW)

TSWM

FUSE: 15A

Front View

Figure 4-29 Fuse Location on PWR SW Card (TSWM/ISWM)

CHAPTER 4
Page 356
Issue 1

NDA-24307

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Perform the procedure in Figure 4-30 to confirm the cause of the RGU fuse blown fault.

Start

Visual check: No pin contacting
or backboard melting?

OPE Lamp (green) of
each LC card remains lit?

No

Yes
No

1. Turn ON (UP) the MB key
on the LC card.
2. Remove the card from the PIM.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one.

Replace the blown fuse with a new
one. The fuse is blown again?
Yes

No

Perform station-to-station
connections within the PIM.
Is any fuse blown?
Yes
Fault of LC card that accompanied
the fuse blowing.

Probable Cause: Not confirmed.
Needs further observation of the fault

No

The replaced fuse
is blown again?

Turn ON (UP) the MB
keys on all LC cards,
and remove them from the
PIM. (Only PWR cards are
inside the PIM)

No

Yes

Perform station-to-station
connections within the PIM. No
Is any fuse blown?

Turn ON (UP) the MB
keys on the whole LC cards,
and remove them from the
PIM. (Only PWR cards are
inside the PIM)

Replace the blown fuse
with a new one.

Yes

Fault of LC card
that was removed

Fault in LC card that accompanied
the fuse blowing.

The replaced fuse is
blown again?

Replace the blown fuse
with a new one.

Yes
No

No

Insert the removed cards
one by one (into the PIM).
Is any fuse blown?

The replaced fuse
is blown again?
Yes
Replace the PWR card

Yes

Fault in LC card that accompanied
the fuse blowing.

Fuse is still blown?

No

Yes
Fault of PWR card.

Perform system initialization
after inserting all removed cards.

There is a short circuit
on the backboard of the PIM.

Figure 4-30 RGU Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 4
Page 357
Issue 1

UNIT/CIRCUIT CARD REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE

Perform the procedure in Figure 4-31 to confirm the cause of the DC-48V fuse blown fault.

Start

Visual check: No pin contacting
or backboard melting?

No

OPE Lamps (green) of
LC/TRK/NCU cards remain lit?
Yes

1. Turn ON (UP) the MB key
on the circuit card.
2. Remove the card from the PIM.
3. Replace the fuse with a new one.

The replaced fuse
is blown again?

No

Yes
LPM / TSWM / ISWM / PIM

Make sure in which module
the fuse has blown

Fault of circuit card
that was removed

Turn ON (UP) the MB
keys on the whole circuit
cards, and remove them from
the PIM. (Only PWR cards
are inside the PIM)

Turn ON (UP) the MB
keys on the whole circuit
cards, and remove them from
the PIM. (Only PWR cards
are inside the PIM)

Replace the blown fuse
with a new one.

Replace the blown fuse
with a new one.

No

Insert the removed cards
one by one (into the PIM).
Is there any fuse blowing?

The replaced fuse
is blown again?

No

Yes

Yes
Insert the removed cards
one by one (into the PIM).
Is any fuse blown?

No
Fault of circuit card that
accompanied the fuse blown.

Replace the PWR card

Yes

Fault of circuit card that
accompanied the fuse blown.

The fuse is still blown?

No

Yes
Fault of PWR card.

Perform system initialization
after inserting all removed cards.

There is a short circuit on the
backboard of the PIM.

Figure 4-31 DC -48V Fuse Blown Fault Flowchart

CHAPTER 4
Page 358
Issue 1

NDA-24307

Perform system initialization
after inserting all removed cards.

CHAPTER 5

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

This chapter provides information on how to repair the fault(s) within the system. If any of the components or
equipment listed in Table 5-1 has a failure, move on to the repair procedure explained for each faulty condition.
Table 5-1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Referenc e
FAULTY ITEM
Line Fault

FAULTY SITUATION
DP/PB Telephone

Dterm

REFERENCE SECTION

Dial tone is not heard.

Section 1.3, Line Fault - When Dial
Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

Dialing results in a wrong
connection.

Section 1.4, Line Fault - When
Dialing Results in a Wrong
Connection

Bell does not ring.

Section 1.5, Line Fault - When Bell
Does Not Ring

Answer/speech cannot be
made.

Section 1.6, When Call Cannot Be
Answered and Speech Cannot Be
Made

• Dterm cannot be operated. Section 1.7, Dterm Fault
• Operations are abnormal.

Trunk Fault

• No connections can be set up.
• PB/DP signals are erroneously received or set out
from ORT/SND.

Section 2.3, Trunk (ORT, SND,
CFT) Fault and Section 2.4, Trunk
(COT, TLT, DTI) Fault

• No three-way calling can be made on CFT, or noise
gets in a established connection.
• A connection results in no speech.
• Noise gets in a established connection.
ATTCON/DESKCON

• No speech can be made.
• No control operations can be made.

Unit Fault

Section 3.3, ATTCON/DESKCON
Fault

Faults related to speech.

Section 4.2, Unit Fault - Fault
Related to Speech

Dial tone is not heard.

Section 4.3, Unit Fault - When Dial
Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

The ACT MUX card side has become faulty and system
changeover has been executed.

Section 4.4, Unit Fault - ACT-Side
MUX Card Is Faulty and System
Has Changed Over

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 359
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES
Table 5-1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference (Continued)
FAULTY ITEM
Speech System Fault
(LN)

FAULTY SITUATION
Faults related to speech.

Section 5.2, Speech Path System
Fault - Fault Related to Speech

Dial tone is not heard.

Section 5.3, Speech Path System
Fault - When Dial Tone (DT)
Cannot Be Heard

STBY side is faulty.

Section 5.4, Speech Path System
Fault (LN) - STBY Side Has
Become Faulty

Speech Path System Fault Fault related to speech.
(Whole System/ISW)

Control System Fault

Alarm Indication Fault

Power Supply Fault

Fan Unit (FANU) Fault

REFERENCE SECTION

Section 6.2, Speech Path System
Fault (Whole System/ISW) - Fault
Related to Speech

ACT side becomes faulty intermittently.

Section 6.3, Speech Path System
Fault (Whole System/ISW) - ACT
side becomes Faulty Intermittently

STBY side becomes faulty intermittently.

Section 6.4, Speech Path System
Fault (Whole System/ISW) - STBY
side becomes Faulty Intermittently

Clock is faulty.

Section 6.5, PLO Fault

Fault occurs occasionally at the ACT side.

Section 7.2, Control System Fault Fault Occurs Intermittently

STBY side is faulty.

Section 7.3, Control System Fault STBY Side is Faulty

No fault indication is made on the Alarm Indicator
Panel.

Section 8.2, Fault of Alarm
Indicating Panel

Fault is not detected.

Section 8.3, Fault That Cannot Be
Detected

Fuse for RGU/-48V has blown.

Section 9.2, Fuse Blown Fault

The circuit breaker of PWR supply is off.

Section 9.3, Circuit Breaker OFF
Fault in PWR Supply

Alarm lamp on the PWR supply is lit.

Section 9.4, Fault of Alarm Lamps
on PWR Supply

• Fans are not activated even if the temperature has
risen higher than a predetermined degree.

Section 10.2, Fan Unit Fault

• Fans are not activated even if the FAN START switch
is set to AUTO position.
Tone Fault

CHAPTER 5
Page 360
Issue 1

Tone is distorted.

Section 11.2, Tone Fault

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES
Table 5-1 Fault Repair Procedure Quick Reference (Continued)
FAULTY ITEM
System Down Fault

CCIS Line Fault

FAULTY SITUATION
Cause for the fault cannot be identified.

Section 12.1, When Cause for Fault
Cannot Be Identified

The faulty circuit card can be detected.

Section 12.2, When Faulty Circuit
Cards Can Be Assumed From
System Message

• A Specific CCH/CCT card is faulty. When the signal
transmission line is a digital line, transmission/
receiving of control signals cannot be performed.

Section 13.3, Specific CCH/CCT
Card Is Faulty and
Section 13.4, Fault of CCH, DTI
and Related Flat Cable

• When the signal transmission line is an analog line,
transmission/receiving of control signals cannot be
performed.
ISDN Line Fault

Hard Time Clock Fault

REFERENCE SECTION

• When the signal transmission line is a digital line,
transmission/receiving of control signals cannot be
performed.

Section 14.3, Specific DCH/PRT
Card Is Faulty
Section 14.4, Fault of DCH, DTI
and Related Flat Cable

EMA card is faulty.

Section 15, Hard Time Clock Fault

• A specific DCH/PRT card is faulty.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 361
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1. LINE FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where only one specific station line is in any of the
faulty conditions listed in Table 5-2.
Table 5-2 Line Fault Situation
FAULTY SITUATION

REFERENCE SECTION

When Dial Tone cannot be heard

Section 1.3, Line Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

When dialing results in a wrong connection

Section 1.4, Line Fault - When Dialing Results in a Wrong
Connection

When the bell does not ring

Section 1.5, Line Fault - When Bell Does Not Ring

When call cannot be answered and speech cannot be
made

Section 1.6, When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech
Cannot Be Made

Dterm Fault

Section 1.7, Dterm Fault

CHAPTER 5
Page 362
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.1

Check Point
When repairing a line fault, consider the following items:

(1) Check alarm lamps on line circuit cards.
(2) When an outgoing call cannot be originated to a specific line/trunk or when an incoming call cannot be
terminated from a specific line/trunk, check Tenant Restriction Data (assigned via ATNR command) and
Route Restriction Data (assigned via ARSC/ARSCN command).
1.2

Line Control
Each line in a specific Line circuit (LC/ELC) card is controlled by the PM in that line circuit card. The
line circuit cards are controlled from the CPU via the MUX. Figure 5-1 shows the control route of line
circuit cards.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 363
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

MDF

IMG0/1 (LN0)

LC/ELC

Control Signal

LT Cable

Control Signal

LC

PM

MUX

LT Cable
LC

Ordinary Telephone/Dterm
LC/ELC

Control Signal

LT Cable

Control Signal

LC

PM

MUX

LT Cable
LC

Ordinary Telephone/Dterm

Control Signal
TSW00/TSW01
(TSW10/TSW11)

LC/ELC
TSW02/TSW03
(TSW12/TSW13)

Control Signal

LT Cable

Control Signal
PM

MUX

LC

LT Cable

GT

LC

Ordinary Telephone/Dterm
LC/ELC

Control Signal

LT Cable

Control Signal
PM

MUX

LC

LT Cable
LC

Ordinary Telephone/D term
TSW00/TSW01
(TSW10/TSW11)

Control Signal
TSW02/TSW03
(TSW12/TSW13)
GT

IMG2/3 (LN0)

ISAGT-A

To LN1

To LN2

To LN3

ISAGT-B

CPU

ISW-LN TSW CA-n
Cables

LANI

CPR
(LN0)

: Circuit Card
: Speech Path
< LN: Local Node >

TSW00(10)

TSW01(11)

TSW02(12)

TSW03(13)

TSW
MUX
GT
ISAGT-A
ISAGT-B
LANI

HSW
Control Signal
IOGT

:
:
:
:
:
:

PH-SW12
PH-PC36
PH-GT09
PZ-GT13
PZ-GT20
PZ-PC19

< ISW: Inter-node Switch >
CPU
LANI

ISAGT

CPR

TSW
HSW
IOGT
ISAGT
LANI

ISW

Ether

Figure 5-1 Controlling LC/ELC Circuit Cards and Speech Path

CHAPTER 5
Page 364
Issue 1

NDA-24307

:
:
:
:
:

PU-SW00
PU-SW01
PH-GT10
PZ-GT13
PZ-PC19

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.3

Line Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is

faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used
until the replacement is complete.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
When OPE lamp on the LC circuit card
does not illuminate

Confirm MB switch of the LC circuit card is in
ON position (UP).
Use ASDT command to confirm that station
data in the LC circuit card is assigned.
Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

When BL lamp for each line is flashing or
illuminating on the LC circuit card

Confirm MB switch of the LC circuit card is in
ON position (UP side).
Use MBST command to confirm LC circuit
card has not been placed into make-busy state.
Use ASDT command to check the station data
assignment.

A
Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 365
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A

Check the faulty line on the MDF.

Isolate the faulty line to the in-house wiring
side and to the system side.
Connect the test telephone to the system side
and check to see if dial tone can be heard.

When Dial Tone (DT) is heard

Check the in-house wirings.
Replace the station telephone set with a spare.

When no DT or side tone is
heard

Check LT cables.
Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 366
Issue 1

When DT is not heard, but side
tone can be heard.

NDA-24307

Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.4

Line Fault - When Dialing Results in a Wrong Connection

Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is

faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used
until the replacement is complete.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
When a call addressed to a specific station
has terminated to another station

Check to see if Call Forwarding-All Calls data
has been deleted.

Check the faulty line on the MDF.

On the MDF, isolate the faulty line to the inhouse wiring side and to the system side.
Connect the test telephone to the system side.

Repeat station-to-station connections and
check to see if the connection is established
normally.

When the dialed station is called

The station telephone set is faulty. Replace the
station telephone set with a spare.

When
occurs

Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

a

wrong

connection

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 367
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.5

Line Fault - When Bell Does Not Ring

Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is

faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used
until the replacement is complete.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Call the faulty station line by Station-toStation calling and check to see if the bell
of the telephone rings.

Replace the telephone set and check to see if
its bell rings.

Check the faulty line on the MDF.

Isolate the faulty line to the in-house wiring
side and to the system side.
Connect the test telephone to the system side.
Call the faulty line by station-to-station
calling and check to see if the bell rings.

When the bell does not ring

Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

When the bell rings

The in-house wiring side is faulty. Confirm
that the A wire is not short-circuiting with
ground.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 368
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.6

When Call Cannot Be Answered and Speech Cannot Be Made

Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is

faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be used
until the replacement is complete.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Check the faulty line on the MDF.

Isolate the faulty line to the in-house wiring
side and to the system side.
Connect the test telephone to the system side.
Call the faulty line by station-to-station
calling.

When speech can be made

Replace the telephone set with a spare.

When speech cannot be made

Replace the LC circuit card with a spare.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 369
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

1.7

Dterm Fault

Note 1: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line

is faulty, no other lines in that circuit card can be
used until the replacement is complete.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START

When OPE lamp on the ELC circuit card
does not illuminate

Confirm that MB switch of the ELC circuit
card is in ON position (UP).

Use ASDT command to confirm that station
data in the ELC circuit card is assigned.

Replace the ELC circuit card with a spare.

When BL lamp for each line is flashing or
illuminating on the ELC circuit card

Confirm that MB switch of the ELC circuit
card is in ON position (UP).

Use MBST command to confirm that ELC
circuit card has not been placed into makebusy state.
Use ASDT command to check the station data
assignment.

Replace the ELC circuit card with a spare.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 370
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Check the faulty line on the MDF.

Isolate the faulty line to the in-house wiring side
and to the system side.
Connect the test Dterm to the system side.
Confirm speech by Station to Station calling.

When no speech can be made

Check LT cables.
Replace ELC circuit card with a spare.

When speech can be made

Check to see if the modular plug is firmly
connected with the Dterm.
Check the wiring inside the rosette.
Check the in-house wiring for any abnormality.
Replace the Dterm with a spare.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 371
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

2. TRUNK FAULT
This paragraph explains the fault repair procedure when a fault, shown in Table 5-3, has occurred to a specific
trunk.
Table 5-3 Trunk Fault Situation
TRUNK

FAULTY SITUATION

ORT

No connection can be set up.
PB/DP signals are erroneously received or cannot be received.

SND

No connections can be set up.
PB/DP signals are erroneously sent out or cannot be sent out.

CFT

No connections can be set up.
No three-way calling can be made.
Noise gets in a established connection.

COT
TLT
DTI

No connections can be set up.
A connection results in no speech.
Noise gets in an established connection.

2.1

REFERENCE SECTION
Section 2.3, Trunk (ORT, SND,
CFT) Fault

Section 2.4, Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI)
Fault

Check Point
When repairing a trunk fault, consider the following items:

(1) Check alarm lamps on trunk circuit cards.
(2) When an outgoing call cannot be originated to a specific trunk or when an incoming call cannot be
terminated from a specific trunk, check Tenant Restriction Data (assigned via ATNR command) and
Route Restriction Data (assigned via ARSC/ARSCN command).
(3) Three-Way Conference Trunk (CFT) is on the MUX (PH-PC36) circuit cards. If a three-way conference
call cannot be established, check the MUX cards.
(4) If the present timing for supervising the trunk/sender status is considered to be responsible for the fault,
change the timing. The specifications for timings that can be changed with respect to trunks and senders
are shown in Table 5-4 and Table 5-5.

CHAPTER 5
Page 372
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Table 5-4 Timings for Trunks
ITEMS FOR STATUS
SUPERVISION
1

Detection of Call
Termination

CONDITIONS FOR SUPERVISION

TIMING SPECIFICATIONS

• Ring Down System
Detection by ringing signal (20Hz) from
the opposite office.

Ringing signal of more than four
cycles is detected within 800 ms.

Detection within 16 ms after call
• Loop System
Detection by loop from the opposite office. termination.
• E&M System
Detection by incoming signal (ground or
–48V) on E (RG2) lead.
2

Acknowledge Signal
Sending

• Wink Signal
• Delay Start

160 ms (standard)
Timing can be assigned using ARTD/
ARTDN command.

Detection of Release at the
time of Incoming
Connection

• E&M System

288 ms (standard)

4

Timing for Restricting Call
Origination after Release

After release of the user’s trunk or the trunk at
the opposite office has been detected, a new
call origination is restricted.

5

Seizure of Opposite Office

• Loop System
Closure of DC loop.

3

• Loop System
160 ms (standard)
Timing can be assigned using ARTD/
ARTDN command.
3070 ms (standard)
Timing can be assigned using ARTD/
ARTDN command.

• E&M System
Supply of outgoing call signal (ground or
–48V) onto M (DL) lead.
6

7

Detection of Acknowledge
Signal

• Wink Signal

Timing is assigned using ARTD/
ARTDN command.

Trunk Hold Time

Even if answer signal has not reached from the • If DP Signal is 10 sec. (standard)
opposite office, the call is regarded as
after dial pulses are sent out
answered.
Timing can be assigned using
ARTD/ARTDN command.

• Delay Start

• If PB Signal is 30 sec. (standard)
after seizure of the trunk
Timing can be assigned using
ASYD SYS 1 Index 156 (only
when 2nd Dial Tone System).
8

Detection of Release at the
time of Outgoing
Connection

608 ms (standard)
• Loop System
Detection of polarity reversal across tip and Timing can be assigned using ARTD/
ARTDN command.
ring.
• E&M System
Detection of Release Signal (ground or
–48V) on E lead.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 373
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Table 5-5 Timings for Senders
ITEMS FOR STATUS
SUPERVISION

CONDITIONS FOR SUPERVISION

TIMING SPECIFICATIONS

1

Sender Acknowledge Wait
Timer

Timing limit for waiting to receive connection 4 sec. (standard)
acknowledgement signal from the opposite
Timing can be assigned using ASYD
office after seizing the opposite office.
SYS 1 Index 130 command.

2

Sender Prepause Timer

Time from sender seizure till sending of the
DP: 3 sec. (standard)
1st digit where connection acknowledgment is PB: 2.5 sec. (standard)
made by interface with the opposite office.
Timing can be assigned using ASYD
SYS 1 Index 131 command.

3

Sender Inter-digit Timer

Inter-digit timing for the numbers to be sent
out by the sender.

• For DP
10 pps: 860 ms (standard)
20 pps: 460 ms (standard)
Timing can be assigned using
ASYD SYS 1 Index. 132
command.
• For PB
60 ms/120 ms (to be selected by
ONSG of ARTD/ARTDN
command.)
Timing can be changed using
ASYD SYS 1 Index 133
command.

CHAPTER 5
Page 374
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

2.2

Trunk Control
Trunk circuit cards are controlled from the CPU via the MUX. Each trunk line in a specific trunk circuit
card is controlled by the Port Microprocessor (PM) in a trunk circuit card. Figure 5-2 shows the control
route of the trunk circuit card.
MDF

IMG0/1 (LN0)

ORT/SND
Control Signal

TRK

PM

MUX

TRK

Control Signal
COT/TLT
LT Cable

Control Signal

TRK

PM

Note

LT Cable

CFT

TRK

Control Signal
TSW00/TSW01
(TSW10/TSW11)

ORT/SND
TSW02/TSW03
(TSW12/TSW13)

Control Signal
GT

PM

MUX

Network

TRK

TRK

Control Signal
COT/TLT
LT Cable

Control Signal

PM

Note

TRK

LT Cable

CFT

TRK

TSW00/TSW01
(TSW10/TSW11)

Control Signal
TSW02/TSW03
(TSW12/TSW13)
GT

IMG2/3 (LN0)

ISAGT-A

To LN1

To LN2

To LN3

ISAGT-B

: Circuit Card

CPU

ISW-LN TSW CA-n
Cables

LANI

CPR
(LN0)

: Speech Path
< LN: Local Node >

TSW00(10)

TSW01(11)

TSW02(12)

TSW
MUX
GT
ISAGT-A
ISAGT-B
LANI

TSW03(13)

HSW
Control Signal
IOGT

CPU
LANI

PH-SW12
PH-PC36
PH-GT09
PZ-GT13
PZ-GT20
PZ-PC19

< ISW: Inter-node Switch >
TSW
HSW
IOGT
ISAGT
LANI

ISAGT

CPR

:
:
:
:
:
:

ISW

:
:
:
:
:

PU-SW00
PU-SW01
PH-GT10
PZ-GT13
PZ-PC19

Note: Eight CFTs are provided on the MUX
(PH-PC36) cards.

Ether

Figure 5-2 Controlling Trunk Circuit Cards and Speech Path
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 375
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

2.3

Trunk (ORT, SND, CFT) Fault

Note: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line is faulty, no

other lines in that circuit card can be used until the
replacement is complete.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
When only one line is faulty

Place the faulty line into make-busy state.

For ORT/SND, set MB switch of
each circuit to ON position.
For CFT, place it into make-busy
state using command MBTK.

Replace the circuit card with spare.

Set MB switch UP and extract the circuit card
from its mounting slot.
Set MB switch of the new circuit card UP and
insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
Set MB switch DOWN.
If the line is under make-busy state, cancel it.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 376
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

2.4

Trunk (COT, TLT, DTI) Fault

Note 1: If a circuit card is replaced because only one line

is faulty, any other lines in that circuit card cannot
be used until the replacement is complete.
Note 2: If the polarities of the external line is reversed, it

is detected in the form of Trunk Ineffective Hold.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
When OPE lamp on the trunk circuit card
does not illuminate

Confirm that MB switch of the trunk circuit
card is in ON position (UP side).
Use ATRK command to confirm that trunk
data in the trunk circuit card is assigned.
Replace trunk circuit card with a spare.

When BL lamp is flashing or illuminating
on the trunk circuit card

Confirm that MB switch of trunk circuit card
is in ON position (UP side).
Use MBTK command to confirm that trunk
circuit card has not been placed into makebusy state.
Use ATRK command to check trunk data
assignment.
Replace trunk circuit card with a spare.

A

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 377
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A

Check the faulty line on the MDF.

If the C.O./Tie Line is in Loop Start system:

Isolate the faulty line to C.O. side and
to the system side.
Connect the test telephone to the C.O.
side.
Note 3: Check can be made

only on temporarily
opened C.O./Tie Lines.

Note 4: Cross

connection
methods are explained
on the following pages.

Confirm that Dial Tone (DT) is heard
and the call is connected to the
destination party at the opposite
office.

If C.O./Tie Line is any other type than Loop
Start:

By cross connections on the MDF,
connect the faulty line to a normal
trunk.
By a designated connection from the
ATTCON/DESKCON, seize the
trunk connected with the faulty line.
When the connection is not set up,
the C.O./Tie Line is faulty

After the trunk has been seized, check
to see if a call can be originated.

When the connection is set up

Replace the Dterm with a spare.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 378
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Note: When performing loop-back connection tests on the trunks at the user’s office,

provide cross connection as follows:
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(1) For a COT

A

LC

C

LC

B

LC

COT

•

Set up a loop-back connection between the C.O. Trunk (COT) to be tested and station line.

•

The trunk route must be assigned for Loop Start.

(2) For a TLT (for DID)

A

LC

T LT

B

LC

T LT

•

Set up a loop-back connection between the Tie Line Trunk (TLT) to be tested and another TLT.

•

If the TLT is a Direct Inward Dialing (DID) Trunk, connect the related leads as shown below:
TLT

•

T
R

T
R

TLT

If the TLT is a 4-wire E & M System, connect the related leads as shown below:
Receive
TLT

Send

T
R
T
R
E
M

T
R
T
R
E
M

NDA-24307

Receive
Send

TLT

CHAPTER 5
Page 379
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

•

If the TLT is a 2W E & M System, connect the related leads as shown below:

TLT

T
R
E
M

T
R
E
M

TLT

(3) For a DTI

•

A

LC

DTI

B

LC

DTI

Set up a loop-back connection between the DTI Trunk to be tested and another DTI Trunk as shown
below:
Receive
DTI
Send

R

R

R

R

T
T

T
T

Receive
DTI
Send

•

When the loop-back test is performed at the time of PCM LOSS, FRM LOSS, or MERM LOSS alarm
lamp (red) illuminates. If the alarm lamp goes out, the DTI circuit card side is normal.

•

When only one DTI circuit card is to be checked, make the following connections and confirm that
no alarm lamps illuminates.
Loop-back
Cross Connection
Receive
DTI
Send

CHAPTER 5
Page 380
Issue 1

RA
RB
TA
TB

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

3. ATTCON/DESKCON FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure when a specific Attendant/Desk Console is in any of the
following faulty conditions.
•

No speech can be made.

•

No operations can be made.

3.1

Check Point
When repairing an ATTCON/DESKCON fault, consider the following items:

(1) Check the cable connections on the backplane.
(2) When replacing the ATI circuit card for master ATTCON/DESKCON, the system is placed under Night
Mode during replacement procedure.
(3) When replacing the master ATTCON/DESKCON, the system is placed under Night Mode during
replacement procedure.
3.2

ATTCON/DESKCON Control
Each ATTCON/DESKCON is controlled from an ATI (PA-CS33) circuit card. The ATI circuit card is
controlled from the CPU card via the INT on the TSW card. Figure 5-3 shows the control route of the ATI
circuit card.
The ATI (PA-CS33) circuit card is used as an interface card between the PBX and ATTCON/DESKCON.
The card is mounted in slot numbers 12 or 23.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 381
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

PIM backplane

LT11 is used when PA-CS33 is mounted in slot 23.
LT5 is used when PA-CS33 is mounted in slot 12.

LT11
LT5

PA-CS33 Pin Assignment
34
for
ATTCON/
DESKCON 0

BN4800

35
36

MDF

ATTCON/
DESKCON

Rosette

0-1

Installation Cable
Rosette 0 - 1

for
ATTCON/
DESKCON 1
for
ATTCON/
DESKCON 0

for
ATTCON/
DESKCON 1

BN4820

NDA-24307

11

BN4821

12

38

TAS1B

13

39

BN4810

14

BN4811

40

TAS0B

15

TAS0A

41

BN4830

16

BN4831

18

43
44

B2

19

45

20

46

21

A2

22

47
48

TAS1A

17

42

B3

Figure 5-3 ATT Connector Cabling and Connector Leads Accommodation

CHAPTER 5
Page 382
Issue 1

BN4801

10

37

Installation Cable

9

23

A3

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

3.3

ATTCON/DESKCON Fault

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Note:

No speech can be made. While replacement of the ATI circuit card for the master ATTCON/DESKCON is in progress,
the system is placed under Night Mode.

START
On the ATTCON/DESKCON, Lamp Check
(LCHK) key has been pressed but no lamps
have illuminated.

Check the ATT connector cable between the
ATTCON/DESKCON and the PBX.

When OPE lamp of the ATI (PA-CS33)
circuit card does not illuminate

Check to see if MB switch of the ATI circuit
card is at ON position (UP side).
Use ATRK command to confirm that the trunk
data in the ATI circuit card are assigned.
Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare.

When BL lamp of the ATI circuit card is
flashing or illuminating

Check to see if MB switch of the ATI circuit
card is at ON position (UP side).
Use MBTK command to see if ATI circuit card
is placed into MB state.
Use ATRK command to check ATI data
assignment.
Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare.

When keys cannot be operated

Replace the operators headset.
Replace the ATI circuit card with a spare.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 383
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Note: No operations can be made.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Replace the ATTCON/DESKCON with a
spare.

Set the MB switch of ATI PA-CS33 circuit
card UP.
If the circuit card is equipped with a fuse,
remove the fuse.
Disconnect the CHAMP connector of the
ATTCON/DESKCON and replace the
ATTCON/DESKCON.
If the circuit card is equipped with a fuse,
insert the fuse into its position.
Set the MB switch of the ATI circuit card
DOWN.
Confirm the PA lamp illuminates on the
ATTCON/DESKCON.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 384
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

4. UNIT FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure in a case where any of the faults shown in Table 5-6, has
occurred to all the line/trunk circuit cards mounted in a specific unit. Figure 5-4 shows the range of units.
Table 5-6 Unit Fault Situation
FAULT SITUATION

REFERENCE SECTION

• Noise, one-way speech, no tone.
• Even if dialing has been made, dial tone does not stop.

Section 4.2, Unit Fault - Fault Related to Speech

Dial Tone cannot be heard.

Section 4.3, Unit Fault - When Dial Tone (DT)
Cannot Be Heard

The MUX card has become faulty and, as a result the CPU has been
changed over.

Section 4.4, Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card Is
Faulty and System Has Changed Over

LN0/1/2/3

PIM3

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

TOPU

Unit 2

Unit 3

Unit 2

MG01
PIM2

Unit 0

Unit 1

Unit 0

FANU
PIM1

Unit 2

Unit 3

Unit 0

Unit 3

Unit 2

Unit 0

Unit 1

Unit 0

Unit 0

Unit 1

FANU

Unit 3

Unit 2

MG04

Unit 1

Unit 3

MG07

FANU

MG02

Unit 1

Unit 0

Unit 2

MG05

Unit 1

Unit 2

Unit 3

Unit 2

FANU

MG00
PIM0

Unit 3

MG03

Unit 3

MG06

Unit 1

Unit 0

Unit 1

LPM

TSWM0

TSWM1

DUMMY

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

BASEU

FRONT VIEW
Unit No. = 0/2

Unit No. = 1/3

Slot No. 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
MUX (PH-PC36) 1

MUX (PH-PC36) 0

PWR

PWR

PIM

Figure 5-4 Range of Units (LN0/1/2/3)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 385
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

4.1

Check Point
When repairing a unit fault, consider the following items:

(1) Speech paths and control paths in the unit are connected to line/trunks via the MUX circuit cards. Be sure
to check the alarm lamps on the MUX circuit cards, and check to see if the front cable between each MUX
circuit card and TSW circuit card is connected correctly. Figure 5-5 and Figure 5-6 show the block
diagram within the unit.
(2) The MUX circuit cards are operating in the ACT/STBY modes under control of the CPU circuit. When
the ACT-side CPU has detected a fault in the ACT-side MUX circuit card, CPU changeover is executed
and the ACT/STBY mode of the Speech Path System is also changed over. When both of the MUX circuit
cards have become faulty, all the lines/trunks in that unit are placed into make-busy state. (If a PFT circuit
card is located in that specific unit, the PFT is activated.) Figure 5-7 shows the location of the MUX cards.
(3) When both units in a specific PIM are faulty, it is possible that the PWR circuit card mounted in that
specific PIM is faulty. In such a case, refer to Section 9, Power Supply Fault.

MUX0

MUX1

Clock

Clock

(B)

(B)
To
TSW/INT

To
TSW/INT
Speech
Path

Speech
Path
(A)

(A)

Control of
CPU No. 0
ACT/STBY of
CPU No. 0

Control of
CPU No. 1
ACT/STBY of
CPU No. 1
PM

SYMBOLS

LC/TRK

Line/
Trunk
Circuit Card

LC/TRK

: Circuit Card

(A)

: Control on ACT/STBY of Speech Path Systems

(B)

: Control on ACT/STBY of Clock Systems

Figure 5-5 Unit Control Block Diagram (Dual Configuration)

CHAPTER 5
Page 386
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

MUX X

Clock
To
TSW/
MUX

Speech
Path
(A)

Control of
CPU
PM
Line/
Trunk
Circuit Card

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

Figure 5-6 Unit Control Block Diagram (Single Configuration)

IMG0/1/2/3
13 14
MUX 1

UNIT = 2

MUX 0

PIM 3

MUX (PH-PC36) card is mounted
in Slot No. 13 and/or 14 of each
PIM.

UNIT = 3

13 14
MUX 1

UNIT = 0

MUX 0

PIM 2

UNIT = 1

13 14
MUX 1

UNIT = 2

MUX 0

PIM 1

UNIT = 3

13 14
MUX 1

UNIT = 0

MUX 0

PIM 0

UNIT = 1

Front View

Figure 5-7 MUX Card Locations (LN0/1/2/3)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 387
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

4.2

Unit Fault - Fault Related to Speech

Faulty Situation:
•

Noise, one-way speech, no tone, etc. occurs only within a unit.

•

Even if dialing has started, dial tone does not stop.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(1) For Dual Configuration
START

Check by replacing the MUX (PH-PC36)
circuit card.

After replacement of the MUX
circuit card, make a station-tostation call in the faulty unit and
see if speech is normal.

Replace the MUX circuit card referring to
Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement
Procedure, Chapter 4.

Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

Check by replacing the TSW circuit card.

Replace the TSW circuit card by referring to
Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement
Procedure, Chapter 4.

After replacement of the TSW
circuit card, make a station-tostation call in the faulty unit and
see if speech is normal.

Place the TSW circuit card into ACT mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

A

CHAPTER 5
Page 388
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A

Check the line/trunk circuit cards mounted
in the unit to see if t ey are faulty.

Set the MB switch of the line/trunk circuit card
UP and extract it from its mounting slot.

Perform this check on an individual basis.

Make a station-to-station call and see if a fault
occurs.

If the fault has stopped occurring,
the circuit card extracted at that
time is faulty. Replace the circuit
card with a spare.
If the fault continues, check the
next circuit card.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 389
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(2) For Single Configuration

START
Check by replacing the MUX (PH-PC36)
circuit card.

Replace the MUX circuit card by referring to
Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement
Procedure, Chapter 4.

After replacement of the MUX
circuit card, make a station-tostation call in the faulty unit and
see if speech is normal.

Check by replacing the TSW circuit card.

After replacement of the TSW
circuit card, make a station-tostation call in the faulty unit and
see if speech is normal.
A

CHAPTER 5
Page 390
Issue 1

NDA-24307

Replace the TSW circuit card referring to
Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement
Procedure, Chapter 4.

.

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A

Check the line/trunk circuit cards mounted
in the unit to see if they are faulty.

Set the MB switch of the line/trunk circuit
card UP and extract it from its mounting slot.

Perform this check on an individual basis.

Make a station-to-station call and see if a fault
occurs.

If the fault has stopped, the
circuit card extracted at that time
is faulty. Replace the circuit card
with a spare.

If the fault continues, check the
next circuit card.
END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 391
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

4.3

Unit Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

Faulty Situation:
•

Dial Tone (DT) cannot be heard except within a unit.

•

[4-T] Both MUX Failure / [4-S] MUX Ready Failure

•

[23-Y] MUX Clock Failure

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Note: For dual system configuration, if a system message indicates that both systems are faulty, first repair

the fault in the indicated system and then proceed to repair the PIM in the other system.
(1) For Dual Configuration
START
Check to see if the MUX (PH-PC36) circuit
card is making poor contact.

Set the faulty MUX circuit card into STBY
mode. Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP.
Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting
slot and clean the contact portion.
If cleaning cannot be done, repeat insertion and
extraction of the circuit card two or three times.
Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP
and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card
DOWN.
Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up within the faulty unit.

Check by replacing the MUX circuit card
with a spare.

Place the faulty MUX circuit card into STBY
mode. Refer to Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
Replace the MUX circuit card. Refer to Section
3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement Procedure,
Chapter 4.

A

B

CHAPTER 5
Page 392
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A

B
Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up to identify the circuit card
responsible for the fault.

Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from
their mounting slots in the unit. Insert the
cards back into their slots one after another
and see if the dial tone is heard each time.

Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from their
slots.
Note: Set the MB switch of the line/trunk
circuit card UP and extract.
Confirm the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX
circuit card illuminates.
Set the MB switch of an extracted line/trunk
circuit card UP and insert the circuit cards into
their mounting slots one by one.

If Dial Tone (DT) is heard, check
the next circuit card.

If DT is not heard, replace the
circuit card with a spare.

Confirm the OPE lamp of the inserted circuit
card illuminates by setting the MB switch
DOWN.
Make a station-to-station call and see if DT can
be heard.
Note: Perform this check on the rest of the
circuit cards by inserting them into
their slots individually.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 393
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(2) For Single Configuration
START
Check to see if the MUX (PH-PC36)
circuit card is making poor contact.

Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP.
Extract the MUX circuit card from its mounting
slot and clean the contact portion.
If cleaning cannot be done, repeat insertion and
extraction of the circuit card two or three times.
Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card UP
and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card
DOWN.
Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up within the faulty unit.

Check by replacing the MUX circuit card
with a spare.

Replace the MUX circuit card referring to Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement Procedure,
Chapter 4.
Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

A

Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up to identify a circuit card
responsible for the fault.

CHAPTER 5
Page 394
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A

Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from
their mounting slots in the unit. Insert the
cards back into their slots one after
another and see if the dial tone is heard
each time.

Extract all the line/trunk circuit cards from
their slots.
Note: Set the MB switch of the line/trunk

circuit card UP and extract.
Confirm the MUX ACT lamp on the MUX
circuit card illuminates.
Set the MB switch of an extracted Line/Trunk
circuit card UP and insert the circuit cards
into their mounting slots one by one.
Confirm the OPE lamp of the inserted circuit
card illuminates by setting the MB switch
DOWN.
Make a station-to-station call and see if DT is
heard.

If DT is heard, check the next
circuit card.

Note: Perform this check on the reset of

the circuit cards by inserting them
into their slots individually.

If DT is not heard, replace the
circuit card with a spare.
END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 395
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

4.4

Unit Fault - ACT-Side MUX Card Is Faulty and System Has Changed Over

Faulty Situation:
•

The ACT side has become faulty and the system changeover has executed in the
dual configuration system.

•

[4-S] MUX Ready Failure / [4-T] Both MUX Failure

•

[23-Y] MUX Clock Failure

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Check to see if the MUX (PH-PC36)
circuit card of the STBY side is making
poor contact.

Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card
UP.
Extract the MUX circuit card from its
mounting slot and clean the contact portion.
If cleaning cannot be done, repeat insertion
and extraction of the circuit card two or three
times.
Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card
UP and insert the circuit card into its
mounting slot.
Set the MB switch of the MUX circuit card
DOWN.
Set the faulty system to ACT side. Refer to
Section 12, Chapter 6.

If the connection is set up, set the
faulty system into STBY side.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
A

CHAPTER 5
Page 396
Issue 1

NDA-24307

Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up within the faulty unit.

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A

Replace the MUX circuit card with a
spare, and check it.

Replace the MUX circuit card referring to
Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement
Procedure, Chapter 4.
Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up and identify a circuit card
responsible for the fault.

END

If the connection is set up, set
the faulty system into STBY
side. Refer to Section 12,
Chapter 6.

NDA-24307

Perform the above check by extracting each
MUX circuit card individually.

CHAPTER 5
Page 397
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

5. SPEECH PATH (TSW) SYSTEM FAULT (LN)
This paragraph explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-7 has occurred in
a LN.
Table 5-7 Speech Path (TSW) System Fault Situation (LN)
FAULTY SITUATION

REFERENCE SECTION

• Noise, one-way speech, no tone
• Even if dialing has been made, dial tone does not stop.

Section 5.2, Speech Path System Fault - Fault
Related to Speech

Dial tone cannot be heard.

Section 5.3, Speech Path System Fault - When Dial
Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

A fault occurring in the STBY side TSW is indicated by a system
message or an alarm lamp.

Section 5.4, Speech Path System Fault (LN) - STBY
Side Has Become Faulty

5.1

Check Point
When repairing a speech path fault, consider that when any of the faults shown in Table 5-7 have occurred
in a LN, it is possible that the TSW circuit card is at fault. Always check the alarm lamps on the TSW
circuit card. Refer to Figure 5-8.

CHAPTER 5
Page 398
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

This figure shows a block diagram of speech path.
IMG0 of LN1

IMG1 of LN1

MUX

MUX

MUX

- Symbols -

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

: Circuit card (ACT)

MUX

MUX

PIM2

MUX

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM1
MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM1
MUX

MUX

PIM3

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM2

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM1
MUX

IMG3 of LN1

MUX

PIM3

MUX

PIM2

LC/TRK

PIM1

: Speech Path
: Cable

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM3

LC/TRK

PIM2

IMG2 of LN1

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM3

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

: Circuit card (ST-BY)
TSW (in ISWM) : PU-SW00
HSW: PU-SW01
TSW (in TSWM0/1) : PH-SW12
MUX: PH-PC36

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

000001002003

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

100101102103

004005006007

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW 00

TSW 10

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

104105106107

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW 13

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

10C10D10E10F

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX
00800900A00B

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

00800900A00B

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

10810910A10B

104105106107

TSW 13
TSW/INT

00C00D00E00F

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1
( LN1)

TSWM 0
( LN1)

IMG0 of LN0

IMG1 of LN0

MUX

PIM3

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM2

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM1

MUX

MUX

PIM0

MUX

MUX

MUX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

LC/TRK

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM1

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM2

LC/TRK

PIM1

MUX

MUX

PIM3

LC/TRK

PIM2

LC/TRK

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

IMG3 of LN0

MUX

PIM3

MUX

PIM1

LC/TRK

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM2

LC/TRK

IMG2 of LN0

MUX

PIM3

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

104105106107

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

104105106107

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW 13

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

10C10D10E10F

00800900A00B

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

10C10D10E10F

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX
00800900A00B

TSWM 1
( LN0)

TSW 13
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSWM 0
( LN0)

T TTT TT TT TT TT TT TT
S SSS SS SS SS SS SS SS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

T TTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
S SSS SSSS SSSS SSS S
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

TT TT T T T T T T T T T T T T
SS SS S S S S S S S S S S S S
WW WW WW WW WWWW WWWW

000 001 002 003 004 005 006 007 008 009 00A 00B 00C00D 00E 00F

T TT T TT TT TTTT T TTT
S SS S SS SS SSSS S SSS
W WW W WW WW WWWW W WWW

100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 10A 10B 10C 10D 10E 10F

010 011 012 013 014 015 016 017 018 019 01A 01B 01C 01D 01E 01F

110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 11A 11B 11C 11D 11E 11F

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 10

TSW 00

TSW 11

TSW 01

HSW
To TSWM0
of LN2

To TSWM0
of LN2

To TSWM1
of LN2

TTTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWW W
020021022023 024025026027 02802902A02B 02C02D02E02F
TSW/INT

TSW 02

TTTT
SSSS
W WW W
120121122123

To TSWM1
of LN2

TTTT TTT T T T TT
SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWW W W W WW
124125126127 12812912A12B 12C12D12E12F
TSW/INT

To TSWM0
of LN3
TTTT
SSSS
W WW W
030031032033

To TSWM1
of LN3

TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW
034035036037 03803903A03B 03C03D03E03F
TSW/INT

TSW 12

To TSWM0
of LN3
TTTT
SSSS
W WW W
130131132133

To TSWM1
of LN3

TTTT TTT T T T TT
SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWW W W W WW
134135136137 13813913A13B 13C13D13E13F
TSW/INT

TSW 03

TSW 13

HSW

ISWM

Figure 5-8 Speech Path Block Diagram (1/2)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 399
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

This figure shows a block diagram of speech path.
IMG0 of LN3

IMG1 of LN3

MUX

MUX

PIM3
MUX

MUX

MUX

PIM2
MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM2
MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM0

MUX

PIM3
MUX

MUX

PIM1

LC/TRK

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM1

LC/TRK

PIM3

LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

IMG3 of LN3

MUX

MUX

PIM2
MUX

PIM0

: Circuit card (ACT)

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM1

: Speech Path
: Cable

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM3
MUX

PIM2

- Symbols -

IMG2 of LN3

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM1
MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

: Circuit card (ST-BY)
TSW (in ISWM) : PU-SW00
HSW: PU-SW01
TSW (in TSWM0/1) : PH-SW12
MUX: PH-PC36

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

000001002003

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

100101102103

004005006007

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW 10

TSW 00

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

104105106107

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW 13

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

10C10D10E10F

00800900A00B

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

00800900A00B

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

104105106107

TSW 13
TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

10C10D10E10F

TSWM 1
( LN3)

TSWM 0
( LN3)

IMG0 of LN2

IMG1 of LN2

MUX

PIM3

MUX

MUX

PIM2

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

PIM1

MUX

MUX

M M MM
U U UU
X X XX

PIM0

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

PIM2
MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM1
MUX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM3

MUX

LC/TRK

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

MUX

PIM2

MUX

LC/TRK

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM1

IMG3 of LN2

MUX

PIM3

MUX

PIM2

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM0

MUX
LC/TRK

PIM3

LC/TRK

MUX

PIM1

IMG2 of LN2

MUX

LC/TRK

MUX
LC/TRK

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

104105106107

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

104105106107

000001002003

100101102103

004005006007

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW 00

TSW 10

TSW 01

TSW 11

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW 13

TSW02

TSW 12

TSW03

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSW/INT
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

10C10D10E10F

00800900A00B

10810910A10B

00C00D00E00F

10C10D10E10F

M M MM
U U UU
XX XX
00800900A00B

TSWM 1
( LN2)

TSW 13
M M MM
U U UU
XX XX

TSWM 0
( LN2)

T T
T T
T T
T T
S T ST ST ST STS T STST
W S W S WS W S W S W S W S WS

T T
T T
T T
T T
ST ST S T ST ST S T S TS T
WS WS W S WS WS W S W S W S

T T
T T
T T
T T
ST ST STST ST ST ST ST
W S W S W S W S WS W S WS W S

T T
T T
T T
T T
S T S T ST S T S T ST STS T
W S W S WS W S W S W S W S W S

020W022W 024W 026W 028W02AW 02CW02EW
021 023 025 027 029 02B 02D 02F

120 W122W 124 W126W 128W12AW 12CW12EW
121 123 125 127 129 12B 12D 12F

030 W032W 034W036W 038W03AW 03CW03EW
031 033 035 037 039 03B 03D 03F

130 W132 W 134W136W 138 W13AW 13CW13EW
131 133 135 137 139 13B 13D 13F

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW 12

TSW 02

TSW 13

TSW 03

HSW
To TSWM0
of LN0

To TSWM0
of LN0

To TSWM1
of LN0

TTTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

000001002003 004005006007 00800900A00B00C00D00E00F

To TSWM0
of LN1

To TSWM1
of LN0

TTTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

100101102103 104105106107 10810910A10B10C10D10E10F

TSW 00

TTTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

010011012013 014015016017 01801901A01B01C01D01E01F

TSW 10

To TSWM0
of LN1

TTTT TTTT TTTT TTTT
SSSS SSSS SSSS SSSS
WWWW WWWW WWWW WWWW

110111112113 114115116117 11811911A11B11C11D11E11F

TSW 01

Figure 5-8 Speech Path Block Diagram (2/2)
CHAPTER 5
Page 400
Issue 1

NDA-24307

To TSWM1
of LN1

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

TSW/INT

To TSWM1
of LN1

TSW 11

HSW

ISWM

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

5.2

Speech Path System Fault - Fault Related to Speech

Faulty Situation:
•

Fault related to speech such as noise, one-way speech, no-speed, etc. occurs.

•

Even if dialing started, Dial Tone (DT) does not stop.

•

[1-C] Both TSW Write Failure

•

[1-D] TSW Write Failure

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(1) For Dual Configuration
START
Check to see if fault occurs by replacing
TSW circuit cards one by one.

Replace the TSW circuit card referring to
Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement
Procedure, in Chapter 4.
Place the TSW circuit card into ACT mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card
responsible for the fault.
Perform the above check by extracting the
TSW circuit cards individually.

Check to see if fault occurs by replacing
MUX circuit cards one by one.

Replace the MUX circuit card referring to
Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement
Procedure, Chapter 4.
Place the MUX circuit card into ACT mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

A

B

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 401
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

B

A

Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up and identify a circuit card
responsible for the fault.
Perform the above check by extracting the
MUX circuit cards individually.

When the PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A)/CLK
(PH-CLK18) circuit card is mounted for
digital interface, replace PLO/CLK circuit
card with a spare and check.

Set MB switch of the PLO/CLK circuit card to
UP side.
Confirm OPE lamp on the PLO/CLK circuit
card of the mate system illuminates.
Extract PLO/CLK circuit card from its
mounting slot.
Set MB switch UP and insert the new PLO/
CLK circuit card into its mounting slot.
Set MB switch DOWN.
Set MB switch of the ACT-side PLO/CLK
circuit card UP.
Confirm that the new PLO/CLK circuit card
becomes the ACT side (OPE lamp on the new
card lights green).
Set MB switch of the STBY side PLO/CLK
DOWN.
Confirm that speech can be carried out
normally by a station-to-station call.

Set the faulty speech path system to STBY
side. Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 402
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(2) For Single Configuration
START
Check to see if the fault occurs by
replacing TSW circuit cards one by one.

Replace the TSW circuit card referring to
Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement
Procedure, Chapter 4.
Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card
responsible for the fault.

Perform the above check by extracting the TSW
circuit cards individually.

Check to see if the fault occurs by
replacing MUX circuit cards one by one.

Replace the MUX circuit card referring to
Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement
Procedure, Chapter 4.

Initialize the system by pressing the START
button on the TOPU.
Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card
responsible for the fault.

A

Perform the above check by extracting the TSW
circuit cards individually.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 403
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
When the PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A)/CLK
(PH-CK18) circuit card is mounted for
digital interface, replace the PLO circuit
card with a spare and check it.

Set MB switch of the PLO/CLK circuit card
to UP side.
Confirm OPE lamp on the PLO/CLK circuit
card goes out.
Extract PLO/CLK circuit card from its
mounting slot.
Set MB switch UP and insert the new PLO/
CLK circuit card into its mounting slot.
Set MB switch DOWN.
Confirm the OPE lamp on the new PLO/CLK
circuit card illuminates.
Confirm that speech can be carried out
normally by a station-to-station call.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 404
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

5.3

Speech Path System Fault - When Dial Tone (DT) Cannot Be Heard

Faulty Situation:
•

Dial Tone (DT) cannot be heard.

•

[1-A] Both TSW Failure (Permanent)

•

[1-E] Both TSW Clock Failure

•

[4-C] Both TSW Ready Failure

•

[23-Y] MUX Clock Failure

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Note: For dual system configuration, if a system message indicates that both systems are faulty, first repair

the fault in the indicated system and then proceed to repair the PIM in the other system.
START
Check to see if the TSW circuit card is
making poor contact.

Set TSW circuit card into STBY mode. Refer to
Section 12, Chapter 6.
Set TSW MBR switch on the TSW card UP.
Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP.
Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting
slot and clean the contact portion.
If cleaning cannot be done, repeat insertion and
extraction of the circuit card two or three times.
Set TSW MBR and MB switches on the TSW
circuit card UP and insert the circuit card into
its mounting slot.
Set MB switch of the TSW circuit card DOWN.
Set TSW MBR switch DOWN.
Check if a station-to-station connection can be
set up.

Check PCM cables.

Check the PCM cables. (See Figure 5-8).
Initialize the system by pressing the START
button on the TOPU and see if a station-to-station connection can be set up.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 405
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

5.4

Speech Path System Fault (LN) - STBY Side Has Become Faulty

Faulty Situation:
•

A fault occurred in the STBY side of the dual configuration system.

•

[1-B] TSW Failure (Permanent)

•

[1-D] TSW Write Failure

•

[1-F] TSW Clock Failure

•

[4-D] TSW Ready Failure

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Check to see if the TSW circuit card
(STBY) is making poor contact.

Set the TSW MBR switch of the TSW circuit
card UP.
Set the MB switch of the TSW circuit card UP
and extract the circuit card from its mounting
slot.
Extract the TSW circuit card from its mounting
slot and clean the contact portion.
If cleaning cannot be done, repeat insertion and
extraction of the circuit card two or three times.
Set the TSW MBR and MB switches of the
TSW circuit card UP and insert the circuit card
into its mounting slot.
Set the MB switch of the TSW circuit card
DOWN.
Set the TSW MBR switch DOWN.
Check if a station-to-station connection can be
set up.

Check PCM cables.

Check the PCM cables. See Figure 5-8.
Initialize the system by pressing the START
button on the TOPU and see if a station-tostation connection can be set up.

A

CHAPTER 5
Page 406
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Faulty Situation:
•

Fault related to speech such as noise, one-way speech, no-speed, etc. occurs.

•

Even if dialing started, Dial Tone (DT) does not stop.

•

[1-C] Both TSW Write Failure

•

[1-D] TSW Write Failure

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

A
Check to see if fault occurs by extracting
TSW circuit cards one by one.

Replace the TSW circuit card referring to
Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement
Procedure, Chapter 4.
Set the TSW circuit card into ACT mode. Refer
to Section 12, Chapter 6.
Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up to identify a TSW circuit card responsible for the fault.
Perform the above check by extracting the TSW
circuit cards individually.

Check to see if the fault occurs by
extracting MUX circuit cards one by one.

Replace the MUX circuit card referring to
Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement
Procedure, Chapter 4.
Set the MUX circuit card into ACT mode. Refer
to Perform the above check by extracting the
TSW circuit cards individually.
Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up and identify a TSW circuit card
responsible for the fault.
Perform the above check by extracting the
MUX circuit cards individually.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 407
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

6. SPEECH PATH SYSTEM FAULT (WHOLE SYSTEM/ISW)
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the fault shown in Table 5-8 has occurred in a
whole system.
6.1

Check Point
System messages pertaining to whole system fault are shown in Figure 5-9. Check the system messages.
Table 5-8 Speech Path (TSW) System Fault Situation (LN)
FAULTY SITUATION

REFERENCE SECTION

• Noise, one-way speech, no tone

Section 6.2, Speech Path System Fault (Whole
System/ISW) - Fault Related to Speech

• Even after dialing a digit, dial tone is still heard.
• Dial tone cannot be heard.
• The system message that indicates a fault occurrence to the active
Speech Path System (Whole System /ISW) is intermittently printed
out.

Section 6.3, Speech Path System Fault (Whole
System/ISW) - ACT side becomes Faulty
Intermittently

• The alarm lamp on the circuit card of the active Speech Path System
(Whole System /ISW) lights up intermittently.
• The system message that indicates a fault occurrence to the STBY
Speech Path System (Whole System /ISW) is intermittently printed
out.

Section 6.4, Speech Path System Fault (Whole
System/ISW) - STBY side becomes Faulty
Intermittently

• The alarm lamp on the circuit card of the STBY Speech Path
System (Whole System /ISW) lights up intermittently.
• Clock (CALK, PLOT) is faulty.

CPU

•

“1-G” ~ “1-J”

HSW Write Failure

•

“1-K” ~ “1-L”

HSW Clock Failure

•

“4-E” ~ “4-F”

HSW Ready Failure

• “1-A” ~ “1-D”

TSW Write Failure

• “1-E” ~ “1-F”

TSW Clock Failure

• “4-C” ~ “4-D”

TSW Ready Failure

• “1-O” ~ “1-P”

PLO Clock Failure

HSW

TSW

PLO/CLK

Figure 5-9 System Messages Related to Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW)
CHAPTER 5
Page 408
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

6.2

Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - Fault Related to Speech

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Replace the TSW card mounted in the
ISWM with a spare.

Replace the TSW card by referring to Section
4.3.2, TSW Card Replacement Procedure,
Chapter 4.
Place the TSW circuit card on the ACT mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

After replacement of the TSW card,
make a station to station call and
check and see if a fault occurs.
When a fault occurs in the whole system,
replace the HSW card with a spare.

Replace the HSW card by referring to Section
4.3.3, HSW Card Replacement Procedure,
Chapter 4.
Place the HSW card on the ACT mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

After replacement of the HSW card,
make a station to station call, and
check and see if a fault occurs.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 409
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

6.3

Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - ACT side becomes Faulty
Intermittently

Faulty Situation:
•

ACT-side Speech Path System becomes faulty intermittently in ISW/Whole System.

•

[1-I] HSW Write Temporary Failure (Both Systems)

•

[1-J] HSW Write Temporary Failure (One System)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Check by replacing related circuit cards of
the ACT mode with a spare.

Related circuit cards:
IOGT (Section 4.3.1, Chapter 4)
TSW (Section 4.3.2, Chapter 4)
HSW (Section 4.3.3, Chapter 4)
Set the faulty system on the STBY mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
On the circuit card, set its MB switch UP and
extract the circuit card out of its mounting slot.
Make switch setting on the new circuit card.
On the new circuit card, set its MB switch UP
and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
Set MB switch DOWN.
Set the faulty system on the ACT mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
Check and see if a fault indication is made.

If a fault occurs, set the faulty system on the
STBY mode. Refer to Section 12, Chapter
6.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 410
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

6.4

Speech Path System Fault (Whole System/ISW) - STBY side becomes Faulty
Intermittently

Faulty Situation:
•

STBY-side Speech Path System becomes faulty intermittently in ISW/Whole System.

•

[1-I] HSW Write Temporary Failure (Both Systems)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Check by replacing related circuit cards of
the STBYmode with a spare.

Related circuit cards:
IOGT (Section 4.3.1, Chapter 4)
TSW (Section 4.3.2, Chapter 4)
HSW (Section 4.3.3, Chapter 4)
Set the faulty system on the STBY mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
On the circuit card, set its MB switch UP and
extract the circuit card out of its mounting slot.
Make switch setting on the new circuit card.
On the new circuit card, set its MB switch UP
and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
Set MB switch DOWN.
Set the faulty system on the ACT mode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
Check and see if a fault indication is made.

If a fault occurs, set the faulty system on the
STBY mode. Refer to Section 12, Chapter
6.
END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 411
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

6.5

PLO Fault

Faulty Situation:
•

Both PLOs have become faulty, and the system is in operation by clocks from the
HSW.

•

One of the two PLOs has become faulty and the other PLO has been set on the ACT
mode.

•

[1-O], [1-P] PLO Clock Failure

•

[1-K], [1-L] HSW Clock Failure

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Replace the faulty PLO circuit card with a
spare.

Set MB switch of the PLO circuit card UP and
extract the circuit card from its mounting slot.
Make necessary switch settings on the new PLO
circuit card.
Set MB switch UP and insert the circuit card
into its mounting slot.
Set MB switch DOWN.

Confirm that no noise generates in a stationto-station connection.

If the system has been operated by the STBY
side, set MB switch on the ACT-side PLO
circuit card UP and execute system changeover.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
OPE lamp (Green) illuminates on the PLO
circuit card.

Confirm that digital interface connection can
be set up.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 412
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

7. CONTROL SYSTEM FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure for the control system listed in Table 5-9.
Table 5-9 Control System Fault Situation
FAULTY SITUATION

REFERENCE SECTION

Fault occurs occasionally at the ACT side.

Section 7.2, Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently

STBY side is faulty.

Section 7.3, Control System Fault - STBY Side is Faulty

7.1

Check Point
When repairing the control system, check the status of the following lamps:
LN
•

CPR

•

GT

•

TSW

•

MUX

•

EMA

ISW
•

CPR

•

IOGT

•

TSW

•

HSW

•

EMA

Figure 5-1 and Figure 5-2 shows a block diagram of the control system.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 413
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

7.2

Control System Fault - Fault Occurs Intermittently

Faulty Situation:
•

Fault occurs intermittently at ACT side in the dual configuration system.

•

Fault occurs intermittently in the single configuration system.

•

[0-C] ~ [0-K] CPU Failure

•

[1-C] Both TSW Write Failure

•

[1-D] TSW Write Failure

•

[3-D], [3-E] Lock-Up Failure (Permanent/Temporary)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(1) For Dual Configuration
START
Replace ACT-side related circuit card with
a spare, and check.

Replace the circuit cards individually referring to the
following sections in Chapter 4:
LN
• Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure
• Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 2.3.1, GT Card Replacement Procedure
• Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement
Procedure
ISW
• Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure
• Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 4.3.1, IOGT Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 4.3.2, TSW Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 4.3.3, HSW Card Replacement
Procedure
Place the replaced circuit card into ACT mode
individually by executing CPU or Speech Path System
changeover. Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.
Check to see if a station-to-station connection can be
set up and identify a circuit card responsible for the
fault.
After all the steps are complete, place the whole circuit
card examined above to the ACT mode. Refer to
Section 12, Chapter 6.

A

CHAPTER 5
Page 414
Issue 1

When a fault is not indicated, set the
faulty system to STBY mode. Refer
to Section 12, Chapter 6.

NDA-24307

Check to see if a fault is indicated.

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

(2) For Single Configuration
A
Replace the related circuit card with a spare,
and check.

Replace the circuit cards individually by
referring to the following sections in Chapter 4:
LN
• Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure
• Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 2.3.1, GT Card Replacement Procedure
• Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement
Procedure
ISW
• Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure
• Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 4.3.1, IOGT Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 4.3.2, TSW Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 4.3.3, HSW Card Replacement
Procedure

Initialize the system by pressing the START
button on the TOPU and check to see if a
station-to-station connection can be set up and
identify a circuit card responsible for the fault.
END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 415
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

7.3

Control System Fault - STBY Side is Faulty

Faulty Situation:
•

Fault has occurred in the STBY side of dual configuration system.

•

[0-I] STBY CPU Failure

•

The ACT side has become faulty, and system changeover has executed.

•

[0-C], [0-H], [0-J] Processor Failure (ACT side)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Replace STBY side related circuit cards
with a spare, and check.

Replace the circuit cards individually by
referring to the following paragraphs in Chapter
4:
LN
• Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure
• Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 2.3.1, GT Card Replacement Procedure
• Section 2.3.2, TSW Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 3.3.2, MUX Card Replacement
Procedure
ISW
• Section 1.3.1, CPR Replacement Procedure
• Section 1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 4.3.1, IOGT Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 4.3.2, TSW Card Replacement
Procedure
• Section 4.3.3, HSW Card Replacement
Procedure

Place the circuit cards into ACT mode by
executing CPU changeover. Refer to Section 12,
Chapter 6.
Check to see if a station-to-station connection
can be set up to identify the circuit card
responsible for the fault.
When a fault is not indicated, set
the faulty systems to STBYmode.
Refer to Section 12, Chapter 6.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 416
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

8. ALARM INDICATION FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure where any of the faults shown in Table 5-10 occur.
Table 5-10 Alarm Indication Fault Situation
FAULTY SITUATION
A fault is indicated on the TOPU, but it is not indicated on the Alarm Indicating Panel
(External Alarm Indicating Panel).

REFERENCE SECTION
Section 8.2, Fault of Alarm
Indicating Panel

• A system message is indicated, but no alarm indication is made on the TOPU.

Section 8.3, Fault That
• An alarm lamp on the circuit card is lighting, but no alarm indication is made on the MAT Cannot Be Detected
or on the TOPU.

8.1

Check Point
When repairing an alarm indication fault, check the alarm cable route shown in Figure 5-10 and Figure 511.

8.2

Fault of Alarm Indicating Panel

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Confirm lamps and power supply circuit of the Alarm Indicating Panel.
Confirm cross connections on the MDF.
Confirm that the connector of 16 PH EXMISC CA is firmly plugged in the MISC 0A connector on
the backplane of LPM.
END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 417
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

ISW (FRONT VIEW)

ISW (REAR VIEW)

TOPU

TOPU
DSPL

Alarm Lamps
KEY

ISWM

ISWM

ALMB

A

ALMA

00

(04)

04

(00)
MISC0B

MMC
PH-M22

KEY

LPM

LPM

68PH EXMISC CA Cable

MISC0A

To CN0 connector of LN0

03

ALM1 EXALM

To CN0 connector of LN1

02

EMA (PH-PC40)

To CN0 connector of LN2

CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0

To CN0 connector of LN3

01

Alarm
Indicating
Panel

DSP
KEY

MDF

- Symbols =
: Connector

: Circuit Card

: Internal alarm bus cable

A

: To alarm information of PWRSW, HSW, TSW, etc.

: CHAMP connector-ended cable

Figure 5-10 Cable Routing for Alarm Indications

CHAPTER 5
Page 418
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

68PH EXMISC CA Cable
ISW
LPM

CHAMP Connector Cable
MDF
MISC0A

BELAA
MNAA

MJ / MN / BELL

SUPAA

Backplane

MJAA
BELBA
MNBA
SUPBA

Alarm
Indicating
Panel

MJBA
RPT1(G)
RPT0(-48V)

Fuse
-48V
G

Power Receiving Terminal

Figure 5-11 Cabling Related to Alarm Indicating Panel
Table 5-11 PIN Location of External Alarm
1
2

26
MPALM

3
4

28
EXTAA

5
6

27

29
30

BELAA

7

31
32

8

MNAA

33

MNBA

9

SUPAA

34

SUPBA

10

MJAA

35

MJBA

11

36

12

37

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 419
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

This figure shows the flow of alarm and key information between ISW and each LN.
LN
PZ-DK222
(TOP KEY)

ISW
PZ-DK227
(TOP KEY)

PH-M22
PH-PC40
RECEIVER

ISEL
PH-M22
PH-PC40
RECEIVER

SEL

EMA

EMA
RELAY

RELAY
LN
PZ-DK222
(TOP KEY)
PH-M22

AUDIBLE
AND
VISUAL
ALARM
INDICATING
PANEL

PH-PC40
RECEIVER

EMA

RELAY
KEY INFORMATION
ALM INFORMATION

Figure 5-12 Distribution/Collection of Key/Alarm Information within the System

CHAPTER 5
Page 420
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

This figure shows the alarm bus cable connections diagram.
IMG0 (LN0)
TOPU

IMG1 (LN0)
DSPL

PZ-DK222

TOPU

PZ-DK222

DSPM

KEY

PIM 3

ALMB

PWR
DPWR

To MMC (

CN0

MUX 0

LC/TRK

PIM 3
PWR
DPWR

MUX 1

ALMB

MUX 0

LC/TRK

MUX 1

) of LN1
ALMA

To MMC (

CN0

) of LN2

To MMC (

CN0

) of LN3

PIM 2

ALMB

PWR
DPWR

MUX 0

LC/TRK

ALMA

PIM 2
PWR
DPWR

MUX 1

ALMB

MUX 0

LC/TRK

MUX 1

ALMA

ALMA

ISWM
PIM 1
TOPU

ALMB

PIM 1

ALMB

DSPL

PZ-DK227
KEY

PWR
DPWR

MUX 0

LC/TRK

PWR
DPWR

MUX 1

MUX 0

LC/TRK

MUX 1

ALMA

ISWM
PWRSW
0/1

PIM 0

ALMB

HSW0/1

TSW0/1

IOGT0/1

ALMB

PWR
DPWR

PLO0/1

MUX 0

LC/TRK

MUX 1

LPM (FRONT VIEW)
00 01 02 03 04

PZ-PW92

LC/TRK

MUX 1
ALMA

TSWM0 (REAR VIEW)
PZ-PW92

PALM

PALM

LANI 1

MUX 0

ISAGT1

MMC

PWR1

LANI 1

ISAGT-1A

ISAGT-1B

PALM

ISAGT0

KEY

KEY

PALM

LANI 0

LPM (REAR VIEW)

PWR0

LANI 0

ISAGT-0A

To EMA
of IMG2

ISAGT-0B

ALM

EMA

LPM (REAR VIEW)

Slot 04

Slot 00

Slot 04

Slot 00

LED3

LED3

: Alarm-related connector

EMA: PH-PC40

: Circuit Card

PALM0

KEY

PALM1

MUSIC ALM2 ALM1 EXALM

PALM0

MUSIC ALM2 ALM1 EXALM

PALM1

ALM3

LED1 ALM3

LED1
ALM

MISC0B

LED2

MISC0B

LED2
EMA

DSP

< ISW: Inter-node Switch >
MMC : PH-M22
EMA: PH-PC40
ISAGT: PZ-GT13
IOGT: PH-GT10
< LN: Local Node >
MMC: PH-M22

PZ-PW92

EMAFH

PZ-PW92
PWR0

EMA

CN0

EMA

CN3 CN2 CN1 CN0

PWR1

ALMB

ALMA

LPM (FRONT VIEW)

MMC

PIM 0
PWR
DPWR

ALMA

00 01 02 03 04

ALMA

EMA

DSP

ALM

KEY

: External Cable

PWRSW: PH-PW14
HSW: PU-SW01
PLO: PH-CK16-A/PH-CK17-A
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20

TSW: PU-SW00

LANI: PZ-PC19

MUX: PH-PC36

LANI: PZ-PC19

Figure 5-13 Alarm Bus Cable Connections Diagram (1/2)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 421
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

This figure shows the alarm bus cable connections diagram.
IMG2 (LN0)
TOPU

IMG3 (LN0)

PZ-DK222

PIM 3
PWR
DPWR

TOPU

DSPM

PIM 3

ALMB

MUX 0

LC/TRK

PZ-DK222

PWR
DPWR

MUX 1

ALMB

MUX 0

LC/TRK

MUX 1

ALMA

PIM 2
PWR
DPWR

ALMA

PIM 2

ALMB

MUX 0

LC/TRK

PWR
DPWR

MUX 1

ALMB

MUX 0

LC/TRK

MUX 1

ALMA

PIM 1
PWR
DPWR

ALMA

PIM 1

ALMB

MUX 0

LC/TRK

PWR
DPWR

MUX 1

ALMB

MUX 0

LC/TRK

MUX 1

ALMA

PIM 0
PWR
DPWR

ALMA

PIM 0

ALMB

MUX 0

LC/TRK

DSPM

PWR
DPWR

MUX 1

ALMB

MUX 0

LC/TRK

MUX 1

ALMA

ALMA

TSWM1 (REAR VIEW)

ALM

EMA

To EMA
of IMG1

LPM of LN0 (REAR VIEW)
Slot 04

Slot 00

LED2

MISC0B

LED3

: External Cable

Figure 5-13 Alarm Bus Cable Connections Diagram (2/2)
CHAPTER 5
Page 422
Issue 1

NDA-24307

ALM

KEY

PALM0

MUSIC ALM2 ALM1 EXALM

: Circuit Card

MUX: PH-PC36

PALM1

LED1 ALM3

: Alarm-related connector
EMA: PH-PC40

EMA

DSP

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

8.3

Fault That Cannot Be Detected

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Check the DSP flat cable (See Figure 5-13.).
WARNING If the EMA card is removed from the system while the system is in operation under
the control of the CPU 1, the system will reset and stop all call processing. See Section
1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement Procedure, Chapter 4 for detailed instructions.
Replace the EMA circuit card with a spare.
Set the MB switch of the EMA circuit card UP, and extract the circuit card from its
mounting slot.
Make necessary switch settings on the new circuit card, referring to the card extracted.
Set MB switch UP and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
Set the MB switch DOWN.
Check to see if a fault is detected.
END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 423
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

9. POWER SUPPLY FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-12 occur.
Table 5-12 PWR Supply Fault Situation
FAULTY SITUATION

REFERENCE SECTION

Fuse Blown Fault

Section 9.2, Fuse Blown Fault

Circuit Breaker OFF, Fault in PWR Supply

Section 9.3, Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply

Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply

Section 9.4, Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply

9.1

Check Point
When repairing a power supply fault, consider the following items:

(1) Before checking the system, check the rectifier, battery, and power cables.
(2) The PWR circuit card is equipped with the circuits to supply ringing signal and howler tone. When a fault
occurs that causes the bell of the telephone not to ring, or howler tone cannot be heard, etc., check the
alarm lamp on the PWR circuit card.
(3) Figure 5-14 through Figure 5-17 show the block diagrams for the power supply to each module.

ISW
ISWM

PWR
0

PWR HSW00 HSW01 TSW00 TSW01 TSW02 TSW03
1
Note
LPM
PWR
0
EMA
IOC ISAGT0 LANI0
PWR
CPU
1
Note

IOGT0

BASEU
Note: PWR1 is mounted when power supply system is a dual system configuration.

Figure 5-14 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (ISW)

CHAPTER 5
Page 424
Issue 1

NDA-24307

PLO0

MISC

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

IMG1/2 (LN0/1/2/3)
PIM3

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

PIM2

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0
PIM1

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0
PIM0

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0
LPM

PWR
0
PWR
CPU0
1 Note

EMA

IOC

ISAFT-0A

ISAGT-0B

LANI0

MISC

BASEU

Note: PWR1 is mounted when power supply system is a dual system configuration.

Figure 5-15 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG0)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 425
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

IMG1/2 (LN0/1/2/3)
PIM3

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

PIM2

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0
PIM1

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0
PIM0

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0
LPM

PWR
0
MISC DLKC0 GT0
PWR
1 Note

TSW00

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03 PLO0/CLK0

BASEU

Note 1: PWR1 is mounted when power supply system is a dual system configuration.
Note 2: DLKC is not mounted in TSWM1 of IMG2.
Note 3: PLO for IMG1 (TSWM0); CLK for IMG2 (TSWM1)

Figure 5-16 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG1/IMG2)

CHAPTER 5
Page 426
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

IMG3 (LN0/1/2/3)
PIM3

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

MUX1

LC/TRK

LC/TRK

PIM2

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0
PIM1

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0
PIM0

PWR
0
LC/TRK
PWR
1 Note

LC/TRK

MUX0

DUMMY

BASEU

Note: PWR1 is mounted when power supply system is a dual system configuration.

Figure 5-17 Block Diagram of Power Supply System (IMG3)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 427
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

(4) Figure 5-18 shows the power supply system for PIM.

PWR1

PWR0

DC-DC
CONV

DC-DC
CONV
RGU

+5V, +12V, 5V
RGU

RGU
CR (for LC)
REL

HOW

HOW
HOW (for LC)

-48V

-48 V
NFB

NFB
-48V (for LC, TRK)

+80V

rel
-48V

+80V

REL

+80 V

rel

+80V

Note

+80V

-48V

Note: +80V is for message waiting lamp.
Figure 5-18 Power Supply to PIM

(5) Figure 5-19 shows the power supply system for LPM.
(To CPR 0)

(To CPR 1)

PWR0

PWR1
DC-DC
CONV

DC-DC
CONV
+5V,+12V
(To EMA, MISC, Cards, etc.)

REL

-48V

REL

-48V

-48V
(To EMA, MISC, Cards, etc.)

-48V

+80V

+80V

Figure 5-19 Power Supply to LPM (LN/ISW)
CHAPTER 5
Page 428
Issue 1

NDA-24307

-48V

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

(6) Figure 5-20 shows the power supply system for TSWM/ISWM.

PWR0

PWR1
DC-DC
CONV

DC-DC
CONV
+5V, +12V, +5V
(To MISC Cards)

REL

-48V

REL

-48V

-48V
[TSWM]
To GT, TSW, DLKC, PLO cards
-48V

+80V

[ISWM]
To IOGT, TSW, HSW, PLO cards

+80V

-48V

Figure 5-20 Power Supply to TSWM/ISWM

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 429
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

9.2

Fuse Blown Fault

START
Check the backplane of the PIM.

Make a visual check on the backplane for pin
contacting, melting or burn, etc.

Extract all the circuit cards from the PIM,
and insert them back into their slots
individually to see if the fuse blows.

Set the MB switch of the PWR supply UP.
Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply
DOWN.
Extract all the circuit cards from their mounting
slots, except PWR supply.
Replace the fuse with spare.
Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply UP
side.
Set the MB switch of the PWR supply DOWN.
Insert the circuit cards into their mounting slots
individually, with their MB switch to UP side.
Check to see if the fuse blows when the MB
switch has been set to DOWN.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 430
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

9.3

Circuit Breaker OFF Fault in PWR Supply

START
Check the backplane of the PIM.

Make a visual check on the backplane for pin
contacting, melting or burning, etc.

Extract all the circuit cards from the PIM,
and make a visual check of the circuit
cards.

Set MB switch of the PWR supply UP.
Set the circuit breaker of the PWR supply
DOWN.
Extract all circuit cards out of their mounting
slots.
Make a visual check of the extracted circuit
cards.
• Check ICs, resistors, and capacitors to see if
any are burned.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 431
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

9.4

Fault of Alarm Lamps on PWR Supply

START
Press RESET button of the PWR supply.

Alarm lamp goes out.

FAULT SUPERVISION

Alarm lamp illuminates again.

Set the MB switch on the PWR supply UP.
Turn circuit breaker OFF.
Set MB switch on all the circuit cards, except
PWR supply.
Extract all circuit cards from their mounting
slots.
Turn circuit breaker ON.
Set the MB switch to DOWN side.
Check to see if the alarm lamp illuminates.
If the alarm lamp illuminates,
replace the PWR supply with a
spare.
If the alarm lamp does not
illuminate, insert the circuit cards
into
their
mounting
slot
individually to see if the alarm
lamp illuminates.

END

Note: Insert each PWR supply with its MB switch to UP side, and then set it back to DOWN side.

CHAPTER 5
Page 432
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

10. FAN UNIT FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure where a fan in the Fan Unit (FANU) does not operate.
10.1 Check Point
(1) When repairing a FANU fault, exercise care about the following conditions. The fans (a total of 3) are
activated by operating the PWR SW key located on the PZ-M369. The conditions for starting the fan are
as follows:
•

With PWR SW key for the fan set to ON position:

Always operating

•

With PWR SW key for the fan set to AUTO position:

Starts operating if the in-frame
temperature is higher than 40°C (104°F);
stops operating at temperatures lower than
32°C (90°F). See Figure 5-21.

(2) When replacing the FANU with a spare, refer to Section 4, Chapter 4.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 433
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

10.2 Fan Unit Fault
START
Set the PWR SW key on the PZ-M369 to the ON position.

When the fan spins

Set PWR SW key to AUTO position, and short the thermal relay of the thermal
unit.

If the fan does not
operate

Check the connector cable between
the FANU and the thermal unit.

If the fan operates

Replace thermal relay with a spare.

Disconnect
the
fan
connector of the cable for
the thermal unit.
Replace thermal relay with
a spare.
Connect the fan connector.
If the fan does not operate

Check the voltage (DC -48 V) at connectors FC0 through FC2.

If the voltage is less
than -48 V

Check the connector cable (fan
connector) between the FANU and
the PIM.

If the voltage is -48 V

Replace the fan with a spare. Refer to
Section 4, Chapter 4.

After the fault is corrected, set PWR SW key to the AUTO position. If the fans are to continue operating
constantly, set PWR SW key to the ON position.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 434
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

Fan Unit

Thermal Unit

FAN 0

FAN 1

FC0

To PIM/
ISWM

1

FUSE ALM

3

-48V

4

G

2

FE

Thermal
Relay
32o C
89o F

FAN 2

FC1

Thermal
Relay
40o C
104o F

Thermal
Relay
70o C
158o F

Thermal
Relay
60o C
140o F

FC2

POW
FUSE
Power
Filter

rl

RL

FAN

RL

ON
OFF
AUTO

rl

P
rl
N

F

FAN START Switch
G

FE

FA
LM

-48V

E

MN MJ

FAN

To PIM

To Display
Section
of TOPU

Figure 5-21 Circuit Diagram of Fan Unit and Thermal Unit

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 435
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

11. TONE FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the various tones cannot be heard in the whole
system.
11.1 Check Point
When repairing a tone fault, consider that the tone generator circuit is equipped in the TSW circuit card
and supplies tone. Check the alarm lamps of the TSW circuit card.
Figure 5-22 shows an example of the related trunking for dial tone connection.
TSW
Dial
Tone
LC

ORT

Figure 5-22 Dial Tone Connection

CHAPTER 5
Page 436
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DT

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

11.2 Tone Fault

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
Replace the TSW circuit card with a spare
and check.
When only Hold Tone is faulty.
If External Hold Tone source is in
use.

Check the external equipment which sends out
hold tone.
Check cross connections on the MDF. Figure 523 shows a block diagram of external hold tone
supply (optional).

Replace the PLO circuit card with
a spare.

Set the MB switch of the PLO circuit card to
UP side and extract the circuit card from its
mounting slot.
Make necessary switch settings on the new
circuit card, referring to the card extracted.
Set the MB switch of the new circuit card UP
and insert the circuit card into its mounting slot.
Set the MB switch DOWN.
Initialize the system and confirm the tone.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 437
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

This figure shows a block diagram of external hold tone supply (optional) in each Local Node (LN0 - LN3). Note 1

IMG1

IMG2

PIM 3

PIM 3

PIM 2

PIM 2

PIM 1

PIM 1

PIM 0

PIM 0

TSW 12

TSW 13

PLO 1
PLO 0

Melody

Melody
IC

TSW 10
TSW 00

TSW 11
TSW 01

TSW 12
TSW 02

TSW 13

CLK 1

TSW 03

CLK 0

PLOCLK0

TSW 03

PLOCLK0 EMAFH

TSW 02

PLOCLK1

TSW 11
TSW 01

PLOCLK1

TSW 10
TSW 00

EXCLK0

TSWM0

TSWM1

ISW-LN PLO CA-A Cable

PLO-CLK CA-A Cable

To MUSIC
connector
for the EMA
card (IMG0)

MDF

Note 2

External
Tone
Source
(Option)

- Symbols : Circuit Card
TSW: PH-SW12
: CHAMP connector-ended cable

PLO: PH-CK16-A
CLK: PH-CK18
: Backplane connectors

EMA: PH-PC40

Note 1: External hold tone is supplied to the PLO of local nodes only (all LN0-LN3 except ISW)
Note 2: Multiple connection is provided on the MDF also between PLO No. 0 and No. 1 systems.
Figure 5-23 External Hold Tone Supply Block Diagram

CHAPTER 5
Page 438
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

12. SYSTEM DOWN FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure when both the CPU and TSW systems are faulty. Figure 5-24
shows the sequence of repair for system down fault.

When cause for the fault cannot be identified:
Section 12.1

When faulty circuit cards can be assumed from
system message: Section 12.2

Check power supply.

Replace doubtful circuit card with a spare.

Minimize system configuration.

Execute system initialization and see if the mode becomes ON-LINE.

Figure 5-24 System Down Fault Repair Sequence

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 439
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

12.1 When Cause for Fault Cannot Be Identified

START
Check power supply circuits.

Check voltage (DC: -48 V ±5 V) at LOAD side
of the rectifier.
Confirm that NFB (circuit breaker) on all PWR
supplies is at ON position (UP side).
Check to see if there is any PWR supply to
which the alarm lamp illuminates.

System Initialization by loading office data
and program data from the hard disk (Refer
to Section 12, Chapter 6.)
Service connections such as
station-to-station
connection
cannot be set up.

See “Check by Minimizing the System
Configuration” on the next page.

Service connections such as
station-to-station connection can
be set up.

The data in the memory has been temporarily
destroyed. Observe the situation for a while.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 440
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

(1) Check by minimizing the system configuration
Mount only the basic circuit cards in CPU
No. 0 system and initialize.

Remove all circuit cards from CPU No. 0
system except the basic circuit cards.
The circuit cards to be mounted are as follows:
• LN
CPU, EMA, GT, TSW, MUX
• ISW
CPU, EMA, IOGT, TSW, HSW
On the CPU Display Panel (DSP), set its SENSE
switch to “1.”
Press Reset (RST) button on the DSP.
CPU OPE lamp should be illuminated on the
DSP.

Initialization cannot be made.

Check by replacing the basic circuit cards
individually.
Set MB switch of the circuit card UP and
extract the circuit card from its mounting
slot.
Make necessary switch settings on the new
circuit card.
Set MB switch of the new circuit card UP
and insert the circuit card into its mounting
slot.
Set MB switch DOWN.
On the DSP (CPU), set SENSE switch to “1.”
Press RST button on the DSP.
CPU OPE lamp should illuminate on the DSP.
If CPU OPE lamp of the DSP does not
illuminate, replace next circuit card and check it.
(Repeat the above steps for all basic circuit
cards.)

A

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 441
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

A
Initialize by loading the office data and Program Data from hard disk using command
“MEM_HDD.”

Set SYSTEM DATA key on the TOPU to
LOAD position
Using “MEM_HDD,” load the office data and
Program Data from the Hard Disk into the data
memory.
Confirm the SENSE switch is set at “2” on the
DSP (CPU).
Press RST on the DSP.
Confirm OPE lamp illuminates on each basic
circuit card.

Insert removed control circuit cards of CPU
No. 0 and line/trunk circuit cards into their
slots and see if a fault occurs.

Set MB switch of the circuit card UP and insert it
into its mounting slot. (Repeat this for all the circuit cards.)
Set MB switch DOWN and see if a fault occurs.

Insert control circuit cards of CPU No. 1
system into their mounting slots, and see if
a fault occurs.

Insert the following control circuit cards of CPU
No. 1 system.
• LN
CPU, EMA, GT, TSW, MUX
• ISW
CPU, EMA, IOGT, TSW, HSW
Set MB switch of the circuit card UP and insert
the circuit card into its mounting slot. (Repeat
this for all the circuit cards.)

After the fault repair, mount all the circuit
cards into their mounting slots and execute
system initialization. Refer to Section 12,
Section 6.
Confirm that service connections such as
Station to Station Connection can be set up
between LNs.
END

CHAPTER 5
Page 442
Issue 1

NDA-24307

Set MB switch DOWN and see if a fault occurs.

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

12.2 When Faulty Circuit Cards Can Be Assumed From System Message
Faulty Situation:
•

When the system is down with message [0-C] ~ [0-J] indicated, faulty circuit cards can be assumed from
the message detail data. Replace circuit cards with spares.

START
Replace faulty circuit card with a spare.

Set MB switch UP and extract the circuit card
from its mounting slot.
Make necessary switch settings on the new
circuit card.
Set the MB switch UP and insert the circuit
card into its mounting slot.
Set the MB switch DOWN.

Confirm that service connections such as
station-to-station connection can be set up.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 443
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

13. COMMON CHANNEL INTEROFFICE SIGNALING (CCIS) LINE FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-13 occur to a specific
CCIS line.
Table 5-13 CCIS Line Fault Situation
FAULTY SITUATION

REFERENCE SECTION

A specific CCH/CCT card is faulty.

Section 13.3, Specific CCH/CCT Card Is Faulty

When the signal transmission line is a digital line, transmitting/
receiving of control signals cannot be performed.

Section 13.4, Fault of CCH, DTI and Related Flat
Cable

13.1 Check Point
When repairing a CCIS Line fault, consider the following:
(1) Check alarm lamps on the CCH or CCT circuit card.
(2) Refer to Figure 5-25, and check the cable connection.
13.2 CCIS Line Control
The CCH/CCT circuit card controls the signal link (digital) of the interoffice common channel signaling
system and transmitting/receiving call processing information. The signal link controls permit normal
transmission and reception of call processing information.
A break in signal links is detected, then restored to establish signal links. The call processing information
is converted into No. 7 signal format for channel 1 (any channel) of the DTI before being transmitted to a
distant office. Figure 5-25 shows the CCIS line control route.
MDF
MUX
LT Cable
DTI
Front
Cable
CCH

To CCIS Line

LT Cable
CCT

CPU

TSW

Figure 5-25 Controlling CCIS Line
CHAPTER 5
Page 444
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

13.3 Specific CCH/CCT Card Is Faulty
START
Check by replacing CCH/CCT card with
a spare.

On CCH/CCT card, set the MBR switch UP.
On CCH/CCT card, set MB switch UP and
extract the card from its mounting slot.
Make switch settings on a new CCH/CCT
card, referring to the card extracted.
On new CCH/CCT card, set MBR and MB
switches UP and insert the card into its
mounting slot.
On new CCH/CCT card, set MB switch
DOWN.
On new CCH/CCT card, set MBR switch
DOWN.
Check whether the fault is still indicated.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 445
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

13.4 Fault of CCH, DTI and Related Flat Cable
START
Check connectors and flat cables between
DTI and CCH.

Check the connector.

On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On CCH
card, set MBR switch UP.

Check whether the connector is correctly
connected or not. If the connection is found
improper, plug and unplug the connector a few
times.
On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On CCH
card, set MBR switch DOWN.
Check whether the fault is still indicated.

Check the flat cable.

On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On CCH
card, set MBR switch UP.
Test the continuity of the flat cable. If found to
be abnormal, replace the flat cable with a spare.
On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On CCH
card, set MBR switch DOWN.
Check whether the fault is still indicated.

Check by replacing the DTI card with
spare.

On DTI card, set MB switch UP and extract the
card from the mounting slot.
On a new DTI card, make the switch setting,
referring to the replaced card.
On new DTI card, set MB switch UP and insert
the card into the mounting slot.
On new DTI card, set MB switch DOWN.

END
Check whether the fault is still indicated.

CHAPTER 5
Page 446
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

14. INTEGRATED SERVICE DIGITAL NETWORK (ISDN) LINE FAULT
This section explains the fault repair procedure when any of the faults shown in Table 5-14 occur to a specific
ISDN.
Table 5-14 ISDN Line Fault Situation
FAULTY SITUATION

REFERENCE SECTION

A specific CCH/CCT card is faulty.

Section 14.3, Specific DCH/PRT Card Is Faulty

When the signal transmission line is a digital line, transmitting/
receiving of control signals cannot be performed.

Section 14.4, Fault of DCH, DTI and Related Flat
Cable

14.1 Check Point
When repairing an ISDN line fault, consider the following items:
(1) Check alarm lamps on the DCH or PRT circuit card.
(2) Refer to Figure 5-26, and check the cable connection.
14.2 ISDN Line Control
The DCH/PRT circuit card controls the signal link (digital) of the ISDN line and transmits/receives call
processing information.
The signal link controls permit normal transmission and reception of call processing information. Figure
5-26 shows the ISDN line control route.
MDF
MUX
LT Cable
DTI
Front
Cable
DCH

To ISDN Line

LT Cable
PRT

CPU

TSW

Figure 5-26 Controlling ISDN Line

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 447
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

14.3 Specific DCH/PRT Card Is Faulty
START
Check by replacing the DCH/PRT card with
a spare.

On DCH/PRT card, set MBR switch UP.
On DCH/PRT card, set MB switch UP and
extract the card from its mounting slot.
Make switch setting on a new DCH/PRT card,
referring to extracted card.
On new DCH/PRT card, set MBR and MB
switches UP and insert the card into its
mounting slot.
On new DCH/PRT card, set MB switch
DOWN.
On new DCH/PRT card, set MBR switch
DOWN.

END

CHAPTER 5
Page 448
Issue 1

Check whether the fault is still indicated.

NDA-24307

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

14.4 Fault of DCH, DTI and Related Flat Cable
START
Check the connectors and flat cables
between DTI and DCH.
Check the connector.

On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On DCH
card, set MBR switch UP.
Check whether the connector is correctly
connected. If the connection is found improper,
plug and unplug the connector a few times.
On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On DCH
card, set MBR switch DOWN.
Check whether the fault is still indicated.

Check the flat cable.

On DTI cards, set MB switch UP. On DCH
card, set MBR switch UP.
Test the continuity of the flat cable. If abnormal,
replace the flat cable with spare.
On DTI cards, set MB switch DOWN. On DCH
card, set MBR switch DOWN.
Check whether the fault is still indicated.

Check by replacing the DTI card with a
spare.

On DTI card, set MB switch UP and extract the
card from the mounting slot.
On a new DTI card, make switch setting.
On new DTI card, set MB switch UP and insert
the card into the mounting slot.
On new DTI card, set MB switch DOWN.
Check whether the fault is still indicated.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 5
Page 449
Issue 1

FAULT REPAIR PROCEDURES

15. HARD TIME CLOCK FAULT
This section explains the procedure for repairing a hard time clock failure which occurs within the EMA card.
START
Replace the EMA card.

END

WARNING If the EMA card is removed from the
system while the system is in operation
under the control of the CPU 1, the
system will reset and stop all call
processing. See Section 1.3.2, EMA
Card Replacement Procedure, Chapter
4, for detailed instructions.

CHAPTER 5
Page 450
Issue 1

NDA-24307

Replace the EMA card referring to Section
1.3.2, EMA Card Replacement Procedure,
Chapter 4.

CHAPTER 6

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To maintain the system in a normal state, maintenance technicians need to monitor the servicing status of the
system. Figure 6-1 shows the flow of the system status monitor.
When trouble occurs in any part of the system or to any phase of system operations, maintenance technicians
are alerted by an alarm indication or by a report from a station user or an operator. When the system becomes
overloaded, maintenance technicians can execute Line Load Control.
SYSTEM OPERATIONS

1.

ALARM INDICATIONS

•
•
•

Alarm Lamps on Circuit Card
Alarm Lamps on TOPU
Alarm Lamps on ATTCON/DESKCON

2.

COLLECTION OF SYSTEM MESSAGES

3.

INDICATION OF LOCKOUT STATUS

4.

LINE LOAD CONTROL

5.

IOC LINE MONITOR

6.

LINE MANAGEMENT
•
•
•

Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station
Class/Number Change of Station and Data Terminal
Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O./Tie Line

7.

STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM (SMDR)

8.

TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT

9.

OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT

10. TEST OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS KIND
11. ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS
12. SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES
•
•
•
•

Changeover/Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Equipment
Initialization
Power ON/OFF
System Startup

Figure 6-1 System Status Monitor
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 451
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

1. ALARM INDICATIONS
When trouble occurs in the system, the system activates an appropriate remedial action (system changeover,
make-busy shift of the circuit card, restart processing, etc.) by executing the automatic diagnostic function.
Results of the action taken and the faulty situation are displayed.
1.1

Kinds of Alarm Indications
Figure 6-2 shows the kinds of alarm indications.

TROUBLE

ALARM INDICATION

SYSTEM MESSAGE

• TOPU
• CIRCUIT CARDS
• ATTCON/DESKCON

• MAT
• SYSTEM DEDICATED PRINTER

Figure 6-2 Alarm Indications

1.2

How to Stop Alarm Indications
To stop the alarm indication, press ALM RST key on the TOPU or use the RALM/RALMN command.

Note: If the RALM/RALMN command is executed, the system messages that show the reason for the failure

will be cleared. Always print the indicated system message before using this command.

CHAPTER 6
Page 452
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

1.3

Alarm Indications on TOPU
The system has alarm lamps on the TOPU as shown in Figure 6-3. Table 6-1 lists the meaning of each
lamp.

PWR
ON

SMJ

MJ

SMN

MN
ALM

SUP

SYSTEM

PWR
ON

NEC

MJ

MN
ALM

SUP

NEAX 2400 IPX

Figure 6-3 Alarm Indications on TOPU

Table 6-1 Description of Alarm Indications on TOPU
LAMP

COLOR

PWR ON

Green

ALM MJ

Red

ALM MN

Red

ALM SUP

Yellow

SMJ

Red

SMN

Red

FUNCTION
Power ON Indication

CONTENTS
Lights when the power is turned ON to the LPM (EMA card
mounted)

Alarm urgency level
The kind of lamp indications are programmable by variable alarm
indicating lamps for each indication. Refer to Section 1.4, Variable Alarm Indication.
IMG/ISW
Alarm urgency level
indicating lamps for
IMG0 of LN/ISW

LN: Lights when any abnormal state is detected within the node.
ISW: Lights when any abnormal state is detected with ISW.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 453
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

1.4

Variable Alarm Indication
This feature allows PBX users to make a flexible change of system message output grades which range 0
to 3 and alarm lamp grades which consist of MJ, MN, SUP and NONE. Thus, the PBX users can give a
proper alarm grade to each system message according to their requirements. When assigning no data, the
default alarm grades are automatically adopted.

COMMAND
ALMG

CHAPTER 6
Page 454
Issue 1

COMMAND FULL NAME
Assignment of Alarm Grade Data

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

2. COLLECTION OF SYSTEM MESSAGES
System messages are collected in the following ways:
•

Automatic printout to the system message dedicated printer

•

Automatic printout to the MAT printer

•

Printout by DFTD command

2.1

Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated Printer
Figure 6-4 shows the operating procedure.

Power ON to printer.

If a message is registered, the contents will
print out.

Automatic
Printout Status

Is printout
stopped
temporarily?

YES

Set printer port to Make-Busy
status using MBSM command.

NO

Figure 6-4 Automatic Printout to System Message Dedicated Printer Operating Procedure

COMMAND

MBSM

2.2

COMMAND FULL NAME
Make Busy of System Message Printout

Display on MAT
Set Scanning to Scanning ON (default) on the Scanning PBX form to collect system messages. If any
message is collected, the information is displayed in the text box on the DFTD command form.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 455
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

3. INDICATION OF LOCKOUT STATIONS
When a station is in lockout status (permanent signaling state, shorting across speech wires, etc.), it can quickly
be discovered, preventing the situation from developing into serious trouble.
3.1

Indicating Method
By entering the following commands from the MAT, information pertaining to the lockout station concerned will display.

COMMAND

3.2

COMMAND FULL NAME

DLSL

Display of Lockout Station - LENS

DLSS

Display of Lockout Station - Number

Recovery Procedure
Go on-hook and then go off-hook again.
If dial tone is heard, the station is in permanent
signaling status.

Confirm the state of the handset of
the displayed station.

PBX
MDF

On the MDF, connect the test
telephone to the displayed station
and confirm Dial Tone (DT).

LOCKOUT STATION

SEPARATING
TEST TEL.

Hear DT?

YES

The in-house wiring (from the MDF to
the lockout station) is shorting.
Check the wiring.

NO
A
Figure 6-5 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station (1/2)

CHAPTER 6
Page 456
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

A

Forcibly release the lockout station circuit.

RLST command

(Confirm: DT)

Hear DT?

Go off-hook again and confirm DT.

YES

The circuit may be faulty temporarily.
Observe situation for a while.

NO

Replace 16LC card
with a spare.

Figure 6-5 Recovery Procedure From Lockout Station (2/2)

COMMAND
RLST

COMMAND FULL NAME
Release Station/Trunk

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 457
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

4. LINE LOAD CONTROL
In the PBX, Line Load Control can be activated automatically or manually as a countermeasure against
abnormal traffic congestion.
In the case of automatic control, the system automatically monitors an overloaded situation and restricts
outgoing calls from stations and incoming calls from trunks.
In the case of manual control, the operator at an Attendant/Desk Console or the MAT restricts outgoing calls
from stations and incoming calls from trunks.
This section covers the following methods to activate Line Load Control:
•

Control by dialing an access code from theATTCON/DESKCON

•

Control by entering command data from the MAT

•

System Automatic Monitoring

4.1

Operating Procedure

(1) Key operations on the Attendant Console (ATTCON)
By the operations on the ATTCON, restriction is effected on an outgoing call from a station having SFC
in which the SFI = 16 (Line Load Control) of ASFC command is set as RES=0 (incoming calls to that
station are allowed). For restricting incoming calls from a trunk, system data ASYD, SYS1, INDEX59,
b0=1 should be assigned.
•

Setting
Press LOOP key.

Dial the access code for setting
Line Load Control.

(SST)

• Lamp (Figure 6-8) on control
panel lights.
• System message [6-C] displays.

Press CANCEL key.

Figure 6-6 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON—Setting

CHAPTER 6
Page 458
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

•

Cancelling

Press LOOP key.

Dial the access code for cancelling
Line Load Control.

(SST)

• Lamp (Figure 6-8) on control
panel lights.
• System message [6-D] displays.

Press CANCEL key.

Figure 6-7 Line Load Control Operations on ATTCON—Cancelling

NEC

LAMP

Figure 6-8 Line Control Indication (ATTCON)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 459
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(2) Key Operations on the Desk Console (DESKCON)
By the operations on the Desk Console, restriction is applied on an outgoing call from a station having
SFC in which the SFI = 16 (Line Load Control) of ASFC command is set as RES=0 (incoming calls to
that station are allowed). For restricting incoming calls from a trunk, system data ASYD, SYS1,
INDEX59, b0=1 should be assigned.
•

Setting

Press LX (L1-L6) key.

Dial the access code for setting
Line Load Control.
• LLC displays on DESKCON
(Figure 6-11).

(SST)

• System message [6-C] displays.
Press CANCEL key.

Figure 6-9 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKON—Setting

•

Cancelling

Press LX (L1-L6) key.

Dial the access code for cancelling
Line Load Control.

(SST)

• LLC displays on desk console
(Figure 6-11).
• System message [6-D] displays.

Press CANCEL key.

Figure 6-10 Line Load Control Key Operations on DESKON—Cancelling

CHAPTER 6
Page 460
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

LLC is displayed on a Desk Console, when Line Load Control starts.
Line Load indication
LLC

L6
L5
L4
L3
L2
L1

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

*

0

#

Desk Console

Figure 6-11 Line Load Control Indication (DESKCON)

(3) Operations on the MAT
By entering ALLC command from the MAT, Line Load Control executes. The station to be controlled and
the contents of the Line Load Control executed on the MAT are the same as those in Step (1), Key
operations on the Attendant Console (ATTCON).
COMMAND
ALLC

COMMAND FULL NAME
Assignment of Line Load Control

(4) Automatic Setting
If the usage rate of the CPU exceeds the system data usage rate, Line Load Control is automatically set.
In this case, system message [6-C] displays. The station to be controlled and the contents of the Automatic
Line Load Control are the same as those in Step (1), Key operations on the Attendant Console (ATTCON).
If the usage rate of the CPU drops below the system data usage rate, the Line Load Control is automatically cancelled. In this case, system message [6-D] displays. While the Line Load Control is set, the lamps
on the control panel of theATTCON/DESKCON remain lit.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 461
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

5. IOC LINE MONITOR
(1) Functional Outline
This function monitors the IOC port status. As a result of the monitoring by this function, the following
is executed:
•

When the connection with a port has been disconnected, it is reported by a message.

•

When the connection with a port is set up, it is reported by a message.

•

The port status is stored in the memory and updated continuously.

(2) Message Judgment Criteria
Message Judgement Criteria are as described in Table 6-2.
Table 6-2 Message Judgment Criteria
MESSAGE

CONTENT

Port Normal

System data is assigned, and DR signal is ON.

Port Abnormal

System data is assigned, and DR signal is OFF.

Output of Port Disconnected

This message is output when Port Abnormal status has lasted for 30 seconds.
This message is immediately output if port abnormal occurs after the IOC card is
initialized.

Output of Port Status Restored

This message is output when DR signal is ON for the port about which Output of Port
Disconnected message is output.

CHAPTER 6
Page 462
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

6. LINE MANAGEMENT
The following explanations apply to line management:
•

Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal

•

Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal

•

Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line

6.1

Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Station and Data Terminal
Stations can be put into make-busy state by the following operations:

(1) On each station basis using the MBST command.
•

Assign the station number in the STN parameter and choose “1” for the MB box of the MBST command.

•

For the make-busy cancellation, choose “0” for the MB box.

(2) On each circuit basis using the MBLE command.
•

Assign LENS number in the LENS parameter and choose “1” for the MB box of the MBLE command.

•

For the make-busy cancellation, choose “0” for the MB box.

(3) On each circuit card basis using the MBPM command or operating the MB (toggle) key on the card.
•

Assign the required LENS number in the MG, UNIT and Group parameters and choose “3” for the
MB box of the MBPM command.

•

For the make-busy cancellation, choose “2” for the MB box.
or

•

Set to UP the MB key on the circuit card (= ON).

•

For make-busy cancellation, return the MB key down (= OFF).

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 463
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

6.2

Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal
Figure 6-12 shows the procedure for class change and number change of station and data terminal.
START

Line Make-Busy

Refer to Section 6.1.

Class change and number
change

• For changing class, use ASCL command Note 1
• For changing station number, use ASTN command
Note 2
• For changing telephone number, use ALGNN amd
ALGSN comands

Line Make-Busy Cancel

Refer to Section 6.1.

END
Note 1: For guest station of Hotel System, use AGCL command.
Note 2: For guest station of Hotel System, use AGSN command.
Figure 6-12 Class Change and Number Change of Station and Data Terminal Procedure

6.3

Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line
Figure 6-13 shows the procedure to make-busy/make-busy cancel of C.O. line/tie line.
START

Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of
C.O./Tie Line

• For make-busy/make-busy cancel by line basis, use
MBLE command
• For make-busy/make-busy cancel by route basis, use
MBRT command
• For make-busy/make-busy cancel by each circuit card,
use MBPM commands or MB (toggle) switch setting on
the circuit card

END
Figure 6-13 Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of C.O. Line/Tie Line Procedure

CHAPTER 6
Page 464
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

6.4

Line Management Commands

COMMAND

COMMAND FULL NAME

AGCL

Assignment of Guest Station Class

AGSN

Assignment of Alternated Guest Station Number

ASCL

Assignment of Station Class Data

ASTN

Assignment of Station Number

ALGNN

Assignment of Telephone Number Data for NDM

ALGSN

Allocation of Telephone Number Data for NDM

MBLE

Make Busy of LENS

MBPM

Make Busy of Port Microprocessor

MBRT

Make Busy of Route

MBST

Make Busy of Station

MBTK

Make Busy of Trunk

DLEN

Display of LENS Data

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 465
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7. STATION MESSAGE DETAIL RECORDING SYSTEM (SMDR)
Billing information can be managed by connecting the PBX system and an external computer (SMDR
equipment).
Note: The SMDR equipment and its software must be provided by the user.

The PBX system provides the SMDR equipment with the following information:
•

Calling Party Information

•

Called Party Number

•

Call Start Time

•

Call End Time

•

Authorization Code/Account Code

Upon receiving the above information from the PBX system, the SMDR equipment performs editing and
management of the information and outputs the resulting information.
7.1

Transmission Data to SMDR Equipment

(1) Transmission Format
As seen in the figure below, the basic information to be transmitted (Transmission Message) is a block
which begins with Start of Text (STX) and ends with End of Text (ETX). When the call ends, the whole
contents of this information is transmitted to the SMDR equipment.

S
T
X

S
A

U
A

TRANSMISSION MESSAGE

STX:
ETX:
SA:
UA:

E
T
X

START OF TEXT
END OF TEST
SYSTEM ADDRESS
UNIT ADDRESS

(2) Transmission Message
One transmission message consists of 128 bytes of data. Each byte represents by ASCII codes the data to
be transmitted (Refer to Table 6-3). The contents of the data to be transmitted vary with the kind of call,
but the first byte is always transmitted by ASCII code K (4B hex.). The second byte to be transmitted is
the data which specifies the kind of call.
Note: In case the Fusion service is involved, the message can consist of more than 128 byte data.

CHAPTER 6
Page 466
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-3 ASCII Code
ASCII CODE
CHARACTER

BINARY DIGIT

REMARKS

HEX.
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
SPACE
STX
ETX
SA
UA
*
#

30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
20
02
03
30
21
2A
23

b7

b6

b5

b4

b3

b2

b1

b0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
1
1
1
1

1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
1
0
0
0

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
0
1
1
0

0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
0
0
0
1
1
0
1
1
1

0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
0
1
0
1
0
1

Special Characters
Code

(3) Text Format
Text formats can be selected by system data. For information on data assigment for SMDR, refer to the
“Feature Programming Manual.” Text formats used in the system are as follows:
•

IPX format:

This format used for both IOC and TCP/IP interface. Refer to Section 7.2

•

ICS format:

This format used for IOC interface. Refer to Section 7.3.

For detailed information on SMDR TCP/IP interface, refer to Section 7.4.9.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 467
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.2

IPX Format (Text Format of Centralized Billing - Fusion)
Below is the IPX format of billing information to be transmitted to the SMDR equipment. Figure 6-14
shows the transmission message of an outgoing call. Figure 6-15 shows the transmission message of an
incoming call. Also, Figure 6-16 shows the transmission message of a station-to-station call.

S
T
X

0

!

K

K
Kind
/
of
Data
L
Data Length
/
M Note

Transmission Data

Kind
Data
of
Data Length
STX : Start of Text
KK : Outgoing
KM : Extension

Note: For details on the Kind of Data, see Table 6-4.

CHAPTER 6
Page 468
Issue 1

NDA-24307

Transmission Data

ETX : End of Text
KL : Incoming

E
T
X

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-4 Kind of Data
KIND
OF
DATA

CONTENTS

KK
(OUTGOING)

KL
(INCOMING)

KM
(STATION)

00

Not Used

01

Outgoing Trunk/Incoming Trunk Information

Provided

Provided

-

02

Calling Party Information (Station Number)

Provided

-

Provided

03

Calling Party Information (Telephone Number)

Conditionally
Provided

-

Conditionally
Provided

04

Called Party Information (Station Number)

-

Provided

Provided

05

Called Party Information (Telephone Number)

-

Conditionally
Provided

Conditionally
Provided

06

Call Start/Call End Time

Provided

Provided

Provided

07

Account Code

Conditionally
Provided

Conditionally
Provided

Conditionally
Provided

08

Condition B Information

Provided

Provided

Provided

09

Alternate Routing Information/Incoming Route Number

Provided

Provided

-

10

Dial Code

Provided

Conditionally
Provided

-

11

Office Code Information (For CCIS)

Conditionally
Provided

Conditionally
Provided

-

12

Authorization Code

Conditionally
Provided

Conditionally
Provided

-

13

Condition C Information + Billing Info/Call Metalling
Info

Provided

Conditionally
Provided

-

14

Condition D Information + Bill Notification Attendant
Console Number

Conditionally
Provided

-

-

15

Department Code

Conditionally
Provided

-

-

16

Automatic Number Indication

Conditionally
Provided

Conditionally
Provided

-

17

Converted Number

Conditionally
Provided

-

-

18-99 Not Used
Note: Conditionally Provided: Information is provided when data is effective.

Provided: Information is provided on every call with no exception.
-: Not available.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 469
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

1

Byte Data
STX
0
!
K
K
0
1

5

Byte Data

Byte Data

Minute
75

Byte Data
220

1
0
0 ~ 3

Second
150
225

Milli-Second

Billing
Information
/
Call
Metering
1
4
0, 0

1
80

FPC
(3 digits)
10

85

Month

160

Dial Code
(Max. 32
digits)

Hour

15
90

Logical
Route No.

230

Bill Notification ATT
CON No.
1
1
5
5

235

0

Call End
Time

Day
Trunk No.

D

155

Year

Outgoing
Trunk
Information

Physical
Route No.

Minute

Dial Code

240

170

30

STN No.
ATT CON
No.
RT/TK No.
(6 digits)

Calling
Party
Information
(Station No.)
Note

0

Account
Code

105

2

~

110

User
Group
Number

45

Office
Code of
Calling
Party

115

Calling
Party
Information
(Telephone No.)

0
8
0

Telephone
Number
(Max. 16
digits)
125

/

55

Logical
Route No.
(3 digits)

C2
C1
C0
0
9
1

Condition B
Information
Note

Physical
RT No. 1

0
6
3

135

260

195

265

270

Authorization
Code

Authorization Code
205 (Max 16
digits.)

275

1
7
0 ~ 0
280

Converted
Number
(Max. 6
digits)
285

Logical
RT No. 1
210

FPC2
65

Year

Month

Call
Start
Time

ETX
140

Day
70

145

Physical
RT No. 2

215

Logical
RT No. 2

1
3
0, 0, 0
C

Hour

Note:

See Reference 1.
Figure 6-14 Message Format for Outgoing Call - IPX Format

CHAPTER 6
Page 470
Issue 1

NDA-24307

Automatic
Number
Indication
Note

1
2

200

Alternate
Routing
Information
Note

Automatic
Number
Indication
(Max. 32
digits)

Office Code
Information

190 Office Code
of Billing
Process
Office

0 ~ 1

FPC1
130

60

255

1
1
0
185

120

50

250

180

Account
Code
(Max. 16
digits)

FPC
(3 digits)
40

*

0 ~ 1
175

0
3
35

245

0
7
100

1
6
0 ~ 3

95 Milli-Second

Tenant
(3 digits)

Department Code

Department
Code

Second

ORIG
25

Condition
D Information

165

0
2
1

20

Condition
C Information

Converted
Number

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

1

5

Byte Data
STX
0
!
K
L
0
1

Byte Data
Month

75

Physical
Route No.

Second
145
Milli-Second

85

ORIG
Called
Party
Information
(Station No.)

Tenant
(3 digits)

155

STN No.
ATT CON
No.
RT/TK No.
(6 digits)

Minute

Dial Code
(Max. 32
digits)

230

235

170
240
Automatic
Number
Indication
(Max. 32
digits)

105

User Group
Number
(3 digits)

Called
Party
Information
(Telephone No.)

110

175

Account
Code
(Max. 16
digits)

245

185

0
8
Office
Code of
Calling
Party

Condition B
Information
Note

120

0
3

125

C2
C1
C0
0
9

190 Office Code
of Billing
Process
Office

1
8

195

Logical
Route No.
(3 digits)

0
6

250

1
1
0
8

FPC1
130
Physical
RT No. 1

Year

Automatic
Number
Indication
Note

180

115

Telephone
Number
(Max. 16
digits)

3
4

Note:

0 ~ 3
1
3

165

Account
Code

/

65

Dial Code

0
1
~
1
6

0
2
~
3
2

45

60

Call
Metering

*

160

0
7

FPC
(3 digits)

55

Condition C
Information
Note

1
6
225

0
5

50

220

95 Milli-Second

1
3
0
5
C

Month

Second

100

40

215

Hour
90

(Max. 16
digits)

210

150

Day

0
4

Authorization
Code

Logical
RT No. 2

Call End
Time

1
0

35

Physical
RT No. 2

0
3
~
1
2

Year

Logical
Route No.

30

Logical
RT No. 1

1
0

80

15

25

140

Minute
Incoming
Trunk
Information

Byte Data
Authorization Code

FPC2

Hour

1
2

Byte Data

205

Day

Trunk No.

20

135

70

FPC
(3 digits)
10

Call
Start
Time

255

Office Code
Information
ETX

1
2
0
1
~
1
6

Incoming
Route
Number
Note
200

See Reference 1.
Figure 6-15 Message Format for Incoming Call - IPX Format
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 471
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Byte Data
(3 digits)

Byte Data

1

5

10

15

STX
0
!
K
M
0
2
1
0
ORIG
Tenant
(3 digits)

135

140
Calling
Party
Information
(Station No.)
Note

FPC
(3 digits)

25

75

Telephone
Number
(Max. 16
digits)

0
8

145

80

0
3
C2
C1
C0
ETX

Condition B
Information
Note

0
6
85

0
3
20

Called
Party
Information
(Telephone No.)

70

STN No.
ATT CON
No.
(6 digits)

0 ~ 2
3
2

Byte Data

Calling
Party
Information
(Telephone No.)

3
4

Year

Call
Start
Time

90
Month

User Group
Number
(3 digits)

Day
95

Hour
Minute

30
100

35

Telephone
Number
(Max. 16
digits)

Milli-Second

105

40
110

55

Tenant
(3 digits)

STN No.
ATT CON
No.
(6 digits)
0
5

60

65

Note:

Day

115
Called
Party
Information
(Station No.)
Note

Minute
Second
Milli-Second

120
0
7
0
1
~
1
6
125

0
2
~
3
2
FPC
(3 digits)
User Group
Number

Call End
Time

Hour

1
0
ORIG

50

Year

Month

0
4
45

Second

130

Account
Code
(Max. 16
digits)

Account
Code

See Reference 1.
Figure 6-16 Message Format for Station-to-Station Call - IPX Format

CHAPTER 6
Page 472
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Reference 1
Data = 02: Calling Party Information (Station Number)
Data = 04: Called Party Information (Station Number)

02
or
04

10

O
R
I
G

Tenant
(3 digits)

Station No.
ATTCON No.
RT / TK No.
(6 digits)

ORIG: Originating Source Identification
ORIG = 0: Information on Station
ORIG = 1: Information on Attendant Console
ORIG = 2: Information on Trunk

Data = 08: Condition B Information

08

03

C
2

C
1

C
0

C0 =

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
7:

Call
Call
Call
Call
Call
Call
Call
Call

C1 =

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:

Call
Call
Call
Call
Call

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:

Call was
Billing is
Call was
Call was

C2 =

Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination

-

Direct
via ATTCON
Direct (Alternate Routing)
via ATTCON (Alternate Routing)
Direct (LCR Routing)
via ATTCON (LCR Routing)
Direct (Called No. - first 6 digits of change code)
via ATTCON (Called No. - first 6 digits of change code)

Origination
Origination
Origination
Origination

by
by
by
by

OG Queuing
dialing with Accounted Code
OG Queuing & dialing with Accounted Code
Call Forwarding Outside

Origination by Call Forwarding Outside & dialing with Accounted Code

transferred
continued
transferred & billing is continued
transferred to last called party

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 473
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Data = 09: Alternate Routing Information (KK) / Incoming Route Number (KL)

09

18

FPC1
(3 digits)

Physical
RT No. 1

Logical
RT No. 1

FPC2
(3 digits)

FPC1:
Physical Route No. 1:
Logical Route No. 1:
FPC2:
Physical Route No. 2:
Logical Route No. 2:

Physical
RT No. 2

Logical
RT No. 2

FPC actually used
Physical route actually used
Logical route actually used
FPC first selected
Physical route first selected
Logical route first selected

Data = 13: Condition C Information + Billing Info / Call Metering Info.

13

01
•
05
•
07

C

Billing Info
/
Call Metering

Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
0:
1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
F:

CHAPTER 6
Page 474
Issue 1

Data
Data
Data
Data
Data
Data

(Basic
(Basic
(Basic
(Basic
(Basic
(Basic

Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge
Charge

Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit
Unit

x 100)
x 101)
x102)
x103)
x104)
x105)

No Charge Information
Charge Information for 1 cent unit
Charge Information for 0.1 cent unit
Charge Information for 10 cent unit
Charge Information for $1 unit
Charge Information for $10 unit
Calling Metering (4 digits)
Charge Information Error

NDA-24307

In case of
Billing Information

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Data = 14: Condition D Information + Bill Notification ATTCON Number

14

01
•
04

Bill
Notification
D
ATTCON
Number

D -

:
0 :
1 :

Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Not Available
Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Not Applied
Bill Notification (by ATTCON) Available

Data = 16: Automatic Number Indication

~

01
16

*

Automatic Number Indication (Max. 32 digits)

33

* Information Element Identifier =

0:
1:
2:
3:
4:

Unable to Output
Display
Unable to Notify
Out of Service (Out of Area)
Public Telephone Origination

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 475
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.3

ICS Format
Below is the ICS format to be transmitted to the SMDR equipment. Figure 6-18 shows the Transmission
Message of an outgoing call, and Figure 6-17 shows the Transmission Message of an incoming call. Also,
Figure 6-19 shows the Transmission Message of a station-to-station call.

BYTE DATA

BYTE DATA
28

K

1

BYTE DATA
60

MONTH

E
3

ROUTE
NUMBER

6
TRUNK
NUMBER
9
10

TERMINATING
TRUNK
INFORMATION

TENANT

STATION
OR
ATTENDANT
OR
ROUTE
TRUNK
NUMBER

32
34

36

ORIG

12

18

30

CALLED
PARTY
INFORMATION
Note

22

HOUR

AUTHORIZATION
Note
CODE

Note

CALL END
TIME
Note

MINUTE

SECOND
114

38 ACCOUNT
CODE
Note

116

MONTH

DAY

HOUR

CALL START
TIME
Note

48

MINUTE

CALL
METERING

CONDITION
B

Note

OFFICE
CODE
OF
CALLED
PARTY

SECOND
54

100
ROUTE
NUMBER

57

Note

00

ROUTE
ADVANCE
INFORMATION
Note

OFFICE
CODE OF
BILLING
PROCESS
OFFICE

128
ONLY FOR
NO. 7 CCIS
Note

00
00

See Reference 2.
Figure 6-17 Message Format for Incoming Call - ICS Format

CHAPTER 6
Page 476
Issue 1

YEAR

SPACE
(20 Hex.)

CALLED
PARTY
TENANT

51

26

Note:

YEAR

118

96
24

104

CALLED
NUMBER

DAY

92
20

BYTE DATA

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

BYTE DATA
1

BYTE DATA

K

28

BYTE DATA
60

MONTH

A
3

6
TRUNK
NUMBER
9
10

ORIGINATING
TRUNK
INFORMATION

TENANT

STATION
OR
ATTENDANT
OR
ROUTE
TRUNK
NUMBER

32
34

36

ORIG

12

18

30

ROUTE
NUMBER

CALLING
PARTY
INFORMATION
Note

22

HOUR

CALL END
TIME
Note

AUTHORIZATION
CODE

MINUTE

SECOND

38 ACCOUNT
CODE

114
Note
116

HOUR

YEAR
YEAR

118

MONTH

DAY

Note

Note

CALL START
TIME
Note

48

51

MINUTE

CONDITION
B

26

CALL
METERING

SPACE
(20 Hex.)

Note

CALLING
PARTY
TENANT
96

24

104

CALLED
NUMBER

DAY

92
20

BYTE DATA

Note

OFFICE
CODE
OF
CALLING
PARTY

SECOND
54

100
ROUTE
NUMBER
1

57

ROUTE
ADVANCE
INFORMATION
Note

OFFICE
CODE OF
BILLING
PROCESS
OFFICE

128
ONLY FOR
NO. 7 CCIS
Note

ROUTE
NUMBER
2

Note:

See Reference 2.

Figure 6-18 Message Format for Outgoing Call - ICS Format

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 477
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

BYTE DATA

BYTE DATA

K

1

28

BYTE DATA

30

6

32

SPACE
(20 Hex.)

34

9
10

36

ORIG
TENANT

12

CALLING
PARTY
INFORMATION
Note

62

DAY

HOUR

STATION
OR
ATTENDANT

CALL END
TIME
Note

CALLED
PARTY
INFORMATION
Note

MINUTE
68

SECOND

TENANT
38 ACCOUNT
CODE

114
Note

SPACE
(20 Hex.)

116

MONTH

22

DAY

HOUR

SPACE
(20 Hex.)

CALL START
TIME
Note

48

SPACE
(20 Hex.)

CALLING
PARTY
TENANT
96

24

51

MINUTE

CONDITION
B

26

Note

SPACE
(20 Hex.)

128

SECOND
54

SPACE
(20 Hex.)

Note:

See Reference 2.

Figure 6-19 Message Format for Station-to-Station Call - ICS Format

CHAPTER 6
Page 478
Issue 1

YEAR

118

92
20

YEAR

71

STATION
OR
ATTENDANT

18

AUTHORIZATION
CODE

TENANT

B
3

104

60

MONTH

BYTE DATA

NDA-24307

Note

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Reference 2
7.4
7.4.1

Details on Transmission Data
Calling Party Information/Called Party Information
•

The 9th byte indicates the type of the calling (or called) party. The 10th through 17th bytes are data
pertaining to this calling (or called) party.
ORIG (Originating Source Identification):
0 = Calling (or called) Party is a station
1 = Calling (or called) Party is an Attendant
2 = Calling (or called) Party is an outside (inside) party

•

The contents of 12th through 17th bytes vary with the type of the calling (or called) party.

(1) For a station (ORIG = 0): Data showing Station Number
DATA

EXAMPLE

12

1st DIGIT

4

13

2nd DIGIT

0

14

3rd DIGIT

0

15

4th DIGIT

1

16

5th DIGIT

SPACE

17

6th DIGIT

SPACE

BYTE

(2) For an Attendant (ORIG = 1): Data showing Attendant Number
DATA

EXAMPLE

12

1st DIGIT

1

13

2nd DIGIT

0

14

3rd DIGIT

SPACE

15

4th DIGIT

SPACE

16

5th DIGIT

SPACE

17

6th DIGIT

SPACE

BYTE

(3) For a trunk (ORIG = 2): Data showing Route Number and Trunk Number
Byte
12

Data

Example

1st DIGIT

13

2nd DIGIT

14

3rd DIGIT

15

1st DIGIT

16

2nd DIGIT

17

3rd DIGIT

0
Route
Number

0

RT No. = 1

1
0
Trunk
Number

5

TR No. = 50

0

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 479
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.2

Call Start/Call End Time Information
•

The data which indicates Call Start Time is as follows:
DATA

EXAMPLE

18

MONTH

0

19

(01-12)

6

20

DAY

0

21

(01-31)

1

22

HOUR

1

23

(00-23)

3

24

MINUTE

0

25

(00-59)

0

26

SECOND

0

27

(00-59)

0

114

YEAR

9

115

(00-99)

8

BYTE

•

YEAR INFORMATION IS SENT OUT ONLY BY
THE LAST TWO DIGITS AS IN ‘98 FOR 1998.

The data which indicates Call End Time is as follows:
BYTE

CHAPTER 6
Page 480
Issue 1

THIS INFORMATION SHOWS THAT THE CALL
STARTED AT 1 O’CLOCK P.M. ON JUNE 1st,
1998

DATA

EXAMPLE

28

MONTH

1

29

(01-12)

0

30

DAY

2

31

(01-31)

0

32

HOUR

0

33

(00-23)

9

34

MINUTE

1

35

(00-59)

0

36

SECOND

3

37

(00-59)

0

116

YEAR

9

117

(00-99)

8

NDA-24307

THIS INFORMATION SHOWS THAT THE CALL
ENDED AT 9 O’CLOCK 10 MIN. 30 SEC. A.M.
ON OCT. 20, 1998.

YEAR INFORMATION IS SENT OUT ONLY BY
THE LAST TWO DIGITS AS IN ‘98 FOR 1998.

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.3

Called Number
•

The data which indicates the Called Number is as follows:
DATA

EXAMPLE

60

1st DIGIT

0

61

2nd DIGIT

4

62

3rd DIGIT

7

63

4th DIGIT

1

64

5th DIGIT

8

BYTE

65

3

66

0

67

3

68

5

69

1

70

SPACE

71

12th DIGIT

SPACE

90

30th DIGIT

SPACE

91

32nd DIGIT

SPACE

NDA-24307

9-0471-83-0351 HAS BEEN DIALED.

9: OG ACCESS CODE

CHAPTER 6
Page 481
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.4

Account Code/Authorization Code
•

The data which indicates the Account Code is as follows:
DATA

EXAMPLE

38

1st DIGIT

1

39

2nd DIGIT

1

40

3rd DIGIT

1

41

4th DIGIT

5

42

5th DIGIT

SPACE

46

9th DIGIT

SPACE

47

10th DIGIT

SPACE

BYTE

ACCOUNT CODE: 1115 HAS BEEN DIALED.

Note: An Account Code is a numerical code to be dialed (up to 10 digits) by a station user with the

capability to enter a cost accounting.
•

The data which indicates the Authorization Code is as follows:
DATA

EXAMPLE

104

1st DIGIT

4

105

2nd DIGIT

0

106

3rd DIGIT

0

107

4th DIGIT

1

108

5th DIGIT

SPACE

112

9th DIGIT

SPACE

113

10th DIGIT

SPACE

BYTE

AUTHORIZATION CODE: 4001 HAS BEEN DIALED

Note: An Authorization Code is a numerical code to be dialed (up to 10 digits) by station users which will

override the station’s class (RSC or SFC) for facilities access restriction.

CHAPTER 6
Page 482
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.5

Route Advance Information
When a call has been originated by route advancing, the following data is transmitted.
DATA

BYTE

EXAMPLE

1st DIGIT

54

0
ROUTE
NUMBER 1

55

2nd DIGIT

56

3rd DIGIT

3

57

1st DIGIT

0

58

2nd DIGIT

59

3rd DIGIT

ROUTE
NUMBER 2

0

THE CALL ORIGINATES
VIA NO. 3 ROUTE BECAUSE
NO. 30 ROUTE IS BUSY.

3
0

ROUTE NUMBER 1: The route which was actually used.
ROUTE NUMBER 2: The route which should have been selected first.

7.4.6

Condition B Information
The 51st through 53rd bytes are Condition B Information. The Condition B Information indicates the
following data:

BYTE

DATA

OUTPUT NUMBER

51

C2

0, 1 or SPACE

52

C1

0–3 or SPACE

53

C0

0–5 or SPACE

C2:

0 = Call is not transferred
1 = Call is transferred

C1:

0 = Normal Call
1 = Call originated by OG trunk queuing
2 = Call originated by dialing with Account Code
3 = Call originated by OG trunk queuing and dialing with Account Code

C0:

0 = Regular Call (Direct Dialing from a station)
1 = Regular Call (Call is made through an ATTCON/DESKCON)
2 = Call through route advance (Direct Dialing from a station)
3 = Call through route advance (Call is made through an ATTCON/DESKCON)
4 = Call through Least Cost Routing (Direct Dialing from a station)
5 = Call through Least Cost Routing (Call is made through an ATTCON/DESKCON)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 483
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.7

Call Metering Information
The value of call metering from the Central Office is transmitted via the data from the 92nd byte to
95th byte.

7.4.8

BYTE

DATA

EXAMPLE

92

1000

5

93

100

2

94

10

0

95

1

0

WHEN 5200 METERING PULSES
ARE RECEIVED FROM C.O.

Office Code of Calling (Called) Party and Billing Process Office
The 96th byte through 99th byte indicates the Office Code of Calling (Called) Party terminated via
CCIS Line.
The 100th byte through 103rd byte indicates the Office Code of the office processing centralized
Billing for CCIS Network.

Note: Office Code includes the CCIS line access code.
DATA

EXAMPLE

96

1st DIGIT

8

97

2nd DIGIT

98

3rd DIGIT

99

4th DIGIT

100

1st DIGIT

BYTE

CHAPTER 6
Page 484
Issue 1

OFFICE CODE OF
CALLING (CALLED)
PARTY

1

OFFICE CODE = 812

2
SPACE
8

OFFICE CODE OF
BILLING PROCESS
OFFICE

1

101

2nd DIGIT

102

3rd DIGIT

3

103

4th DIGIT

SPACE

NDA-24307

OFFICE CODE = 813

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

7.4.9

Text Format of SMDR - TCP/IP Interface
When using SMDR - TCP/IP interface, billing information is output to the billing output devices
connected by an external LAN in the form of socket interface as shown in Figure 6-20.

PBX(Server)

Billing Information
LAN

SMDR(A)

SMDR(B)

SMDR(C)

SMDR(D)

(Client)

(Client)

(Client)

(Client)

Note: A maximum of 4 clients can be designated as SMDR equipment for each LN.
Figure 6-20 SMDR—TCP/IP Interface Billing Output Devices

Details on the text format for SMDR - TCP/IP Interface are explained below.
(1) Identifier 1: Data Request Text
A text to be sent by the client when it requests the server to send billing data.

S
Y

Text
identifier
(1)

Data length
(00002)

Device
No.

Parity

N

Text sending direction: Client

Server

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 485
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(2) Identifier 2: Sending Data Text
A text for sending billing data in response to “(1) Data Request Text” from the client.

S
Y

Text
Data length Device Sequence
identifier
(XXXXX)
No.
No.
(2)

Billing data
(IPX Format)

Parity

Note

N

Note: Text format of billing data is IPX format only. (Refer to Section 7.2.)

Text sending direction: Client

Server

The number of billing data records is 64 or less.
(3) Identifier 3: Server Response Text
A text to be sent to the client when there is no billing data to send in response to “(1) Data Request Text”
or as a response to a “(5) Status Monitoring Text.”

S
Y

Text
Data length
identifier
(00003)
(3)

Device
No.

Response
No.

Parity

N

Text sending direction: Client

Server

(4) Identifier 4: Client Response Text
A response text to be sent to the server by the client which has received the data by a “(2) Sending Data
Text.”

S
Y

Text
identifier
(4)

Data length
(00002)

Device Response
No.
No.

N

Text sending direction: Client

CHAPTER 6
Page 486
Issue 1

Server

NDA-24307

ACK/
NAK

Parity

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(5) Identifier 5: Status Monitoring Text
A text for use in monitoring the server status from the client’s viewpoint or the client from the server’s
viewpoint. At the same time, the text is used to notify the server of the client status.

S
Text
identifier
(5)

Y

Client
Data length Device
ACK/
device
(00005)
No.
information NAK

Parity

N

Text sending direction: Client

Server

(6) Identifier 6: Connection Disconnect Text
A text to be sent from the client to the server to disconnect the connection. In response to this text, the
server promptly performs processing to disconnect the connection.

S
Y

Text
identifier
(6)

Data length
(00003)

Device ACK/
Parity
NAK
No.

N

Text sending direction: Client

Server

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 487
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

8. TRAFFIC MANAGEMENT
To obtain the value of common equipment usage, the system provides traffic measurement feature. It can
improve the system efficiency.
8.1

The Kind of Traffic Measurement
Table 6-5 shows the kinds of traffic measurements.
Table 6-5 Traffic Measurement Type s
KIND OF
MEASUREMENT

TYPE

DESCRIPTION

1*

Terminal Traffic
Measurement

Measurement of traffic on a per LENS basis, and measurement of the total traffic on
a PIM basis.

2*

Route Traffic
Measurement

Measurement of traffic on a per route basis.

3*

Station Peg Count

Measurement of the number of outgoing connections, intra-office calls, outgoing
C.O. line calls, Tie Line calls, etc. originated by each station.

4*

ATTCON Peg Count

Measurement of the number of each type of call handled at theATTCON/
DESKCON.

5*

Route Peg Count

Measurement of the number of various types of call connections on a per route basis.

6

Service Peg Count

Measurement of the number of times the following services are operated:
Call Hold
Call Back
Executive Right of Way
Call Waiting
Call Pickup - Group
Call Pickup - Direct
Call Forwarding - All Calls
Call Forwarding - Busy Line
Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer
Speed Calling - System
Speed Calling - Station
Off-Hook Outgoing Trunk Queuing
Outgoing Trunk Queuing
Consultation Hold - All Call
Call Transfer - All Calls
Three-Way Calling

8

UCD Route Peg Count

Measurement of the number of incoming calls, answered calls, and abandoned calls
handled at UCD Groups on a per route basis.

9

UCD Group Peg Count

Measurement of the number of incoming calls, answered calls and abandoned calls
on a UCD Group basis.

10

UCD Station Peg Count

Measurement of the number of incoming calls, answered calls and abandoned calls
for each station on a UCD Group basis.

CHAPTER 6
Page 488
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Table 6-5 Traffic Measurement Types (Continued)
TYPE

KIND OF
MEASUREMENT

DESCRIPTION

15

ATT Answer Peg Count

Measurement of the number of answered calls handled by each attendant.

18

Connection Route Peg
Count

Measurement of the number of various type of call connection on a connection route
basis.

19

Connection Route Traffic

Measurement of traffic on a connection route basis.

Note: Asterisk(*) identifies the traffic measurements that can be saved on the HD of the MAT.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 489
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

8.2

Operating Procedure

8.2.1

Procedure for Set-up and Start

The procedure to set up and start the traffic measurement is as follows:
(1) By using the ASYD/ASYDN command, assign the necessary system data as follows:
START
ASYD

ASYDN

When performing traffic measurement on a node basis:
• SYS1, INDEX8 (Number of Tenants)
• SYS1, INDEX9 (Number of Attendant Consoles)
• SYS1, INDEX47, bit 0 (Unit of Traffic Measurement): 0/1 = CCS/Erlang
• SYS1, INDEX47, bit 7 (Traffic Measurement Service): 0/1 = Out/In Service

Assign “1.”

When performing traffic measurement on a network basis (via TCP/IP):
• SYS1, INDEX8 (Number of Tenants)
• SYS1, INDEX9 (Number of Attendant Consoles)
• SYS1, INDEX47, bit 0 (Unit of Traffic Measurement): 0/1 = CCS/Erlang
• SYS1, INDEX47, bit 7 (Traffic Measurement Service): 0/1 = Out/In Service

Assign “1.”

END
(2) By using the ATRF/ATRFN command, assign the traffic measurement programs as follows:
START
ATRF

ATRFN

When performing traffic measurement on a node basis:
• Assign traffic measurement “TYPE” (Note 1), “PORT” number to be used, and the output
“INTERVAL” and “Time (HOUR/MINUTE),” etc. For more details, see the ATRF command in
CHAPTER 8.
When performing traffic measurement on a network basis (via TCP/IP):
• Assign traffic measurement “TYPE” (Note 1), “PORT” number to be used, and the output
“INTERVAL” and “Time (HOUR/MINUTE),” etc. For more details, see the ATRFN command
in CHAPTER 8.

END
Note 1: You can select one measurement “TYPE” at a time. If you need two or more measurement “TYPE,”

repeat the same steps, following the entry of this command.
(3) Terminate all the MAT commands.
An image of IPX “MAT Menu” is shown in Figure 6-21. Terminate all MAT commands, and make sure
no commands are currently running via the “Processes” button.
(4) Set the programmed Traffic Measurement in routine operation.
Click the “Scan New Alarms/Traffic” and “Collect New Alarms” buttons on the IPX “MAT Menu”
(confirm the clicked buttons remain in the pressed state). Then, the Traffic Measurement is activated as
programmed.
CHAPTER 6
Page 490
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

This Figure shows the IPX “MAT Menu” display image. The display should look similar to the following:
Scan New Alarms/Traffic
Office Name (assigned by ASYD/AOFC command)
Collect New Alarms
Collect New Traffic
Abort Data Collection

Major Alarm Indicator

View Scanning Log

Minor Alarm Indicator
Supervisory Message Indicator
Traffic Data Indicator

About
Log Manager
Log out
Configure
Log in
Processes

Command Name Input Text Box

Figure 6-21 IPX “MAT Menu” Display Image (Example)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 491
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

8.2.2

Data Output - Details on DTFD/DTFDN Command

To obtain the collected Traffic data, you can use the “DTFxxx” or “DTFxxxN” command as shown below. The
commands can be activated by your direct log-in operation onto the MAT, but in normal cases, the commands
are to be activated automatically at predetermined intervals assigned by the ATRF/ATRFN command.
Also, each command below corresponds to the Traffic Measurement “TYPE” assigned by the ATRF/ATRFN
command.
When performing traffic measurement on a node basis:
Measurement “TYPE”
(by ATRF Command)

Command
Name

Full Command Name

1

Terminal Traffic

DTF101

Display of Terminal Traffic Data

2

Route Traffic

DTF102

Display of Route Traffic Data

3

Station Peg Count

DTF103

Display of Station Peg Count Data

4

ATTCON Peg Count

DTF104

Display of Attendant Peg Count Data

5

Route Peg Count

DTF105

Display of Route Peg Count Data

6

Service Peg Count

DTF201

Display of Service Peg Count Data

8

UCD Route Peg Count

DTF301

Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data

9

UCD Group Peg Count

DTF302

Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data

10 UCD Station Peg Count

DTF303

Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data

15 ATT Answer Peg Count

DTF501

Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data

18 Connection Route Peg Count

DTF601

Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data

19 Connection Route Traffic

DTF602

Display of Connection Route Traffic Data

When performing traffic measurement on a node network basis :
Measurement “TYPE”
(by ATRFN Command)

Command
Name

Full Command Name

1

Terminal Traffic

DTF101N

Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion Network

2

Route Traffic

DTF102N

Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

3

Station Peg Count

DTF103N

Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

4

ATTCON Peg Count

DTF104N

Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

5

Route Peg Count

DTF105N

Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

6

Service Peg Count

DTF201N

Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

8

UCD Route Peg Count

DTF301N

Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

9

UCD Group Peg Count

DTF302N

Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

10 UCD Station Peg Count

DTF303N

Display of UCD Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

15 ATT Answer Peg Count

DTF501N

Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

18 Connection Route Peg Count

DTF601N

Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

19 Connection Route Traffic

DTF602N

Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

Note: For information on the command display images, see Figure 6-22, Figure 6-23, and Figure 6-24.
CHAPTER 6
Page 492
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

This Figure shows the DTFD command display image (example). The DTFD/DTFDN command should look similar to this.
Data Collecting Log
Traffic Data
Check box to specify the “Traffic Data” TYPE.

This area displays the current Traffic
Measurement data, based on the selected
“Traffic Data” TYPE.

Tool Buttons
Collect Data
Used to collect the Traffic report with regard to the selected “Traffic Data” TYPE. The result text is shown
in the “Data Collection Log” display area.

Stop
Used to quit the currently performed Traffic Data collection.

Print Log
Used to print out the text data now displayed in the “Data Collection Log” area.

Clear Log
Used to delete (clear) the text data now in the display of the “Data Collection Log” area.

View Database
Used to view the whole data (based on the selected data “Traffic Data” TYPE), so far stored in the database.
More details are shown in Figure 6-11-3.

Clear Database
Used to delete (clear) the whole data (based on the selected “Traffic Data” TYPE), so far stored in the database.

Log Colors
Used to designate/change the text font color of the “Data Collection Log” display area.

Exit
Used to exit this command. (Note that the database contents are not cleared by pressing this button.)

Figure 6-22 DTFD Command Display Image (Example)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 493
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

This Figure shows a sample image of the “Listup Report” window for the DTFD/DTFDN command. This window appears
by taking the following operations, and is used to obtain a sequence of Traffic data, so far collected and stored in the database. The window is also used to save the Traffic data text (now displayed in the window) onto your desired PC directory.
- To activate this window:
1. Designate a specific “Traffic Data” TYPE out of the DTFD/DTFDN command check boxes (see Figure 6-11-2).
2. Press the “View Database” button on the left-bottom part of the DTFD/DTFDN command (see Figure 6-11-2).
Listup Report

[ TROUBLE :: DTFA ]

ABCDE

* Terminal Traffic Data (DTF101) *
Start Time:
End Time:

Module Group Unit

Group

Type

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14

CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS
CCS

0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0

1 / 2

Display Area
This area displays the details on
the Traffic report, specified by
the “Page (UP)/Page (DOWN)”
buttons.
Shown here is an example of a
certain first page of “Terminal
Traffic Data (DTF101)”.

12/25 12:00
12/25 13:00

Cancel

Level 0
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000
09252.000

Level 1

Level 2

09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859
09215.859

09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718
09179.718

Close

Level 3
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576
09143.576

69 of 69

Level 4

Level 5

Level 6

Level 7

09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435
09107.435

09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294
09071.294

09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153
09035.153

08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012
08999.012

Total: 69

100%

Save Text File
When saving the currently displayed text page, press this button.
Then, a dialog box, as shown in Figure 6-11-4, appears.

Page (UP)
Page (DOWN)
Any Traffic data, now in the database, can easily be found via these buttons. Select “UP”
or “DOWN”, according to the text display pattern: “the newest the first, the oldest the last.”
Note
Note: When thiswindow is activated, the initial text to appear is the newest file data, out of a sequence of Traffic reports.
Like this, the newest text (in the database) appears on the first page, and the next new, the next page.

Figure 6-23 “Listup Report” Window when “View Database” Is Selected (Example)
The dialog box, as shown below, appears, if the “Save Text File” button is selected on the “Listup Report” window
(see Figure 6-11-3 above). If the file is to be saved:
Export

1. Select “Character-separated values” on the “Format”
list box.

Format:

Destination:

Character separated values

Disk file

2. Select “Disk file” on the “Destination” list box.
OK

3. Click OK.

Cancel

After these steps, a new dialog, asking the saved file name and directory, also appears. Then, complete the data saving by
filling out these necessary items.

Figure 6-24 “Export” Dialog for Traffic Report Text File Saving

CHAPTER 6
Page 494
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

8.2.3

Service Conditions (when performing Traffic Measurement via TCP/IP)

(a) The NDM (network-level) data for the traffic measurement order is replaced/updated, at each time
the system is initialized or data change is requested from theATRFN command.
(b) When the network-level data is once assigned via the ATRFN command, the node-level data for
ATRF command cannot be changed or modified.
(c) When the network-level data is once assigned via the ATRFN command, the already assigned data
by the ATRF command is not cleared, but becomes ineffective.
(d) When a data transfer error occurs, the following are performed in order:
Traffic measurement is suspended momentarily and system message is displayed (notification
of fault)
Traffic measurement, concerning all the remaining data except for the fault-involved one, is resumed
Retry is made repeatedly for the transfer of fault-involved data, until the fault has been eradicated
If the fault hasn’t been eradicated still until the time of next measurement routine, the data is
finally discarded, and next traffic measurement routine starts
(e) When the same Individual ATT Numbers exist on the network, the traffic measurement concerning
the ATTCON/DESKCON cannot be performed correctly.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 495
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

9. OFFICE DATA MANAGEMENT
This section explains how to manage various kinds of data such as Call Forwarding Data, Individual Speed
Calling Data, and Office Data, etc.
9.1

Office Data Stored Locations
The office data is stored in the Memory (MEM) and on the Hard Disk (HD). While the system is in service, it operates by the office data stored in the memory. Should the contents of the office data be destroyed
due to trouble, the system restarts its operations by loading the office data from the hard disk into the
memory. The office data of the system in operation is being backed up by the hard disk.

9.2

Office Data Preservation
Since the PBX keeps operating by the assigned office data, be sure to preserve the latest office data. If the
office data is not preserved, all office data must be reassigned if the contents of the data memory have been
destroyed, because of trouble occurrence, etc. The system will remain in a system down state until reassignment of the office data is complete.
Practice to verify and confirm the valid office data by routine maintenance is considered an effective
means to prevent loss of the office data and occurrence of trouble due to the office data. For this reason,
be sure to keep the following items near the system at all times so that they may be available when needed.

(1) Office Data Programming Sheets
As the most up-to-date data must be recorded in the sheets, be sure to make entries by pencil.
(2) Floppy Disks for Data Saving
To back up the office data stored on the HD, use floppy disks. The necessary number of Floppy Disks (FD)
is determined by the following factors:
•

Mounting capacity of office data depends upon the system data (ASYD-SYS1, Index30, ASYDLSYS1, Index 513, 514).

•

Each floppy disk can save 1MB of data. After a large-scale office data change, in particular which
includes system data, unpredictable failures might occur. To deal with such failures, prepare an FD
for saving the office data before the changing. In addition, prepare an FD for saving the latest office
data.

CHAPTER 6
Page 496
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

9.3

Office Data Management Procedure
The procedure generally taken when changing the office data is shown below.

CREATION OF DATA CHANGE PLAN

Entry Into Office Data Programming Sheets

DATA CHANGING

Entry Into Office Data Programming Sheets

LISTING OFFICE DATA

Entry Into Office Data Programming Sheets

DATA SAVE FROM MEM INTO HDD

MEM_HDD command
Direction Select : Memory to Hard Disk
Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.
MEM_HDD_N command
Direction Select : Memory to Hard Disk
Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.

DATA VERIFICATION

MEM_HDD command
Direction Select : Verify HDD against MEM
Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.
MEM_HDD_N command
Direction Select : Verify HDD against MEM
Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.

DATA SAVE FROM HDD INTO FD

HDD_FDD command
System Select
: HFD0/HFD1
Direction Select : Hard Disk to Floppy Disk
Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.

DATA VERIFICATION

HDD_FDD command
System Select
: HFD0/HFD1
Direction Select : Verify HDD against MAT
Data Type Select : Data Memory, etc.

Figure 6-25 Office Data Change Procedure

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 497
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Figure 6-26 shows the function of three backup commands: HDD to FDD, HDD to MAT, and MEM to
HDD. These commands are available when logging in to each Local Node.

IMG0 (LN0/1/2/3)
NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

MEM

MAT

MEM_HDD
HDD_MAT
DM
NDM
LDM
ND
RCF
CF
SPD
USK
NS
CBK

HDD

HDD_FDD

FDD
FD

DM
NDM
LDM
ND
RCF
CF
SPD
USK
NS
CBK

HDD

FDD
FD

DM
NDM
LDM
ND
RCF
CF
SPD
USK
NS
CBK

DM: Data Memory
NDM: Network Data Memory
LDM: Local Data Memory
ND: Name Display Data
RCF: Wireless Call Forwarding Data
CF: Call Forwarding Data
SPD: Speed Calling-System Data
USK: User Assign Soft Key Data
NS: Number Sharing Data Note
CBK: Call Block Data (for Release 5 or later)
: Command

Note: The Number Sharing data load/back-up also affects the data load/back-up of Dual Station

Calling Over-FCCS.
Figure 6-26 Node-Level Commands for Data Management

CHAPTER 6
Page 498
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

In addition to the three backup commands on the previous page, the IPX-U system also can use
“MEM_HDD_N” and “HDD_MAT_N” commands, which are available at the NCN (Network Control
Node) only. Figure 6-27 shows the function of these network-level data management commands.
Note:

Service conditions for these commands are shown on the next page.

< MEM_HDD_N >
This command is used to save/verify a series of Office Data from the Memory of all Local Nodes to the HDD of the same nodes.
Control Signal from the MAT

Control Signal from the MAT

IMG0
(LN0)
NEC

IMG0
(LN1)
NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

MEM

HDD

Control Signal from the MAT

MEM

DM
NDM
LDM
ND
RCF
CF
SPD
USK
NS
CBK

IMG0
(LN2)
NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

MEM_HDD_N

Control Signal from the MAT

MEM_HDD_N

MEM

DM
NDM
LDM
ND
RCF
CF
SPD
USK
NS
CBK

HDD

IMG0
(LN3)
NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

HDD

NEAX 2400 IMS

MEM_HDD_N

MEM

DM
NDM
LDM
ND
RCF
CF
SPD
USK
NS
CBK

HDD

MEM_HDD_N
DM
NDM
LDM
ND
RCF
CF
SPD
USK
NS
CBK

Ether

Centralized MAT
(at NCN only)

FD

DM
NDM
LDM
ND
CF
SPD

HDD

:
:
:
:
:
:

Data Memory
Network Data Memory
Local Data Memory
Number Display Data
Call Forwarding Data
Speed Calling-System Data

RCF
USK
NS
CBK

:
:
:
:

Wireless Call Forwarding Data
User Assign Soft Key Data
Number Sharing Data Note
Call Block Data
(for Release 5 or later)
: Command

FDD

Note: The Number Sharing data load/back-up also affects the data load/back-up of Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS
(for Release 5 or later).

< HDD_MAT_N >
This command is used to install (overwrite) the updated Program data, which has been already saved on the HDD of the
centralized MAT, onto the HDD of all Local Nodes.
IMG0
(LN0)
NEC

IMG0
(LN1)
NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

IMG0
(LN2)
NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

IMG0
(LN3)
NEC

NEAX 2400 IMS

NEAX 2400 IMS

MEM

MEM

MEM

MEM

HDD

HDD

HDD

HDD

Ether

HDD_MAT_N

HDD_MAT_N

HDD_MAT_N

HDD_MAT_N

Centralized MAT
(at NCN only)

FD HDD
FDD

1

2 Data Load (overwriting)
Data Install

Updated
Program Data

Figure 6-27 Network-level Commands for Data Management

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 499
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Service Conditions for MEM_HDD_N Command
This feature is made available by broadcasting the same back-up request signal toward all the nodes. If a failure
occurs in any of the process, the MEM<=>HDD back-ups on a network level cannot be executed any more.
(Retry of signal broadcasting is not made.)
Service Conditions for HDD_MAT_N Command
When an error occurs in the process of data transfer, the updated program data is no more installed onto the
HDD of the node(s) which is/are involved in the fault.
9.4

Call Forwarding Data/Individual Speed Calling Data Management
Call Forwarding Data and Individual Speed Calling Data are changed at any time because these services
are set/cancelled from the station involved. In the PBX, these data are backed up by FD.
Call Forwarding Data:
HDD_MAT command
Individual Speed Calling Data: HDD_MAT command

9.5

One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data Management
One-Touch Speed Call Memory data of Dterm is destroyed when ELC circuit card has been replaced with
a spare or its mounting slot has been changed. The data can be backed up onto FD before replacement or
mounting slot change of ELC card.
Backup: BOSD command

9.6

Commands for Data Management

COMMAND
BOSD

COMMAND FULL NAME
Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data

HDD_FDD

Data Control between HDD and FDD

HDD_MAT

Data Control between HDD and MAT

HDD_MAT_N
MEM_HDD
MEM_HDD_N

CHAPTER 6
Page 500
Issue 1

Data Control between HDD and MAT for NDM
Data Control between Memory and HDD
Data Control between Memory and HDD for NDM

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

10. TEST OPERATIONS OF VARIOUS KINDS
This section explains the methods of test operations (shown in Figure 6-28) to be performed in case a fault
recovery occurs.

Display of connection status of designated station/trunk
COMMAND

DCON

COMMAND FULL NAME

Display of Connection Status

Test connection by designating trunks, tones, and ringback tone from test station

10.1 Designated Connection Test (Station)

Test connection by designating trunks (outgoing only) from ATTCON/DESKCON

10.2 Designated Connection Test (ATTCON/DESKCON)

Display of line failure indication when faulty condition occurred while a call is in progress

10.3 Bad Call Notification

Figure 6-28 Test Operation Method Examples

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 501
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

10.1 Designated Connection Test (Station)
(1) General
The purpose of this test is to confirm the operations related to a trunk or tone that is designated from the
test station. Refer to Table 6-6. The test result displays on the MAT screen as system message [6-I].
Table 6-6 Designated Connection Test (Station) Operations
ITEM

TEST ITEM

CONTENT OF CONFIRMATION

1

Register (ORT/IRT)

2

Sender

Whether the numbers (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #) can all be sent out
is to be confirmed.

3

3-Party Conference
Trunk

By connecting the test tone to each port of a 3-Party Conference Trunk,
whether the test tone can be heard is to be confirmed.

4

Tone

Various kinds of tone are to be confirmed.

5

Interrupted Ringing
(IR)

Interrupt ringing (IR) is to be confirmed.

6

Trunk

REMARKS

Whether the dialed numbers (1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 0, *, #) can be
received correctly is to be confirmed.

Connections of trunks are to be confirmed.

(2) Precaution
Designated connection to a trunk—A designated connection to trunk is limited only to an individual line
of either 2nd DT system or sender system.

CHAPTER 6
Page 502
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(3) Designated Connection Test Procedure
(a) Register Test Procedure

Lift handset

(DT)

Dial access code for
designated connection

“9xx”
RT No.

+

“xxx”

•

Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N,
SRV=SSC, SID=17

•

Route numbers to be designated are as follows.:

TRK No.

RT NUMBER

(DT)

TRUNK NAME

902

Originating Register Trunk

903

Incoming Register Trunk

Dial “1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,0” (*, #
in case of PB signal)
consecutively
•

(SST)

(NO)
Is next register to
be tested, too?

If any of the dialed numbers are not received correctly, a
Reorder Tone (ROT) is heard.

Hang Up
T RU N K DE S IG N ATIO N

T ES T IN P R O G RE S S

(YES)
RE G IS TE R
O RT

Make switch hook flash
Note

Note:

UN D E R T ES T

If the Trunk Number of the next register is not assigned, the test ends.
Figure 6-29 Register Test Procedure/Connection Diagram

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 503
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(b) Sender Test Procedure

Lift handset

(DT)

Dial access code for
designated connection

“9xx”
RT No.

+

“xxx”

•

Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N,
SRV=SSC, SID=17

•

Route number to be designated is as follows:

TRK No.
RT NUMBER

905
(Music On Hold)

Sender Trunk DP/PB

Connection test is automatically
performed Note 1

•

(SST)

Is next
register to be
tested, too?

TRUNK NAME

If any of the dialed numbers are received correctly, a Reorder
Tone (ROT) is heard.

NO
Hang Up

YES
TRUNK DESIGNATION

TEST IN PROGRESS
MUSIC ON
HOLD

Make switch hook flash

ORT

Note 2
ORT

SND

DP
OR PB

Note 1: After the sender to be tested is connected to the register, the sender sends out 1 ~ 9, 0 by DP

signals and 1 ~ 9, 0, *, # by PB signals, thus checking to see if the dialed numbers are sent out
correctly.
Note 2: If the trunk number of the next sender is not assigned, the test ends.
Figure 6-30 Sender Test Procedure/Connection Diagram

CHAPTER 6
Page 504
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(c) 3-Party Conference Trunk Test Procedure

Lift handset

(DT)

Dial access code for
designated connection

“9xx”
RT No.

+

• Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N,
SRV=SSC, SID=17

• Route numbers to be designated are as follows:

“xxx”
TRK No.

RT NUMBER

(SST)

TRUNK NAME

909

3-party conference trunk
(for station, ATTCON, trunk)

913

3-party conference trunk
(only for ATTCON)

As shown in Figure 6-32,
tone sending is repeated.

(SST)

Is next
register to be
tested, too?

NO
Hang Up

YES
Make switch hook flash
Note

Note: If the trunk number of the next 3-Party Conference Trunk is not assigned, the test ends.

Figure 6-31 3-Party Conference Test Procedure

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 505
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

TRUNK DESIGNATION

TEST IN PROGRESS

1 SEC.

1 SEC.

1 SEC.

1 SEC.

SST

ORT

TSTT
(DT)

1 SEC.

TSTT
(SST)

1 SEC.

TSTT
(SST)

1 SEC.

TSTT
(DT)

Figure 6-32 3-Party Conference Test Connection Diagram

CHAPTER 6
Page 506
Issue 1

NDA-24307

TSTT
(DT)
1 SEC.

TSTT
(SST)

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(d) Tone Test Procedure

Lift handset

(DT)

Dial access code for
designated connection

•

Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N, SRV=SSC,
SID=17

•

For Tone No. to be designated, refer to Table 6-7.

•

Tone designated by Tone No. is heard.

Dial “000”

(DT)

Dial “x x”
Tone Number

(Tone)

Hang Up

TRUNK DESIGNATION

TEST IN PROGRESS

TONE

ORT
ORT

Figure 6-33 Tone Test Procedure/Connection Diagram

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 507
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-7 Tone Numbers
Tone No.

Kind Of Tone

00

Dial Tone (DT)

01

Special Dial Tone (SPDT)

02

Ring Back Tone (RBT)

03

Continuous Ring Back Tone (CRBT)

04

Busy Tone (BT)

05

Reorder Tone (ROT)

06

Service Set Tone (SST)

07

Second Dial Tone (SDT)

08

No Tone

09

Sender Transmitting Tone (SDTT)

10

Call Waiting Ring Back Tone (CWRBT)

11

No Tone

12

No Tone

13

Test Tone (TSTT)

14

Music On Hold (MSC)

15

No Tone

CHAPTER 6
Page 508
Issue 1

NDA-24307

Remarks

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(e) Interrupt Ringing (IR) Test Procedure

Lift handset

(DT)

Dial access code for
designated connection

•

Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N, SRV=SSC,
SID=17

Dial “999”

(SST)

Hang Up

Bell Rings

Lift handset and answer

(SST)

Hang Up
DESIGNATION

TEST IN PROGRESS

A

A

A

SST
ORT

A

IR

ANSWER

SST

HANGUP

Figure 6-34 Interrupt Ringing (IR) Test Procedure/Connection Diagram

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 509
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(f) Trunk Test Procedure

Lift handset
(DT)

Dial access code for
designated connection

“9xx”

+

RT No.

• Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=N,
SRV=SSC, SID=17

“xxx”
TRK No.

Dial the called party
number

(RBT)

The called party at the
distant office answers
and talks

Is next
register to be
tested, too?

NO

Hang Up

YES
Make switch hook flash
Note

Note: If the trunk number of the next trunk is not assigned, the test ends.

Figure 6-35 Trunk Test Procedure

CHAPTER 6
Page 510
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

TRUNK DESIGNATION
A

2nd DT SYSTEM

SENDER
SYSTEM
ORT

CALLED PARTY DIALING

CALLED PARTY DIALING

A

CHARGING SERVICE
PROVIDED
TRK

A

ORT
TRK

CALLED PARTY DIALING
A

NUMBER SENDING
A

SND
ORT

TRK

Figure 6-36 Trunk Test Connection Diagram

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 511
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

10.2 Designated Connection Test (DESKCON/ATTCON)
(1) General
The purpose of this test is to confirm the operations related to a trunk which has been designated from the
DESKCON/ATTCON.
(2) Test Procedure
(a) Trunk seizure with TKSL key

Press TKSL or TRKSL key

“xxx”

+

RT No.

“xxx”
TRK No.

or
“xxxx”
C.O. Line NO.

•

Whether dialing RT No. + TRK No.
OR

•

Dialing C.O. Line NO. is determined per ASYD
command, SYS1. INDEX68. b1.
C.O. Line No. is assigned by ACOC command.

(DT from Distant Office)

Dial the called party
number

(RBT)

The called party at the
distant office answers
and talks

Press CANCEL key

CHAPTER 6
Page 512
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(b) Trunk seizure by access code dialing
Press LOOP key or LX (L1-L6) key

Dial access code
for designated connection

Dial “xxxx”

• Special Code is assigned by ASPA command.
• CI=N, SRV=SSC, SID-17

• C.O. Line No. is assigned by ACOC command.

C.O. Line No.

(DT from distant office)

Dial called party number

(RBT)

Called party at the distant
office answers and talks

Press CANCEL key

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 513
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

10.3 Bad Call Notification
(1) General
When a station user has trouble because of hearing noise during a call, or has other difficulty having a
normal call, the line involved is recorded as a bad call notification.
The record displays on the MAT screen as system message [6-H], which indicates the recording source
(Station Number), Called Station Number or Trunk Number, etc.
(2) Operating Procedure

Talking

• SFC of the station user who can perform this operation must
be allowed ASFC, SFI=46

Switch hook flash

(SPDT)

Dial access code for
bad call notification

(SST)

• Access code is assigned by ASPA command, CI=H,
SRV=SSC, SID=46

System message [6-H] displays

Station user returns
to talking state

CHAPTER 6
Page 514
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

11. ROUTINE DIAGNOSIS
For confirming its own servicing status, the system automatically executes self diagnosis every day, and
displays the result of the diagnosis on a system message. By this function, possible causes for trouble can be
discovered in an early stage and possible trouble can be prevented from remaining undetected.
11.1 Related System Data
•

ASYD, INDEX62 b6, b7 - Routine Diagnosis ACT/STBY Changeover
b7
0
0
1

b6
0 = Every time
1 = Once a week (on Sunday)
0 = Once a month (on the 1st Sunday of the month)

Note: When Routine Diagnosis is simultaneously executed at all nodes (see SYS1, INDEX87, 88), all nodes

execute ACT/STBY changeover according to the data assigned in ISW.
•

ASYD, SYS1, INDEX86,
b0 –

When routine diagnosis starts, and the result of the routine diagnosis is normal, the result
displays as system message [7-O].
0/1: Not displayed/To display

b1 –

When the result of the routine diagnosis is abnormal, it displays as system message [7-P].
0/1: Not displayed/To display

b3, b2 – Processing at the time when Trunk Ineffective Hold is detected. Note 1

Bit
b3

b2

0
0
1

0
1
0

Except the trunks being held on two-way calls
(station-to-station call, station-to-trunk, trunkto-trunk call), the trunks being held at present
are forcibly released

All trunks being held at
present are forcibly
released

X
—
—

—
—
X

LENS of the trunk detected
display as system message
[7-P]
X
X
X

Note 1: Trunk Ineffective Hold is a continuous state other than idle state within a predetermined duration

while routine diagnosis is in progress. Whether it is to be detected/not detected is assigned by ASYD,
SYS1, INDEX89.
Note 2: When Routine Diagnosis is simultaneously executed at all nodes (see SYS1, INDEX87, 88), all nodes

execute ACT/STBY changeover according to the data assigned in ISW.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 515
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

•

SYS1, INDEX87, 88 - Routine Diagnosis Start Time: Assign Routine Diagnosis Start Time only in
ISW. Regarding LNs, set indexes to FF so that all nodes simultaneously start/stop Routine Diagnosis.
Note

Start time should be such a time at which the traffic of the office is the lowest.
INDEX 87 0

2

(Hour)

INDEX 88 0

0

(Minute)

2:00 a.m. is the start time.

To stop the routine diagnosis, set FF respectively to INDEX87, 88.
Note: If the data other than FF is assigned in a LN, Routing Diagnosis is independently activated in the LN.

•

SYS1, INDEX89, 90 — Routine Diagnosis Items: The item corresponding to each bit is to execute
once a day.

Note: When Routine Diagnosis is simultaneously executed at all nodes (see SYS1, INDEX87, 88), all nodes

execute the same Routine Diagnosis Items according to the data assigned in ISW. However, when Call
Forwarding Data Clear/Save is to be executed, the corresponding data (Index 232 b0-b3/INDEX304,
b0, b1, b3-b5) must be assigned on a LN basis
• INDEX89

b0 — Main Memory Check (MM Program Memory)
0/1 = No/Yes
b1 — DM Check (DM = Data Memory)
0/1 = No/Yes
b2 — TSW ACT/STBY Changeover (for Dual Systems)
0/1= No/Yes Note
Note: This data fixed to 0 in LNs.

b3 — CPU ACT/STBY Changeover (for Dual Systems)
0/1= No/Yes
b4 — Trunk Ineffective Hold Check
0/1= No/Yes
b5 — Trunk Ineffective Hold Detection
0/1 = No/Yes
b6 — Call Forwarding Data Clear (See Index 232)
0/1 = No/Yes
•

INDEX90

b1 — Backup of Call Forwarding, Individual Speed Data, Name Display Data, User
Assign Soft Key Data and Number Sharing Data to HDD (see Index 304)
0/1 = No/Yes
b3 — Residual Link Detection
0/1 = No/Yes

CHAPTER 6
Page 516
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

•

INDEX232

b0 — Call Forwarding - All Calls Data Clear
0/1 = No/Yes (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX232, b6=1)
b1 — Call Forwarding - Busy Line Data Clear
0/1 = No/Yes (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX232, b6=1)
b3 — Call Forwarding - Don’t Answer Data Clear
0/1 = No/Yes (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX232, b6=1)

•

INDEX304

b0 — Individual Speed Calling Data Saving
0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)
b1 — Call Forwarding Data Saving
0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)
b3 — Name Display Data Saving
0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)
b4 — User Assign Soft Key Data Saving
0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)
b5 — Number Sharing Data Saving
0/1 = Out/In Service (This data is valid when SYS1, INDEX90, b1=1)

11.2 Routine Diagnosis Result
The result of routine diagnosis displays as a system message.
Normally ended:

[7-O]

Abnormality detected

[7-P] Refer to Chapter 3 for more details.

In case an abnormality is detected, initiate necessary processing explained in Chapter 5.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 517
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12. SYSTEM CONTROL PROCEDURES
Although the system is remarkably maintenance free, maintenance technicians occasionally may confront a
situation in which they have to manually control the system. This chapter describes system control procedures
focusing on the following four items.
•

Changeover/Make-busy/Make-busy Cancel of Equipment

•

Initialization

•

How to Turn ON/OFF the Whole System

•

System Start-up

Note: Changeover of equipment is available for common control equipment, which is provided in a dual

configuration.
12.1 Changeover/Make-Busy/Make-Busy Cancel of Equipment
12.1.1 General
This section explains system operations which are necessary for Changeover/Make-Busy/Make-Busy
Cancel of equipment dividing them into the following two blocks.
•

CPU Block

•

Switching Block (TSW/HSW/DLKC/MUX, PLO/CLK)

Prior to performing these operations, see Figure 6-37 through Figure 6-44 to obtain general
understanding on the system configuration.

CHAPTER 6
Page 518
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

This figure shows a system block diagram of ISW, which adopts a dual configuration. As seen in the
figure, ISW has the following terminals for the ACT/STBY changeover of dual system equipment:
CPU: If the ACT/STBY of CPU (ISW) is once changed over, the whole controlling block (including
CPU, ISAGT, LANI in ISW) are also changed over.
IOGT: If the ACT/STBY of IOGT (ISW) is once changed over, the whole switching block within the
system (IOGT, TSW, HSW in ISW and TSW, MUX, DLKC in all LNs) are also changed over.
However, PLO (in both ISW and each LN) is not affected.
PLO: If the ACT/STBY of PLO in ISW is once changed over, only the PLOs in ISW are solely
changed over.

HSW 11
HSW 01
HSW 10
External Cables
(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

HSW 00

To TSW of LN3

TSW 03

To TSW of LN2

TSW 02

To TSW of LN1

TSW 01

To TSW of LN0

TSW 00

TSW I/O BUS

TSW I/O BUS

External Cables
(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

TSW 13

To TSW of LN3

TSW 12

To TSW of LN2

TSW11

To TSW of LN1

TSW 10

To TSW of LN0
To PLO1 (TSWM0)
of each LN

PLO 1
PLO 0

External Cables
(ISW-LN PLO CA-n)

To PLO0 (TSWM0)
of each LN

Note

IOGT 1
IOGT 0

ISAGT CPR 1

CPR 0 ISAGT

CPU 1

CPU 0
LANI

LANI

LANI

LANI

MISC BUS
EMA

IOC/
MISC

Fusion Link
ISAGT: PZ-GT13

LANI : PZ-PC19

IOGT: PH-GT10

TSW : PU-SW00

H S W : PU-SW01

P L O : PH-CK16/17-A

EMA : PH-PC40

I O C : PH-IO24

Figure 6-37 System Block Diagram for ISW Switching Network
Note:

Even though the ACT/STBY of PLO in ISW is once changed over, the PLO/CLK in each LN are not changed over.
This is because the PLOs in ISW and each LN (TSWM0) have multiple connections, respectively, via the backboard
bus. For more details, refer to the “Circuit Card Manual.”

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 519
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

This figure shows a system block diagram of LN, which adopts a dual configuration. As seen in the
figure, each LN has following terminals for the ACT/STBY changeover of dual system equipment:
CPU :

If the ACT/STBY of CPU is once changed over, the whole controlling block in the
same node (including CPU, ISAGT, LANI) and GT in both TSWM0 and TSWM1
are also changed over.

GT (TSWM0) : If the MBR key is flipped on the active GT (PH-GT09) card in TSWM0, the whole
switching block in IMG0/1 (TSW, MUX, DLKC) and IMG2/3 (TSW, MUX) are totally changed over. However, PLO (in TSWM0) and CLK (in TSWM1) are not affected.
PLO (TSWM0): If the MB key is flipped on the active PLO (PH-CK16-A) card (in TSWM0), the
ACT/STBY of both PLO (in TSWM0) and CLK (in TSWM1) are totally changed
over.
LN0/1/2/3

To/From TSW of ISWM

IMG 0

IMG 1

Line/Trunk PM

Line/Trunk PM
PM BUS

PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW
MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

External Cables
(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

TSW 12
TSW 02
TSW 10

TSW 00

TSW 01

TSW 13

TSW 03

TSW 11

TSW I/O BUS
TSW I/O BUS

DLKC 1
DLKC 0

PLO 1

From PLO
of ISWM

PLO 0

Note

To CLK of
TSWM1

External Cables
(ISW-LN PLO CA-n)

External Cables
(PLO-CLK CA-n)
GT 1
GT 0

TSWM0

To TSWM1
To TSWM1

ISAGT-A
ISAGT-B

CPU 1

CPU 0

CPR 0

ISAGT-B

ISAGT-A

LANI

LANI

LANI

LANI

CPR 1

MISC BUS

EMA

IOC/
MISC

Fusion Link
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13
MUX: PH-PC36

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20
DLKC: PH-PC20

LANI: PZ-PC19
PLO: PH-CK16-A

GT: PH-GT09
EMA: PH-PC40

TSW: PH-SW12
IOC: PH-IO24

Figure 6-38 System Block Diagram for LN Switching Network (1/2)
Note:

See “Note” on the previous page.

CHAPTER 6
Page 520
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

LN0/1/2/3
To /From TSW of ISWM

IMG 2

IMG 3

Line/Trunk PM

Line/Trunk PM
PM BUS

PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

MUX

PCM HW

PCM HW

PM BUS

PCM HW
MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

External Cables
(ISW-LN TSW CA-n)

TSW 12
TSW 02
TSW 10

TSW 00

TSW 01

TSW 13

TSW 03

TSW 11

TSW I/O BUS
TSW I/O BUS

CLK 1
From PLO
of ISWM

CLK 0

External Cable
(PLO-CLK CA-n)

GT 1
GT 0

TSWM1

To TSWM0
To TSWM0

ISAGT-B

ISAGT-A
ISAGT-B

ISAGT-A

CPU 1

CPU 0

CPR 0

LANI

LANI

LANI

LANI

CPR 1

MISC BUS

EMA

IOC/
MISC

Fusion Link
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13
MUX: PH-PC36

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20
CLK: PH-CK18

LANI: PZ-PC19
EMA: PH-PC40

GT: PH-GT09
IOC: PH-IO24

TSW: PH-SW12

Figure 6-38 System Block Diagram for LN Switching Network (2/2)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 521
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To perform the ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6-39, and
then operate the related key.
Note 1: LED indications cited in Figure 6-39 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF)

can differ, depending on each system setting.
Note 2: STATUS 7-seg. LED provides information on ACT/STBY status of the belonging CPU. For details on

the LED’s checking method, refer Figure 6-44.

System State
CPU 0 -> ACT
TSW 0 -> ACT
PLO 0 -> ACT

PLO
TSW

OPE

IOGT

MB
TSW ACT

TSW ACT

TSW MB
TSW MBR

MB
MBR

FRONT
FRONT
FRONT

ISW
HSW

TOPU
02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19

HSW ACT
HSW11 (PU-SW01)

HSW10 (PU-SW01)

TSW13 (PU-SW00)

TSW12 (PU-SW00)

TSW11 (PU-SW00)

TSW10 (PU-SW00)
PLO1
(PH-CK16-A/17-A)

IOGT1 (PH-GT10)

IOGT0 (PH-GT10)
PLO0
(PH-CK16-A/17-A)

04

TSW03 (PU-SW00)

03

TSW02 (PU-SW00)

TSW01 (PU-SW00)

00

TSW00 (PU-SW00)

FRONT

HSW01 (PU-SW01)

HSW00 (PU-SW01)

MB

ISWM

.....
.....
1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

OFF

1

2
E

1

C

PZ-DK224

OFF

CPUOPE WDT

MBR

.....
.....
1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

IMG1

OFF

1

2

IMG2

E

1

C

STATUS

OFF

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

Note 2

OFF

BASEU

IMG3

4 6

0

OFF

IMG0

A

IOC(PH-IO24)

EMA (PH-PC49)

MMC(PH-M22)

LPM

4 6

0

OFF

A

OPE

OPEOPE/MB

DSP 1 (PZ-DK224)

DSP 0 (PZ-DK224)

1

5

6

7

8

OFF

1

FRONT VIEW

2

3

4

5

6

7

C

A

E

0

4 6
2

8

OFF

FRONT
Legend

:

Lamp is ON

:

Lamp is Flashing

:

Lamp is OFF

Figure 6-39 How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (ISW)
CHAPTER 6
Page 522
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To perform the ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6-40, and
then operate the related key.
Note 1: LED indications cited in Figure 6-40 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF)

can differ, depending on each system setting.
Note 2: STATUS 7-seg. LED provides information on ACT/STBY status of the belonging CPU. For details on

the LED’s checking method, refer Figure 6-44.
IMG0
System State

TOPU

CPU 0 -> ACT
TSW 0 -> ACT

13

14

MUX ACT
MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

13

14

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM3

13

14

MUX

MUX ACT
MB

MUX ACT

PIM2

FRONT

FANU
MUX ACT
MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

13

14

MUX(PH-PC36)

MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM1

MUX ACT

PIM0
DSP 1 (PZ-DK224)
03

04
.....
.....

OPEOPE/MB

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

OFF

2

4 6

0

E

1

C

A

1

OFF

PZ-DK224

OFF

CPUOPE WDT

MBR

.....
.....
1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

IMG1

OFF

1

2

IMG3

4 6

E

0

OFF

IMG0

IMG2

1

C

A

IOC(PH-IO24)

EMA (PH-PC49)

LPM

STATUS

OFF

1

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

OFF

BASEU

DSP 0 (PZ-DK224)

1

Note 2

OFF
4 6

FRONT VIEW

C

A

E

0

2

1

OFF

FRONT

Legend
: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is Flashing

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 6-40 How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG0)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 523
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To perform ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6-41, and then
operate the related key.
Note: LED indications cited in Figure 6-41 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF) can

differ, depending on each system setting.
IMG1
System State

TOPU

TSW 0 -> ACT
PLO 0 -> ACT
DLKC 0 -> ACT

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM3

MUX

MUX ACT
MB

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM2

FRONT

FANU
13 14

TSW

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

GT

PIM1

OPE/MB

TSW ACT
MB
TSW MBR

13 14

MB
MBR

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM0

FRONT

FRONT

PLO

08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
ACT
PLO Note 1

PLO Note 1
(RES)

TSW 13 (PH-SW12)

TSW 12 (PH-SW12)

TSW 11 (PH-SW12)

TSW 10 (PH-SW12)

TSW 03 (PH-SW12)

TSW 02 (PH-SW12)

TSW 01 (PH-SW12)

TSW 00 (PH-SW12)

GT (PH-GT09)

GT (PH-GT09)

OPE/MB
MB

DLKC (PH-PC20)

DLKC

DLKC (PH-PC20)

TSWM

MB

FRONT

BASEU
FRONT VIEW
Legend
: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is OFF

FRONT

Figure 6-41 How to Check the LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG1)

CHAPTER 6
Page 524
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To perform the ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6-42, and
then operate the related key.
Note: LED indications cited in Figure 6-42 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF) can

differ, depending on each system setting.
IMG2
System State

TOPU

TSW 0
CLK 0

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM3

MUX

MUX ACT
MB

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM2

-> ACT
-> ACT

FRONT

FANU
13 14

TSW

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM1

GT

OPE/MB

TSW ACT
MB
TSW MBR

13 14

MB
MBR

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM0

FRONT

FRONT

CLK

08 09 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
OPE

(RES)

CLK (PH-CK18)

CLK (PH-CK18)

TSW 13 (PH-SW12)

TSW 12 (PH-SW12)

TSW 11 (PH-SW12)

TSW 10 (PH-SW12)

TSW 03 (PH-SW12)

TSW 02 (PH-SW12)

TSW 01 (PH-SW12)

TSW 00 (PH-SW12)

GT (PH-GT09)

GT (PH-GT09)

TSWM1

MB

FRONT

BASEU
FRONT VIEW
Legend
: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 6-42 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG2)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 525
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To perform the ACT/STBY system changeover, check the lamp indicators shown in Figure 6-43, and
then operate the related key.
Note: LED indications cited in Figure 6-43 are only an example. The indicating pattern (ON/Flash/OFF) can

differ, depending on each system setting.

IMG 3

System State
TSW 0 -> ACT

TOPU
13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM3

MUX

MUX ACT
MB

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM2

FRONT

FANU
13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM1

13 14

MUX(PH-PC36)
MUX(PH-PC36)

PIM0

DUMMY

BASEU
FRONT VIEW
Legend
: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 6-43 How to Check LEDs and SW Keys for System Changeover (IMG3)

CHAPTER 6
Page 526
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

•

How to check the STATUS 7-seg. LEDs
The ACT/STBY status of CPU can be confirmed by viewing theSTATUS 7-seg. LEDs. Visually
check the LED indications and confirm which CPU is active in your system.
When the STATUS LEDs display any of the two-digit numbers (00 - 99), the belonging CPU is
active. If the LEDs display the three letters (S, B and Y) in rotation, the CPU system is in STBY
mode. Note that the numbers (00 - 99), displayed on the active CPU front panel (DSP), conform
to the percentage points showing CPU occupancy rate.

DSP (Front View)

DSP (Front View)

MBR CPUOPE WDT IMG0

MBR CPUOPE WDT IMG0
IMG1 IMG2

2

3

STATUS

4

OFF

2

3

4

5

6

7

1

1

4

2

3

4

STATUS

5

6

7

2

3

4

5

6

7

E

E

2

C

A

1

If the CPU is in ST-BY mode,
the left-side LED here goes
OFF and the right side beams
S, b and y in rotation.

8

OFF

4 6

0

2

3

OFF

8

OFF

2

4 6

0

1

If the CPU is active, the
LEDs here indicate CPU
occupancy rate.

IMG3

8

1

OFF

2

3

4

5

6

7

C

A

1

IMG1 IMG2

IMG3

8

OFF

ST-BY

Active
Legend
: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is OFF

: Lamp is Flashing

Note 1: The figure above shows an example of lamp indications on the DSP mounted in the ISW.
Note 2: In addition to the indication of “STATUS” 7-seg. LEDs, the ACT/ST-BY of the CPU also can be

confirmed via the “CPU OPE” and “IMGn” lamps. Lamp indications on CPR for the fully
expanded system (one ISW and four LNs) are shown below:

ISW

LN (IMG0)

LED NAME
ACT

STBY

ACT

STBY

CPU OPE

Steady-green

OFF

Steady-green

OFF

IMG0

Steady-green

Flash green

Flash green

Flash green

IMG1

Steady-green

OFF

Flash green

OFF

IMG2

Steady-green

OFF

Flash green

OFF

IMG3

Steady-green

OFF

Flash green

OFF

Figure 6-44 How to Check STATUS LEDs

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 527
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.2 How to Control CPU Block
The ACT/STBY of CPU, when it is provided in a dual configuration, can be
switched over by one of the operations shown in Table 6-8. If the system of CPU
in the LN is changed over, the ACT/STBY of GT (in TSWM) also changes over.
See Figure 6-45.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 6-8 Changeover of CPU Block

TYPE

OPERATIONS

REMARKS

Changeover by
Use the CMODI/CMOD command.
CMODI/CMOD
Note 1 See Chapter 8.

CPU OPE lamp
lights steady green
on the DSP of the
CPU, which is
Changeover by key Turn ON the MBR key on the DSP of the active CPU. After a few seconds,
placed into ACToperation
return the MBR key to the previous position.
mode by this
Note 1 See Section 12.1.3, Manual System Changeover of CPU.
operation. OPE/MB
Forced Changeover ACT/STBY mode of CPU can be controlled by CPU SEL key operation on the lamp of GT
(PH-GT09) card,
Note 2 EMA (PH-PC40) card.
which is in the
UP- No. 0 system (ACT)
controlling route,
DOWN- No. 1 system (ACT)
lights green.
Normally, this key must be placed in the center position when the CPU is
Note 3
provided in a dual configuration.
See Section 12.1.4, Forced Changeover of CPU.
Note 1: While changeover of the CPU is in progress, any call attempt is rejected. Already established calls,

however, will not be affected.
Note 2: When the forced changeover is executed, the entire system is initialized. For this reason, do not use

this operation except in unavoidable circumstances.
Note 3: Except in the case of ISW, the CPU mode change (in LN) affects the ACT/STBY of GT (PH-GT09)

card. See Figure 6-45.
Figure 6-45 shows a system block diagram centering upon the CPU and its controlling GT in a LN.
Though the two sides have a complicated cable connection, the controlling route of CPU 0 directly
goes to GT 0, and that of CPU 1 to GT 1. Therefore, if the system of CPU is changed over, the ACT/
STBY of GT also changes over (for LN only: IOGT is not changed over in the the case of ISW.)

CHAPTER 6
Page 528
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To/From TSW of ISWM
IMG 0/2

MUX

MUX

MUX

IMG 1/3

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

MUX

TSW 11

TSW 10

MUX

MUX

TSW 02

MUX

MUX

TSW 13

TSW 12

TSW 01

TSW 00

MUX

TSW 03

TSW I/O BUS
TSW I/O BUS
DLKC 0

DLKC 1

Note 2

PLO 1/
CLK 1

As shown below, though an external cable is
physically connected between ISAGT 0 and
GT 1, the actual control signal is sent/
received only between ISAGT 0 and GT 0 via
the backboard bus.

PLO 0/
CLK 0

Note 3

Note 2

Note 3

GT 1
GT 0
GT 0

GT 1
IOP0

ISAGT

CPR 0 ISAGT

CPR 1

CPU 1
Backboard Bus

T

ISAGT0

CPU 0

Backboard

LANI
LANI

External Cable

LANI

LANI

CPU
MISC BUS

Note : As for the ISW, although the cable
connection is the same as above, the
control signal is sent from ISAGT0 to
both IOGT0/1.
ISAGT: PZ-GT13/PZ-GT20
DLKC : PH-PC20

EMA

LANI: PZ-PC19
PLO : PH-CK16-A/17-A

IOC/
MISC

GT : PH-GT09
CLK : PH-CK18

TSW: PH-SW12
EMA: PH-PC40

MUX: PH-PC36
IOC : PH-IO24

Note 1: This figure shows the Switching Network diagram only related to the LNs. For the diagram

regarding the ISW. See Figure 6-37.
Note 2: This card is mounted in TSWM0 only.
Note 3: PLO card is mounted in TSWM0 and CLK card is mounted in TSWM1.
Figure 6-45 System Block Diagram in LN (Switching Network Between CPU and GT)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 529
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.3 Manual System Changeover of CPU
To change over the CPU system, the CMODI/CMOD command is normally used. However, if the command cannot be used for some reason, use the key operations listed below:
Note: For system changeover via the command, see Chapter 8.

WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys, applying
extreme care.
Changeover Procedure for CPU of ISW
STEP 1

Determine which CPU is active.
(1) Check the lamp indications on the CPU Display Panel (DSP).

DSP (Front View)

CPUOPE WDT

MBR

IMG1

2

3

IMG2 IMG3

IMG1

1

OFF

2

3

4

2

3

4

OFF

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

6

7

8

2

OFF

E

0

E

2

5

4 6
C

8

1

OFF

4 6

0

2

OFF

1

IMG2 IMG3

A

1

IMG0

STATUS

STATUS

4

CPUOPE WDT

MBR

2

3

4

5

6

7

C

A

1

IMG0

8

OFF

STBY

Active
Legend
: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is Flashing

: Lamp is OFF

Figure 6-46 CPU in ACT/STBY Mode (ISW)

(2) Check the mate CPU’s STBY mode.
WARNING The system changeover of CPU can be done only when the mate CPU is in STBY mode. Do
not attempt the changeover if the mate CPU is closed.

CHAPTER 6
Page 530
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

STEP 2

Flip the MBR key on the DSP of the active CPU.

After the above steps, set the MBR key as shown below.
The system changeover starts automatically.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
1

STATUS

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

OFF

2

1

2

4 6

0

E

1

C

A

1

OFF

OFF

DSP (Active)

Figure 6-47 CPU Changeover via MBR Key (ISW)
Note: If the MBR key remains in the UP position, the CPU stays in its make-busy status. Be sure to return the

key to the DOWN position except in the case of a special purpose.
STEP 3

Confirm the changed lamp indications.
To confirm the CPU changeover, check the lamps on both DSPs. LED indications must change
as shown when the CPU system has been correctly changed over.
CPU Formerly Active
CPU OPE

After Changeover

: Steady-ON (green)

: Flash (green)
IMG0
: Flash (green)
IMG1-3
MB/OPE (GT Card) : Steady-ON (green)

Flash (green)
OFF
OFF
After Changeover

CPU Formerly in STBY Mode
CPU OPE

OFF

: OFF

Steady-ON (green)

IMG0
: Flash (green)
IMG1-3
: OFF
MB/OPE (GT Card) : OFF

Steady-ON (green)
Flash (green)
Steady-ON (green)

Figure 6-48 LED Indications Before and After CPU Changeover (ISW)

STEP 4

Analyze the displayed system messages.
After STEPs 1 through 3 are performed, the system messages [7-C] and [7-D] automatically
display. Confirm that no errors occurred during the CPU changeover process.

Note: When the CPU mode change executes, the MAT (TCP/IP) is once disconnected. Then, log in to the

system again.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 531
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Changeover Procedure for CPU of LN
STEP 1

Determine which CPU is active.
(1) Check the lamp indications on the CPU Display Panel (DSP).
DSP (Front View)

CPUOPE WDT

MBR

IMG1

2

3

IMG2 IMG3

IMG1

1

OFF

2

3

4

2

3

4

OFF

3

4

5

6

7

8

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

6

7

8

2

OFF

E

0

E

2

5

4 6
C

8

1

OFF

4 6

0

2

OFF

1

IMG2 IMG3

A

1

IMG0

STATUS

STATUS

4

CPUOPE WDT

MBR

2

3

4

5

6

7

C

A

1

IMG0

8

OFF

STBY

Active
Legend

: Lamp is Flashing

: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is OFF

Note: IMG1 through IMG3 lamp indication may differ depending on the system configuration.
Figure 6-49 CPU in ACT/STBY Mode (LN)

The CPU changeover also affects the ACT/ST-BY of GT(s) in the TSWM(0/1). Referring to
Figure 6-50, check the lamp indications on the GT (PH-GT09) card(s).

GT (PH-GT09)

green

OPE/MB

OPE/MB

MB

MB

MBR

MBR

GT: Active

GT: ST-BY

Legend
FRONT VIEW

: Lamp is ON

Figure 6-50 GT in ACT / STBY Mode (LN)
CHAPTER 6
Page 532
Issue 1

NDA-24307

: Lamp is OFF

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

(2) Check the mate CPU’s STBY mode. Also check the mate GT’s STBY mode. Refer to
Figure 6-50.
WARNING The system changeover of CPU can be done only when the mate CPU is in STBY mode. Do
not attempt the changeover if the mate CPU is closed.
STEP 2

Flip the MBR key on the DSP of the active CPU.
After the above steps, set the MBR key as shown below.
The system changeover starts automatically.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required
1

STATUS

2

3

4

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

OFF

2
E

1

1

2

4 6

0

OFF

C

A

1

OFF

DSP (Active)

Figure 6-51 CPU Changeover via MBR Key (LN)
Note: If the MBR key remains in the UP position, the CPU stays in its make-busy status. Be sure to return the

key to the DOWN position except in the case of a special purpose.
STEP 3

Confirm the changed lamp indications.
To confirm the CPU changeover, check the lamps on both DSPs. LED indications must change
as shown when the CPU system has been correctly changed over.
CPU Formerly Active

After Changeover

CPU OPE

: Steady-ON (green)

OFF

IMG0
IMG1-3

: Flash (green)
: Flash (green)

Flash (green)
OFF

MB/OPE (GT Card) : Steady-ON (green)
CPU Formerly in STBY Mode

OFF
After Changeover

CPU OPE

: OFF

Steady-ON (green)

IMG0
IMG1-3

: Flash (green)
: OFF

Steady-ON (green)
Flash (green)

MB/OPE (GT Card) : OFF

Steady-ON (green)

Figure 6-52 LED Indications Before and After CPU Changeover (LN)

STEP 4

Analyze the displayed system messages.
After STEPs 1 through 3 are performed, the system messages [7-C] and [7-D] automatically
display. Confirm that no errors occurred during the CPU changeover process.

Note: When the CPU mode change executes, the MAT (TCP/IP) is once disconnected. Then, log in to the

system again.
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 533
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.4 Forced Changeover of CPU
Figure 6-53 shows how to perform the forced changeover of CPU by key operation on the EMA (PH-PC40) card. Because the key operation will cause the entire system to initialize, do not rely on this method except as a last resort. The
LPM is mounted in the LN as as example.
PZ-PW92

PZ-IO27

01

02

03

Handling
Precautions Required

ISAGT(PZ-GT13)

LANI(PZ-PC19)

ISAGT(PZ-GT20)
Note 1

Note 2

00

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive

04
SW

HDD MB

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

ON

MBR

FDD

IMG1

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT0
1

2

3

IMG2 IMG3
STATUS

4

ON
OFF

5A
SYSTEM SELECT1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

OUT PWR

SENSE
OFF

4 6
C

A

E

0

2

SYSTEM SELECT2
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

CPURST

8

ON

ON
IN PWR

EMA(PH-PC40)

IOC(PH-IO24)

MISC/IOC

MISC

MISC

LPM

OFF

OFF
SLOT No.

SW

HDD MB

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

CPUOPEWDT IMG0

ON

MBR

FDD

IMG1

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT0
1

2

3

IMG2 IMG3
STATUS

4

ON
OFF

5A
SYSTEM SELECT1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

OUT PWR

SENSE
OFF

4 6
C

A

E

0

2

SYSTEM SELECT2
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

ON
IN PWR

CPURST

OFF

OFF
SLOT No.

CPR

OPE/MB

MB
ACT1
CKERR1
ACT0
CKERR0
EMASUP

For the forced system changeover, set the CPU-SEL
switch from middle to "Up" or "Down." Note this operation
also leads to system initialization.
1) UP
: The CPU#1 is placed into the ACT-side.
2) MIDDLE : Normal setting for dual CPU configuration.
3) DOWN : The CPU#0 is placed into the ACT-side.
(This setting is mandatory for single CPU
system.)

EMASUP

CPU SEL

UP

CPU-SEL

MIDDLE

NMI SEL

DOWN

SW65
SW73
SW92

SW62

For more information, see the "Circuit Card Manual."

SW70
SW A0

CPU-SEL Key

EMA(PH-PC40) FACE LAYOUT

Note 1: PZ-GT20 card is mounted in the CPR of LN only.
Note 2: In place of PZ-IO27, the CPR may be quipped with PZ-IO28, which does not have the MB key.

Figure 6-53 Forced CPU Changeover

CHAPTER 6
Page 534
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.5 How to Control Switching Block
The Switching Block denoted here includes the following system equipment:
In LN
TSW (PH-SW12)
MUX (PH-PC36)
DLKC (PH-PC20)
PLO (PH-CK16-A)
CLK (PH-CK18)
GT (PH-GT09)

In ISW
IOGT (PH-GT10)
TSW (PU-SW00)
HSW (PU-SW01)
PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A)

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Perform the required system changeover by using the CMODI/CMOD command or by operating the
relevant key on the IOGT/PLO card. Refer to Table 6-9.
Note: The changeover of IOGT completely affects the whole system denoted in this section, except for the GT,

PLO, and CLK. If the Speech Path System is changed over, be sure to make a follow-up check to see if
the whole related systems (TSW, HSW, MUX, DLKC) are securely changed over. (The check can be
made by a simple glimpse at the OPE or ACT lamps on each circuit card)
Table 6-9 Changeover of Switching Block
Type
• Speech Path Changeover by the
CMODI command

Operations

Remarks

Use the CMODI command (for the changeover
on both system/node basis by logging in to ISW)
or
Use CMOD (for the changeover only on a node
basis)

All the OPE or ACT lamps on the
Speech Path System, except the
GT, PLO and CLK cards, which
were formerly active, go OFF.
All the OPE or ACT lamps on the
Speech Path System, except the
GT, PLO and CLK cards, which
were formerly STBY, light steadygreen.

Note 1
See Chapter 8.

• Speech Path System Changeover
by Key Operation on the active
IOGT card

On the active IOGT card, turn the MBR key UP.
Note 2
Return the MBR key to the original position
(DOWN) after the TSW ACT lamp goes OFF on
the IOGT card.

All the OPE or ACT lamps on the
Speech Path system, except GT,
PLO and CLK cards, which were
formerly active, go OFF.

All the OPE or ACT lamps on the
Note 1 See Section 12.1.6, Manual System Changeover other side Speech Path System,
except the GT, PLO and CLK
of Speech Path System.
cards light steady-green.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 535
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Table 6-9 Changeover of Switching Block (Continued)
Type

Operations

• PLO and CLK Changeover in the
ISW/LN by Key Operation

On the active PLO card in ISW/LN, turn the
MBR key UP.
Return the MB key to the original position
(DOWN) after the OPE lamp goes OFF on the
PLO card.

Note 1

Remarks
The OPE lamp on the PLO/CLK
card, which was formerly active,
goes OFF.
The OPE lamp on the PLO/CLK
card, which was formerly STBY,
goes steady-green.

See Section 12.1.7, Manual System Changeover
of PLO/CLK.
Note 1: These operations cause a momentary interruption in speech paths. It can be ignored as far as ordinary

telephone calls are concerned. Since interruption might cause bit errors, care should be take when
data communications are involved.
Note 2: When changing over the Speech Path System on a node basis, flip the MBR key on that node’s GT (PH-

GT09) card. Refer to Figure 6-38.

CHAPTER 6
Page 536
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.6 Manual System Changeover of Speech Path System
To changeover the ACT/STBY of Speech Path System, the CMODI/CMOD command is normally
used. However, if for some reason the command cannot be used, use the key operations listed below.
Note 1: The command CMOD cannot be used to change over the Speech Path mode on a system basis. This

command is only for the changeover on each node basis.
Note 2: This section gives a detail on how to change the Speech Path mode on a system basis. When the mode

change is necessary on a node basis, flip the MBR key on the GT (PH-GT09) card in that node’s
TSWM0. For more information, refer to Figure 6-38 or the Installation Manual.

IMG 0
Line/Trunk PM

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

HSW00

PM BUS
PCM HW

TSW00

MUX

PM BUS
PCM HW

MUX

PM BUS
PCM HW

PM BUS
PCM HW

To TSW To TSW To TSW
of LN2 of LN3
of LN1

MUX

TSW00

HSW01

TSW01

TSW02

TSW03

PLO

DLKC

PLO

To MUX To MUX
(IMG2) (IMG3)

To MUX
(IMG1)

MUX

TSW00

TSW01

ISAGT
MISC

IOC

EMA

To PLO of
LN1 through 3

MISC

IOC

TSW03

CLK

IOGT

TSWM0

TSW02

GT

GT

ISAGT-A

ISAGT-B

TSWM1

EMA

CPU
CPU

ISW

LANI

LANI

LN0
To LANI of
LN1 through 3

Fusion Link

< ISW (Inter-node Switch) >
ISAGT: PZ-GT13
LANI: PZ-PC19
HSW: PU-SW01
PLO: PH-CK16-A/17-A
< LN (Local Node) >
ISAGT-A: PZ-GT13
DLKC: PH-PC20

ISAGT-B: PZ-GT20
PLO: PH-CK16-A

IOGT: PH-GT10
EMA: PH-PC40
LANI: PZ-PC19
CLK: PH-CK18

TSW: PU-SW00
IOC: PH-IO24
GT: PH-GT09
EMA: PH-PC40

TSW: PH-SW12
IOC: PH-IO24

MUX: PH-PC36

Note: If the MBR key is once flipped on the active IOGT card, all the Speech Path related systems (TSW,

HSW, DLKC and MUX) in the same switching block are totally changed over. However, the ACT/
STBY of GT (PH-GT09 in LN) and PLO/CLK in both ISW and LNs are not affected.
Figure 6-54 System Block Diagram (Switching Network for Speech Path System)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 537
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

STEP 1

Confirm the active Speech Path System.
(1) Check all the lamp indications below, which are in the same switching block.
Legend
: Lamp is ON
Circuit Cards in ISW

PH-GT10

green

PU-SW00

green

TSW ACT

PU-SW01

PH-SW12

green

HSW ACT

MB

TSW MB

MBR

TSW MBR

IOGT: Active

Circuit Cards in LN

green

TSW ACT

TSW: Active

: Lamp is ON

PH-PC36

green

MB

green

MUX ACT

TSW ACT

PH-PC20

MB

OPE/MB
MB

MB

TSW MBR

HSW: Active

TSW: Active

MUX: Active

DLKC: Active

Note: Be sure to check all the circuit cards in the same Switching Block referring to the lamp indications

above.
Figure 6-55 IOGT/TSW/HSW/DLKC/MUX in ACT Mode

(2) Confirm the STBY mode of mate Speech Path System. Check all the lamp indications below, which are in the same switching block.
WARNING The ACT/STBY of Speech Path System can be changed over only when the mate system is
in STBY mode. Do not attempt the changeover if the mate Speech Path System is closed.

Legend
: Lamp is OFF
ISW
PH-GT10

PU-SW01

TSW ACT

PH-SW12

HSW ACT

MB

TSW MB

MBR

TSW MBR

IOGT: ST-BY

Note:

LN

PU-SW00

TSW ACT

: Lamp is OFF

TSW: ST-BY

PH-PC36

MUX ACT

TSW ACT
MB

PH-PC20

MB

OPE/MB
MB

MB

TSW MBR

HSW: ST-BY

TSW: ST-BY

MUX: ST-BY

DLKC: ST-BY

Be sure to check all the circuit cards in the same Switching Block referring to the lamp indications
above.
Figure 6-56 IOGT/TSW/HSW/DLKC/MUX in STBY Mode

CHAPTER 6
Page 538
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys, using extreme
care.
STEP 2

Flip the MBR key on the active IOGT card in ISW.

After the above steps, set the MBR key as shown below.
The system changeover starts automatically.
Steady-green
OPE/MB
MB

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

MBR

1

2

IOGT (Active)

Figure 6-57 Speech Path System Changeover via Active IOGT MBR Key
Note: If the MB key is turned ON (UP), the IOGT card is forcibly placed in a make-busy status. Therefore, do

not operate the MB key by mistake. Also, after the MBR key is flipped, be sure to return the key to the
original position (DOWN).
STEP 3

Confirm the changed lamp indications.
(1) To confirm the imposed Speech Path System changeover, check all the lamps on the cards
shown in Figure 6-58, which are in the relevant switching blocks.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 539
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

LED Indications at the ISW
Switching Block Formerly Active

After Changeover

TSW ACT (IOGT card): Steady-ON (green)

OFF

TSW ACT (TSW card) : Steady-ON (green)

OFF

HSW ACT (HSW card): Steady-ON (green)

OFF

Switching Block Formerly stby

After Changeover

TSW ACT (IOGT card): OFF

Steady-ON (green)

TSW ACT (TSW card) : OFF

Steady-ON (green)

HSW ACT (HSW card): OFF

Steady-ON (green)

LED Indications at the LNs
Switching Block Formerly Active

After Changeover

TSW ACT (TSW card) : Steady-ON (green)

OFF

MUX ACT (MUX card) : Steady-ON (green)

OFF

OPE/MB (DLKC card) : Steady-ON (green)

OFF

Switching Block Formerly stby

After Changeover

TSW ACT (TSW card) : OFF

Steady-ON (green)

MUX ACT (MUX card) : OFF

Steady-ON (green)

OPE/MB (DLKC card) : OFF

Steady-ON (green)

Figure 6-58 LED Indications Before and After Speech Path System Changeover

STEP 4

Analyze the displayed system messages.
After STEPs 1 through 3 are performed, the system messages [7-E], [7-F], and [1-T] will
automatically display. Confirm that no errors occurred during the Speech Path System
changeover process.

Note: When the Speech Path System changeover is executed in each LN independently, the system messages

to be displayed at this time are 7-E, 7-F, and 1-T.

CHAPTER 6
Page 540
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.1.7 Manual System Changeover of PLO
To change over the system of Phase Lock Oscillator (PLO)/Clock (CLK), use the key operations listed
below at a specific LN/ISW.
Note: Though the PLO/CLK belongs to the Switching Block as explained in Section 12.1.5, its ACT/STBY

Switching Network is separate from that of the Speech Path System. Therefore, the changeover of the
PLO/CLK must be independently performed at each LN/ISW.
WARNING Improper key operations may result in a system down. Operate the related keys, using extreme
care.
STEP 1

Confirm the active PLO. When performing the changeover at the LN, also check the active
CLK.
(1) Check the lamp indications.
PH-CK16-A/17-A, PH-CK18 (Front View)

green
OPE

OPE

MB

MB

PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A)
CLK (PH-CK18)

PLO (PH-CK16-A/17-A)
CLK (PH-CK18)

PLO/CLK: Active

PLO/CLK: ST-BY
Legend
: Lamp is ON

: Lamp is OFF

Note: ACT/STBY of PLO can be changed over on a node basis, not on a network/system basis. Therefore,

check the PLO/CLK cards only in that specific LN/ISW. Refer to Figure 6-37 and Figure 6-38.
Figure 6-59 PLO/CLK in ACT/STBY Mode

(2) Check the mate PLO’s STBY mode. When performing the changeover at the LN, check the
mate’s CLK’s STBY mode.
WARNING The changeover of PLO/CLK system can be done only when the mate PLO/CLK is in STBY
mode. Do not attempt the changeover if the mate PLO/CLK is closed.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 541
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

STEP 2

Flip the MB key on the PLO card.

After the above steps, set the MB key as shown below.
Then, the system changeover starts automatically.

OPE
MB

1

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

2

MB key

PLO: Active

Figure 6-60 PLO Changeover via MB Key
Note: If the MB key remains in the UP position, the PLO system also stays in its make-busy status. Be sure to

return the key DOWN except in the case of a special purpose.
STEP 3

Confirm the changed lamp indications.
(1) To affirm the imposed PLO changeover, check the following lamps on both PLO cards. The
LED indications must change as follows when the PLO system has been correctly changed
over. When performing the changeover at the LN, check the CLK’s lamps.
PLO/CLK Formerly Active

After Changeover

OPE: Steady-ON (green)

OFF

PLOCLK Formerly in STBY Mode
OPE:

After Changeover

OFF

Steady-ON (green)

Figure 6-61 LED Indications Before and After PLO/CLK Changeover

STEP 4

Analyze the displayed system messages.
After STEPs 1 through 3 are performed, the system messages [7-U] and [7-V] will
automatically display. Make sure that no errors occurred during the PLO changeover process.

CHAPTER 6
Page 542
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2 Initialization
12.2.1 General
This section explains the initialization types:
System Initialization
•

System Initialization by turning ON the Power Supply, Section 12.2.2

•

System Initialization by Key Operations on the TOPU, Section 12.2.3
Procedure #1 through Procedure #5

•

System Initialization by the keys on the CPU Front Panel, Section 12.2.4

•

System Initialization by the SINZ/SINZ1 Command, Section 12.2.5

Peripheral Equipment Initialization (Line/Trunk Initialization), Section 12.2.6

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 543
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2.2 System Initialization by Turning ON the Power Supply
This initialization executes when the power supply to a node (ISW/LN) has
stopped. Follow the procedure in Figure 6-62.
ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
MODULE

Confirm all switches in the node are turned “OFF”
on PWR cards.


Confirm input source power to the node is normal.

Turn “ON” the power supply at PWR cards.

CIRCUIT CARDS

LPM:
PIM:

PWRU 0/PWRU 1 (PZ-PW92)
PWR 0(PA-PW55-A)/
PWR 1(PA-PW54-A)
ISWM/TSWM:
PWR SW 0/ 1(PH-PW14)

Check the INPUT voltage is
normal at the power terminals.
Turn ON the power supply referring to
Section 12.3.



Confirm lamp indications on the DSP of CPR.

Refer to 1 or 3 of Table 6-10 for DSP 0,
and 2 or 4 of the table for DSP 1.

Clear the alarm by pressing the ALM RST key on the TOPU.

Use the ATIM/ATIMN command to adjust the date and time.

END

Figure 6-62 System Initialization by Turning ON the Power Supply

CHAPTER 6
Page 544
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-10 Lamp Indications on DSP of CPR
NODE

ACT/
ST-BY

LAMP ON DSP

ISW

ACT

CPU OPE

Lights Green

IMG 0

Lights Green

IMG 1

Lights Green

IMG 2

Lights Green (when LN 2 exists)

IMG 3

Lights Green (when LN 3 exists)

1

STBY

2

LN

ACT

3

STBY

4

CPU OPE

STATE

OFF

IMG 0

Flashes Green

IMG 1

OFF

IMG 2

OFF

IMG 3

OFF

CPU OPE

Lights Green

IMG 0

Flashes Green

IMG 1

Flashes Green

IMG 2

Flashes Green (when IMG 2 exists)

IMG 3

Flashes Green (when IMG 3 exists)

CPU OPE

OFF

IMG 0

Flashes Green

IMG 1

OFF

IMG 2

OFF

IMG 3

OFF

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 545
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2.3 System Initialization by Key Operations on TOPU
Table 6-11 shows the system initialization procedure. Figure 6-63 shows the initial program load
conceptional diagram.
Table 6-11 System Initialization Procedure Types
TYPE

DESCRIPTION

Procedure 1
(Table 6-12)

System Initialization without Loading

The whole system or a specific node (ISW/LN) is
initialized. All communications are forcibly released.
System restarts with current Main Memory Files and
Office Data Files that exist on DRAM.

Procedure 2
(Table 6-13)

System Initialization with Office Data Loading

The whole system or a specific node (ISW/LN) is
initialized. All communications are forcibly released.
System transfers Office Data Files from HDD to DRAM.
System restarts with the transferred Office Data Files and
the current Main Memory Files.

Procedure 3
(Table 6-14)

System Initialization with Program Loading

The whole system or a specific node (ISW/LN) is
initialized. All communications are forcibly released.
System transfers Main Memory Files from HDD to
DRAM. System restarts with the transferred Main
Memory Files and the current Office Data Files.

Procedure 4
(Table 6-15)

System Initialization with Office Data and
Program Loading

The whole system or a specific node (ISW/LN) is
initialized. All communications are forcibly released.
System transfers both Main Memory Files and Office
Data Files from HDD to DRAM. System restarts with the
transferred Main Memory Files and the transferred Office
Data Files.

Procedure 5
(Table 6-16)

System Initialization by Phase 1 Restart

The whole system or a specific node (ISW/LN) is
initialized. All communications, except for the following
two-way connections that have already been established,
are forcibly released:
• Basic two-way connections (STN-STN, STN-TRK,
TRK-TRK)
• Fixed connections
• Two-way connections established on a Fusion Link
Note 1: STN-ATT connection is not included in

the two-way connection list cited
above. These kind of calls are forcibly
released once the initialization
executes.
Note 2: When a calling party hears the Ring

Back Tone, the ORT is additionally
provided, and the call is placed into the
Dial Tone (DT) connection.
CHAPTER 6
Page 546
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS


Basic Software (#2~#11)
Standard Service Software
IMAT Software (#1~#2)
TCP/IP Software (#1)

Main Memory Files
(=PROGRAM)

Office Data Files
(=SYSTEM DATA)

Initial Program Load



Data Memory (ASYD, AUNT,
ANPD, ASPA,
ASDT, etc.)
Call Forwarding Data
Speed Calling Data
Name Display Data
User Assign Soft Key Data
Number Sharing Data
RCF
NDM
LDM
Call Block Data



PBX

Figure 6-63 Conceptional Diagram of Initial Program Load

< PZ-DK227 >
PFT
ALM
RST

SYSTEM DATA

PROGRAM

INITIAL

EFFECT

INITIAL
SELECT

NON LOAD
ON

START

LOAD

ON

SYSTEM

OFF

SELF

LOAD

NON LOAD

OFF

Figure 6-64 Keys on the TOPU (ISW)


PFT
ALM
RST

ON

SYSTEM DATA
NON LOAD

PROGRAM

INITIAL
START

LOAD

EFFECT
ON

LOAD
OFF
OFF

NON LOAD

Figure 6-65 Keys on the TOPU (LN)
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 547
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

To initialize the system, check the lamp indications in Figure 6-66, and operate the keys on the TOPU.

EX. 

Note 1
SYSTEM DATA
PROGRM

PFT
ALM
RST

ON

INITIAL

NON LOAD

START

LOAD

INITIAL
SELECT

EFFECT
ON

SYSTEM

OFF

SELF

LOAD

NON LOAD

OFF

To initialize the system, operate the shaded
keys.

Ex. ISW

03

04
.....
.....
1

2

3

4

2

3

4

2

3

4

OFF

5

6

7

8

2

4 6

0

E

1

5

6

7

8

5

6

7

8

C
A

1

OFF

To confirm the imposed system initialization,
check the shaded lamp indicators .

OFF

.....
.....
1

2

3

4

2

3

4

OFF

2

4 6

0

E

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

C
A

1

OFF

8

OFF

FRONT VIEW



Note 2

Note 3

SW

HDD MB

CPUOPE WDT IMG0

ON

MBR

FDD

IMG1

OFF

SYSTEM SELECT0
1

2

3

IMG2 IMG3
STATUS

4

ON
OFF

5A
SYSTEM SELECT1
1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

ON

OUT PWR

SENSE
OFF

4 6
C

A

E

0

2

SYSTEM SELECT2
1

ON

ON
IN PWR

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

CPURST

OFF

OFF
SLOT No.

0

1

2

3

4

5

6

Note 1: The Initial Select key exists only on the TOPU of ISW (PZ-DK227). Refer to Figure 6-64

and Figure 6-65.
Note 2: The LED indication cited above is only an example. The actual indicating patterns (ON/

Flash/OFF) may vary, depending on the system configuration.
Note 3: This figure assumes the CPR is equipped with PZ-I027 (HDD/FDD), in place of PZ-IO28.

If PZ-IO28 is used, the MB key is not furnished on the card.
Figure 6-66 Related Keys and LEDs for System Initialization

CHAPTER 6
Page 548
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-12 System Initialization Without Loading Procedure
7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY
SETTINGS

ACTION

Note: The TOPU used for intialization varies depending on the type of For lamp indication on DSP,

initialization.
Initialization of Whole System: TOPU of ISW
Initialization of ISW: TOPU of ISW
Initialization of LN: TOPU of IMG0 (each LN)
START

refer to Table 6-10.

For the face layout of TOPU,
refer to for ISW and for LN.
ISW: Figure 6-64
LN: Figure 6-65

Confirm the system is operating normally.
Set the INITIAL SELECT keys as follows.
• Initialization of Whole System→ Set the key to SYSTEM side
• Initialization of ISW
→ Set the key to SELF side
• Initialization of LN
→ Skip this step

Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU.
Set the keys on the TOPU as follows.
• PROGRAM KEY
→ NON LOAD
• SYSTEM DATA KEY → NON LOAD

CPU OPE and IMGn lamps on
both DSP go OFF.
STATUS LED (right) on
the CPU is ON.

Press the INITIAL START button on the TOPU.
• HD Initial

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.

• System Initialization
For lamp indication on DSP,
refer to Table 6-10.
• System starts up again.

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of active CPU is
ON. (ON LINE)

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 549
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-13 System Initialization With Office Data Loading Procedure
7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY
SETTINGS

ACTION

Note: The TOPU used for intialization varies depending on the type of For lamp indication on DSP,

initialization.
Initialization of Whole System: TOPU of ISW
Initialization of ISW: TOPU of ISW
Initialization of LN: TOPU of IMG0 (each LN)
START

refer to Table 6-10.

For the face layout of TOPU,
refer to for ISW and for LN.
ISW: Figure 6-64
LN: Figure 6-65

Confirm the system is operating normally.
Set the INITIAL SELECT keys as follows.
• Initialization of Whole System→ Set the key to SYSTEM side
• Initialization of ISW
→ Set the key to SELF side
• Initialization of LN
→ Skip this step

Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU.
Set the keys on the TOPU as follows.
• PROGRAM KEY
→ NON LOAD
• SYSTEM DATA KEY → NON LOAD

CPU OPE and IMGn lamps on
both DSP go OFF.
STATUS LED (right) on
the CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.

Press the INITIAL START button on the TOPU.
•

HD Initial

•

Office Data LOAD

•

System Initialization

•

System starts up again.

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of active CPU is
ON.

For lamp indication on DSP,
refer to Table 6-10.
STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of active CPU is
ON. (ON LINE)

END

CHAPTER 6
Page 550
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-14 System Initialization with Program Loading Procedure
7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY
SETTINGS

ACTION

Note: The TOPU used for intialization varies depending on the type of For lamp indication on DSP,

initialization.
Initialization of Whole System: TOPU of ISW
Initialization of ISW: TOPU of ISW
Initialization of LN: TOPU of IMG0 (each LN)
START

refer to Table 6-10.

For the face layout of TOPU,
refer to for ISW and for LN.
ISW: Figure 6-64
LN: Figure 6-65

Confirm the system is operating normally.
Set the INITIAL SELECT keys as follows.
• Initialization of Whole System→ Set the key to SYSTEM side
• Initialization of ISW
→ Set the key to SELF side
• Initialization of LN
→ Skip this step
CPU OPE and IMGn lamps on
both DSP go OFF.
Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU.
Set the keys on the TOPU as follows.
• PROGRAM KEY
→ NON LOAD
• SYSTEM DATA KEY → NON LOAD

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.

Press the INITIAL START button on the TOPU.
•

HD Initial

•

Program LOAD

•

System Initialization

•

System starts up again.

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of active CPU
is ON.

For lamp indications on DSP,
refer to Table 6-10.
STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of active CPU
is ON. (ON LINE)

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 551
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-15 System Initialization With Office Data And Program Loading Procedure
7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY
SETTINGS

ACTION

Note: The TOPU used for intialization varies depending on the type of For lamp indication on DSP,

initialization.
Initialization of Whole System: TOPU of ISW
Initialization of ISW: TOPU of ISW
Initialization of LN: TOPU of IMG0 (each LN)
START

refer to Table 6-10.

For the face layout of TOPU,
refer to for ISW and for LN.
ISW: Figure 6-64
LN: Figure 6-65

Confirm the system is operating normally.
Set the INITIAL SELECT keys as follows.
• Initialization of Whole System→ Set the key to SYSTEM side
• Initialization of ISW
→ Set the key to SELF side
• Initialization of LN
→ Skip this step
CPU OPE and IMGn lamps on
both DSP go OFF.
Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU.
Set the keys on the TOPU as follows.
• PROGRAM KEY
→ NON LOAD
• SYSTEM DATA KEY → NON LOAD
Press the INITIAL START button on the TOPU.
•

HD Initial

•

Program LOAD

•

Office Data LOAD

•

System Initialization

•

System starts up again.

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.
STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.
STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.
STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of active CPU
is ON.
For lamp indications on DSP,
refer Table 6-10.
STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of active CPU
is ON. (ON LINE)

END

CHAPTER 6
Page 552
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-16 System Initialization by Phase 1 Restart Procedure
7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY
SETTINGS

ACTION

Note: The TOPU used for intialization varies depending on the type of For lamp indication on DSP,

initialization.
Initialization of Whole System: TOPU of ISW
Initialization of ISW: TOPU of ISW
Initialization of LN: TOPU of IMG0 (each LN)
START

refer to Table 6-10.

For the face layout of TOPU,
refer to for ISW and for LN.
ISW: Figure 6-64
LN: Figure 6-65

Confirm the system is operating normally.
Set the INITIAL SELECT keys as follows.
• Initialization of Whole System→ Set the key to SYSTEM side
• Initialization of ISW
→ Set the key to SELF side
• Initialization of LN
→ Skip this step

Set SENSE Switch on the DSP of CPR to 3.

CPU OPE and IMGn lamps on
both DSP go OFF.
STATUS LED (right) on
the CPU is ON.

Turn ON the EFFECT key on the TOPU.
Set the keys on the TOPU as follows.
• PROGRAM KEY
→ NON LOAD
• SYSTEM DATA KEY → NON LOAD

Press the INITIAL START button on the TOPU.
•

HD Initial

•

System Initialization

•

System starts up again.

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.

For lamp indications on DSP,
refer to Table 6-10.
STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of active CPU
is ON. (ON LINE)

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 553
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2.4 System Initialization by Keys on CPU Front Panel
This initialization executes on a node (ISW/LN) basis when the keys on the
TOPU cannot be used. The CPU’s active status must be confirmed before
executing this type of initialization.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START
EMA: PH-PC40
Check ACT0/ACT1
lamps on the EMA
card.
(ACT1 lights green.)

(ACT0 lights green.)
Confirm SENSE switch on the
DSP of CPU 0 is 2 (DM Load
Restart).

Confirm SENSE switch on the
DSP of CPU 1 is 2 (DM Load
Restart).

Press CPU RST key on the
DSP of CPU 0.

Press CPU RST key on the
DSP of CPU 1.

(CPU 0 is being initialized.)

(CPU 1 is being initialized.)

Confirm ACT 0 lamp
lights green again.

Confirm ACT 1 lamp
lights green again.

Use ATIM/ATIMN command to adjust
date and time.
END

Figure 6-67 System Initialization by Keys on CPU Front Panel

CHAPTER 6
Page 554
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2.5 System Initialization by SINZ/SINZ1 Command
The entire system can be initialized by execution of the SINZ/SINZ1 command from the MAT, which
is useful for maintenance technicians who have to control the system from a distant location. When
initializing the system on a node (ISW/LN) basis, use SINZ command. When initializing the whole
system, use SINZI command.

START
Use the SINZ/SINZI command
to execute initialization.

For more information about the SINZ/SINZI
command, see CHAPTER 8:
“MAINTENANCE COMMANDS.”



Refer to 1 or 3 of Table 6-9 for DSP#0,
and 2 or 4 of the table for DSP#1.

Confirm lamp indications on
the DSP of CPR.

Use the ATIM/ATIMN command to adjust the date and time.

END
Note: When the system is initialized, the MAT is once disconnected. Then, log in to the

system again.
Figure 6-68 System Initialization by SINZ Command

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 555
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.2.6 Peripheral Equipment Initialization (Line/Trunk Initialization)
Line/trunk initialization can be divided into two types: initialization on an
individual channel basis and initialization on a circuit card basis. Follow the
procedure in Table 6-17.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 6-17 Line/Trunk Initialization Procedure
ACTION

REMARKS
Note: When initializa-

START

Is initialization on
individual channel basis or on
circuit card basis?

tion executes on a
circuit card basis, all
channels on the circuit card are placed
into make-busy state.

Circuit card basis

Individual channel basis
Use RLST command.
(Refer to Chapter 8)

END

Turn the MB switch UP on
the circuit card.

Return MB switch to the
previous position after the
MB lamp has turned ON.

END

CHAPTER 6
Page 556
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.3 How to Turn ON/OFF Whole System
A switching system, once put into service, is seldom stopped. However, there may
be a case when a switching system, while in service, must be stopped due to module
expansion work, etc. In preparation for such a case, this Section explains the
procedure for turning ON the power supply.

NDA-24307

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

CHAPTER 6
Page 557
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.3.1 How to Turn ON a LN
STAR T
M ake sure the SEN SE sw itch
on the D SP of Active C PU is
set at Ò 2Ó (D M Load R estart).

Turn ON the pow er supply at
PIM s of IM G 3.
PIM 0 PIM 1 PIM 2 PIM 3

(1) Turn ON the -48V SW on the PW R card in PIM 0.
(2) Turn ON the -48V SW on the DPW R card in PIM 0.
(3) Repeat (1) and (2) for PIM 1,2,3 in turn (depending on
the system configuration).

T urn O N the pow er supply at
T SW M 1.

Turn ON the pow er supply at
PIM s of IM G 2.
PIM 0 PIM 1 PIM 2 PIM 3

(1) Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW 14 (PW R SW #0).
(2) Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW 14 (PW R SW #1).

(1) Turn ON the -48V SW on the PW R card in PIM 0.
(2) Turn ON the -48V SW on the DPW R card in PIM 0.
(3) Repeat (1) and (2) for PIM 1,2,3 in turn (depending on
the system configuration).

T urn O N the pow er supply at
T SW M 0.

Turn ON the pow er supply at
PIM s of IM G 1.
PIM 0 PIM 1 PIM 2 PIM 3

(1) Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW 14 (PW R SW #0).
(2) Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW 14 (PW R SW #1).

(1) Turn ON the -48V SW on the PW R card in PIM 0.
(2) Turn ON the -48V SW on the DPW R card in PIM 0.
(3) Repeat (1) and (2) for PIM 1,2,3 in turn (depending on
the system configuration).

Turn O N the pow er supply at
LPM .

Turn O N the pow er supply at
PIM s of I M G0.
PIM 0 PIM 1 PIM 2 PIM 3

(1) Turn ON the SW on the PZ-PW 92 of CPU#0.
(2) Turn ON the SW on the PZ-PW 92 of CPU#1.

(1) Turn ON the -48V SW on the PW R card in PIM0.
(2) Turn ON the -48V SW on the DPW R card in PIM 0.
(3) Repeat (1) and (2) for PIM1,2,3 in turn (depending on
the system configuration).

Note:

EN D
Start from bigger number IMG stack

(i.e. IMG3

Figure 6-69 How to Turn ON a LN

CHAPTER 6
Page 558
Issue 1

NDA-24307

IMG2

IMG1

IMG0).

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.3.2 How to Turn ON the ISW

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

START

Make sure the SENSE switch
on the DSP of Active CPU is
set at "2"(DM Load Restart).

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Turn ON the power supply at
the LPM.

(1) Turn ON the SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU 0.

Turn ON the power supply at
the ISWM.

(1) Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW14 (PWR SW 0).

(2) Turn ON the SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU 1.

(2) Turn ON the -48V SW on the PH-PW14 (PWR SW 1).

END
Figure 6-70 How to Turn ON the ISW

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 559
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.4 How to Turn OFF Whole System
Be sure to confirm the memory data has been backed up on the HD before turning
OFF the system power. When turning OFF the power supply, follow the procedure
shown below.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

12.4.1 How to Turn OFF a LN
As shown in the figure, turn OFF the power supply first in the uppermost
PIM of the IMG stack whose number is bigger.Then, move on to the
bottommost PIM and repeat it for the smaller IMGs.

IMG0

IMG1

IMG2

IMG3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM3

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM2

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM1

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

PIM0

LPM

TSWM0

TSWM1

DUMMY

[Procedure]

(1) Turn OFF the -48V SW on the DPWR (first) and PWR (next) cards in PIM3 of IMG3.
(2) Repeat (1) for PIM2, PIM1, PIM0 (IMG3) in turn.

(3) Turn OFF the -48V SW on the DPWR (first) and PWR (next) cards in PIM3 of IMG2.
(4) Repeat (3) for PIM2, PIM1, PIM0 (IMG2) in turn.
(5) Turn OFF the SW on the PH-PW14 (both PWR SW #1 and #0) in TSWM1.
(6) Turn OFF the -48V SW on the DPWR (first) and PWR (next) cards in PIM3 of IMG1.
(7) Repeat (6) for PIM2, PIM1, PIM0 (IMG1) in turn.
(8) Turn OFF the SW on the PH-PW14 (both PWR SW #1 and #0) in TSWM0.
(9) Turn OFF the -48V SW on the DPWR (first) and PWR (next) cards in PIM3 of IMG0.
(10)Repeat (9) for PIM2, PIM1, PIM0 (IMG0) in turn.
(11)Turn OFF the SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU#1.
(12)Turn OFF the SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU#0.
Figure 6-71 How to Turn OFF a LN

CHAPTER 6
Page 560
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Table 6-18 How to Turn OFF the ISW Procedure
ACTION

REMARKS

ISW
ISWM
LPM

(1) Turn OFF -48V SW on PA-PW14 (both PWR SW 1 and PWR SW 0) in
ISWM.
(2) Turn OFF SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU 1.
(3) Turn OFF SW on the PZ-PW92 of CPU 0.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 561
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

12.5 System Start-Up
12.5.1 System Start-Up Procedures
The system start-up procedures consist of the following types.
Procedure 1 (see Table 6-19)
Executes when the Basic Software and Application Software are already installed in the HD. Office
Data is not installed.
Procedure 2 (see Table 6-20)
Executes when the Basic Software, Application Software and Office Data are already installed in the
HD.
Note: For the start-up procedure in case any Basic Software, Application Software and Office Data have not

been installed in the HD, refer to the Installation Manual (IPX-U Type).

CHAPTER 6
Page 562
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-19 Start-Up Procedure When Basic and Application Software is Installed
7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY
SETTINGS

ACTION

➀ When Power is OFF

➁

START

When Power is ON
and OFF LINE
START

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive

Set the SENSE switch at “1”
(DM Clear Restart) on the DSP
of CPU 0.

Set the SENSE switch at “1”
(DM Clear Restart) on the DSP
of active CPU.

Turn ON the SW on the PZPW92 of CPU 0.

Press the CPU RST button
on the DSP of active CPU.
or
Turn OFF the SW on the PZPW92 of active CPU and
turn it ON again.

Handling
Precautions Required

• HD Initialization

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.

• Program Load

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.

• System Initial

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.

The system starts up, clearing the Office Data on the HD.
• The system starts up again
➂ when Power is ON and ON
LINE
START
A

NDA-24307

CPU OPE lamp on the
DSP of active CPU
lights steady green. IMG0-3
lamps flash.
For lamp indications, refer to
Table 6-10.
STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON
(ON LINE).

CHAPTER 6
Page 563
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Table 6-19 Start-Up Procedure When Basic and Application Software is Installed (Continued)
7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY
SETTINGS

ACTION

A

Set the SENSE switch at “2” (DM Load Restart) on the DSP of
active CPU.

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

Enter your Office Data.
Back up your Office Data using the MEM_HDD/MEM_HDD_N
command.
If necessary, repeat the above steps for all remaining nodes.
To perform necessary system intialization, refer to Table 6-13,
System Initialization with Office Data Loading.

END

CHAPTER 6
Page 564
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SYSTEM OPERATIONS

Table 6-20 Start-Up Procedure When Basic, Application Software and Office Data is Installed
7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY
SETTINGS

ACTION

➀ When Power is OFF

➁

START

When Power is ON
and OFF LINE
START
ATTENTION

Set the SENSE switch at “2”
(DM Load Restart) on the DSP
of CPU 0.

Set the SENSE switch at “2”
(DM Load Restart) on the DSP
of active CPU.

Turn ON the SW on the
PZ-PW92 of CPU 0.

Press the CPU RST button
on the DSP of active CPU.
or
Turn OFF the SW on the
PZ-PW92 of active CPU and
turn it ON again.

Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

• HD Initial

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.

• Program Load

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.

• Office Data Load

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.
STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.

• System Initial

A

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 6
Page 565
Issue 1

SYSTEM OPERATIONS
Table 6-20 Start-Up Procedure When Basic, Application Software and Office Data is Installed (Continued)
7SEG LED/OPE LAMP/KEY
SETTINGS

ACTION

A

ATTENTION
Contents
Static Sensitive
Handling
Precautions Required

• The system starts up again.

If necessary, repeat the previous steps for all remaining nodes.

END

CHAPTER 6
Page 566
Issue 1

NDA-24307

For lamp indications, refer to
Table 6-10.

STATUS LED (right) on
the DSP of CPU is ON.
(ON LINE)

CHAPTER 7

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

1. GENERAL
When a fault has occurred in the system, (for example when a fault has occurred to No. 1 circuit on the 16LC
card), the stations connected to No. 1 circuit become unserviceable. When the 16LC card has been replaced with
a spare to analyze the cause of the fault or to repair the fault, other normal lines also become unserviceable. As
in this example, even when the fault is restricted to a single component, it very often harms the system operations
as a whole.
Even if the system is operating normally, it is necessary to perform a routine check to prevent a fault occurrence
before it is too late to discover any latent cause of a fault.
This chapter categorizes the routine maintenance procedures of the PBX into the following three types, and explains the minimum required work steps and precautions pertaining to each of the three procedures.
•

Daily Maintenance Procedure

•

Monthly Maintenance Procedure

•

Quarterly Maintenance Procedure

1.1 Flow of Procedures
The scheduling of routine maintenance (daily, monthly, quarterly) will vary with each installation and
organization. Figure 7-1 shows the flow of the routine maintenance procedures.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 7
Page 567
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

Section 2.8, Explanation of Terms
in Chapter 2

Section 2, Routine Maintenance Procedures
• Daily Maintenance Procedures
• Monthly Maintenance Procedures
• Quarterly Maintenance Procedures
Note: Perform procedure performance

per each divided section

Section 3, Routine Maintenance ProceduresDetailed Explanations
• Work performance as per each
divided section

Chapter 5, Fault Repair Procedures
Chapter 6, System Operations

Chapter 4, Unit/Circuit Card
Replacement Procedure
Section 4, Routine Maintenance Check Lists
• Recording of checked items

Figure 7-1 Flow of Procedures

1.2 Required Test Equipment and Tools
Table 7-1 shows the tools and equipment required for test procedures.
Table 7-1 Test Equipment and Tools
NO.

TEST EQUIPMENT/TOOLS

PURPOSE

1

Telephone Set

A telephone set is used when performing connection tests
on trunks, etc.

2

Blown Fuse

3

VOM Digital Meter

VOM digital meter is used when checking output voltages
of the rectifier and the battery.

4

Phillips Screwdriver

A screwdriver is used when replacing the fan with a spare.

CHAPTER 7
Page 568
Issue 1

A blown fuse is used when performing alarm tests.

NDA-24307

REMARKS

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

2. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
This section explains general routine maintenance procedures to be performed on a daily, monthly, and
quarterly basis. Table 7-2 lists each procedure according to the time each procedure is to be performed. Use
the Reference Section to locate the detailed procedure.
Table 7-2 List of Routine Maintenance Procedures
TIME
Daily

Monthly

PROCEDURE

REFERENCE SECTION

Check the temperature and relative humidity in
the switch room.

Section 3.1, Check of Ambient
Conditions in Switch Room

Check to see if any of the alarm indicator lamps
on the TOPU are lit.

Section 3.2, Alarm Check

Check the operating status of the MAT and the
printer, remaining quantity of paper, etc.

Section 3.3, MAT/Printer Check

Check to see if a system message indicating a
fault is displayed.

Section 3.4, Collection of
System Messages

Check whether any station is in lockout state.

Section 3.5, Display of Lockedout Station

Check whether the FANU is operating normally.

Section 3.6, Fan Unit Check

Generate an alarm and check whether an indication appears on the TOPU.

Section 3.7, Alarm Tests

REMARKS

Check the conditions of the rectifier and batteries. Section 3.8, Main Power System
Check

Quarterly

Check trunk circuits individually. Also check the
RGU circuit in the PWR Supply of each
Module.

Section 3.9, Trunk RGU Check

Check each operation and lamps of ATTCON/
DESKCON.

Section 3.10, ATTCON/
DESKCON Check

Check the CPU, TSW, and line/trunk Port
Microprocessors (PMs).

Section 3.11, System Check

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 7
Page 569
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES-DETAILED EXPLANATIONS
This Section provides detailed explanations of the routine maintenance procedures.
Table 7-3 List of Routine Maintenance Procedures
SECTION NO.

CONTENTS OF WORK

3.1

Check of Ambient Conditions in the Switch Room

3.2

Alarm Check

3.3

MAT/Printer Check

3.4

Collection of System Messages

3.5

Display of Locked-out Station

3.6

FAN Unit Check

3.7

Alarm Tests

3.8

Main Power System Check

3.9

Trunk/RGU Check

3.10

ATTCON/DESKCON Check

3.11

System Check

CHAPTER 7
Page 570
Issue 1

NDA-24307

REMARKS

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.1 Check of Ambient Conditions in Switch Room
START
Check the room temperature.

Check whether the room temperature is within
the range of 5°C (41°F) to 30°C (86°F).

Check the humidity in the room.

Check whether the relative humidity in the
room is within the 15% to 65% range.

If the temperature or the humidity is
outside the allowable range, adjust the air
conditioner.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 7
Page 571
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.2 Alarm Check
START
Check alarm indications on the TOPU.

If an alarm is indicated

Check whether the alarm lamp on the power
supply of any module is lit.
Check whether an alarm lamp is lit on any
circuit card(s).

Alarm recovery

Refer to Chapter 5, diagnose the alarm and
perform the indicated recovery procedures.

END

CHAPTER 7
Page 572
Issue 1

NDA-24307

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.3 MAT/Printer Check
START
Check the MAT.

Turn ON the MAT’s power.
Confirm that the menu appears on the screen.

System messages are automatically sent to
the MAT HD for output.

Leave the MAT power ON continuously (lower
the CRT brightness when not in use).

System messages are automatically sent to
the external printer for output.

Confirm that printer power is ON and that the
SEL lamp is lit.
Check the remaining quantity of printer paper.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 7
Page 573
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.4 Collection of System Messages
START
Cause system messages to be displayed.

Refer to Chapter 3, System Messages.

When a system message is displayed.

If the system message indicates a fault,
diagnose the fault by referring to Chapter 5,
and perform fault recovery.

Check the results of routine diagnosis.

System message [7-O] indicates that the
system is normal.
System message [7-P] indicates that the system
is abnormal. Perform fault recovery by
referring to Chapter 3 or Chapter 5.

When the system is operating normally or
after a fault has been restored

END

CHAPTER 7
Page 574
Issue 1

NDA-24307

Use the RALM/RALMN command to clear the
alarm indication and registered system
message.

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.5 Display of Locked-out Station
START
Check the displays of relevant commands
to locate any locked-out stations.

When any station in locked-out
state is displayed

Check the displays of the following
commands:
• DLSL: Display in the order of LENS.
• DLSS: Display in the order of Station
Numbers

Recover the locked-out station(s) referring to
Section 3, Indication of Lockout Stations,
Chapter 6.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 7
Page 575
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.6 Fan Unit Check
START
When the fan is set for automatic start

Pull the FAN START switch toward the front
and set it to ON (UP) position.
Confirm that the fan has started running.
Pull the FAN START switch toward the front
and set it to AUTO (DOWN) position.

When the fan is set for constant operation

Confirm that the fan is running.

When the fan is out of order

Refer to Section 10, Fan Unit Fault, Chapter 5.
Replace the fan with a spare by referring to
Section 5, Fan Unit Replacement, Chapter 4.

END

CHAPTER 7
Page 576
Issue 1

NDA-24307

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.7 Alarm Tests
START
An alarm is to be generated which will be displayed at the DESKCON/ATTCON. Be sure to inform
the attendant of the test in advance.
Replace the –48V fuse in the FANU with a blown fuse.
Confirm that an alarm is indicated on the TOPU.
Replace the blown fuse with the original –48V fuse.
Using the RALM/RALMN command, reset all alarm indications.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 7
Page 577
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.8 Main Power System Check
START
Check the load voltage (DC –48V ±5 V) of the rectifier.
Check the batteries.

Check the forced-charge voltage and floating
voltage.
Check the specific gravity, liquid level and
rated capacity of each battery.

END

Note: For a longer battery life, observe the following items:

•

Place the batteries in a dark, cool place.

•

Keep the room temperature within the range of 10°C to 35°C (40°F to 85°F).

•

Floating voltage must be kept within the range of the battery specification at all times.

•

After discharging, perform equalized charging as per the battery specification.

CHAPTER 7
Page 578
Issue 1

NDA-24307

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.9 Trunk RGU Check
START
Check alarm lamps on the line/trunk circuit cards.
Check to see if a system message pertaining to a circuit card has been output.
Check the speech path for each PIM and also check ringing signal.

END

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 7
Page 579
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.10 ATTCON/DESKCON Check
(1) Attendant Console Check
START
Ask the operator at each ATTCON if the ATTCON is operating normally.
Each operator presses the LCHK button on the ATTCON and confirms that all the lamps on the
control panel light up.
When the ATTCON is equipped with a Time Indicator Section, the operator also checks the displayed
time.

END

Note: Adjusting Time Method

•

If the Hour (H) button is pushed once, the time will advance one hour. (To push the button, use a thin
object, such as a toothpick.)

•

If the H button is held continuously, the time will advance one hour each second.

•

If the Minute (M) button is pushed once, the time will advance one minute.

•

If the M button is held continuously, the time will advance one minute each second.

AM

PM

ADJUST.
H

M

TIME
STATION/TRUNK NUMBER

Figure 7-2 Adjusting Time on ATTCON

CHAPTER 7
Page 580
Issue 1

NDA-24307

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

(2) Desk Console Check
START
Ask the operator at each DESKCON if the DESKCON is operating normally.
On the DESKCON control panel, each operator presses the L3, SRC, and Release keys simultaneously
and confirms that all the lamps on the control panel light red.
Operator presses the # key and confirms that all the lamps on the same transverse line between the
EMG and Mute lamps light green. Refer to the figure below.
Operator presses the # key and confirms that all the green lamps (in the step above) go OFF and the
LCD on the DESKCON displays black.
Operator presses the # key and confirms the black LCD display is cleared and a ringing tone is heard.
Operator presses the # key and confirms the provided ringing tone has suspended.
Operator presses the keys on the DESKCON one by one and confirms that each lamp, corresponding
to the pressed key, emits a light and the name of the key displays on the LCD, respectively.
Operator presses the * button and completes the lamp checks. Note1
Operator checks the displayed time on the right part of LCD. Note 2
END

Note 1: The lamp checks can be suspended any time when the * key on the control panel is pressed.
Note 2: The DESKCON obtains time information only from the PBX side. Therefore, adjust the time and date

using the MAT command.

3:25 PM WED 1

Alarm

Position
Available

Position
Busy

Night

LDN

TIE

BUSY

ATND

NANS

RECALL

PAGE

REC

EMG

BV

TRKSL

Call Park

SC

SVC

Start

Mute

L6

1

2

Cancel

3

L5
L4

DEST

SRC
Talk

4

5

7

8

9

0

#

6

L3
L2
L1

Release

Hold

Answer

Figure 7-3 Desk Console

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 7
Page 581
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

3.11 System Check
START
Check the OPE lamps (green) on all circuit cards.
Check whether a system message pertaining to the CPU/TSW has been output.
Check speech conditions by establishing a station-to-station connection at each PIM.

If the condition is abnormal, determine the nature of the problem (dial tone cannot be heard,
no speech can be established, etc.)
Does the condition occur in No. 0 TSW or in No. 1 TSW?
Does the condition occur in No. 0 CPU or in No. 1 CPU?
Using MEM_HDD/MEM_HDD_N command, check the data memory.
END

CHAPTER 7
Page 582
Issue 1

NDA-24307

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

4. ROUTINE MAINTENANCE CHECK LISTS
This section provides check lists (Maintenance Procedure Reports) to be used when performing routine
maintenance. The Routine Maintenance Check Lists consists of the following items:
•

Maintenance Procedure Report

•

C.O. Trunk/Tie Line

•

Register/Sender Trunk (RST)

•

Digital Conference Function (8 CFT)

•

Speech Path for each PIM, and Ringing Generator Unit

•

Attendant/Desk Console

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 7
Page 583
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

SIGNATURE OF
SUPERVISOR

USER NAME
Name of User (Company)

WORK TIME
(FROM )
Maintenance
Routine/
Classification
Non-routine

Date:
Control No.

Name of Equipment
Reference
Section

Maintenance
Company

Room Temperature - °C
°F & humidity %

Item

Detail

Check of Ambient
Conditions in the
Switch Room

Ambient
Temperature
Relative humidity

DCF Function

3.2

Alarm Check

TOPU

Tone

3.3

MAT/Printer Check MAT

3.1

3.4

Collection of
System Messages

3.9

Detail

Trunk RGU Check

SND Trunk

MAT
3.10

ATTCON Check

Related to Fault

3.11

System Check

Ringing Signal

Result of Routine
Diagnosis

CPU

Locked out
Stations

TSW

Display of Lockedout Station

3.6

Fan Unit Check

3.7

Alarm Tests

TOPU

3.8

Main Power
System Check

Rectifier

Trunk RGU Check

C.O. Trunk

PM

Battery

Tie Trunk
ORT
IRT

Condition And Cause

Procedure and Parts Used

CHAPTER 7
Page 584
Issue 1

Item

Printer

3.5

3.9

Check Reference
Section

Name of Worker

NDA-24307

Check

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

C.O. Trunk Tie Line
TEST TYPE

C.O. Trunk/Tie Line
Speech Path Test

TEST ITEM

CONNECTION DIAGRAM

• Set up a speech path test by • Connection Test-Station
seizing a trunk using the
Station or ATTCON/DESKCON
LC
TRK
connection test diagrammed to
the right.
• Connection Test-ATTCON/DESKCON

C.O./Tie
Line

C.O./Tie
Line
ATI

TRK

ATTCON/
DESKCON

C.O. Trunk/Tie Line
NAME OF TRUNK ROUTE

ACCESS
NUMBER

ROUTE
NUMBER

NDA-24307

TRUNK
NUMBER

CHECK

REMARKS

CHAPTER 7
Page 585
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

Register/Sender Trunk (RST)
TEST TYPE

ORT Function

TEST ITEM

CONNECTION DIAGRAM

• Perform the test by specifying DP/PB
an ORT using the Connection
Test-Station.
LC

• Confirm that [6-I] system
message displays as a result of
the test.
SENDER Function

• Perform the test by specifying
an ORT using the Connection
Test-Station.
• Confirm that [6-I] system
message displays as a result of
the test.

CHAPTER 7
Page 586
Issue 1

NDA-24307

ORT

LC

~

SND
ORT

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

RST (/)
FUNCTION
TRUNK NO.

RST No.

RST No.

RST No.

RST No.

ORT
PB RECEIVING

ORT0

SND0

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

0

0

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

0

0

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

0

0

1

1

2

2

3

3

4

4

5

5

6

6

7

7

DP RECEIVING

NDA-24307

SENDER

REMARKS

CHAPTER 7
Page 587
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

Digital Conference Function
TEST TYPE

Three-way
Conversation

TEST ITEM

CONNECTION DIAGRAM

• Perform the test by specifying
an 8CFT using the Connection
Test-Station.
• Confirm that [6-I] system
message displays as a result of
the test.

LC

MUX

~

8CFT

~
TSTT

FUNCTION
TRUNK NO.

SPEECH

RELEASE

CFT0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

CHAPTER 7
Page 588
Issue 1

NDA-24307

REMARKS

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

Speech Path for Each PIM, and Ringing Generator Unit
NO.

1

TEST TYPE

TEST ITEM

CONNECTION DIAGRAM

The ATTCON/
Normal speech path is confirmed
DESKCON is called by calling the attendant from a
from one station in station located in each PIM.
each PIM.

LC

ATI
ATTCON/
DESKCON

2

The operator calls
the station back.

After normal speech path has
been confirmed, the attendant
calls the station back. Confirm
that the station rings.

ATI
ATTCON/
DESKCON
PWR0, 1
RG

~

LC
(RINGING)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 7
Page 589
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

MOUNTING LOCATION
MODULE NAME

UNIT NAME

CHECK

0
PIM0

1
2
3
0

PIM1

1
2
3
0

PIM2

1
2
3
0

PIM3

1
2
3

CHAPTER 7
Page 590
Issue 1

NDA-24307

REMARKS

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

Attendant/Desk Console (ATTCON/DESKCON)
TEST TYPE

TEST ITEM

CONNECTION DIAGRAM

Call Termination Test

• A station dials the operator
access code and confirm that
the call termination is
indicated at all the ATTCON/
DESKCON.
• A station dials the operator
access code. An attendant
answers and speaks with the
caller. This process is repeated
at all the ATTCON/
DESKCON.

Call Origination Test

• The attendant originates a call
to the station by pressing
LOOP keys one after another.

LC

ATI
ATTCON/
DESKCON

ATI
ATTCON/
DESKCON

LC
(RINGING)

~ RG

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 7
Page 591
Issue 1

ROUTINE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURE

FUNCTION
ATTCON/
DESKCON NO.

CALL TERMINATION
INCOMING CALL
INDICATION

SPEECH

CALL ORIGINATION
RELEASE

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

CHAPTER 7
Page 592
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SPEECH

RELEASE

REMARKS

CHAPTER 8

MAINTENANCE COMMANDS

This chapter explains various commands used in the system administrative management procedure. Table 8-1
shows a list of maintenance commands.
Table 8-1 Command Lis t
COMMAND

COMMAND FULL NAME

ALLC

Assignment of Line Load Control

ALMG

Assignment of Alarm Grade Data

ATRF

Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order

ATRFN

Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network

BOSD

Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data

CADSD

Continuous Assignment of Station Data

CATK

Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

CBCN

Control of Broadcasting for NDM

CCSE

Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment

CDBU

Change of Dch Backup

CMOD

Change of System Mode

CMODI

Change of System Mode for ISW

CMWL

Control Message Waiting Lamp

CMWL_T

Control Message Waiting Lamps - Telephone Number

CPRS

Controlled Alternate PRSCs

CSCL

Continuous Change of Station Class

CSTN

Continuous Change of Station Number

DCBD

Display of Call Block Entry Data

DCEN

Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM

DCON

Display of Connection Status

DFTD

Display of System Message Details

DISS

Display of Program Issue

DLEN

Display of LENS Data

DLSL

Display of Lock Out Station - LENS

DLSS

Display of Lockout Station - Number

DLSS_T

Display of Lock Out Station - Number- Telephone Number

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 593
Issue 1

MAINTENANCE COMMANDS
Table 8-1 Command List (Continued)
COMMAND

COMMAND FULL NAME

DLTEL

Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM

DNTEL

Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM

DPKG

Display of Setting Port Package

DPSW

Display Package Switch Status

DSTN

Display of Station Data

DTELN

Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM

DTF101

Display of Terminal Traffic Data

DTF102

Display of Route Traffic Data

DTF103

Display of Station Peg Count Data

DTF104

Display of Attendant Peg Count Data

DTF105

Display of Route Peg Count Data

DTF201

Display of Service Peg Count Data

DTF301

Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data

DTF302

Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data

DTF303

Display of Station Peg Count Data

DTF501

Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data

DTF601

Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data

DTF602

Display of Connection Route Traffic Data

DTF101N

Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion Network

DTF102N

Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

DTF103N

Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF104N

Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF105N

Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF201N

Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF301N

Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF302N

Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF303N

Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF501N

Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF601N

Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF602N

Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

CHAPTER 8
Page 594
Issue 1

NDA-24307

MAINTENANCE COMMANDS
Table 8-1 Command List (Continued)
COMMAND
FLINST

COMMAND FULL NAME
File Install

HDD_FDD

Data Control Between HDD and FDD

HDD_MAT

Data Control Between HDD and MAT

HDD_MAT_N

Data Control Between HDD and MAT for NDM

HDFP

HDD Format of PBX

MBCT

Make Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM

MBLE

Make Busy of LENS

MBPM

Make Busy of Port Microprocessor

MBRT

Make Busy of Route

MBSM

Make Busy of System Message Printout

MBST

Make Busy of Station

MBST_T

Make Busy of Station - Telephone Number

MBTC

Make Busy of Trunk-Continuous

MBTK

Make Busy of Trunk

MEM_HDD
MEM_HDD_N

Data Control Between Memory and HDD
Data Control Between Memory and HDD for NDM

MFCH

Make Busy of FCCH

PMBU

Port Microprocessor Back Up

RALM

Release Alarm

RALMN
RLST
RLST_T

Release Alarm for NDM
Release Station/Trunk
Release Station/Trunk - Telephone Number

SINZ

System Initialization

SINZI

System Initialization for ISW

SPTS

Scanning of Port Status

SRTS

Scanning of Route Status

XHFD

X-RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 595
Issue 1

ALLC: Assignment of Line Load Control

ALLC:

Assignment of Line Load Control

1. Functional Outline
This command designates the start and stop of line load control.
2. Parameters
Input Data
ALL/ONE:

Operation Mode Selection (1,2)
O/A=Only One LP/All LPs

LP:

Local Partition (LP) Number Note

STATUS:

Line Load Control Status (0-3)
0=Stop Line Load Control
1=Start Line Load Control
2=Automatic Line Load Control is in effect (display only)
3=Status of all LPs do not match (display only)

Note: This parameter appears when 0 (only one LP) is set in ALL/ONE input data.

CHAPTER 8
Page 596
Issue 1

NDA-24307

ALMG: Assignment of Alarm Grade Data

ALMG:

Assignment of Alarm Grade Data

1. Functional Outline
This command makes a flexible change of system message output grades. Thus, the PBX user can give a proper
alarm grade to each system message according to their requirements. When no data is assigned, the default
alarm grades are automatically adopted.
Note: This command cannot change the alarm grade for [6-A] system message.

2. Parameters
Input data
FK:

Fault Message Kind (0-7, 10-17, 20-27, 30-37)

FI:

Fault Message Index (A-Z)

LMP:

Fault Message Lamp Data (0-3)
0=Lamp OFF
1=SUP Lamp ON
2=MN Lamp ON
3=MJ Lamp ON

GRD:

Printout Grade (0-3)

TYPE:

List-up Type)
1=All Data
2=Changed Data
3=Default Data

SYSM GRD: System Message Output Grade
0=All Messages
1=Not Used
2=MN/MJ Grade Massages
3=MJ Grade Massages

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 597
Issue 1

ATRF: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order

ATRF:

Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to assign and delete node-level traffic measurement programs. A request for traffic
measurement is performed on each node basis when a traffic measurement instruction has been assigned by
this command. The collected traffic measurement data can be stored on the HD of the MAT, which can be
designated on the basis of traffic measurement type.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE:

Type of Traffic Measurement (1-19)

DATA

MEANING

DATA

MEANING

1

Terminal Traffic

2

Route Traffic

3

Station Peg Count

4

ATT Peg Count

5

Route Peg Count

6

Service Peg Count

8

UCD Route Peg Count

9

UCD Group Peg Count

10

UCD Station Peg Count

15

ATT Answering Peg Count

18

Connection Route Peg Count

19

Connection Route Traffic

PORT:

Traffic Information Output Terminal Number (0-7: IOC, 8: LAN, 9: NMS)

INTERVAL: Output interval (0, 30-120)
Assign the data (30-120) in 10 minute increments. When assigning 0 (available when any
of TYPE 3-18 is selected), instead specify your desired output time in the OUTPUT
HOUR/MINUTE parameters below.
START HOUR

Note

START MINUTE

Note

END HOUR

Note

END MINUTE

Note

OUTPUT HOUR:

This data is valid only when “INTERVAL”=0.

OUTPUT MINUTE:

This data is valid only when “INTERVAL”=0.

START RT:

Start External Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)

END RT:

End External Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)

CHAPTER 8
Page 598
Issue 1

NDA-24307

ATRF: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order

START C_RT:

Start Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)

END C_RT:

End Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)

Note: Assign the traffic measurement time period between START HOUR/MINUTE and END HOUR/

MINUTE longer than an hour. Also, if the measurement should be executed throughout a day, assign
the same data in both START HOUR/MINUTE and END HOUR/MINUTE parameter

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 599
Issue 1

ATRFN: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network

ATRFN:

Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to assign and delete traffic measurement programs available on the Ethernet. A request
for traffic measurement is performed on a network basis when a traffic measurement instruction has been
assigned by this command. The collected traffic measurement data can be stored on the HD of the MAT
(connected to the NCN: Network Control Node), which can be designated on the basis of traffic measurement
type. Note that this command can be used at the NCN only.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE:

Type of Traffic Measurement (1-19) Note 1

DATA

MEANING

DATA

MEANING

1

Terminal Traffic

2

Route Traffic

3

Station Peg Count

4

ATT Peg Count

5

Route Peg Count

6

Service Peg Count

8

UCD Route Peg Count

9

UCD Group Peg Count

10

UCD Station Peg Count

15

ATT Answering Peg Count

18

Connection Route Peg Count

19

Connection Route Traffic

PORT:

Traffic Information Output Terminal Number (0-7: IOC, 8: LAN, 9: NMS)

INTERVAL:

Output interval (0, 30-120)
Assign the data (30-120) in 10 minute increments. When assigning 0 (available when any of TYPE 3-18 is selected), instead specify your desired output
time in the “OUTPUT HOUR/MINUTE” parameters below.

START HOUR

Note 2, Note 3

START MINUTE

Note 2, Note 3

END HOUR

Note 2, Note 3

END MINUTE

Note 2, Note 3

OUTPUT HOUR:

This data is valid only when “INTERVAL”=0.

OUTPUT MINUTE:

This data is valid only when “INTERVAL”=0.

START LGRT:

Start Logical Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)

CHAPTER 8
Page 600
Issue 1

NDA-24307

ATRFN: Assignment of Traffic Measurement Order for Fusion Network

END LGRT:

End Logical Route Number (available when TYPE 2/5/8 is selected)

START C_RT:

Start Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)

END C_RT:

End Connection Route Number (available when TYPE 18/19 is selected)

Note 1: The selected traffic measurement data, except for TYPE 1 (Terminal Traffic), is collected with the

whole network systems as a single unit.
Note 2: When time difference exists between the nodes, confirm that the related time difference data, based on

the UCT (Universal Coordinated Time) standard, has been assigned at each node via the ATDF command.
Note 3: Assign the traffic measurement time period between START HOUR/MINUTE and END HOUR/

MINUTE longer than an hour. Also, if the measurement should be executed throughout a day, assign
the same data in both START HOUR/MINUTE and END HOUR/MINUTE parameters.
Note 4: If the data for this command is once assigned, the node-level data by the ATRF command is not

cleared, but loses its validity (the network-level data takes precedence).

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 601
Issue 1

BOSD: Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data

BOSD:

Back Up One-Touch Speed Call Memory Data

1. Functional Outline
•

Save Function
Saves the data residing in the One-Touch Speed Call Memory of ELC card onto a floppy disk.

•

Verify Function
Verifies the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data saved on the floppy disk with the data residing in the
One-Touch Speed Call Memory of ELC card.

•

Load Function
Loads the One-Touch Speed Call Memory data saved in the floppy disk into the One-Touch Speed Call
Memory of ELC card.

2. Parameters
Input data
Direction Select:

PBX Memory to MAT/MAT to PBX Memory / Verify MAT against MEM

Data Type Selection:

by Station / by LEN

Begin TN:

Note 1

End TN:

Note 1

Begin STN:

Note 1

End STN:

Note 1

Begin LEN:

Note 2

End LEN:

Note 2

Auto Verify Afterward:

Click ON/OFF=Checked/Unchecked

File Name and Path
Note 1: When “by Station” is designated
Note 2: When “by LEN” is designated

CHAPTER 8
Page 602
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CADSD: Continuous Assignment of Station Data

CADSD:

Continuous Assignment of Station Data

1. Functional Outline
This command can assign/delete many station data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers.
2. Parameters
Type: Assign/Delete
[When “Assign” is selected in the “Type” selection list box]
Input data
TN(START):

Start Tenant Number

TN(END):

End Tenant Number

STN(START):

Start Station Number [Max. 6 digits] Note 1

STN(END):

End Station Number [Max. 6 digits] Note 1

STEP:

Station Count-up Step Note 2
If using “*” and “#” → [1-12]
If not using “*” and “#” → [1-10]

LENS(START):

First Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

LENS(END):

Last Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

GROUP(START):

First Group Number [0-31]

GROUP(END):

Last Group Number [0-31]

LEVEL(START):

First Level Number [0-7]

LEVEL(END):

Last Level Number [0-7]

Note 1: In the bottom part of the display, a check box is provided to determine whether to use “*” and “#” as

a part of the Station Number. If necessary, check the box.
Note 2: In the parameter here, specify the size of increment between the consecutive station numbers to be

assigned. See the example below:

Example:

[Input data]
STN(START)=100
STN(END)=200
STEP=10

→

[Result]
Station Number is assigned by 10 increments:
∇ When * and # are not used as part of STN
100 110 120 130 ... 190 200
∇ When * and # are used as part of STN
10* 118 126 134 ... 1** 1#8

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 603
Issue 1

CADSD: Continuous Assignment of Station Data

TEC:

Telephone Equipment Class [1-31]
1=DP (10pps)

2=PB

3=DP/PB

4=DP (20pps)

5-11=Not used

12=Dterm

13=Data Terminal via Dterm

14=Hot Line

15=CAS Line

16=Data Terminal via Data Module

17=Not used

18=Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line)

19-22=Not used

23=ISDN Terminal

24-26=Not used

27=8 Conference Equipment

28-31=Not used
RSC:

Route Restriction Class [0-15]

SFC:

Service Feature Class [0-15]

Buttons
Execute:

Click to make the input data valid.

Cancel:

Click to cancel the input data.

Exit:

Click to exit this command.

Display data (after “Execute” button is pressed)
TN:

Tenant Number

STN:

Assigned Station Number

LENS:

Line Equipment Number

STATUS:

Data Entry Result
OK=Data Assignment Is Successful Note

Note: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.

CHAPTER 8
Page 604
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CADSD: Continuous Assignment of Station Data

[When “Delete” is selected in the “Type” selection list box]
Input data
TN(START):

First Tenant Number

TN(END):

Last Tenant Number

STN(START):

First Station Number [Max. 6 digits]

STN(END):

Last Station Number [Max. 6 digits]

STEP:

:Station Count-up Step Note 1
If using “*” and “#” → [1-12]
If not using “*” and “#” → [1-10]

Note 1: In the parameter here, specify the size of increment between the consecutive station numbers to be

deleted. See the example below:

Example:

[Input data]
STN(START)=100
STN(END)=200
STEP=10

→

[Result]
Station Number is deleted by 10 increments:
∇ When * and # are not used as part of STN
100 110 120 130 ... 190 200
∇ When * and # are used as part of STN
10* 118 126 134 ... 1** 1#8

Buttons
Execute:

Click to delete the input data.

Cancel:

Click to cancel the deletion.

Exit:

Click to exit this command.

Display data
TN:

Tenant Number

STN:

Station Number

STATUS:

Result of Deletion Note 2

Note 2: When the deletion is successful, “OK” is displayed here. Otherwise (i.e. the deletion is rejected), re-

lated error message is displayed.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 605
Issue 1

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

CATK:

Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

1. Functional Outline
This command can assign/delete many trunk data simultaneously which have consecutive numbers.
2. Parameters
Type/KIND (Note): Assign/Delete
Note: Type

KIND
[When “Assign” is selected in the “Type/KIND” selection list box]
Input data
RT:
TK (START):
TK (END):
STEP:
LENS (START):
LENS (END):
TN:
RSC:
SFC:
GROUP (START):
GROUP (END):
LEVEL (START):
LEVEL (END):
TYPE:

Route Number
First Trunk Number [1-768]
Last Trunk Number [1-768]
Trunk Count-up Step [1-10] Note 1
First Line Equipment Number [6 digits]
Last Line Equipment Number [6 digits]
Tenant Number
Route Restriction Class [0-15] Note 2
Service Feature Class [0-15] Note 2
First Group Number [0-31]
Last Group Number [0-31]
First Level Number [0-7]
Last Level Number [0-7]
Count-up Type [1-6] Note 3
1 = LEVEL → GROUP→ UNIT
2 = LEVEL → UNIT → GROUP
3 = GROUP→ UNIT → LEVEL
4 = GROUP→ LEVEL → UNIT
5 = UNIT → LEVEL → GROUP
6 = UNIT → GROUP→ LEVEL

Note 1: In the parameter here, specify the size of increment between the consecutive trunk numbers to be

assigned. See the example below:
Example:

[Input data]
TN(START)=1
TN(END)=21
STEP=2

[Result]
→

Trunk Number is assigned by 2 increments:
1
3
5
7
9
11
... 19

21

Note 2: Data entry for this parameter is necessary when “RT” is “901” or “915.”
Note 3: “TYPE” parameter here determines how to arrange the trunk data. See [Details on Trunk

Arrangement “TYPE”] (later pages) for details.
CHAPTER 8
Page 606
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

Buttons
Execute:

Click to make the input data valid.

Cancel:

Click to cancel the input data.

Exit:

Click to exit this command.

Display data
TK:

Assigned Trunk Number

LENS:

Line Equipment Number

STATUS:

Data Entry Result
OK=Data Assignment Is Successful Note 4

Note 4: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 607
Issue 1

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

[When “Delete” is selected in the “Type/KIND” selection list box]
Input data
RT:

Route Number

TK(START):

First Trunk Number [1-768]

TK(END):

Last Trunk Number [1-768]

STEP:

Trunk Count-up Step [1-10] Note 1

Buttons
Execute:

Click to delete the input data.

Cancel:

Click to cancel the deletion.

Exit:

Click to exit this command.

Display data
TK:

Trunk Number

STATUS:

Result of Deletion
OK=Deletion Success Note 2

Note 1: In the parameter here, specify the size of increment between the consecutive trunk numbers to be de-

leted. See the example below:
Example:

[Input data]
TK(START)=1
TK(END)=21
STEP=2

[Result]
→

Trunk Number is deleted by 2 increments:
1
3
5
7
9
11
... 19

21

Note 2: When the deletion is successful, “OK” is displayed here. Otherwise (i.e. the deletion is rejected), re-

lated error message is displayed.

CHAPTER 8
Page 608
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

[Details on Trunk Arrangement “TYPE”]
When assigning the consecutive trunk data by using the CATK command, you must select the trunk arrangement type (1-6) in the “TYPE” parameter. See the detailed examples below:
The following are the examples when the 16 COT circuit cards are accommodated as shown below.
U=2
00

05

10

15

20

16

16 16

C

C

C

O

O

O

T

T

T

16 16

16

C

C

C

O

O

O

T

T

T

PIM C/E

PIM C/E

U=3

U=0

•

U=1

TYPE=1 (Level → Group → Unit)
Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
U=2
Slot No.

1MG

05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

U=3

06

15

16

56 64

72 80 88 96

49 57
16 24 32

65 73 81 89
40 48

9

17 25

33 41

Level No.

02 03 04 05

00 01 02 03

Group No.

U=0

U=1

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 609
Issue 1

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

•

TYPE=2 (Level → Unit → Group)
Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
U=2
Slot No.

05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0

1MG

8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1

U=3

06

15

16

24 56

32 64 80 96

17 49
40 72 88

25 57 73 89
16 48

33 65 81

9

41

Level No.

02 03 04 05

00 01 02 03

Group No.

U=0

•

U=1

TYPE=3 (Group → Level → Unit)
Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
U=2
Slot No.

1MG

05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0

06

29

5
1

U=3

2

15

16

63 64

93

96

51 52
49 50
32

69
65
47 48

72
68

8
4

35 36
33 34

3

Level No.

02 03 04 05

00 01 02 03

Group No.

U=0

CHAPTER 8
Page 610
Issue 1

U=1

NDA-24307

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

•

TYPE=4 (Group → Unit → Level)
Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
U=2
Slot No.

05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0

1MG

85

13
1

U=3

06

2

15

16

91 92

93

96

19 20
7 8
88

21
9
89 90

24
12

16
4

17 18
5 6

3

Level No.

02 03 04 05

00 01 02 03

Group No.

U=0

•

U=1

TYPE=5 (Unit → Level → Group)
Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
U=2
Slot No.

1MG

05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0

U=3

06

15

16

31 63

32 64 80 96

7 39
3 35
29 61 79 95

8 40 68 84
4 36 66 82
30 62

5
1

37 67 83
33 65 81

6
2

38
34

Level No.

02 03 04 05

00 01 02 03

Group No.

U=0

U=1

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 611
Issue 1

CATK: Continuous Assignment of Trunk Data

•

TYPE=6 (Unit → Group → Level)
Trunk data is arranged in the following numerical order.
U=2
Slot No.

1MG

05
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0
LV7
LV6
LV5
LV4
LV3
LV2
LV1
LV0

U=3

06

15

16

87 91

89 92 94 96

15 19
3 7
85 89 93 95

16 20 22 24
4 8 10 12
86 90

13 17 21 23
1 5 9 11

14 18
2 6

02 03 04 05

00 01 02 03

Level No.
Group No.

U=0

CHAPTER 8
Page 612
Issue 1

U=1

NDA-24307

CBCN: Control of Broadcasting for NDM

CBCN:

Control of Broadcasting for NDM

1. Functional Outline
This command specifies the destination of NDM data broadcast from the NCN. This command is available
only at the NCN (Network Control Node).
2. Parameters
Input data
TYPE:

ALL (All the Nodes)/ONE (One designated Node)

FPC:

FPC of the designated Node Note

Interval:

Broadcasting Interval

Note: This parameter appears when one node is selected.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 613
Issue 1

CCSE: Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment

CCSE:

Change of Common Signaling Channel Equipment

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to set/reset the make busy state of CCH circuit card.
2. Parameters
CCH LENS:

Line Equipment Number of CCH circuit card [5 digits]
MG=XX, UNIT=X, GROUP=XX

LINK:

Link Status [0-2]
0=Link Open
1=Link Close
2=Not Available

MB:

Make Busy Information [0-2]
0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy
2=Not Available

Note: This command cannot be used for the ISDN-related circuit card (such as PRT, DCH card).

CHAPTER 8
Page 614
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CDBU: Change of Dch Backup

CDBU:

Change of Dch Backup

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to execute the D-channel route changeover, associated with the D-CHANNEL BACKUP-PRI feature (for AT&T/NT/N-ISDN2).
2. Parameters
Input data
MG:

Module Group Number [00-07] Note

CNT:

Number of Dch Backup Route [1-32] Note

Buttons
Get:

Click to get information on the Dch Routes.

Change:

Click to execute the Dch route changeover.

Stop:

Click to cancel the Dch route changeover.

Exit:

Click to exit this command.

Display data
RT:

External Route Number

STS0:

Primary-side DCH Status [ACT/ST-BY/OOS (out of service)]

STS1:

Backup-side DCH Status [ACT/ST-BY/OOS (out of service)]

P-LENS:

Primary DCH LENS (6 digits)

B-LENS:

Backup DCH LENS (6 digits)

CHG-STS:

Change Status [Completed/Executing]

Note: Data entry procedure by this command is as follows:

1.
2.
3.
4.
→

Specify the Module Group No. in the “MG” parameter.
Click the “Get” button. Then, the related Dch data appears in the display data field.
Referring to the display data, enter the “CNT” No. attached to the Dch to be changed over.
Click the “Change” button.
Now, the Dch changeover starts automatically.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 615
Issue 1

CMOD: Change of System Mode

CMOD:

Change of System Mode

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to execute ACT/ST-BY change of the processor (CPU) / TSW and display the status of
CPU/CLK/TSW/PLO.
2. Parameters
Input data
TYPE:

Type of Process (1,2)
1/2=Change Operating Mode/Make Busy of TSW

DEVICE:

Device to be changed (1,2)

Note 1

1=CPU

Note 2

2=TSW
SW:

Type of Switch

Note 3

1=TSW(fixed)
SYSTEM:

System of Switch (0,1)

Note 3

0/1=System 0/System 1
Note 1: This parameter appears only when “TYPE”=1.
Note 2: When the CPU mode change is executed, the MAT (TCP/IP) is once disconnected. Then, log in to the

system again.
Note 3: This parameter appears only when “TYPE”=2.

Display data
Status:

CPU 0/1, TSW 0/1, PLO 0/1(0-3)
0=Not Mounted
1=Stand By
2=ACT
3=Make Busy

CHAPTER 8
Page 616
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CMODI: Change of System Mode for ISW

CMODI:

Change of System Mode for ISW

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to execute ACT/ST-BY change of the CPU/TSW and display the status of CPU/TSW/
PLO. To use this command, the MAT must be connected to ISW.
2. Parameters
Input data
FPC:

FPC of designated Node

Note: When TSW changeover is executed, be sure to assign FPC of ISW.

TYPE SELECT:

1=ACT/ST-BY change of CPU/TSW
2=MB Control of TSW

[When TYPE 1 is selected]
DEVICE:

1=CPU

Note

2=TSW
Execution Button: ACT/ST-BY change to be executed
[When TYPE 2 is selected]
SYSTEM:

0/1=TSW No.0 System/TSW No.1 System

Execution Button: MB ON/MB OFF
Note: When the CPU mode change is executed, the MAT (TCP/IP) is once disconnected. Then, log in to the

system again.
Display data
FPC:

FPC of each Node

STATUS:

Result of ACT/ST-BY change

SYSTEM:

No.0 System/No.1 System

CPU:

ACT/ST-BY state of CPU No.0/1

TSW:

MB ON/MB OFF state of TSW No.0/1

PLO:

ACT/ST-BY state of PLO No.0/1

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 617
Issue 1

CMWL: Control Message Waiting Lamp

CMWL:

Control Message Waiting Lamp

1. Functional Outline
This command indicates ON/OFF status and controls the Message Waiting Lamp ON/OFF (MW Lamp) at the
station. If the station is a Dterm, this command can also control Message Waiting Display on the D term.
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE:

Type of Input (1,2)
1/2=Designation by Station Number/Designation by LEN

TN:

Note 1

STN:

Maximum 5 digits for Business system, and 6 digits for Hotel system. Note 1

LENS:

Note 2

MCI:

Message Center MW Status (0,1)
0/1=OFF/ON

ATT:

Attendant Console MW Status (0,1) See the parameter MCI.

STA:

Station MW Status (0,1)

VMM:

Voice Mail Module MW Status (0,1)See the parameter MCI.

Note 1: This parameter appears when TYPE= 1.
Note 2: This parameter appears when TYPE= 2.

CHAPTER 8
Page 618
Issue 1

NDA-24307

See the parameter MCI.

CMWL_T: Control Message Waiting Lamps - Telephone Number

CMWL_T: Control Message Waiting Lamps - Telephone Number
1. Functional Outline
This command is used to control/display the Message Waiting Lamp’s ON/OFF status, by using Telephone
Numbers. When the station is a Dterm, this command can also be used to control the Message Waiting Lamp
Display. This command is available at NCN (for Fusion network) only. Note
Note: This command is available for PBX program software.

2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE:

Designation by Telephone Number/Designation by LEN

UGN:

User Group Number Note 1

TELN:

Telephone Number (max. 16 digits) Note 1

LENS:

Line Equipment Number Note 2

MWLAMP:

MW Lamp Status OFF/ON

MCI:

Message Center MW Status OFF/ON

ATT:

Attendant Console MW Status OFF/ON

STA:

Station MW Status OFF/ON

VMM:

Voice Mail Module MW Status OFF/ON

Note 1: This parameter is valid when “Type = 1” is selected.
Note 2: This parameter is valid when “Type = 2” is selected.

Display Data
FPC:

Fusion Point Code (1-253) Note 3

TN:

Tenant Number Note 3

STN:

Physical Station Number (max. 5 digits for Business/max. 6 digits for Hotel
system) Note 3

Note 3: These parameters are for display only.

Buttons
Get:

Click to get information on the MW status.

Set:

Click to execute the assigned MW lamp control.

Exit:

Click to exit this command.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 619
Issue 1

CPRS: Controlled Alternate PRSCs

CPRS:

Controlled Alternate PRSCs

1. Functional Outline
This command is necessary for the Controlled Alternate PRSCs function. It either selects the class used between two priority restriction classes (Normal or Urgent), or indicates the class used. This command is allowed
only when bit1 of SYS 1, INDEX 59 is “1” (Controlled Alternate PRSCs in service).
2. Parameters
N/U:

Priority Restriction Class [N/U]
N=Normal
U=Urgent

CHAPTER 8
Page 620
Issue 1

NDA-24307

CSCL: Continuous Change of Station Class

CSCL:

Continuous Change of Station Class

1. Functional Outline
This command can change the station class information (RSC, SFC) continuously by designating the
consecutive range of the station numbers.
2. Parameters
Input data
TN:
STN(START):
STN(END):
TEC(OLD):
TEC(NEW):
RSC(OLD):
RSC(NEW):
SFC(OLD):
SFC(NEW):

Tenant Number
First Station Number [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note 1
Last Station Number [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note 1
Telephone Equipment Class before change [1-31] Note 2, Note 3
Telephone Equipment Class after change [1-31] Note 2
Route Restriction Class before change [0-15] Note 3
Route Restriction Class after change [0-15]
Service Feature Class before change [0-15] Note 3
Service Feature Class after change [0-15]

Note 1: In the bottom part of the display, a check box is provided to determine whether to use “*” and “#” as

a part of the Station Number. If necessary, check the box.
Note 2: Details on TEC (Telephone Equipment Class) are shown below:

1=DP (10pps)
3=DP/PB
5-11=Not used
13=Data Terminal via Dterm
15=CAS Line
17=Not used
19-22=Not used
24-26=Not used
28-31=Not used

2=PB
4=DP (20pps)
12=Dterm
14=Hot Line
16=Data Terminal via Data Module
18=Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line)
23=ISDN Terminal
27=8 Conference Equipment

Note 3: If you want to change all classes of all specified stations, enter “**” for this parameter.

Buttons
Execute:
Cancel:
Exit:
Display data
STN:
STATUS:

Click to make the input data valid.
Click to cancel the input data.
Click to exit this command.
Station Number
Data Entry Result
OK=Data Assignment is successful Note

Note: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 621
Issue 1

CSTN: Continuous Change of Station Number

CSTN:

Continuous Change of Station Number

1. Functional Outline
This command can change a consecutive range of physical station numbers.
2. Parameters
Input data
TN:

Tenant Number

OLD STN(START):

First Station Number before change [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note

OLD STN(END):

Last Station Number before change [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note

NEW STN(START): First Station Number after change [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note
NEW STN(END):

Last Station Number after change [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)] Note

Note: In the bottom part of the display, a check box is provided to determine whether to use “*” and “#” as

a part of the Station Number. If necessary, check the box.
Buttons
Execute:

Click to make the input data valid.

Cancel:

Click to cancel the input data

Exit:

Click to exit this command.

Display data
OLD STN:

Station Number before change

NEW STN:

Station Number after change

STATUS:

Data Entry Result
OK=Data Assignment is successful Note

Note: If not OK (i.e. the data entry is not successful), related error message is displayed here.

CHAPTER 8
Page 622
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DCBD: Display of Call Block Entry Data

DCBD:

Display of Call Block Entry Data

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to display the following Call Block data, assigned to a station:
•

Number of station/trunk whose call is to be blocked (in the remainder of this page, denoted as “Restriction
Number”)

•

Registered “Restriction Numbers” in total

These data can be obtained by entering any of the station’s Telephone Number (TYPE 1), Physical Station
Number (TYPE 2) or LENS (TYPE 3) in the parameters below:
2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE:

Selection of Input Data Type
TYPE 1 (Input Data = UGN, TELN)

Note

TYPE 2 (Input Data = FPC, TN, STN) Note
TYPE 3 (Input Data = FPC, LENS)

Note

READ (button to view the Display Data)
EXIT (button to exit)
Note: When using this command, first choose the input data type (Type 1 - 3) in the “TYPE” selection list box.

Then the following parameters appear, according to the selected data type.
•

When TYPE 1 is selected:

UGN
TELN

(User Group Number)
(Telephone Number [Max.16 digits])

•

When TYPE 2 is selected:

FPC
TN
STN

(Fusion Point Code [1-253])
(Tenant Number [Max.3 digits])
(Physical Station Number [Max.6 digits])

•

When TYPE 3 is selected:

FPC
LENS

(Fusion Point Code [1-253])
(Line Equipment Number)

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 623
Issue 1

DCBD: Display of Call Block Entry Data

Display Data
CNT:

Registered “Restriction Numbers” in total (1-5)

DC:

Each “Restriction Number”

CHAPTER 8
Page 624
Issue 1

•

When Physical Station Number is registered – Max.6 digits

•

When Telephone Number is registered – Max.16 digits

•

When Trunk Call Number is registered – Max.32 digits

NDA-24307

DCEN: Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM

DCEN:

Display of Connection Trunk LENS Data for LDM

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to display the registered connection trunk/route data by designating LENS.
2. Parameters
Input data
C_LENS:

Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

Display data
C_RT:

Connection Route Number [1-1023]

C_TK:

Connection Trunk Number [1-4095]

RT:

External Route Number

TK:

Trunk Number [1-255]

TN:

Tenant Number

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 625
Issue 1

DCON: Display of Connection Status

DCON:

Display of Connection Status

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the connection status of the station and trunks. If the specified station or trunk is busy,
the connected party is displayed.
2. Parameters
Input data
TYPE:

Kind of Connection Status (1-4)
1=Station of Connection Status
2=Trunk of Connection Status
3=LENS of Connection Status
4=Connection Trunk of Connection Status (Fusion Network)

TN:

Note 1

STN:

Maximum number of digits is 5 for Business system, and 6 for Hotel system. Note 1

RT:

Note 2

TK:

Note 2

LEN:

Note 3

C_RT:

Connection Route Number (1-1023) Note 4

C_TK:

Connection Trunk Number (1-4095) Note 4

Note 1: This data is valid when Type= 1.
Note 2: This data is valid when Type= 2.
Note 3: This data is valid when Type= 3.
Note 4: This data is valid when Type= 4.

CHAPTER 8
Page 626
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DFTD: Display of System Message Details

DFTD:

Display of System Message Details

1. Functional Outline
This command is necessary to print the system messages detected by the Fault Diagnostic programs.
When the fault scanning (Scanning PBX) is effective, the MAT can scan the PBX status by polling every 20
sec, (default setting is Effective.)
If the PBX has faults, this command executes automatically.
2. Parameters
Input data
New/Old
Show Details:

YES/NO

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 627
Issue 1

DISS: Display of Program Issue

DISS:

Display of Program Issue

1. Functional Outline
This command outputs to the printer and displays at the MAT, the program information (version, issue No. and
date) in the main memory, and the program information (SP No.and issue No.) in the port microprocessor
memory mounted in each circuit card in the PBX.
2. Parameters
Input data
Type of Issue:

Main Memory/Port Microprocessor

Module Group:

Note 1

Unit:

Note 1

Display data
Type:

Main Memory/Boot ROM/IP/ACDP Note 2

Version:

Note 2

Issue:

Note 2

Date:

Note 2

Group:

00-23 Note 1

SP No.:

4 digits Note 1

Issue:

ASCII 2 digits Note 1

Note 1: This data is valid when Port Microprocessor is designated.
Note 2: This data is valid when Main Memory is designated.

CHAPTER 8
Page 628
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DLEN: Display of LENS Data

DLEN:

Display of LENS Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the data (station data or trunk data) assigned for a designated LEN. For Hotel system,
Room Class and Floor Service Data [Annex (ANX), Ground/Underground (G), Floor (FLR)] displays also.
2. Parameters
Input data
LENS
Display data
TN
STN:

Maximum 6 digits

TEC:

Telephone Equipment Number (1-31)

DATA

MEANING

DATA

MEANING

1

DP (10pps)

2

PB

3

DP/PB

4

DP (20 pps)

Not used

12

Dterm

13

Data Terminal via Dterm

14

Hot Line

15

CAS Line

16

Data Terminal via Data Module

17

Not used

23

ISDN Terminal

18

Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm
Multi-Line)

5-11

24-26

Not used

28-31

Not used

19-22
27

RSC:

Route Restriction Class (0-15)

SFC:

Service Feature Class (0-15)

ROOM CLASS:

(0-15)

ANX:

Annex (0-3)

G:

0/1=Ground/Underground

FLR:

Floor (1-127)

RT:

The Internal Route Number
NDA-24307

Not used
Eight Conference Equipment

CHAPTER 8
Page 629
Issue 1

DLEN: Display of LENS Data

DATA

MEANING

DATA

MEANING

901

Attendant Console

902

Originating Register Trunk

903

Incoming Register Trunk

904

MF Receiver

905

Sender Trunk DP/PB

906

PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service

907

AMP

908

Not used

909

Three-Way Conference Trunk

910-912

Not used

913

Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON

914

Not Used

915

Night Attendant Console

916

MFC Register

917

MFC Sender

918

Not used

927, 928

Not used

919-926
929

Modem
Data Signaling Trunk-Option

931-947

930

Not used

TK
C_RT:

Connection Route Number (1-1023)

C_TK:

Connection Trunk Number (1-4095)

CHAPTER 8
Page 630
Issue 1

NDA-24307

Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk

DLSL: Display of Lock Out Station - LENS

DLSL:

Display of Lock Out Station - LENS

1. Functional Outline
This command prints the LENS of stations in lockout state.
2. Parameters
Input data
TYPE:

Type of Printout (1-3)
1=Printout of all LEN in lockout
2=Printout of locked out LEN in the designated Module Group
3=Printout of locked out LEN in the designated Unit

MG:

Note 1, Note 2

UNIT:

Note 2

Note 1: The parameter is valid only when Type= 2.
Note 2: The parameter is valid only when Type= 3.

Display data
LENS

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 631
Issue 1

DLSS: Display of Lockout Station - Number

DLSS:

Display of Lockout Station - Number

1. Functional Outline
This command prints the stations in lockout state by station number.
2. Parameters
Input data
TYPE:

Type of Printout (1-3)
1=Printout of all lockout stations
2=Printout of lockout stations by tenant
3=Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station number.

TN:

Note 1, Note 2

START STN:

Maximum 6 digits

Note 2

END STN:

Maximum 6 digits

Note 2

Note 1: The parameter is valid only when Type= 2.
Note 2: The parameter is valid only when Type= 3.

Display data
CNT:

Count

TN
STN
LENS

CHAPTER 8
Page 632
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DLSS_T: Display of Lock Out Station - Number- Telephone Number

DLSS_T: Display of Lock Out Station - Number- Telephone Number
1. Functional Outline
This command is used to print out stations in lockout state, by using Telephone Numbers. This command is
available at NCN (for Fusion network) only. Note
Note: This command is available for PBX program software.

2. Parameters
Input data
Type:

Printout of all lockout stations
Printout of lockout stations by tenant
Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station number

UGN:

User Group Number Note 1, Note 2

Start TELN:

First Telephone Number (max. 16 digits) Note 2

End TELN:

End Telephone Number (max. 16 digits) Note 2

Note 1: This parameter is valid when “Type = Printout of lockout stations by tenant” is selected.
Note 2: This parameter is valid when “Type = Printout of lockout stations within a specified range of station

number” is selected.
Display data
FPC:

Fusion Point Code (1-253)

TN:

Tenant Number

Start STN:

First Physical Station Number (max. 5 digits for Business/max. 6 digits for Hotel
system)

End STN:

End Physical Station Number (max. 5 digits for Business/max. 6 digits for Hotel
system)

CNT:

Count

UGN:

User Group Number

TELN:

Telephone Number (max. 16 digits)

LENS:

Line Equipment Number

Buttons
Get:

Click to get information on the lockout station

Exit:

Click to exit this command.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 633
Issue 1

DLTEL: Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM

DLTEL:

Display of Telephone Number from LENS for LDM

1. Functional Outline
This command, available at each Local Node (LN), is used to display the Telephone Number or other station
data by designating a specific LEN.
2. Parameters
Input data
LENS:

Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

Display data
UGN:

User Group Number

TELN:

Telephone Number [Max. 16 digits]

TN:

Tenant Number

STN:

Station Number [Max. 6 digits]

TEC:

Telephone Equipment Class [1-31]

RSC:

Route Restriction Class [0-15]

SFC:

Service Feature Class [0-15]

CHAPTER 8
Page 634
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DNTEL: Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM

DNTEL:

Display of Telephone Number from LENS for NDM

1. Functional Outline
This command, available at Network Control Node (NCN) only, is used to display the Telephone Number or
other station data by designating a specific FPC and LEN.
2. Parameters
Input data
FPC:

Fusion Point Code [1-253]

LENS:

Line Equipment Number [6 digits]

Display data
UGN:

User Group Number

TELN:

Telephone Number [Max. 16 digits]

NID:

Network ID Note

TN:

Tenant Number

STN:

Station Number [Max. 6 digits]

TEC:

Telephone Equipment Number [1-31]

RSC:

Route Restriction Class [0-15]

SFC:

Service Feature Class [0-15]

Note: Network ID (NID) is allocated automatically when the Module Group/Unit data is assigned by the

AFMU command. Refer to the “Fusion Network System Manual” for more information.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 635
Issue 1

DPKG: Display of Setting Port Package

DPKG:

Display of Setting Port Package

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to display the circuit card name accommodated in each Group of a specific UNIT.
Note 1: When using this command, make sure that each circuit card related database files have already been

installed to your MAT. (See FLINST command for more information.)
2. Parameters
Input data
MG:

Module Group (MG) number [00-07]

UNIT:

Unit (U) number [0-3]

Buttons
Get:

Click to get information on mounted circuit cards.

Close:

Click to exit this command.

Note: When the Input Data above is entered and the “Get” button is pressed, the related circuit card name is

displayed on a Group basis. However, if the name is not found for some reasons, the following mark
may appear in the relevant display field.
• #
→ Unidentifiable firm ware type.
• ## → Data not found in the FMID (database).
• ### → Group data not assigned.
• *
→ Circuit card name not found (for the card is in make-busy state, etc.).

CHAPTER 8
Page 636
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DPSW: Display Package Switch Status

DPSW:

Display Package Switch Status

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to display the following information on a Line/Trunk or Control circuit card:
[When MAT is in On-Line Mode (=connected to the system)]
• Current status of each switch
• Explanation of each switch function
[When MAT is in Off-Line Mode (= not connected to the system)]
• Explanation of each switch function
Note 1: When using this command, make sure that each circuit card related database files have already been

installed to your MAT. (See FLINST command for more information.)
2. Parameters
Input data
KIND:

TYPE:

PMN:
PKG NAME:
LP/ISW:
SYSTEM:

MG:
UNIT:
ACT/ST-BY:

NODE:
CLINE:

No:

Display Kind (selection)
• (MAT=) On-Line Mode
• (MAT=) Off-Line Mode
Circuit Card Type (selection)
• Line Trunk Package
• Control Package
Port Micro Processor Number
Circuit Card Name
Local Partition Number [00-06 (Even Number only)] or ISW Number Note
System Note
0=No.0 System
1=No.1 System
Module Group Number [00-07] Note
Unit Number [0-3] Note
ACT/ST-BY information Note
0=ACT
1=ST-BY
2=Not used
Node Number [0-3]
Collection Line Note
0=Out of Service
1=In Service
IOC Card Number [0/1] Note

Note: This parameter may appear when “Control Package” is selected in the “TYPE” parameter.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 637
Issue 1

DPSW: Display Package Switch Status

Buttons
Get:

Click to view the display data

Page Up:

Click to view the next page data (when next page exists).

Page Down:

Click to return to the previous page data.

Exit:

Click to exit this command.

Display data
PKG Name:

Circuit Card Name

Firm Name/Issue: Firm Name/Issue of the circuit cardEach switch data is also displayed on the dedicated
display page.
Each switch data is also displayed on the dedicated display page.

CHAPTER 8
Page 638
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DSTN: Display of Station Data

DSTN:

Display of Station Data

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to display the registered Station Data corresponding to the designated Tenant and Station Number. In addition, the information of Hot Line, Dterm Key Layout, Hunting, and Call Pickup, etc., can
also be displayed as the data related to the designated stations.
2. Parameters
Input data
TN:
STN:

Tenant Number
Station Number [0-9, #, * (Max. 6 digits)]

Buttons
[For display data selection]
SHP:
Station Hunting Group-Pilot Note
KYD:
Key Data for Dterm Note
CPG:
Call Pickup Group Note
CPE:
Call Pickup Expand Group Note
PHN:
Phantom Station Number Note
SHC:
Station Hunting-Circular Note
SHU:
Station Hunting-UCD Note
HLS:
Hot Line Station Note
Note: When the designated station has any of these data, the corresponding button(s) can be selected. If the

data is necessary, click the button(s).
[For execution order]
Get:
Close:

Click to view the display data.
Click to exit this command.

Display data (by Parameters)
ETN:
Effective Tenant Number
LENS:
Line Equipment Number (6 digits)
TEC:
Telephone Equipment Class [1-31]
1=DP (10pps)
2=PB
3=DP/PB
4=DP (20pps)
5-11=Not used
12=Dterm
term
13=Data Terminal via D
14=Hot Line
15=CAS Line
16=Data Terminal via Data Module
17=Not used
18=Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm Multi-Line)
19-22=Not used
23=ISDN Terminal
24-26=Not used
27=8 Conference Equipment
28-31=Not used
RSC:
Route Restriction Class [0-15]
SFC:
Service Feature Class [0-15]
NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 639
Issue 1

DTELN: Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM

DTELN:

Display of Telephone Number Data for NDM

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to display the registered station data corresponding to specified User Group Number
(UGN) and Telephone Number (TELN). The following data related to Number Group can be displayed by
clicking the selection button for each data. This command can be used only when logging in to Network
Control Node (NCN).
• ACPGN:
Call Pickup Group (NDM)
• ACPEN:
Call Pickup Expand Group (NDM)
• ASHUN:
Station Hunting Group-UCD (NDM)
• ASHCN:
Station Hunting Group-Circular (NDM)
• AHLSN:
Hot Line Station (NDM)
• ASHPN:
Station Hunting Group-Pilot (NDM)
• AKYD:
Key Data for Dterm
2. Parameters
Input Data
UGN:
TELN:
Display Data
FPC:
TN:
STN:
LENS:

User Group Number
Telephone Number

TEC:
RSC:
SFC:

Fusion Point Code (1-253)
Tenant Number
Station Number
Line Equipment Number (6 digits)
MG:
Module Group Number
UNIT:
Unit Number
G:
Group Number
LV:
Level Number
Telephone Class (1-31)
Route Restriction Class (0-15)
Service Feature Restriction Class (0-15)

Selection Button
CPGN
CPEN
SHUN
SHCN
HLSN
SHPN
KYD

:Call Pickup Group (NDM)
:Call Pickup Expand Group (NDM)
:Station Hunting Group-UCD (NDM)
:Station Hunting Group-Circular (NDM)
:Hot Line Station (NDM)
:Station Hunting Group-Pilot (NDM)
:Key Data for Dterm

CHAPTER 8
Page 640
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF101: Display of Terminal Traffic Data

DTF101:

Display of Terminal Traffic Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 1 (Terminal Traffic) assigned by the
ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 641
Issue 1

DTF102: Display of Route Traffic Data

DTF102:

Display of Route Traffic Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 2 (Route Traffic) assigned by the
ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8
Page 642
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF103: Display of Station Peg Count Data

DTF103:

Display of Station Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 3 (Station Peg Count) assigned by the
ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 643
Issue 1

DTF104: Display of Attendant Peg Count Data

DTF104:

Display of Attendant Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 4 (ATT Peg Count) assigned by the
ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8
Page 644
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF105: Display of Route Peg Count Data

DTF105:

Display of Route Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 5 (Route Peg Count) assigned by the
ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 645
Issue 1

DTF201: Display of Service Peg Count Data

DTF201:

Display of Service Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 6 (Service Peg Count) assigned by
the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8
Page 646
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF301: Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data

DTF301:

Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 8 (UCD Route Peg Count) assigned
by the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 647
Issue 1

DTF302: Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data

DTF302:

Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 9 (UCD Group Peg Count) assigned
by the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8
Page 648
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF303: Display of Station Peg Count Data

DTF303:

Display of Station Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 10 (UCD Station Peg Count) assigned
by the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 649
Issue 1

DTF501: Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data

DTF501:

Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 15 (ATT Answering Peg Count)
assigned by the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8
Page 650
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF601: Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data

DTF601:

Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type=18 (Connection Route Peg Count)
assigned by the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 651
Issue 1

DTF602: Display of Connection Route Traffic Data

DTF602:

Display of Connection Route Traffic Data

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type=19 (Connection Route Traffic)
assigned by the ATRF command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

CHAPTER 8
Page 652
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF101N: Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion Network

DTF101N: Display of Terminal Traffic Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 1 (Terminal Traffic) assigned by the
ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 653
Issue 1

DTF102N: Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

DTF102N: Display of Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 2 (Route Traffic) assigned by the
ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

CHAPTER 8
Page 654
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF103N: Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF103N: Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 3 (Station Peg Count) assigned by the
ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 655
Issue 1

DTF104N: Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF104N: Display of Attendant Peg Count Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 4 (ATT Peg Count) assigned by the
ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

CHAPTER 8
Page 656
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF105N: Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF105N: Display of Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 5 (Route Peg Count) assigned by the
ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101
Route Traffic-DTF102
Station Peg Count-DTF103
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104
Route Peg Count-DTF105

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 657
Issue 1

DTF201N: Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF201N: Display of Service Peg Count Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 6 (Service Peg Count) assigned by
the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

CHAPTER 8
Page 658
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF301N: Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF301N: Display of UCD Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 8 (UCD Route Peg Count) assigned
by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 659
Issue 1

DTF302N: Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF302N: Display of UCD Group Peg Count Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 9 (UCD Group Peg Count) assigned
by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

CHAPTER 8
Page 660
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF303N: Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF303N: Display of Station Peg Count Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 10 (UCD Station Peg Count) assigned
by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 661
Issue 1

DTF501N: Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF501N: Display of Attendant Answering Peg Count Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type= 15 (ATT Answering Peg Count)
assigned by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

CHAPTER 8
Page 662
Issue 1

NDA-24307

DTF601N: Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network

DTF601N: Display of Connection Route Peg Count Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type=18 (Connection Route Peg Count)
assigned by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 663
Issue 1

DTF602N: Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network

DTF602N: Display of Connection Route Traffic Data for Fusion Network
1. Functional Outline
This command displays the result of traffic measurement data for Type=19 (Connection Route Traffic)
assigned by the ATRFN command.
2. Parameters
Traffic Data 1:

Terminal Traffic-DTF101N
Route Traffic-DTF102N
Station Peg Count-DTF103N
Attendant Peg Count-DTF104N
Route Peg Count-DTF105N

Traffic Data 2:

Service Peg Count-DTF201N

Traffic Data 3:

UCD Route Peg Count-DTF301N
UCD Group Peg Count-DTF302N
UCD Station Peg Count-DTF303N

Traffic Data 5:

Attendant Answering Peg Count-DTF501N

Traffic Data 6:

Connection Route Peg Count-DTF601N
Connection Route Traffic-DTF602N

CHAPTER 8
Page 664
Issue 1

NDA-24307

FLINST: File Install

FLINST:

File Install

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to install the DPSW-dedicated database files to your MAT. This command is necessary
to provide each circuit card’s various information (such as circuit card name, equipped switch names, etc.)
when your system uses the DPSW/DPKG command.
2. Parameters
Input data
None
Buttons
Copy:

Click to start the data file install.

Exit:

Click to exit this command.


(1) Start up the FLINST command from the Start menu.
(2) Initial Display of the FLINST command appears. Make sure the proper FD drive name is selected in the
“FDD” parameter.
(3) Click the “Copy” button. Then, a message, requiring to insert the first FD into the FDD drive, appears.
(4) Insert the first FD into the FDD of the MAT. Then, click OK.
(5) File copy starts automatically, and the “Copy End” message appears upon completion.
(6) Click OK. Then, another message asks you whether the next FD is to be installed or not.
(7) Click OK.
(8) A message, requiring to insert the second FD into the FDD drive, appears. Insert the second FD into the
FDD, and click OK.
(9) File copy starts automatically, and the “Copy End” message appears upon completion.
(10) Click OK. Then, a message asks you whether the next (fourth) FD is to be installed or not.
(11) Click Cancel.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 665
Issue 1

HDD_FDD: Data Control Between HDD and FDD

HDD_FDD:

Data Control Between HDD and FDD

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to install the program data from FDD of PBX to HDD of PBX, and to verify the program
data between FDD of PBX and HDD of PBX.
2. Parameters
Input data
System Select:

HFD 0/HFD 1

Direction Select:

Floppy Disk to Hard Disk/Verify HDD against FDD/Hard Disk to Floppy Disk

Data Type Selection:

Data Memory

Note 1

Name Display
Wireless Call Forwarding
Program data

Note 2

Call Forwarding
Speed Calling
User Assign Soft Key
Number Sharing

Note 3

Call Block
ACD Data Memory
LP Select:

This data appears when Call Forwarding, Speed Calling, User Assign Soft Key,
Number Sharing, or Call Block data is designated.

File Name Select
Auto Verify Afterward
Note 1: When “Data Memory” is selected, Local Data Memory (LDM) and Network Data Memory (NDM)

are also saved/verifed simultaneously.
Note 2: “Program data” can be valid when you select “Floppy Disk to Hard Disk” or Verify HDD against

FDD” in the “Direction Select” list box.
Note 3: By saving the Number Sharing data, the data concering “Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS” is also

saved/verifed automatically.

CHAPTER 8
Page 666
Issue 1

NDA-24307

HDD_MAT: Data Control Between HDD and MAT

HDD_MAT:

Data Control Between HDD and MAT

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to save the following data from HDD of PBX to MAT.
2. Parameters
Input data
Direction Select:

PBX Hard Disk to MAT/MAT to PBX Hard Disk/Verify HDD againstMAT

Data Type Selection:

Data Memory

Note 1

Name display
Wireless Call Forwarding
Program data

Note 2

Call Forwarding
Speed Calling
User Assign Soft Key
Number Sharing

Note 3

Call Block
ACD Data Memory
LP Select:

This data appears only when Call Forwarding, Speed Calling, User Assign Soft
Key, Number Sharing, or Call Block data is designated.

Auto Verify Afterward
Note 1: When “Data Memory” is selected, Local Data Memory (LDM) and Network Data Memory (NDM)

are also saved/verifed simultaneously.
Note 2: “Program data” can be valid when you select “MAT to PBX Hard Disk” in the “Direction Select”
list box.
Note 3: By saving the Number Sharing data, the data concering “Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS” is also
saved/verifed automatically.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 667
Issue 1

HDD_MAT_N: Data Control Between HDD and MAT for NDM

HDD_MAT_N:

Data Control Between HDD and MAT for NDM

1. Functional Outline
This command, available at the NCN only, installs (overwrites) the updated Program data from the centralized
MAT onto the HDD of all local nodes. To use this command, first install the updated program data on the HDD
of the MAT and then execute the program installing onto the HDD of each LN.
2. Parameters
Input data
Data Type Selection:

Select all the listed program data

Execution Button:

Installing of program data is to be executed

CHAPTER 8
Page 668
Issue 1

NDA-24307

HDFP: HDD Format of PBX

HDFP:

HDD Format of PBX

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to execute the formatting of the HDD of PBX.
2. Parameters
Input data (Selection by check)
0 System:

HDD of No.0 System

1 System:

HDD of No.1 System

Buttons
Execute:

Click to execute the formatting.

Close:

Click to exit this command.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 669
Issue 1

MBCT: Make Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM

MBCT:

Make Busy of Connection Trunk for LDM

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to set/reset the make busy state of the connection trunk.
2. Parameters
Input data
C_RT:

Connection Route Number [1-1023]

C_TK:

Trunk Number [1-4095]

MB:

Make Busy Information [0/1]
0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy (Outgoing)

CHAPTER 8
Page 670
Issue 1

NDA-24307

MBLE: Make Busy of LENS

MBLE:

Make Busy of LENS

1. Functional Outline
This command assigns the Idle/Busy status of Line Equipment Numbers (LENS).
2. Parameters
Input data
LENS
MB:

0/1=Make Idle/Make Busy

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 671
Issue 1

MBPM: Make Busy of Port Microprocessor

MBPM:

Make Busy of Port Microprocessor

1. Functional Outline
This command sets or resets the make-busy state of the circuit card that contains the port microprocessor. This
setting and resetting is performed individually for each circuit card. If the location of the circuit card containing
the port microprocessor is specified in this command, the operating state of all circuit cards mounted in the
associated unit is displayed.
2. Parameters
Input data
MG
Unit
Group
MB
Display data
MB:

(0-1)
0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy

Note: The Idle/Busy status can be displayed and assigned by the MB parameter.

CHAPTER 8
Page 672
Issue 1

NDA-24307

MBRT: Make Busy of Route

MBRT:

Make Busy of Route

1. Functional Outline
This command assigns Idle/Busy status for all the trunks in the route designated.
2. Parameters
Input data
RT:

DATA

Route Number of the external route/internal route. The Internal Route Number and its
meaning is shown in the table below.

MEANING

DATA

MEANING

901

Attendant/Desk Console

902

Originating Register Trunk

903

Incoming Register Trunk

904

MF Receiver

905

Sender Trunk DP/PB

906

PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service

907

AMP

908

Not used

909

Three-Way Conference Trunk

910-912

Not used

913

Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON

914

Not used

915

Night Attendant Console

916

MFC Register

917

MFC Sender

918

Not used

927, 928

Not used

919-926
929

Modem
Data Signaling Trunk-Option

931-947

930

Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk

Not used

MB:

0/1=Make Idle/Make Busy

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 673
Issue 1

MBSM: Make Busy of System Message Printout

MBSM:

Make Busy of System Message Printout

1. Functional Outline
This command allows or inhibits the system message printer to output system messages.
2. Parameters
Input data
PORT NO.:

Port Number of the printer

MB:

0/1=Make Idle/Busy

CHAPTER 8
Page 674
Issue 1

NDA-24307

MBST: Make Busy of Station

MBST:

Make Busy of Station

1. Functional Outline
This command assigns the Idle/Busy status of stations.
2. Parameters
Input data
TN
STN:

Maximum 5 digits for Business system/maximum 6 digits for Hotel system.

MB:

0/1=Make Idle/Make Busy

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 675
Issue 1

MBST_T: Make Busy of Station - Telephone Number

MBST_T: Make Busy of Station - Telephone Number
1. Functional Outline
This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of stations, by using Telephone Numbers. This command is available at NCN (for Fusion network) only. Note 1
Note 1: This command is available for PBX program software.

2. Parameters
Input Data
UGN:

User Group Number

TELN:

Telephone Number (max. 16 digits)

MB:

Make Busy/Make Idle

Display Data
FPC:

Fusion Point Code (1-253) Note 2

TN:

Tenant Number Note 2

STN:

Physical Station Number (max. 5 digits for Business system/max. 6 digits for Hotel
system) Note 2

Note 2: This data is for display only.

Buttons
Get:

Click to get information on the station

Set:

Click to execute the BUSY/IDLE performance.

Exit:

Click to exit this command.

CHAPTER 8
Page 676
Issue 1

NDA-24307

MBTC: Make Busy of Trunk-Continuous

MBTC:

Make Busy of Trunk-Continuous

1. Functional Description
This command is used to assign the IDLE/BUSY status of trunks. By using this command, plural trunks can
be placed into IDLE/BUSY state simultaneously per a route designated in “RT” parameter.
2. Parameters
RT:

Route Number

TK:

Trunk Number Note 1

MB:

0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy(Outgoing)
2=Make Busy (Bothway) Note 2

Note 1: Plural trunks can be assigned simultaneously per a route designated in “RT” parameter.
Note 2: 2=Make Busy (Bothway) is not used.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 677
Issue 1

MBTK: Make Busy of Trunk

MBTK:

Make Busy of Trunk

1. Functional Outline
This command assigns the Idle/Busy status of trunks.
2. Parameters
RT:

Route Number

TK:

Trunk Number

MB:

0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy (Outgoing)

CHAPTER 8
Page 678
Issue 1

NDA-24307

MEM_HDD: Data Control Between Memory and HDD

MEM_HDD: Data Control Between Memory and HDD
1. Functional Outline
This command is used to save the following data from MEM of PBX to HDD of PBX, and vice versa.
2. Parameters
Input data
Direction Select:

Memory to Hard Disk/Hard Disk to Memory/Verify HDD against MEM

Data Type Selection:

Data Memory

Note 1

Name Display
Wireless Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Speed Calling
User Assign Soft Key
Number Sharing

Note 2

Call Block
ACD Data Memory
LP Select:

This data is valid when Call Forwarding, Speed Calling, User Assign Soft Key,
Number Sharing or Call Block data is designated.

Auto Verify Afterward
Note 1: When “Data Memory” is selected, Local Data Memory (LDM) and Network Data Memory (NDM)

are also saved/verified simultaneously.
Note 2: By saving the Number Sharing data, the data concerning “Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS is also

saved/verified automatically.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 679
Issue 1

MEM_HDD_N: Data Control Between Memory and HDD for NDM

MEM_HDD_N: Data Control Between Memory and HDD for NDM
1. Functional Outline
This command, available at the NCN only, is used to save/verify a series of Office Data from the Memory of
all Local Nodes to the HDD of the same node.
2. Parameters
Input data
Direction Select:

MEM to HDD/Verify HDD against MEM

Data Type Selection:

Data Memory

Note 1

Name Display
Wireless Call Forwarding
Call Forwarding
Speed Calling
User Assign Soft Key
Number Sharing

Note 2

Call Block
ACD Data Memory
LP Select:

The parameter is valid when Call Forwarding, Speed Calling, User Assign Soft
Key, Number Sharing, or Call Block data is designated.

Auto Verify Afterward
Note 1: When “Data Memory” is selected, Local Data Memory (LDM) and Network Data Memory (NDM)

are also saved/verified simultaneously.
Note 2: By saving the Number Sharing data, the data concerning “Dual Station Calling Over-FCCS is also

saved/verified automatically.
Display data
Information:

FPC of Node in which saving/verifying is executed
Result of the execution

Direction:

MEM to HDD/Verify HDD against MEM

Data Type:

Selected Data Type

CHAPTER 8
Page 680
Issue 1

NDA-24307

MFCH: Make Busy of FCCH

MFCH:

Make Busy of FCCH

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to set or reset the make busy state of the FCH card.
2. Parameters
Input data
FCHN:

FCH Number [1-255]

MB:

Make Busy Information [0/1]
0=Make Idle
1=Make Busy

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 681
Issue 1

PMBU: Port Microprocessor Back Up

PMBU:

Port Microprocessor Back Up

1. Functional Outline
This command saves the contents of Port Microprocessor (PM) onto Floppy Disk (FD) or verifies them.
Information of firmware (Program Code) also appears on the screen.
2. Parameters
Input data
Direction Select:

Port Microprocessor to MAT/Verify Port Microprocessor/Verify PM with Error
List Auto Verify Afterward can be performed when designating Port
Microprocessor to MAT.

PM Information:

Module Group/Unit/Group/Data Size(1-6) See the following data:
1=2 Kbytes
2=4 Kbytes
3=8 Kbytes
4=16Kbytes
5=32Kbytes
6=64Kbytes

Display data
Office
SP Number:

Information of firmware (Program Code)

SP Issue:

Information of firmware (Program Code)

CHAPTER 8
Page 682
Issue 1

NDA-24307

RALM: Release Alarm

RALM:

Release Alarm

1. Functional Outline
This command clears the fault indications.
2. Parameters
Input data
WRT:

Y/N=Alarm is released/Not released

RETURN TO MENU?: Y/N=Return to MENU/Start operation again
Display data
Alarms Released

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 683
Issue 1

RALMN: Release Alarm for NDM

RALMN:

Release Alarm for NDM

1. Functional Outline
This command, available at the NCN only, clears the fault indications of all the nodes by clicking the release
button on the display.
2. Parameters
Display data
FPC:

FPC of alarm released nodes

Status:

Result of releasing the alarm
OK/NG

CHAPTER 8
Page 684
Issue 1

NDA-24307

RLST: Release Station/Trunk

RLST:

Release Station/Trunk

1. Functional Outline
This command releases a station or trunk.
2. Parameters
Input data
TYPE:

Type of Select (1-4)
1=Stations
2=Trunk
3=LENS
4=Connection Trunk

TN:

Note 1

STN:

Maximum 6 digits Note 1

RT:

Note 2

TK:

Note 2

LENS:

Note 3

Connection RT:

(1-1023) Note 4

Connection TK:

(1-4095) Note 4

Note 1: This parameter is valid only when TYPE= 1.
Note 2: This parameter is valid only when TYPE= 2.
Note 3: This parameter is valid only when TYPE= 3.
Note 4: This parameter is valid only when TYPE= 4.

Display data
STATUS:

Status of Station/Trunk(1-4)
1=Idle
2=Busy
3=Lockout
4=Make Busy

FPC:

Fusion Point Code (1-253)

INFORMATION:

Information of the connected party Note

Note: This parameter appears only when STATUS= 2.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 685
Issue 1

RLST_T: Release Station/Trunk - Telephone Number

RLST_T: Release Station/Trunk - Telephone Number
1. Functional Outline
This command is used to release a station/trunk, by using Telephone Numbers. This command is available at
NCN (for Fusion network) only. Note
Note: This command is available for PBX program software.

2. Parameters
Input Data
TYPE:

UGN:
TELN:
RT:
TK:
LENS:
C_RT:
C_TK:
Note 1:
Note 2:
Note 3:
Note 4:

Telephone Number
Trunk
LENS
Connection Trunk
User Group Number Note 1
Telephone Number (max. 16 digits) Note 1
External/Internal Route Number Note 2
Trunk Number Note 2
Line Equipment Number Note 3
Connection Route Number (1-1023) Note 4
Connection Trunk Number (1-4095) Note 4

This parameter is valid when “Telephone Number” is designated in the “TYPE” selection list box.
This parameter is valid when “Trunk” is designated in the “TYPE” selection list box.
This parameter is valid when “LENS” is designated in the “TYPE” selection list box.
This parameter is valid when “Connection Trunk” is designated in the “TYPE” selection list box.

Display Data
FPC:
TN:
STN:

Fusion Point Code (1-253)
Tenant Number Note 5
Physical Station Number (max. 5 digits for Business/max. 6 digits for Hotel system)
Note 5

STATUS:

Status of Station/Trunk (1-5)
1 = Idle
2 = Busy
3 = Lockout
4 = Make Busy
5 = Now Calling
INFORMATION: Information on the connected party Note 6
ERN:
Area Number (1-32) Note 7
GRN:
Group Number (1-8) Note 7
CSN/ZTN:
CS/ZT Number (1-32) Note 7
PCN:
PHS Community Number (1-1024) Note 7
Note 5: This data is displayed when “Telephone Number” is designated in the “TYPE” selection list box.
Note 6: This data is displayed when “STATUS” = 2 (Busy).
Note 7: This data is for Wireless system only.
CHAPTER 8
Page 686
Issue 1

NDA-24307

RLST_T: Release Station/Trunk - Telephone Number

Buttons
Get:

Click to get information on the station/trunk

Release:

Click to execute the station/trunk release.

Exit:

Click to exit this command

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 687
Issue 1

SINZ: System Initialization

SINZ:

System Initialization

1. Functional Outline
This command initializes the PBX from the MAT. At the time of system initialization, this command allows
the programs and the office data to be loaded from a Hard Disk of PBX into the RAM of PBX.
2. Parameters
Input data
TYPE:

Kind of Initialization (1-4)
1=System Initialize
2=System Initialize Office Data Load & System Initialize
3=System Initialize Program Load & System Initialize
4=System Initialize Program & Office Data Load & System Initialize

Note: When the system is intialized, the MAT is disconnnected. Then, log in to the system again.

CHAPTER 8
Page 688
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SINZI: System Initialization for ISW

SINZI:

System Initialization for ISW

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to initialize ISW and all the LNs in IPX-U system from the MAT. Also, at the time of
system initialization, this command allows the programs and the office data to be loaded from a Hard Disk of
PBX into the RAM of PBX. To use this command, the MAT must be connected to ISW.
2. Parameters
Input data
TYPE SELECT: Kind of Initialization(1-4)
1=Non Load
2=Program Load
3=DM Load
4=Program Load & DM Load
EXECUTION BUTTON : Initialization is to be executed
Display data
FPC:

FPC of executed Node

RESPONSE:

Result of initialization
OK/NG

Note: When the system is initialized, the MAT is once disconnected. Then, log in to the system again.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 689
Issue 1

SPTS: Scanning of Port Status

SPTS:

Scanning of Port Status

1. Functional Outline
This command displays momentarily the working status of Port Microprocessor (PM) on Module Group (MG),
Unit and Group basis.
2. Parameters
Input data
MG
Unit
Group
Interval:

The unit for this parameter is second

Display data
PKG TYPE:

(0-255)

PKG Status:

1/2=On Line/Make Busy

DATA

MEANING

DATA

MEANING

DATA

MEANING

DATA

MEANING

0

LC

1

TRK

2

RST

3

ATI

4

DLC

5

Not used

6

CFT

7

MASTER T

8

SMI

9

MODEM T

Not used

16

DATA LC

17

DTI

18

HDT

GWT

20

DST

Not used

255

Not assigned

21-254

10-15
19

SP No.:

Program information (1-3999)

ISSUE:

Firmware Issue (0-4)

LEVEL STATUS

CHAPTER 8
Page 690
Issue 1

NDA-24307

SPTS: Scanning of Port Status

PORT STATUS:

when TYPE= “1”
0=circuit card is not mounted or Make Busy
1=More than one port in a group is Idle
2=All port in a group is busy
3=All port in a group is Hard Make Busy or Soft Make Busy
4=
when TYPE= “2”/“3”
0=Not assigned
1=Line Idle
2=Line Busy
3=Make Busy
4=Lockout

PORT DATA
KIND:

Type of Port (1,2)
1/2=Station/Trunk

TN:

Note 1

STN:

Maximum 6 digits Note 1

TEC:

Telephone Equipment Number (1-31) Note 1

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 691
Issue 1

SPTS: Scanning of Port Status

RT:

Note 2

DATA

MEANING

DATA

MEANING

1

DP (10pps)

2

PB

3

DP/PB

4

DP (20pps)

Not used

12

Dterm

13

Data Terminal via Dterm

14

Hot Line

15

CAS Line

16

Data Terminal via Data Module

17

Not used

18

Virtual Line Appearance (for Dterm
Multi-Line)

19-20

Not used

21

ACD (MIS)

22

Not used

23

ISDN Terminal

24-26

Not used

27

Eight Conference Equipment

28-31

Not used

5-11

TK:

Note 2

TCL:

Trunk Class (1-31) Note 2

DATA

MEANING

DATA

MEANING

1

DDD Line

2

FX

3

WATS

4

Tie Line

5

CCSA

6

Toll Terminal

7

CAS Line

8

Paging

9

Code Call Trunk

10

Dictation Trunk

11

Radio Paging Trunk

RT:

CHAPTER 8
Page 692
Issue 1

12-31

Route Number

NDA-24307

Not used

SPTS: Scanning of Port Status

DATA

MEANING

DATA

MEANING

901

Attendant Console

902

Originating Register Trunk

903

Incoming Register Trunk

904

MF Receiver

905

Sender Trunk DP/PB

906

PB Receiver for Automated Attendant Service

907

AMP

908

Not used

909

Three-Way Conference Trunk

910-912

Not used

913

Three-Way Conference Trunk for ATTCON

914

Not used

915

Night Attendant

916

MFC Register

917

MFC Sender

918

Not used

927, 928

Not used

919-926

Modem

929

MFC Sender

931

Not used

930
932-947

Rate Adapter Conversion Trunk
Not used

Note 1: The parameter is only for KIND = 1.
Note 2: The parameter is only for KIND= 2.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 693
Issue 1

SRTS: Scanning of Route Status

SRTS:

Scanning of Route Status

1. Functional Outline
This command displays the designated trunk status (Busy/Idle) at predetermined intervals. A maximum of 15
routes can be scanned.
2. Parameters
Input data
RT:

Route Number

Interval Time
Display data
Number of Idle TK
Number of Busy

CHAPTER 8
Page 694
Issue 1

NDA-24307

XHFD: X-RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis

XHFD:

X-RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis

1. Functional Outline
This command is used to execute the following diagnoses.
•

Hard Disk Diagnosis
By executing read/write check on the files in the hard disk of the PBX, this command diagnoses the hard
disk for its normality.
If an error has been found as a result of the diagnosis, this command displays the information on the faulty
logical drive and the number of faulty sectors on the MAT screen. The information can also be output by
the printer.

•

Floppy Disk Diagnosis
By executing cleaning of the floppy disk drive in the PBX, this command diagnoses the floppy disk drive
for its normality.
If the cleaning has not finished normally, a diagnosis error has been found as a result of the diagnosis. The
result message may be displayed on theMAT screen or printed out by the printer.

2. Parameters
Input data
FUNCTION:

HD/FDD Designation [1/2]
1=Diagnosis of HD (Hard Disk)
2=Diagnosis of FDD (Floppy Disk Drive)

AREA:

Area Designation [0/l] Note
0=All Files
1=Program Files

SYSTEM:

System (0/1)
0=No.0 System
1=No.1 System

Note: “AREA” parameter appears only when “1(=HD)” is selected in the “FUNCTION” parameter.

Buttons
Exe:

Click to execute the diagnosis.

Close:

Click to exist this command.

NDA-24307

CHAPTER 8
Page 695
Issue 1

XHFD: X-RAY HD or FDD Diagnosis

Display data
FAULT DRIVE:

Fault Drive Number [0-4]
0=1=#0
2=#1
3=#2
4=#3

FAULT SECTOR: Number of Fault Sector [0-65535]
MESSAGE:

Result of diagnosis [0-255]
0=Normal End
1=Hard disk read test practice error
2=Floppy disk drive cleaning practice error
3=Common part parameter error (Data length error)
4=FDD cleaning abnormal end (FD not in drive)
5=Individual part parameter error (Function error)
6=Individual part parameter error (Sub function error)
7=Individual part parameter error (Device error)
8=Individual part parameter error (Drive selection error)
9=Individual part parameter error (Data ID error)
10=Individual part parameter error (Processor ID error)
11=Individual part parameter error (File ID error)
12=Individual part parameter error (File name error)
13=Request order error (Health check send error)
14=Request order error (Data send signal error)
15=Internal error (File open error)
16=Internal error (File read error)
17=Internal error (File close error)
18=Internal error (FAT error)
19=Internal error (SCSIC error)
20=Internal error (other)
21=Hard interface abnormal end
22-255=-

CHAPTER 8
Page 696
Issue 1

NDA-24307



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.4
Linearized                      : No
Warning                         : Error loading Encrypt object

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools